807923
872
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/879
Next page
En_01 SB##01(10)
DIGITAL CAMERA
Reference Guide
En
Read this document thoroughly before using the camera.
To ensure proper use of the camera, be sure to read
“For Your Safety” (page 26).
After reading this document, keep it readily accessible for
future reference.
Table of Contents
When Your First Photo Can’t Wait. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Getting Ready. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Taking and Viewing Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Package Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
About This Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
For Your Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Notices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Parts of the Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Camera Body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
The Photo/Video Selector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Black-and-White Photo Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
The Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
The Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Photo Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Video Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Angling the Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
The Viewfinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Photo Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Video Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
The Monitor Mode Button and the Eye Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Touch Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Focusing and Releasing the Shutter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Adjusting Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Viewing Videos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
The i Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Text Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2Table of Contents
Navigating the Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
The Fn Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Using the Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
The MENU Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using the Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
The i Button (i Menu). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
The Still Photography i Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
The Video i Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
The Playback i Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Customizing the i Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
First Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Attaching the Strap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Inserting the Battery and Memory Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Battery Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Number of Exposures Remaining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Charging the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Attaching a Lens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Detaching Lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Opening the Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Camera Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Basic Photography and Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Taking Photographs (b Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Recording Videos (b Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Viewing Videos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Deleting Unwanted Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Shooting Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Adjusting Image Area Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Adjusting Image Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Choosing an Image Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3Table of Contents
Focus Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
AF-Area Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Subject Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Focus-Point Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
The Touch Shutter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Focus Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Manual Focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Choosing a Shooting Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Long Time-Exposures (Mode M Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Autoexposure (AE) Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Exposure Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Release Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Choosing a Release Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
High-Speed Frame Capture (C30). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Using the Self-Timer (E). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
ISO Sensitivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Adjusting ISO Sensitivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
White Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
About White Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Fine-Tuning White Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Choosing a Color Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Preset Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Picture Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
About Picture Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Modifying Picture Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Custom Picture Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Video Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Video File Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Tone Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Video Frame Size and Rate Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
4Table of Contents
Bit Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Video Recording: Shooting Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Video Image Area Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Points to Note When Filming Videos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Recording HLG Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Recording N-Log Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
View Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Viewing Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Viewing Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Full-Frame Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Thumbnail Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Photo Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Basic Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Exposure Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Highlight Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
RGB Histogram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Shooting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
File Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
The i Button (Playback Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Videos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Videos (Playback Paused). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Playback Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Using Playback Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Protecting Pictures from Deletion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Rating Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Selecting Pictures for Upload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Filtered Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
“Filtered Playback Criteria”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Viewing Slide Shows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
During the Show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
5Table of Contents
Deleting Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Using the Delete Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Deleting Multiple Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Retouching Photographs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Retouching Photographs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
RAW Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Processing Photos Shot Using the “SDR” Tone Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Processing Photos Shot Using the “HLG” Tone Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Trim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Resize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Resizing the Current Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Resizing Multiple Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
D-Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Straighten. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Distortion Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Perspective Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Monochrome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Overlay (Add). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
“Lighten” and “Darken”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Motion Blend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Editing Videos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Editing Videos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Trimming Videos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Saving the Current Frame as a JPEG Still. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Creating Stills from a Selected Length of Footage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Voice Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Recording Voice Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Playing Voice Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Deleting Voice Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Connecting to HDMI TVs and Recorders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Connecting to HDMI Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
TVs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
6Table of Contents
Recorders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Adjusting Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
YCbCr and Bit Depth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
HDMI Output and Tone Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
External Recording Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Connecting to Smart Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
The SnapBridge App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
What SnapBridge Can Do for You. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Wireless Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Connecting via Bluetooth (Pairing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Connecting to Computers or FTP Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Making the Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Computers: Connecting via USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Computers: Connecting via USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Installing NX Studio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Copying Pictures to a Computer Using NXStudio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
The Wireless Transmitter Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Connecting to Computers via Wireless LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Ending the Connection to the Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Connecting to FTP Servers via Wireless LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Ending the Connection to the FTP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
What You Can Do When the Camera Is Connected to a Computer or FTP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Uploading Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Camera Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Troubleshooting Wireless LAN Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Problems and Solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
7Table of Contents
Connecting to Other Cameras. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
What Inter-camera Connections Can Do for You. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Camera-Based Remote Photography (Synchronized Release). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Clock Synchronization (Synchronize Date and Time). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Synchronized Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Configuring and Using Synchronized Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Synchronizing Camera Clocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Flash Photography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
“On-Camera” Versus “Remote”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Camera-Mounted Flash Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Remote Flash Photography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Using an On-Camera Flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Flash Control Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Flash Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Flash Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Adjusting Flash Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
FV Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Remote Flash Photography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
What Is Remote Flash Photography?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Controlling Remote Flash Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Using Optical AWL with the SB‑500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
The Photo Shooting Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Menu Items and Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Reset Photo Shooting Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Storage Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Renaming Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
“Select Folder by Number”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
“Select Folder from List”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
File Naming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Primary Slot Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Secondary Slot Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Deleting Copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
8Table of Contents
Image Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Tone Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Image Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Image Size Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
RAW Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
ISO Sensitivity Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
White Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Set Picture Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Manage Picture Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Set Picture Control (HLG). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Modifying HLG Picture Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Color Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Active D‑Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Long Exposure NR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
High ISO NR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Vignette Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Diffraction Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Auto Distortion Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Skin Softening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Portrait Impression Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Creating Portrait Impression Balance Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Applying Saved Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Photo Flicker Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Metering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Flash Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Flash Control Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Wireless Flash Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Group Flash Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Flash Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Flash Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Release Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Focus Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
9Table of Contents
AF-Area Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
AF/MF Subject Detection Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
MF Subject Detection Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Vibration Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Link VR to Focus Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Auto Bracketing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Exposure and Flash Bracketing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
White Balance Bracketing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
ADL Bracketing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Multiple Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Creating a Multiple Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
HDR Overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Taking HDR Photographs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Interval Timer Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Interval-Timer Photography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Time-Lapse Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Recording Time-Lapse Videos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Focus Shift Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Focus Shift Photography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Pixel Shift Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Taking Photos Using Pixel Shift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
The Video Recording Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Menu Items and Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Reset Video Recording Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Storage Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
File Naming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Video File Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Frame Size/Frame Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Image Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
ISO Sensitivity Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
White Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
10 Table of Contents
Set Picture Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Manage Picture Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
HLG Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Active D‑Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
High ISO NR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Vignette Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Diffraction Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Auto Distortion Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Skin Softening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Portrait Impression Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Video Flicker Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Metering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Focus Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
AF-Area Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
AF/MF Subject Detection Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Subject Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
AF When Subject Not Detected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
MF Subject Detection Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Vibration Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Electronic VR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Microphone Sensitivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Attenuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Frequency Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Wind Noise Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Mic Jack Plug-in Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Headphone Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Timecode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
External Rec. Cntrl (HDMI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
The Custom Settings Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Menu Items and Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Reset Custom Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
a1: AF-C Priority Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
11 Table of Contents
a2: AF-S Priority Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Blocked Shot AF Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
a4: Focus Points Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
a5: Store Points by Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
a6: AF Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
a7: Focus Point Persistence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
a8: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
a9: Focus Point Wrap-Around. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
a10: Focus Point Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Manual Focus Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Dynamic-Area AF Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
AF-C In-Focus Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
3D-Tracking Focus Point Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
a11: Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
a12: Focus Peaking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Focus Peaking Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Focus Peaking Sensitivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Focus Peaking Highlight Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
a13: Focus Point Selection Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
a14: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
b2: Easy Exposure Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
b3: Matrix Metering Face Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
b4: Center-Weighted Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
b5: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
c2: Self-Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
c3: Power Off Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
d1: CL Mode Shooting Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
d2: Maximum Shots per Burst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
d3: Pre-Release Capture Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
12 Table of Contents
d4: Sync. Release Mode Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
d5: Shutter Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
d6: Extended Shutter Speeds (M). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
d7: Limit Selectable Image Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
d8: File Number Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
d9: View Mode (Photo Lv). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
d10: Starlight View (Photo Lv). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
d11: Warm Display Colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
d12: View All in Continuous Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
d13: Release Timing Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
d14: Image Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
d15: Grid Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
d16: Virtual Horizon Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Roll. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Pitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
d17: Custom Monitor Shooting Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
d18: Custom Viewfinder Shooting Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
e1: Flash Sync Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
e2: Flash Shutter Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
e4: Auto cISO Sensitivity Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
e5: Modeling Flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
e6: Auto Bracketing (Mode M). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
e7: Bracketing Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
e8: Flash Burst Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
f1: Customize i Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
View Memory Card Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Split-Screen Display Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
f2: Custom Controls (Shooting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Command Dials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Saving and Recalling Focus Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
f3: Custom Controls (Playback). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
13 Table of Contents
Command Dials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
f4: Touch Fn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Enable/Disable Touch Fn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Assign Touch Fn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Touch Fn Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
f5: Focus-Point Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
f6: Reverse Dial Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
f7: Release Button to Use Dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
f8: Reverse Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
f9: Reverse Ring for Focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
f10: Focus Ring Rotation Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
f11: Control Ring Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
f12: Switch Focus/Control Ring Roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
f13: Power Zoom (PZ) Button Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
f14: Full-Frame Playback Flicks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Flick Up/Flick Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Flick Advance Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
g1: Customize i Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Multi-Selector Power Aperture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Multi Selector Exposure Comp.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
View Video Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
g2: Custom Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Command Dials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
g3: Focus-Point Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
g4: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
g5: AF Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
g6: AF Tracking Sensitivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
g7: Power Zoom (PZ) Button Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
g8: Fine ISO Control (Mode M). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
g9: Extended Shutter Speeds (S/M). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
g10: View Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
g11: Zebra Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
14 Table of Contents
Pattern Tone Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Highlight Threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Mid-tone Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
g12: Limit Zebra Pattern Tone Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
g13: Grid Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
g14: Brightness Information Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
g15: Custom Monitor Shooting Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
g16: Custom Viewfinder Shooting Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
g17: Red REC Frame Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
The Playback Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Menu Items and Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Playback Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Playback Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Delete Pictures from Both Slots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Dual-Format Recording PB Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Filtered Playback Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Series Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Auto Series Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
List Series as Single Thumbnails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Picture Review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
After Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
After Burst, Show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Auto-Rotate Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Copy Image(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Copying Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
The Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Menu Items and Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Format Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Time Zone and Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
15 Table of Contents
Monitor Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Monitor Color Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Viewfinder Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Viewfinder Color Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Finder Display Size (Photo Lv). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Limit Monitor Mode Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Auto Rotate Info Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
AF Fine-Tuning Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Creating and Saving Fine-Tuning Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Choosing a Default Fine-Tuning Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Non-CPU Lens Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
Save Focus Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Save Zoom Position (PZ Lenses). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Auto Temperature Cutout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Clean Image Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
Image Dust Off Ref Photo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Pixel Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Image Comment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Input Comment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Attach Comment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Copyright Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
Artist/Copyright. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
Attach Copyright Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
IPTC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Creating, Renaming, Editing, and Copying Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Deleting Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Embedding Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Copying Presets to a Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Copying Presets to the Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Voice Memo Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Voice Memo Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
16 Table of Contents
Audio Output (Playback). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Camera Sounds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Beep On/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Pitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Silent Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Touch Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Enable/Disable Touch Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Glove Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Self-Portrait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
USB Connection Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Conformity Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
Battery Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
USB Power Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Energy Saving (Photo Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Slot Empty Release Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Save/Load Menu Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
Settings That Can Be Saved and Loaded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
Save Menu Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Load Menu Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Reset All Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Firmware Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
The Network Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
Menu Items and Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
Airplane Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Connect to Smart Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Pairing (Bluetooth). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Select Pictures for Upload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Wi-Fi Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Upload While Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Location Data (Smart Device). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
17 Table of Contents
Wireless Remote (ML-L7) Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Wireless Remote Connection (ML‑L7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Save Wireless Remote Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Delete Wireless Remote Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Assign Fn1 Button/Assign Fn2 Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Connect to Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Connection Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Connect to FTP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Connect to Other Cameras. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Synchronized Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Group Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Master/Remote. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Remote Camera List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Synchronize Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
ATOMOS AirGlu BT Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Router Frequency Band. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
MAC Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
My Menu/Recent Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Menu Items and Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
Adding Items to My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
Removing Items from My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
Reordering Items in My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Displaying “RECENT SETTINGS”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
Recent Settings: Accessing Recently-Used Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
How Items Are Added to “RECENT SETTINGS”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
18 Table of Contents
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Before Contacting Customer Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Problems and Solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Battery/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Bluetooth and Wi‑Fi (Wireless Networks). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
Miscellaneous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Alerts and Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Technical Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Compatible Lenses and Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Camera Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
The Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
The Viewfinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Compatible Flash Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Features Available with CLS-Compatible Flash Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Notes on Optional Flash Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Other Compatible Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
ML‑L7 Remote Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
Caring for the Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
Long-Term Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
Image Sensor Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
Manual Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Cautions: Using the Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Cautions: Using Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
19 Table of Contents
Nikon Z f Digital Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Approved Memory Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Portable Chargers (Power Banks). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Memory Card Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
Memory Card Capacity (Videos). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
Battery Endurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
Trademarks and Licenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
Notices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
Symbols, Numerics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
Q. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
20 Table of Contents
W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
21 Table of Contents
Attach a lens (0 90).
Align the mounting mark on the lens with the matching
mark on the camera body (q) and rotate the lens in the
direction shown (w).
A strap can be attached to the camera. For more
information, see “Attaching the Strap” (0 81).
Turn the camera on and then choose a language and set
the clock (0 93).
When Your First Photo Can’t Wait
Getting Ready
Insert the battery and a memory card into the camera (0 82).
For information on charging the battery, see “Charging the Battery” (0 86).
22 Getting Ready
1
2
3
Rotate the mode selector to AUTO (b).
To focus, press the shutter-release button halfway (i.e.,
lightly press the shutter-release button, stopping when it
is pressed halfway; 0 95).
Without lifting your finger from the shutter-release
button, press the button the rest of the way down to take
the picture.
View the picture (0 104).
Taking and Viewing Pictures
23 Taking and Viewing Pictures
1
2
3
4
Camera body
BS‑1 accessory shoe cover (comes
attached to camera; 0 817)
DK‑33 rubber eyecup (comes attached
to camera; 0 814)
BF‑N1 body cap
EN‑EL15c rechargeable Li-ion battery with terminal
cover
AN‑DC27 strap (0 81)
UC‑E25 USB cable (0 86)
Users Manual
Warranty
Before You Begin
Package Contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
Memory cards are sold separately.
DThe Nikon Download Center
Visit the Nikon Download Center to download firmware updates, NX Studio and other Nikon software,
and documentation for Nikon products including cameras, NIKKOR lenses, and flash units.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
24 Package Contents
About This Document
Symbols
This document employs the following symbols. Use them to help locate the information you need.
DThis icon marks notes, information that should be read before using this product.
Tip This icon marks tips, additional information you may find helpful when using this product.
0This icon marks references to other sections in this document.
Conventions
This camera uses SD, SDHC, SDXC, microSD, microSDHC, and microSDXC memory cards. Memory
cards of all types are referred to throughout this document as “memory cards”. Where it is
necessary to distinguish between the different types, the terms “SD memory card” and “microSD
memory card” may also be used.
Throughout this document, battery chargers are referred to as “battery chargers” or “chargers”.
Throughout this document, the display in camera monitor and viewfinder during shooting is
referred to as the “shooting display”. In most cases, the illustrations show the monitor.
Throughout this document, smartphones and tablets are referred to as “smart devices”.
Throughout this document, “FX format” and “FX” are used in reference to an angle of view
equivalent to that of a 35 mm format (“full frame”) camera and “DX format” and “DX” to an angle of
view equivalent to that of an APS-C camera.
Throughout this document, the term “default settings” is used to refer to the settings in effect at
shipment. The explanations in this document assume that default settings are used.
25 About This Document
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to property or injury to yourself or to others, read “For Your Safety” in its entirety
before using this product.
After reading these safety instructions, keep them readily accessible for future reference.
DANGER: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon carries a high
risk of death or severe injury.
WARNING: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could result
in death or severe injury.
CAUTION: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could result in
injury or property damage.
WARNING
Do not use while walking or operating a vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents or other injury.
Do not disassemble or modify this product. Do not touch internal parts that become exposed
as the result of a fall or other accident.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in electric shock or other injury.
Should you notice any abnormalities such as the product producing smoke, heat, or unusual
odors, immediately remove the batteries or disconnect the power source.
Continued operation could result in fire, burns or other injury.
Keep dry. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle the plug with wet hands.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
Do not let your skin remain in prolonged contact with this product while it is on or plugged
in.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in low‑temperature burns.
26 For Your Safety
WARNING
Do not use this product in the presence of flammable dust or gas such as propane, gasoline
or aerosols.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in explosion or fire.
Do not directly view the sun or other bright light source through the lens.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in visual impairment.
Do not aim the flash or AF‑assist illuminator at the operator of a motor vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
Keep this product out of reach of children.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product malfunction. In addition, note
that small parts constitute a choking hazard. Should a child swallow any part of this product, seek
immediate medical attention.
Do not entangle, wrap or twist the straps around your neck.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
Do not use batteries, chargers, AC adapters, or USB cables not specifically designated for use
with this product.
When using batteries, chargers, AC adapters, and USB cables designated for use with this
product, do not:
Damage, modify, forcibly tug or bend the cords or cables, place them under heavy objects,
or expose them to heat or flame.
Use travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one voltage to another or with
DC-to-AC inverters.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
Do not handle the plug when charging the product or using the AC adapter during
thunderstorms.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock.
Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth.
Continued use could result in fire.
Do not handle with bare hands in locations exposed to extremely high or low temperatures.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or frostbite.
27 For Your Safety
Do not touch the camera or memory cards when a high-temperature warning
is displayed in the monitor or viewfinder.
The camera and memory cards will be hot, potentially causing burns or causing
the cards or battery to be dropped and damaged when removed.
CAUTION
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light sources.
Light focused by the lens could cause fire or damage to product’s internal parts. When shooting
backlit subjects, keep the sun well out of the frame. Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun
is close to the frame could cause fire.
Turn this product off when its use is prohibited. Disable wireless features when the use of
wireless equipment is prohibited.
The radio-frequency emissions produced by this product could interfere with equipment onboard
aircraft or in hospitals or other medical facilities.
Remove the battery and disconnect the AC adapter if this product will not be used for an
extended period.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product malfunction.
Do not fire the flash in contact with or in close proximity to the skin or objects.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or fire.
Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high temperatures for an
extended period, such as in an enclosed automobile or in direct sunlight.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product malfunction.
Do not look directly at the AF‑assist illuminator.
Failure to observe this precaution could have adverse effects on vision.
Do not transport cameras or lenses with tripods or similar accessories attached.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product malfunction.
Keep the product at least 5 cm (2.0 in.) from pacemakers and other medical devices.
Medical devices in close proximity could be affected by the magnet or magnets in the product.
28 For Your Safety
DANGER (Batteries)
Do not mishandle batteries.
Failure to observe the following precautions could result in the batteries leaking, overheating,
rupturing, or catching fire:
Use only rechargeable batteries approved for use in this product.
Do not expose batteries to flame or excessive heat.
Do not disassemble.
Do not short‑circuit the terminals by touching them to necklaces, hairpins, or other metal
objects.
Do not expose batteries or the products in which they are inserted to powerful physical shocks.
Do not step on batteries, pierce them with nails, or strike them with hammers.
Charge only as indicated.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in the batteries leaking, overheating, rupturing, or
catching fire.
If battery liquid comes into contact with the eyes, rinse with plenty of clean water and seek
immediate medical attention.
Delaying action could result in eye injuries.
Follow the instructions of airline personnel.
Batteries left unattended at high altitudes in an unpressurized environment may leak, overheat,
rupture, or catch fire.
WARNING (Batteries)
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a battery, seek immediate medical attention.
Keep batteries out of reach of household pets and other animals.
The batteries could leak, overheat, rupture, or catch fire if bitten, chewed, or otherwise damaged by
animals.
Do not immerse batteries in water or expose to rain.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product malfunction. Immediately dry the
product with a towel or similar object should it become wet.
29 For Your Safety
WARNING (Batteries)
Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the batteries, such as
discoloration or deformation. Cease charging EN‑EL15c rechargeable batteries if they do not
charge in the specified period of time.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries leaking, overheating, rupturing, or
catching fire.
When batteries are no longer needed, insulate the terminals with tape.
Overheating, rupture, or fire may result should metal objects come into contact with the terminals.
If battery liquid comes into contact with a person's skin or clothing, immediately rinse the
affected area with plenty of clean water.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in skin irritation.
30 For Your Safety
Notices
No part of the documentation included with this product may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form, by any means,
without Nikon’s prior written permission.
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and software
described in this documentation at any time and without prior notice.
Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product.
While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this documentation is accurate
and complete, we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of
the Nikon representative in your area (address provided separately).
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by
means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law.
Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government bonds, or local
government bonds, even if such copies or reproductions are stamped “Sample”.
The copying or reproduction of paper money, coins, or securities which are circulated in a foreign
country is prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained, the copying or reproduction
of unused postage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited.
The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents
stipulated by law is prohibited.
Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private
companies (shares, bills, checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or coupon tickets, except
when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company. Also, do
not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government, licenses issued by public agencies
and private groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.
Comply with copyright notices
Under copyright law, photographs or recordings of copyrighted works made with the camera
cannot be used without the permission of the copyright holder. Exceptions apply to personal use,
but note that even personal use may be restricted in the case of photographs or recordings of
exhibits or live performances.
31 Notices
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras include complex electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories
(including lenses, chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon
specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within
the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.
The use of non‑Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon
warranty. The use of third‑party rechargeable Li‑ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic
seal shown below could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries
overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.
Memory Cards
Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory cards from
the camera.
Do not perform the following operations during formatting or while data are being recorded,
deleted, or copied to a computer or other device. Failure to observe these precautions could
result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card.
Do not remove or insert memory cards.
Do not turn the camera off.
Do not remove the battery.
Do not disconnect AC adapters.
Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
Do not use excessive force when handling memory cards. Failure to observe this precaution
could damage the card.
Do not bend or drop memory cards or subject them to strong physical shocks.
Do not expose memory cards to water, heat, or direct sunlight.
Do not format memory cards in a computer.
32 Notices
-
-
-
-
DBefore Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a
trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for
damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
DLife‑Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life‑Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and education,
continually‑updated information is available on‑line at the following sites:
For users in the U.S.A.: https://www.nikonusa.com/
For users in Canada: https://www.nikon.ca/
For users in Mexico: https://www.nikon.com.mx/
For users in Latin America: https://www.nikonamericalatina.com/
For users in Europe: https://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
For users in Asia, Oceania, the Middle East, and Africa: https://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up‑to‑date with the latest product information, tips, answers to
frequently‑asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography. Additional
information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following URL for
contact information: https://imaging.nikon.com/
33 Notices
ISO sensitivity dial (0 152)
ISO sensitivity dial lock release (0 152)
Stereo microphone (0 100)
Shutter-speed dial lock release (0 132,
0 135)
Shutter-speed dial (0 132, 0 135)
Power switch (0 93)
Shutter-release button (0 95)
Video-record button (0 100)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Eyelet for camera strap (0 81)
Exposure compensation dial (0 143)
Control panel (0 41)
Photo/video selector (0 40, 0 95,
0 100)
Accessory shoe (for optional flash unit;
0 355, 0 789)
Mode selector (0 131)
Focal plane mark (E; 0 130)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Parts of the Camera
Camera Body
8
12 11
9
9
10
1314
15
764 51 2 3
34 Camera Body
AF-assist illuminator (0 98, 0 542)
Red-eye reduction lamp (0 359)
Self-timer lamp (0 151)
Monitor mode button (M; 0 56,
0 679)
USB connector cover
Cover for microphone, headphone, and
HDMI connectors
1
2
3
4
Lens mounting mark (0 90)
Charge lamp (0 86)
USB connector (0 298, 0 711)
Headphone connector (0 518)
HDMI connector (0 280)
Connector for external microphone
(0 815)
Body cap (0 90)
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
8
6
4
5
9
10
7
11
35 Camera Body
Monitor (0 60, 0 124)
Eyepiece release (0 814)
Delete button (O; 0 107, 0 233)
Playback button (K; 0 104, 0 199)
1
2
3
4
Rubber eyecup (0 814)
Viewfinder (0 51)
Eye sensor (0 56)
5
6
7
7
1
6
3
5
4
2
36 Camera Body
Diopter adjustment control (0 59)
AE/AF lock (A) button (0 126, 0 141)
Protect button (g; 0 223)
Speaker
“i” button (i; 0 75, 0 215)
Main command dial
Multi selector (0 69)
OK button (J; 0 69)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Playback zoom in button (X; 0 128,
0 200, 0 221)
DISP button (d; 0 44)
MENU button (G; 0 68)
Playback zoom out/thumbnails button
(W; 0 200, 0 221)
Help button (Q; 0 73)
Memory card access lamp (0 98,
0 102)
8
9
10
11
12
4
5
6
7
11
10
12
9
8
2 3
1
37 Camera Body
Lens release button (0 91)
Lens mount (0 90, 0 130)
CPU contacts
Image sensor (0 827)
Tripod socket
Battery chamber/memory card slot cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
Battery chamber/memory card slot cover
latch
Fn button (0 67)
Sub-command dial
7
8
9
9
8
7
4
3
5
6
1
2
DDo Not Touch the Image Sensor
Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the image sensor, poke it with cleaning tools,
or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. Failure to observe this precaution could scratch
or otherwise damage the sensor. For information on cleaning the image sensor, see “Image Sensor
Cleaning” (0 827).
38 Camera Body
The serial number for this product can be found by opening the
monitor.
Tip: Product Serial Number
39 Camera Body
Choose between photo and video modes.
Black-and-white photo mode
Photo mode
Video mode
1
2
3
123
Rotate the photo/video selector to B&W(black-and-white photo
mode) to take photos in black and white.
The choice of Picture Controls available for [Set Picture
Control] in the photo shooting menu (0 176) is
limited to [Monochrome], [Flat Monochrome], [Deep Tone
Monochrome], and custom Picture Controls for which these
serve as a base.
All other settings are the same as for photo mode.
The Photo/Video Selector
Black-and-White Photo Mode
40 The Photo/Video Selector
The Control Panel
The control panel lights when the camera is on. It functions as an aperture display (0 134, 0 135).
An aperture value of f/0.95 appears in the control panel as [.95].
When [ON] is selected for Custom Setting d6 [Extended shutter speeds (M)], the aperture value is
replaced by an exposure progress display at shutter speeds of 60s or slower.
A [--] warning may be displayed if the lens is not correctly attached.
A [PC] connection indicator may be displayed when the camera is connected to a computer or
smart device.
41 The Control Panel
Shooting mode (0 131)
Release mode (0 145)
Focus mode (0 114)
AF-area mode (0 116)
t icon (0 94)
White balance (0 157)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Active D-Lighting (0 399)
Picture Control (0 176)
Image area (0 108)
Image size (0 112)
Image quality (0 110)
7
8
9
10
11
The Monitor
At default settings, the following indicators appear in the monitor. For a full list of the indicators that
may be displayed, see “The Monitor” in the section on “Camera Displays” (0 777) in the “Technical
Notes” chapter.
Photo Mode
1
10
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
11
42 The Monitor
Exposure indicator
Exposure (0 136)
Exposure compensation (0 143)
i icon (0 75, 0 215)
Battery indicator (0 84)
Number of exposures remaining (0 85,
0 854)
ISO sensitivity (0 152)
ISO sensitivity indicator (0 152)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator (0 155)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Aperture (0 134, 0 135)
Shutter speed (0 132, 0 135)
Metering (0 411)
Touch shooting (0 124)
Vibration reduction indicator (0 421)
Shutter type (0 559)
Focus point (0 123)
View mode (photo live view; 0 564)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
4
3
11
57 6
98
14
12
13
10
1
2
43 The Monitor
In photo mode, the playback, i menu, and shooting displays rotate
to match camera orientation.
Press the DISP button to cycle the shooting display. Choose from
up to five displays, each with a customizable selection of icons
and indicators. The items displayed can be selected using Custom
Setting d17 [Custom monitor shooting display] (0 575).
Tip: Using the Monitor with the Camera in “Tall” Orientation
Tip: Choosing a Display
44 The Monitor
Recording indicator
“No video” indicator (0 102)
Recording indicator (red border; 0 648)
Length of footage recorded
Frame size andrate (0 189)
Destination (0 489)
1
2
3
4
5
Available recording time
Image area (0 192)
Video file type (0 187)
Sound level (0 513)
Microphone sensitivity (0 513)
6
7
8
9
10
Video Mode
1 2 3 5 64
9
7
8
10
45 The Monitor
In video mode, the playback and playback i menu displays rotate
to match camera orientation.
Tip: Using the Monitor with the Camera in “Tall” Orientation
46 The Monitor
Angling the Monitor
The monitor can be angled and rotated.
90° 180°
180°
Normal use:
The monitor is normally used in storage position with the screen facing outward.
Low-angle shots:
Tilt the monitor up to take shots with the camera held low.
47 The Monitor
High-angle shots:
Tilt the monitor down to take shots with the camera held high.
Self-portraits:
Rotating the monitor to face the same direction as the lens enables self-portrait mode (0 49).
DCautions: Using the Monitor
Rotate the monitor gently within the limits of its hinges. Using excessive force could damage the
camera or monitor.
We recommend returning the monitor to the storage position with the screen facing inward to keep
it free of dust and scratches when not in use.
Do not lift or carry the camera by the monitor. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
damage to the camera.
48 The Monitor
If desired, you can tap the self-timer icon (q) in the monitor to
set the self-timer and choose the number of shots taken when
the timer expires.
When the exposure compensation dial is rotated to C, you can
also adjust exposure compensation by tapping the exposure
compensation icon (w).
Self-Portrait Mode
Rotating the monitor to the self-portrait position triggers self-portrait mode.
The monitor shows a mirror image of the view through the lens, but pictures recorded by the
camera are not mirrored.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. Press it the rest of the way down to take a
photograph.
If the self-timer is enabled, a count-down timer will be displayed in the monitor when the shutter-
release button is pressed all the way down.
You can also use the monitor for touch AF and take pictures via the touch shutter.
In video mode, recording can be started by pressing the video-record button.
Self-portrait mode ends when the monitor is moved to another position.
49 The Monitor
DNotes on Self-Portrait Mode
Note the following points when using the camera in self-portrait mode:
Selecting self-portrait mode disables all controls other than the power switch, the shutter-release
and video-record buttons, the mode and photo/video selectors, and the shutter speed, ISO
sensitivity, and exposure compensation dials.
The standby timer will expire if no operations are performed for either one minute or the time
selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]> [Standby timer], whichever is longer.
The following settings are fixed at the values below.
[Release mode]: [Self-timer]
[Focus mode] in the video recording menu: [Full-time AF]
[Touch controls]>[Enable/disable touch controls]: [Enable]
The viewfinder cannot be used.
The following features are disabled:
[Long exposure NR]
[Auto bracketing]
[HDR overlay]
[Extended shutter speeds (M)]
Rotating the monitor to the self-portrait position will not trigger self-portrait mode when [OFF] is
selected for [Self-portrait mode] in the setup menu (0 706).
50 The Monitor
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
View mode (photo live view; 0 564)
t icon (0 94)
Release mode (0 145)
Focus mode (0 114)
AF-area mode (0 116)
White balance (0 157)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Active D-Lighting (0 399)
Picture Control (0 176)
Image quality (0 110)
Image size (0 112)
Image area (0 108)
7
8
9
10
11
The Viewfinder
At default settings, the following indicators appear in the viewfinder. For a full list of the indicators that
may be displayed, see “The Viewfinder” in the section on “Camera Displays” (0 785) in the “Technical
Notes” chapter.
Photo Mode
2 4 5 7 8 961 3 1110
51 The Viewfinder
Battery indicator (0 84)
Number of exposures remaining (0 85,
0 854)
ISO sensitivity (0 152)
ISO sensitivity indicator (0 152)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator (0 155)
Exposure indicator
Exposure (0 136)
Exposure compensation (0 143)
1
2
3
4
5
Aperture (0 134, 0 135)
Shutter speed (0 132, 0 135)
Shooting mode (0 131)
Vibration reduction indicator (0 421)
Metering (0 411)
Shutter type (0 559)
Focus point (0 123)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
3 25 4910
11
78 6 1
12
52 The Viewfinder
In photo mode, the playback, i menu, and shooting displays rotate
to match camera orientation.
Press the DISP button to cycle the shooting display. Choose from
up to four displays, each with a customizable selection of icons
and indicators. The items displayed can be selected using Custom
Setting d18 [Custom viewfinder shooting display] (0 577).
Tip: Using the Viewfinder with the Camera in “Tall” Orientation
Tip: Choosing a Display
53 The Viewfinder
Recording indicator
“No video” indicator (0 102)
Length of footage recorded
Destination (0 489)
Available recording time
Frame size andrate (0 189)
1
2
3
4
5
Image area (0 192)
Video file type (0 187)
Recording indicator (red border; 0 648)
Sound level (0 513)
Microphone sensitivity (0 513)
6
7
8
9
10
Video Mode
2
1356
47
8
9
10
54 The Viewfinder
In video mode, the playback and playback i menu displays rotate
to match camera orientation.
Tip: Using the Viewfinder with the Camera in “Tall” Orientation
55 The Viewfinder
Placing your eye to the viewfinder activates the eye sensor,
switching the display from the monitor to the viewfinder. Note that
the eye sensor will also respond to other objects, such as your
fingers.
Press the M (monitor mode) button to cycle between viewfinder
and monitor displays.
The Monitor Mode Button and the Eye Sensor
The viewfinder can be used for menus and playback if desired.
56 The Viewfinder
[Automatic display switch]: The camera automatically switches
between the viewfinder and monitor displays based on information
from the eye sensor.
[Viewfinder only]: The monitor remains blank. The viewfinder is used
for shooting, menus, and playback.
[Monitor only]: The monitor is used for shooting, menus, and playback.
The viewfinder display will remain blank even if you put your eye to the
viewfinder.
Press the M button to cycle through the displays as follows.
In photo mode, the viewfinder display also lights for a few seconds after the camera is turned
on and after the standby timer is activated by pressing the shutter-release button halfway.
57 The Viewfinder
[Prioritize viewfinder (1)]: In photo mode, the camera functions in
a manner similar to existing digital SLR cameras. Placing your eye to
the viewfinder turns the viewfinder on; the monitor remains off after
you take your eye away. In video mode, the displays function as per
[Automatic display switch].
[Prioritize viewfinder (2)]: In photo mode, the viewfinder turns on both
when you look through it and also for a few seconds after the camera
is turned on or the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. In video
mode, the displays function as per [Automatic display switch].
58 The Viewfinder
The viewfinder can be focused by rotating the diopter
adjustment control.
Be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in your eye.
DThe Diopter Adjustment Control
Tip: Extended Use
When using the viewfinder for extended periods, you can select [Adjust for ease of viewing] for
Custom Setting d9 [View mode (photo Lv)] to ensure that viewfinder brightness and hue are adjusted
for ease of viewing.
Tip: Limit Monitor Mode Selection
You can limit the choice of monitor modes available using the [Limit monitor mode selection] item in
the setup menu.
59 The Viewfinder
Touch the monitor to focus on the selected point (touch AF).
In photo mode, the shutter will be released when you lift your
finger from the display (touch shutter).
Touch shutter/AF settings can be adjusted by tapping the W icon
(0 124).
Touch Controls
The touch-sensitive monitor offers a variety of controls that can be operated by touching the display
with your fingers.
Focusing and Releasing the Shutter
60 Touch Controls
Tap highlighted settings in the display.
You can then choose the desired option by tapping icons or
sliders.
Tap Z or press J to select the chosen option and return to the
previous display.
Touch Fn is available only when the monitor is in storage position
with the screen facing outward.
Adjusting Settings
Tip: Touch Fn
When [ON] is selected for Custom Setting f4 [Touch Fn]> [Enable/disable touch Fn], you can use
monitor touch controls to adjust settings while framing pictures in the viewfinder.
61 Touch Controls
Flick left or right to view other pictures during full-frame
playback.
To zoom in on a picture displayed during full-frame playback,
use a stretch gesture or give the display two quick taps. You can
adjust the zoom ratio using stretch gestures to zoom in and pinch
gestures to zoom out.
To “zoom out” to a thumbnail view, use a pinch gesture during
full-frame playback. Use pinch and stretch to choose the number
of pictures displayed from 4, 9, and 72 frames.
Playback
In full-frame playback, touching the bottom of the display brings up a frame-advance bar. Slide your
finger left or right over the bar to scroll rapidly to other pictures.
Use slide gestures to view other parts of the picture during zoom.
Giving the display two quick taps while zoom is in effect cancels zoom.
62 Touch Controls
Videos are indicated by a 1 icon; to start playback, tap the a
icon.
Tap Z to exit to full-frame playback.
Tap the i icon to display the i menu during shooting (0 75).
Tap items to view and change options.
You can choose the items displayed in the imenu (0 80).
Viewing Videos
The i Menu
63 Touch Controls
Text display area
Keyboard area
Keyboard selection
1
2
3
Text Entry
When a keyboard is displayed, you can enter text by tapping the keys.
To position the cursor, tap e or f or tap directly in the text display area.
To cycle through the upper- and lower-case and symbol keyboards, tap the keyboard selection
button.
64 Touch Controls
Slide up or down to scroll.
Tap a menu icon to choose a menu.
Tap menu items to display options. You can then choose the
desired option by tapping icons or sliders.
To exit without changing settings, tap Z.
Navigating the Menus
65 Touch Controls
DCautions: The Touch Screen
The touch screen responds to static electricity. It may not respond when touched with fingernails
or gloved hands. For improved response when using the touch screen with gloves, select [ON] for
[Touch controls]> [Glove mode] in the setup menu.
Do not touch the screen with sharp objects.
Do not use excessive force.
The screen may not respond when covered with third-party protective films.
The screen may not respond when touched simultaneously in multiple locations.
Tip: Enabling or Disabling Touch Controls
Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using [Touch controls]> [Enable/disable touch
controls] in the setup menu.
Touch Fn is available when [ON] is selected for Custom Setting f4 [Touch Fn]> [Enable/disable
touch Fn], even if [Disable] is selected for [Touch controls] > [Enable/disable touch controls] in
the setup menu.
66 Touch Controls
Use the Fn button for quick access to frequently-used settings.
The role the Fn button plays can be chosen via Custom Settings.
Different roles can be assigned for photography (0 591), video
recording (0 626), and playback (0 605).
At default settings, the Fn button is used for white balance
(0 157).
The assigned setting can be adjusted by holding the Fn button
and rotating a command dial. In some cases, adjustments can be
made using both the main and sub-command dials.
The Fn Button
67 The Fn Button
Press the G button to view the menus.
CPHOTO SHOOTING MENU (0 369)
1VIDEO RECORDING MENU (0 484)
ACUSTOM SETTINGS MENU (0 522)
DPLAYBACK MENU (0 649)
BSETUP MENU (0 668)
FNETWORK MENU (0 722)
OMY MENU/mRECENT SETTINGS*
(0 751)
d (help) icon (0 73)
Current settings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Using the Menus
The MENU Button
You can choose the menu displayed. The default is [MY MENU].
68 The MENU Button
*
Move cursor up
Select the highlighted item
Display sub-menu, select highlighted
item, or move cursor right
Move cursor down
Cancel and return to previous menu, or
move cursor left
1
2
3
4
5
Using the Menus
You can navigate the menus using the multi selector and J button.
Highlight the icon for the current menu.
Press 4 to place the cursor in the menu-selection area.
Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
69 The MENU Button
1
2
Position the cursor in the selected menu.
Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected menu.
Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item.
Display options.
Press 2 to display options for the selected menu item.
70 The MENU Button
3
4
5
Select the highlighted option.
Press J to save changes and exit.
To exit without making a selection, press the G button.
To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-
release button halfway.
Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option.
71 The MENU Button
6
7
Some items and menu options may be unavailable depending on
camera status. Unavailable items are displayed in gray.
In some cases, pressing J when a grayed-out item is highlighted
will display a message explaining why the item is unavailable.
DGrayed-Out Items
72 The MENU Button
If the only options available for the current item are [ON] and [OFF],
you can switch from [ON] to [OFF] or vice versa simply by pressing
J, pressing the multi selector right (2), or tapping the item in the
display.
Tip: ON/OFF Only Items
Tip: The d (Help) Icon
Where available, a description of the currently-selected item can be viewed by pressing the W (Q)
button.
Press 1 or 3 to scroll.
Press W (Q) again to return to the menus.
Tip: Touch Controls
You can also navigate the menus using touch controls (0 60).
73 The MENU Button
Text display area
Keyboard area
Keyboard selection
1
2
3
Tip: Text Entry
A keyboard is displayed when text entry is required, for example if you are called on to enter a file
name or the like. Enter text as described below.
Enter characters at the current cursor position by highlighting them with the multi selector arrow
keys and then pressing J.
The cursor can be moved left or right in the text display area by rotating either of the command
dials.
To cycle through the upper- and lower-case and symbol keyboards, highlight the keyboard selection
icon and press J. The keyboard selection icon may not be available in some cases.
If a character is entered when the text display area is full, the rightmost character will be deleted.
To delete the character under the cursor, press the O button.
To complete entry, press X.
To exit without completing text entry, press G.
74 The MENU Button
Different menus are displayed in photo, video, and playback
modes.
Options can be viewed by tapping items in the display or by
highlighting items and pressing J; selections can then be made
using the multi selector.
The i Button (i Menu)
For quick access to frequently-used settings, press the i button or tap the i icon to view the i menu.
Items for which the camera displays a command dial guide can be adjusted by highlighting them in
the i menu and rotating a command dial. In some cases, adjustments can be made using both the
main and sub-command dials.
75 The i Button (i Menu)
Some items and menu options may be unavailable depending on
camera status. Unavailable items are displayed in gray.
When the camera is rotated to take or view pictures in “tall”
(portrait) orientation, the i menu displays rotate to match. In
video mode, only the playback i menu rotates to match camera
orientation.
DGrayed-Out Items
Tip: Using the i Menu with the Camera in “Tall” Orientation
76 The i Button (i Menu)
Set Picture Control (0 176)
White balance (0 157)
Image quality (0 110)
Image size (0 112)
AF-area mode/subject detection (0 116,
0 120)
Focus mode (0 114)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Release mode (0 145)
Vibration reduction (0 421)
Custom controls (shooting; 0 591)
Metering (0 411)
Airplane mode (0 724)
View memory card info (0 589)
7
8
9
10
11
12
The Still Photography i Menu
Pressing the i button in photo mode displays the items listed below. Highlight the desired item using
the multi selector and press J to view options.
1 2 3 4 5 6
87 9 10 11 12
77 The i Button (i Menu)
Set Picture Control (0 176)
White balance (0 157)
Frame size/frame rate (0 189)
Microphone sensitivity (0 513)
AF-area mode/subject detection (0 116,
0 120)
1
2
3
4
5
Focus mode (0 114)
Electronic VR (0 512)
Vibration reduction (0 511)
Custom controls (0 626)
Wind noise reduction (0 516)
Airplane mode (0 724)
Destination (0 489)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
The Video i Menu
Pressing the i button in video mode displays the items listed below. Highlight the desired item using
the multi selector and press J to view options.
1 2 3 4 5 6
87 9 10 11 12
78 The i Button (i Menu)
Photos
Videos Videos (playback paused)
The Playback i Menu
Pressing the i button during playback displays a context-sensitive imenu of playback options.
79 The i Button (i Menu)
Highlight Custom Setting f1 or g1 [Customize i menu]
and press J.
See “The G Button” (0 68) for information on using the
menus.
Highlight the position you want to change and press J.
A list of the items available for the selected position will be
displayed.
Highlight the desired item and press J.
The item will be assigned to the selected position and the
options shown in Step2 will be displayed.
Repeat Steps2 and 3 as desired.
Customizing the i Menu
The items displayed in the i menu during shooting can be chosen using Custom Setting f1 or g1
[Customize i menu].
Press the G button.
Changes will be saved and the Custom Settings menu will be displayed.
80 The i Button (i Menu)
1
2
3
4
First Steps
Attaching the Strap
To attach a strap, follow the steps below.
81 Attaching the Strap
The camera is equipped with two memory card slots: a slot that
takes one SD memory card (q) and another that takes one microSD
memory card (w), for a total of two cards, one of each type.
Inserting the Battery and Memory Cards
Turn the camera off before inserting or removing the battery or memory cards.
Holding the memory card in the orientation shown, slide it straight into the slot until it clicks into
place.
If you are using a microSD memory card, we recommend that you insert it before inserting the
battery.
Using the battery to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one side, slide the battery into the
battery chamber until the latch locks it in place.
82 Inserting the Battery and Memory Cards
DRemoving the Battery
To remove the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery chamber/memory card slot cover.
Press the battery latch in the direction shown by the arrow to release the battery and then remove the
battery by hand.
DRemoving Memory Cards
Before removing the memory cards, confirm that the memory card access lamp is off and then turn the
camera off and open the battery chamber/memory card slot cover. Press the card in to eject it (q) and
then slide it from the camera (w).
We recommend that you remove the battery before removing microSD memory cards.
83 Inserting the Battery and Memory Cards
Battery Level
The battery level is shown in the shooting display while the camera is on.
The battery level display changes as the battery level diminishes, from L through K to H. When
the battery level falls to H, suspend shooting and charge the battery or ready a spare battery.
If the message [Shutter release disabled. Recharge battery.] is displayed, charge or exchange the
battery.
DThe Standby Timer
The camera uses a standby timer to help reduce the drain on the battery. If no operations are
performed for about 30 seconds, the standby timer will expire and the monitor, viewfinder, and control
panel will turn off. A few seconds prior to turning off, the monitor and viewfinder will dim. They can be
reactivated by pressing the shutter-release button halfway. The length of time before the standby timer
expires automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]> [Standby timer].
84 Inserting the Battery and Memory Cards
The location of the current picture is shown by an icon at the
bottom left corner of the playback display.
Number of Exposures Remaining
When you turn the camera on, the shooting display will show the number of photographs that can
be taken at current settings.
Values over 1000 are rounded down to the nearest hundred. For example, values between 1500 and
1599 are shown as 1.5k.
Tip: The Write Protect Switch
SD memory cards are equipped with a write-protect switch. Sliding the switch to the “lock” position
write-protects the card, protecting the data it contains.
16
A “–––” indicator and a [Card] warning appear in the shooting display when a write-protected card
is inserted.
If you attempt to release the shutter while a write-protected card is inserted, a warning will be
displayed and no picture will be recorded. Unlock the memory card before attempting to take or
delete pictures.
Tip: Slot Icons
85 Inserting the Battery and Memory Cards
Charging the Battery
Charge the supplied EN‑EL15c battery before use. The battery can be charged while inserted in the
camera by connecting the camera to an optional EH-8P AC adapter using the supplied USB cable.
DCautions: Using Batteries
Read and follow the warnings and cautions in “For Your Safety” (0 26) and “Caring for the Camera
and Battery: Cautions” (0 831).
Insert the battery (0 82).
86 Charging the Battery
1
After confirming that the camera is off, connect it to an optional EH-8P AC adapter using
the supplied USB cable (q).
Plug the AC adapter into a household power outlet. The battery will charge while the camera is
off. Keep the plug straight during insertion and removal.
The camera charge lamp (w) lights amber while charging is in progress. The lamp turns off
when charging is complete.
Assuming a 5V/500mA input, an exhausted battery will fully charge in about 2 hours and 40
minutes.
Disconnect the USB cable when charging is complete. Keep the connector straight when
disconnecting it from the camera.
87 Charging the Battery
2
DCautions: Charging
Only EN‑EL15c and EN‑EL15b batteries can be charged while inserted in the camera. EN‑EL15a
batteries can be charged using an optional MH‑25a battery charger.
Charging errors caused by, for example, elevated camera temperatures or attempts to charge an
EN‑EL15a are indicated by the charge lamp flashing rapidly for about 30 seconds before turning off.
After the charge lamp turns off, we recommend that you turn the camera on (or activate the standby
timer) and confirm that the battery is charged.
88 Charging the Battery
Tip: Optional EH‑7P Charging AC Adapters: Charging
The battery can also be charged using an optional EH‑7P charging AC adapter. After confirming that
the camera is off, connect the adapter to the camera via USB and plug it in. The battery will charge
while the camera is off. Keep the plug straight during insertion and removal.
Tip: Powering the Camera
If [ON] is selected for [USB power delivery] in the setup menu when the camera is connected to an
EH-8P or EH-7P, power will be supplied to the camera when the camera is on.
Power will only be supplied to the camera when the battery is inserted.
The battery will not charge while the camera is powered by an outside power source.
For more information, see “‘Power Delivery’ Versus ‘Charging’” (0 712).
Tip: Computer USB Power Delivery and Battery Charging
Computers connected via USB can supply current to power the camera or charge the battery.
The computer supplies power only while on. Charging will be suspended while the computer is in
sleep mode. It will resume when sleep mode ends.
Do not connect the computer via a USB hub or keyboard during charging. Connect it directly to the
camera.
Actual charging times may be longer depending on the computer USB connector type and
specifications.
Depending on the model and product specifications, some computers will not supply current to
power the camera or charge the battery.
89 Charging the Battery
Attaching a Lens
The camera can be used with Z mount lenses. For more information on lenses, see the lens
documentation available from the Nikon Download Center.
The lens generally used in this document for illustrative purposes is a NIKKORZ 40mm f/2 (SE).
Be careful to prevent dust entering the camera.
Confirm that the camera is off before attaching the lens.
Remove the camera body cap (q, w) and rear lens cap (e, r).
Align the mounting marks on the camera (t) and lens (y). Do not touch the image sensor or
lens contacts.
90 Attaching a Lens
-
-
After turning the camera off, press and hold the lens release
button (q) while turning the lens in the direction shown (w).
After removing the lens, reattach the lens caps and camera body
cap.
Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place (u).
Remove the front lens cap before taking pictures.
DF Mount Lenses
Be sure to attach an FTZII or FTZ mount adapter (available separately) to the camera before using F
mount lenses (0 815).
Attempting to attach F mount lenses directly to the camera could damage the lens or image sensor.
Detaching Lenses
91 Attaching a Lens
-
Opening the Monitor
Rotate the monitor gently; do not use force.
92 Opening the Monitor
Press G, and in the setup menu highlight [Language] and
press 2.
For information on using the menus, see “Using the Menus”
(0 69).
Highlight [Time zone and date] and press 2.
Choose a time zone.
Select [Time zone] in the [Time zone and date] display.
The display lists selected cities in the chosen zone and the
difference between the time in the chosen zone and UTC.
Highlight a time zone in the [Time zone] display and press
J.
Camera Setup
Turn the camera on, choose a language, and set the clock. Before using the camera for the first time,
follow the steps below to choose a language and time zone and set the clock so that the correct time
and date will be recorded with any pictures you take.
Select a language.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired language and press J (the languages available vary with
the country or region in which the camera was originally purchased).
93 Camera Setup
1
2
3
4
Turn daylight saving time on or off.
Select [Daylight saving time] in the [Time zone and date]
display.
Select [ON] (daylight saving time on) or [OFF] (daylight
saving time off).
Selecting [ON] advances the clock one hour; to undo the
effect, select [OFF].
Set the clock.
Select [Date and time] in the [Time zone and date] display.
Press J after using the multi selector to set the clock to the
date and time in the selected time zone in the [Date and
time] display (note that the camera uses a 24-hour clock).
Choose a date format.
Select [Date format] in the [Time zone and date] display.
Highlight the desired date (year, month, and day) display
order and press J.
Exit the menus.
Lightly press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to
shooting mode.
DThe t Icon
A flashing t icon in the shooting display indicates that the camera clock has been reset. The date
and time recorded with new photographs will not be correct; use the [Time zone and date]> [Date
and time] option in the setup menu to set the clock to the correct time and date. The camera clock is
powered by an independent clock battery. The clock battery charges when the main battery is inserted
in the camera. It takes about 2 days to charge. Once charged, it will power the clock for about a month.
94 Camera Setup
5
6
7
8
Lenses with retractable barrels must be extended before use. Rotate
the zoom ring as shown until the lens clicks into place in the
extended position.
Select photo mode by rotating the photo/video selector to
C.
Rotate the mode selector to AUTO (b).
Basic Photography and Playback
Taking Photographs (b Mode)
Select b (auto) mode for simple, “point-and-shoot” photography.
DLenses with Retractable Barrels
95 Taking Photographs (b Mode)
1
2
Rotate the ISO sensitivity dial to C.
At the default settings for AUTO (b) mode, the camera will
adjust ISO sensitivity automatically to assist exposure control
while the ISO sensitivity dial is rotated to C.
Landscape (wide) orientation Portrait (tall) orientation
Frame the photograph.
Frame your subject in the shooting display.
Human faces detected by the camera are identified by a
white border indicating the focus point. If the camera detects
the subject’s eyes, the focus point will instead appear over
one or the other of their eyes.
Ready the camera.
Holding the handgrip in your right hand and cradling the camera body or lens with your left,
bring your elbows in against the sides of your chest.
96 Taking Photographs (b Mode)
3
4
5
To focus, press the shutter-release button halfway (i.e.,
lightly press the shutter-release button, stopping when it
is pressed halfway).
The focus point will be displayed in green when the subject
is in focus.
The AF-assist illuminator may light to assist the focus
operation if the subject is poorly lit.
If the camera is unable to focus, the out-of-focus indicator
will flash red.
The focus point will turn green if the camera is able to focus
after detecting the face or eyes of a human portrait subject. If
the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will flash red.
Without lifting your finger from the shutter-release
button, press the button the rest of the way down to take
the picture.
97 Taking Photographs (b Mode)
6
7
The memory card access lamp will light while the photograph is
being recorded. Do not open the battery chamber/memory card slot
cover or remove the memory card or battery.
DThe AF-Assist Illuminator
Do not obstruct the AF-assist illuminator while it is lit.
DCautions: Taking Photographs
You may notice the following in the shooting display. These phenomena will also be visible in any
photos taken with the camera:
flicker or banding in scenes lit by such sources as fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps,
distortion during motion (individual subjects such as trains or cars moving at high speed through
the frame may be distorted, or the entire frame may appear distorted when the camera is
panned horizontally),
jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, or bright spots, or
bright regions or bands in scenes lit by flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or
when the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source.
Note that noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected colors may appear if
you use the X button to zoom in on the view through the lens.
Avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other powerful light sources during shooting. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
DThe Memory Card Access Lamp
98 Taking Photographs (b Mode)
-
-
-
-
You can also take a photograph by touching the monitor. Touch
your subject to focus and lift your finger to release the shutter
(0 124).
Exposure can be adjusted by rotating the exposure compensation
dial (0 143).
To zoom in on the display in photo mode (to a maximum of
approximately 12×), press the X button.
Use the X and W (Q) buttons to zoom in and out.
A navigation window showing the area currently visible will
appear at the bottom right corner of the display.
Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in
the monitor.
Tip: The Touch Shutter
Tip: The Exposure Compensation Dial
Tip: Using Display Zoom in Photo Mode
99 Taking Photographs (b Mode)
Select video mode by rotating the photo/video selector to
1.
Note that optional flash units cannot be used when the camera
is in video mode.
Rotate the mode selector to AUTO (b).
Recording Videos (b Mode)
b (auto) mode can be used for simple, “point-and-shoot” video recording.
100 Recording Videos (b Mode)
1
2
Press the video-record button to start recording.
1 2
4
3
Recording indicator
Video recording time (length of
footage recorded)
Available recording time
Recording indicator (red border)
1
2
3
4
A recording indicator will be displayed and the borders of the shooting display will turn red.
The display also shows the time remaining, or in other words the approximate amount of
new footage that can be recorded to the memory card.
Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone. Do not cover the microphone during
recording.
You can also focus by tapping your subject in the monitor.
Press the video-record button again to end recording.
101 Recording Videos (b Mode)
3
4
The memory card access lamp will light while the video is being
recorded. Do not open the battery chamber/memory card slot cover
or remove the memory card or battery.
During video recording, the camera may become hot and a high-
temperature warning may appear in the shooting display. Wait for
the camera to cool and the warning to clear from the display before
handling the camera, battery, or memory cards.
DThe Memory Card Access Lamp
DThe 0 Icon
A 0 icon indicates that videos cannot be recorded.
DCautions: Recording Videos
Video recording will end automatically if:
the maximum length is reached,
the battery is exhausted,
you choose a different shooting mode,
you switch modes using the photo/video selector,
the lens is removed, or
the camera’s internal temperature rises.
Sounds made by the camera may be audible in footage recorded:
during autofocus,
during vibration reduction,
when power aperture is used, or
when power zoom is used.
DHigh-Temperature Warnings
102 Recording Videos (b Mode)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Exposure can be adjusted by rotating the exposure compensation
dial (0 143).
DCautions: Video Recording
You may notice the following in the shooting display. These phenomena will also be visible in any
footage recorded with the camera:
flicker or banding in scenes lit by such sources as fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps,
distortion during motion (individual subjects such as trains or cars moving at high speed through
the frame may be distorted, or the entire frame may appear distorted when the camera is
panned horizontally),
jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, or bright spots,
bright regions or bands in scenes lit by flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or
when the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source, or
flicker when power aperture is used during recording.
Note that noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected colors may appear if
you use the X button to zoom in on the view through the lens.
When recording, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other powerful light sources. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
Tip: The Exposure Compensation Dial
Tip: Using Display Zoom in Video Mode
The X button can also be used to zoom in on the display in video mode (0 99).
Press X during recording to zoom in 50%, 100% (1 : 1), or 200%. To zoom out, press W (Q). Note,
however, that 50% zoom is not available at a frame size of 1920× 1080.
When viewing videos, you can zoom in on the current frame when playback is paused.
103 Recording Videos (b Mode)
-
-
-
-
-
Videos are indicated by a 1 icon at the top left corner of the
display. Tap the a icon in the display or press the J button to
start playback.
Playback
Press the K button to view photos and videos in the monitor or viewfinder after shooting.
Press 4 or 2 or flick left or right to view additional pictures.
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button halfway.
104 Playback
1 2
3
4
5 76
1 icon
Length
a icon
1
2
3
Current position/total
length
Volume
Progress bar
Guide
4
5
6
7
Viewing Videos
The video playback display and controls are described below.
The Video Playback Display
During video playback, the display shows the length of the video, the current playback position, and
the other indicators listed below. Your approximate position in the video can also be ascertained from
the video progress bar.
Video Playback Controls
The following operations can be performed while playback is in progress:
Operation Description
Pause Press 3 to pause playback.
Resume Press the J button to resume playback when playback is paused or during
rewind/advance.
Rewind/advance Press 4 to rewind, 2 to advance. Speed increases with each press, from 2×
to 4× to 8× to 16×.
105 Playback
Operation Description
Start slow-motion
playback Press 3 while the video is paused to start slow-motion playback.
Jog rewind/
advance
Press 4 or 2 while the video is paused to rewind or advance one frame at
a time.
Keep 4 or 2 pressed for continuous rewind or advance.
Skip 10s Rotate the sub-command dial one stop to skip ahead or back 10s.
Skip 10 frames Rotate the main command dial one stop to skip ahead or back 10 frames.
Skip to first or last
frame
Keep 4 or 2 pressed to skip respectively to the first frame or last frame.
The first frame is indicated by a h in the top right corner of the display,
the last frame by a i.
Zoom in Press X to zoom in on the current frame while playback is paused.
Adjust volume Press X to increase volume, W (Q) to decrease.
Edit video To display the video i menu, pause playback and press the i button.
Exit Press 1 to exit to full-frame playback.
106 Playback
Press the O button to delete the current picture. Note that pictures
cannot be recovered once deleted.
Display a picture you want to delete and press the O button to
display a confirmation dialog. Press the O button again to delete
the picture and return to playback.
To exit without deleting the picture, press K.
Deleting Unwanted Pictures
Tip: The Playback Menu “Delete” Item
Use [Delete] in the playback menu to:
delete multiple pictures,
delete all pictures currently rated d (candidate for deletion),
delete all pictures taken on selected dates, or
delete all pictures in selected folders.
107 Playback
Image area settings can be displayed by selecting [Image area] in
the photo shooting menu.
Shooting Settings
Image Recording Options (Image Area,
Quality, and Size)
Adjusting Image Area Settings
108 Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality,
and Size)
FX (36× 24)
DX (24× 16)
1 : 1 (24× 24)
16 : 9 (36× 20)
1
2
3
4
If [ON] is selected for this option in the camera menus, the image
area icon in the shooting display will flash when “DX (24×16)” is
selected.
Choose Image Area
Choose the image area. The following options are available:
Option Description
c[FX (36×24)]Record pictures in FX format with an angle of view equivalent to a 35mm
format camera.
a[DX (24×16)]
Pictures are recorded in DX format. To calculate the approximate focal length
of the lens in 35mm format, multiply by 1.5.
Image-area selection is fixed at [DX (24×16)] when a DX lens is attached.
m[1:1 (24×24)] Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1.
Z[16:9 (36×20)] Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 16 : 9.
DX Crop Alert
109 Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality,
and Size)
Use the [Image quality] item in the photo shooting menu to
choose the image quality option employed when photographs are
recorded.
Adjusting Image Quality
Option Description
[RAW+ JPEG/HEIF finem]Record two copies of each photo: an NEF (RAW) picture and either
a JPEG or HEIF copy.
When [SDR] is selected for [Tone mode] in the photo shooting
menu, the camera will record an NEF (RAW) picture and a JPEG
copy. When [HLG] is selected for [Tone mode] in the photo
shooting menu, the camera will record an NEF (RAW) picture
and an HEIF copy.
The highest-quality JPEG and HEIF copies are produced by
options ending in [fine ], with quality progressively declining
through [fine], [normal ], [normal], [basic ], and [basic].
The camera displays only the JPEG or HEIF copy of dual-format
pictures taken with one memory card inserted.
If the photo was recorded with only one memory card inserted
or with [Overflow] or [Backup] selected for [Secondary slot
function] in the photo shooting menu and two memory cards
inserted, deleting the JPEG or HEIF copy on the camera will also
delete the NEF (RAW) picture.
[RAW+ JPEG/HEIF fine]
[RAW+ JPEG/HEIF normalm]
[RAW+ JPEG/HEIF normal]
[RAW+ JPEG/HEIF basicm]
[RAW+ JPEG/HEIF basic]
[RAW] Record photos in NEF (RAW) format.
[JPEG/HEIF finem]
Record photos in JPEG or HEIF format. The highest-quality
pictures are produced by options ending in [fine ], with quality
progressively declining through [fine], [normal ], [normal],
[basic ], and [basic].
Photos are recorded in JPEG format when [SDR] is selected for
[Tone mode] in the photo shooting menu. Photos are recorded
in HEIF when [HLG] is selected for [Tone mode] in the photo
shooting menu.
[JPEG/HEIF fine]
[JPEG/HEIF normalm]
[JPEG/HEIF normal]
[JPEG/HEIF basicm]
[JPEG/HEIF basic]
110 Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality,
and Size)
Tip: NEF (RAW)
NEF (RAW) files have the extension “*.nef.
The process of converting NEF (RAW) pictures to other highly-portable formats such as JPEG is
referred to as “NEF (RAW) processing”. During this process, Picture Controls and settings such as
exposure compensation and white balance can be freely adjusted.
The RAW data themselves are unaffected by NEF (RAW) processing and their quality will remain
intact even if the pictures are processed multiple times at different settings.
NEF (RAW) processing can be performed using [Retouch]> [RAW processing (current picture)] or
[RAW processing (multiple pictures)] in the playback i menu or on a computer using Nikon’s NX
Studio software. NX Studio is available free-of-charge from the Nikon Download Center.
Tip: “NEF (RAW)+ JPEG/HEIF”
If [RAW primary - JPEG secondary] or [RAW primary - HEIF secondary] is selected for [Secondary
slot function] in the photo shooting menu, the NEF (RAW) copies will be recorded to the card in the
primary slot and the JPEG or HEIF copies to the card in the secondary slot (0 379).
111 Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality,
and Size)
Use [Image size settings] in the photo shooting menu to choose a
size for new photographs.
Choose a size for new JPEG and HEIF pictures. The size for
photographs recorded in formats other than NEF (RAW) can be
chosen from [Large], [Medium], and [Small].
NEF (RAW) pictures are recorded at a size of [Large].
Choosing an Image Size
Image Size
The number of pixels in the picture varies with the option selected for image area (0 108).
Image area Image size Size when printed at 300dpi
[FX (36×24)]
Large (6048× 4032 pixels) Approx. 51.2× 34.1cm/20.2× 13.4in.
Medium (4528× 3024 pixels) Approx. 38.3× 25.6cm/15.1× 10.1in.
Small (3024× 2016 pixels) Approx. 25.6× 17.1cm/10.1× 6.7in.
[DX (24×16)]
Large (3984× 2656 pixels) Approx. 33.7× 22.5cm/13.3× 8.9in.
Medium (2976× 1992 pixels) Approx. 25.2× 16.9cm/9.9× 6.6in.
Small (1984× 1328 pixels) Approx. 16.8× 11.2cm/6.6× 4.4in.
[1:1 (24×24)]
Large (4032× 4032 pixels) Approx. 34.1× 34.1cm/13.4× 13.4in.
Medium (3024× 3024 pixels) Approx. 25.6× 25.6cm/10.1× 10.1in.
Small (2016× 2016 pixels) Approx. 17.1× 17.1cm/6.7× 6.7in.
112 Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality,
and Size)
Selecting [ON] allows the size for photos taken using the [DX
(24×16)] image area to be chosen separately from that for pictures
taken using other image areas. The size for photos taken using the
[DX (24×16)] image area can be chosen using [Image size (DX)].
Choose the size of photographs taken using the [DX (24×16)]
image area when [ON] is selected for [Enable DX image sizes].
Regardless of the option selected, NEF (RAW) pictures will be
recorded at a size of [Large].
Image area Image size Size when printed at 300dpi
[16:9 (36×20)]
Large (6048× 3400 pixels) Approx. 51.2× 28.8cm/20.2× 11.3in.
Medium (4528× 2544 pixels) Approx. 38.3× 21.5cm/15.1× 8.5in.
Small (3024× 1696 pixels) Approx. 25.6× 14.4cm/10.1× 5.7in.
Tip: Print Size
Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1
inch= 2.54 cm).
Enable DX Image Sizes
Image Size (DX)
113 Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality,
and Size)
The focus mode can be selected using the [Focus mode] item
in the i menu, photo shooting menu, or video recording menu
(0 75, 0 417, 0 507).
Focus
Focus Mode
Control how the camera focuses.
Choosing a Focus Mode
Option Description
AF‑S [Single AF]
Use with stationary subjects. When you press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus, the focus point will turn from red to green
and focus will lock. If the camera fails to focus, the focus point will
flash red and the shutter release will be disabled.
At default settings, the shutter can only be released if the camera is
able to focus (focus priority).
AF‑C [Continuous AF]
Use for shots of athletes and other moving subjects. The camera
adjusts focus continuously in response to changes in the distance to
the subject while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
At default settings, the shutter can be released whether or not the
subject is in focus (release priority).
AF‑F [Full-time AF]
The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject
movement or changes in composition.
When you press the shutter-release button halfway to focus, the
focus point will turn from red to green and focus will lock.
This option is only available in video mode.
MF [Manual focus]Focus manually (0 128). The shutter can be released whether or not
the subject is in focus.
114 Focus
DCautions: Autofocus
The camera may be unable to focus if:
the subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame,
the subject lacks contrast,
the subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness,
the focus point includes night-time spot lighting or a neon sign or other light source that
changes in brightness,
flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-vapor, or similar lighting,
a cross (star) filter or other special filter is used,
the subject appears smaller than the focus point, or
the subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or a row of windows in a
skyscraper).
The display may brighten or darken while the camera focuses.
The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus.
The camera may take longer to focus when lighting is poor.
Tip: Low-Light AF
For improved focus when shooting under low light, select [ON] for Custom Setting d10 [Starlight view
(photo Lv)]. This option takes effect only in photo mode.
115 Focus
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
The AF-area mode can be selected using the [AF-area mode/subj.
detection] item in the i menu (0 75) or the [AF-area mode]
items in the photo shooting and video recording menus (0 418,
0 508).
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus.
In modes other than [Auto-area AF], the focus point can be positioned using the multi selector.
Choosing an AF-Area Mode
Option Description
3[Pinpoint AF]
With a focus point smaller than that employed for single-point
AF, pinpoint AF is used for pinpoint focus on a selected spot in
the frame.
Focusing may be slower than with single-point AF.
Recommended for shots involving static subjects, such as
buildings, in-studio product photography, or close-ups.
This option is only available when photo mode is selected and
[Single AF] is chosen for focus mode.
d[Single-point AF]The camera focuses on a point selected by the user.
Use with stationary subjects.
116 Focus
Option Description
d[Dynamic-area AF (S)] The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If the
subject briefly leaves the selected point, the camera will focus
based on information from surrounding focus points.
This option is only available when photo mode is selected and
[Continuous AF] is chosen for focus mode.
Use for photographs of athletes and other active subjects that
are hard to frame using single-point AF.
The size of the area used for focus can be selected from S
(small), M (medium), and L (large). S is the smallest and L the
largest.
[Dynamic-area AF (S)]: Choose when there is time to compose
the photograph or when photographing subjects that are
moving predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track).
[Dynamic-area AF (M)]: Choose when photographing subjects
that are moving unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).
[Dynamic-area AF (L)]: Choose when photographing subjects
that are moving quickly and cannot be easily framed in the
selected focus point (e.g., birds).
e[Dynamic-area AF (M)]
f[Dynamic-area AF (L)]
f[Wide-area AF (S)] As for single-point AF except that the camera focuses on a
wider area.
Choose for snapshots, subjects that are in motion, and other
subjects that are difficult to photograph using single-point AF.
During video recording, wide-area AF can be used for smooth
focus when making panning or tilting shots or filming moving
subjects.
If the selected focus point contains subjects at different
distances from the camera, the camera will assign priority to
the closest subject.
The focus points for [Wide-area AF (L)] are larger than those
for [Wide-area AF (S)].
g[Wide-area AF (L)]
117 Focus
Option Description
8[Wide-area AF (C1)] Choose the dimensions (measured in focus points) of the focus
areas used for the selected AF-area.
This can be used, for example, if the size and shape of the area
employed for focus can be determined in advance with a fair
degree of accuracy.
On selecting [Wide-area AF (C1)] or [Wide-area AF (C2)], you
will be prompted to choose the AF-area size. Use 1 and 3 to
choose the height and 4 and 2 to choose the width.
The sizes available vary with the option selected for image area.
When [FX (36×24)] is selected, the photo shooting menu
offers a choice of 77 options ranging from [1×1] to [21×13].
Similarly, when [FX (36×24)] is selected, the video recording
menu offers a choice of 66 options ranging from [1×1] to
[21×11].
9[Wide-area AF (C2)]
u[3D-tracking]
Track focus on a selected subject.
Position the focus point over your subject and start tracking
by pressing the shutter-release button halfway; focus will then
track the selected subject as it moves through the frame.
Release the button to end tracking and restore the previously-
selected focus point.
If the subject leaves the frame, remove your finger from the
shutter-release button and recompose the photograph with the
subject in the selected focus point.
This option is only available when photo mode is selected and
[Continuous AF] is chosen for focus mode.
n[Subject-tracking AF]
Track focus on a selected subject.
Position the focus point over your subject and start tracking by
pressing J or by pressing the shutter-release button halfway;
focus will then track the selected subject as it moves through
the frame. To end tracking and select the center focus point,
press J.
This option is only available in video mode.
h[Auto-area AF]
The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the
focus point.
Use on occasions when you don’t have time to select the focus
point yourself, for portraits, or for snapshots and other spur-of-
the-moment photos.
118 Focus
-
-
DCaution: 3D-Tracking and Subject Tracking
The camera may be unable to track subjects that:
are similar in color, brightness, or pattern to the background,
change visibly in size, color, or brightness,
are too large or too small,
too bright or too dark,
move quickly, or
are obscured by other objects or leave the frame.
Tip: s: The Center Focus Point
In all AF-area modes except [Auto-area AF], [3D-tracking], and [Subject-tracking AF], a dot appears
in the focus point when it is in the center of the frame.
119 Focus
The class of subjects given priority during autofocus and electronic
rangefinding can be chosen using the [AF/MF subject detection
options] items in the photo shooting and video recording menus,
which offer a choice of [Auto], [People], [Animal], [Vehicle],
[Airplanes], and [Subject detection off]. The subject detected by
the camera is indicated by a focus point.
Human faces detected by the camera when [People] is selected
are identified by a border indicating the focus point. If the camera
detects the subject’s eyes, the focus point will instead appear over
one or the other of their eyes. If the subject looks away after their
face is detected, the focus point will move to track their motion.
If a dog, cat, or bird is detected when [Animal] is selected, the
focus point will appear over the face of the animal in question. If
the camera detects the subject’s eyes, the focus point will instead
appear over one or the other of their eyes. If the camera can
detect neither face nor eyes, it will display a focus point over the
detected animal.
If a car, motorcycle, train, airplane, or bicycle is detected when
[Vehicle] is selected, the focus point will appear over the vehicle
in question. In the case of trains, the camera will detect only the
front end. With planes, the camera will detect the body, nose, or
cockpit depending on the aircraft’s size.
If an aircraft is detected when [Airplanes] is selected, the focus
point will appear over the aircraft in question. The camera will
detect the body, nose, or cockpit depending on the aircraft’s size.
Subject Detection
In the case of the video recording menu, the choice of subject is made via [AF/MF subject
detection options]> [Subject detection]. Separate subject types can be selected for photo and
video modes.
120 Focus
To enable subject detection during manual focus, select an option
other than [MF subject detection off] for [MF subject detection
area] in the photo shooting or video recording menu (0 128).
If [Auto] is selected, the camera will detect humans, animals, and vehicles and choose a subject for
focus automatically.
To disable subject detection altogether, choose [Subject detection off].
Using Subject Detection During Autofocus
Subject detection is available during autofocus when [Wide-area AF (S)], [Wide-area AF (L)],
[Wide-area AF (C1)], [Wide-area AF (C2)], [3D-tracking], [Subject-tracking AF], or [Auto-area
AF] is selected for [AF-area mode].
If more than one subject of the selected type is detected, a gray focus point will appear over each
of the subjects detected. If [Auto-area AF] is selected for [AF-area mode], e and f icons will
appear on the focus point selected by the camera. The focus point can be positioned over the other
subjects by pressing 4 or 2.
Using Subject Detection with Manual Focus
Select [All] to enable subject detection in all areas of the frame. If more than one subject of the
selected type is detected, the initial subject selected by the camera will be indicated by a gray focus
point with e and f icons. The focus point can be positioned over the other subjects by pressing 4
or 2.
Select [Wide (L)] or [Wide (S)] to limit subject detection to the current focus area.
121 Focus
DCaution: Subject Detection Using “People”
Subject detection may not perform as expected if:
the subject’s face is too large or small relative to the frame,
the subject’s face is too brightly or dimly lit,
the subject is wearing glasses or sunglasses,
the subject’s face or eyes are obscured by hair or other objects, or
the subject moves excessively during shooting.
DCaution: Subject Detection Using “Animal”
Subject detection may not perform as expected if:
the subject’s face is too large or small relative to the frame,
the subject’s face is too brightly or dimly lit,
the subject’s face or eyes are obscured by fur or the like,
the subject’s face and eyes are of similar colors, or
the subject moves excessively during shooting.
The camera may display a border around subjects that are not dogs, cats, or birds but which
resemble these animals.
The light from the AF-assist illuminator may adversely affect the eyes of some animals; select [OFF]
for Custom Setting a11 [Built-in AF-assist illuminator] when using autofocus.
DCaution: Subject Detection Using “Vehicle” and “Airplanes”
Subject detection may not perform as expected with subjects that are:
too large or small relative to the frame,
too bright or too dark,
partially hidden,
similar in color to surrounding objects, or
moving excessively.
The camera may fail to detect vehicles of some shapes and colors. Alternatively, it may display a
border around subjects that are not of the selected type.
DSubject Detection
The performance of subject-detection may drop:
during high-speed frame capture,
if [HLG] is selected for [Tone mode] in the photo shooting menu, or
if either [HLG] or [N-Log] is selected as the tone mode for [Video file type]> [H.265 10-bit
(MOV)] in the video recording menu.
122 Focus
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Focus-Point Selection
Except when [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode, the focus point can be selected manually,
allowing photographs to be composed with the subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame.
Use the multi selector to select the focus point while the standby timer is on.
Pressing J selects the center focus point.
Tip: Quick Focus-Point Selection
For quicker focus-point selection, choose [Alternating points] for Custom Setting a4 [Focus points
used] to use only a quarter of the available focus points. Selecting [Alternating points] does not
affect the number of points available for [Pinpoint AF].
Tip: Focus-Point Lock
Focus-point selection can be locked by choosing [ON] for Custom Setting f5 or g3 [Focus-point lock].
123 Focus
Touch the display to focus on the selected point. The shutter will be
released when you lift your finger from the display.
Tap the icon shown in the illustration to choose the operation
performed by tapping the display.
The Touch Shutter
Option Description
W[Touch shutter/touch AF]
Touch the display to focus on the selected point and lift
your finger to release the shutter.
When choosing an eye using touch controls, note that the
camera may not focus on the eye on the side you intend.
Use the multi selector to choose the desired eye.
If [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode, the camera
will focus on the chosen point, release the shutter, and track
the selected subject. Press J to end subject tracking.
Available only in photo mode.
X[Off] Touch shutter disabled.
f[Move focus point]
Touch the display to position the focus point. The camera
will not focus and lifting your finger from the display will
not release the shutter.
If [Subject-tracking AF] or [Auto-area AF] is selected for
AF-area mode, focus will track the subject at the chosen
point. Press J to end subject tracking.
124 Focus
Option Description
V[Touch AF]
Touch the display to focus on the selected point. Lifting
your finger from the display does not release the shutter.
If [Subject-tracking AF] or [Auto-area AF] is selected for
AF-area mode, the camera will focus on and track the
subject at the chosen point. Press J to end subject tracking.
DCautions: Taking Pictures Using Touch Shooting Options
Touch controls cannot be used for manual focus.
The shutter-release button can be used to take pictures when the W icon is displayed.
During burst photography, touch controls can be used only to take one picture at a time. Use the
shutter-release button for burst photography.
In self-timer mode, focus locks on the selected subject when you touch the monitor and the shutter
is released about 10 seconds after you lift your finger from the display. If the number of shots
selected is greater than 1, the remaining shots will be taken in a single burst.
125 Focus
Press the A (g) button.
Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway (q),
press the A (g) button (w) to lock focus. Focus will remain
locked while the A (g) button is pressed, even if you lift
your finger from the shutter-release button.
Exposure will also lock.
AE‑L icons will appear in the displays.
Keeping the A (g) button pressed, recompose the
photograph and shoot.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the
subject. If the distance to the subject changes, release the lock
and focus again at the new distance.
Focus Lock
Use focus lock in cases in which the camera has trouble focusing with autofocus.
Use focus lock to lock focus on the current subject when AF‑C is selected for focus mode.
When using focus lock, choose an AF-area mode other than [Auto-area AF].
Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter-release button
halfway.
126 Focus
1
2
3
DLocking Focus When AF-S Is Selected for Focus Mode
Focus locks while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. You can also lock focus by pressing the
A (g) button.
DTaking Multiple Shots at the Same Focus Distance
If you locked focus by pressing the A (g) button, focus will remain locked between shots if you
keep the A (g) button pressed.
If you locked focus by pressing the shutter-release button halfway, focus will remain locked if you
keep the button pressed halfway between shots.
127 Focus
Position the focus point over your subject and rotate the focus or
control ring until the subject is in focus.
For greater precision, press the X button to zoom in on the view
through the lens.
Manual Focus
Manual focus is available in manual focus mode. Use manual focus when, for example, autofocus does
not produce the desired results.
128 Focus
1
2
Focus distance indicator
Focus indicator
1
2
The focus indicator (I) in the shooting display can be used to confirm whether the subject in the
selected focus point is in focus (electronic rangefinding). The focus point will also light green when
the subject is in focus.
Focus indicator Description
(steady) The subject is in focus.
(steady) Focus is in front of the subject.
(steady) Focus is behind the subject.
(flashes) The camera is unable to focus.
When using manual focus with subjects not suited to autofocus, note that the in-focus indicator (I)
may be displayed when the subject is not in focus. Zoom in on the view through the lens and check
focus. Use of a tripod is recommended when the camera is having trouble focusing.
129 Focus
Focus distance is measured from the focal plane mark (E) on the
camera body, which shows the position of the focal plane inside
the camera (q). Use this mark when measuring the distance to
your subject for manual focus or macro photography. The distance
between the focal plane and the lens mounting flange is known
as the “flange-back distance” (w). On this camera, the flange-back
distance is 16mm (0.63in.).
If [ON] is selected for Custom Setting a12 [Focus peaking]>
[Focus peaking display], objects that are in focus will be
indicated by colored outlines that appear when focus is adjusted
manually (focus peaking).
Note that the focus peaking display may not appear if the
camera is unable to detect outlines. Check focus in the shooting
display.
DLenses with Focus-Mode Selection
Manual focus mode can be chosen using focus-mode selection controls on the lens (where available).
DThe Focal Plane Mark and Flange-Back Distance
Tip: Focus Peaking
130 Focus
Use the mode selector to choose the shooting mode.
Exposure
Choosing a Shooting Mode
Mode Description
AUTO
(b)Auto (0 95, 0 100)A simple “point-and-shoot” mode that leaves the camera in
charge of settings.
PProgrammed auto
(0 132)
Use for snapshots and in other situations in which there is
little time to adjust camera settings. The camera chooses
both shutter speed and aperture automatically.
SShutter-priority auto
(0 132)
Use to freeze or blur motion. You choose the shutter speed;
the camera adjusts aperture automatically.
AAperture-priority auto
(0 134)
Use to blur backgrounds or bring both foreground and
background into focus. You choose the aperture; the camera
adjusts shutter speed automatically.
MManual (0 135)You control both shutter speed and aperture. Choose a
shutter speed of “Bulb” or “Time” for long time-exposures.
131 Exposure
While flexible program is in effect, a flexible program indicator
(U) is displayed.
To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate
the main command dial until the indicator is no longer
displayed. Flexible program can also be ended by choosing
another mode or turning the camera off.
-
-
Rotate the shutter speed dial to choose a shutter speed.
P (Programmed Auto)
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture according to a built-in
program to ensure optimal exposure in most situations.
Different combinations of shutter speed and aperture that produce the same exposure can be
selected by rotating the main command dial (“flexible program”).
S (Shutter-Priority Auto)
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically adjusts aperture
for optimal exposure. Choose fast shutter speeds to “freeze” motion, slow shutter speeds to suggest
motion by blurring moving objects.
132 Exposure
To choose the shutter speed using touch controls or the main
command dial, rotate the shutter speed dial to 1/3STEP. Shutter
speed can be set to [X] or to values between ¹⁄₈₀₀₀s and 30s in
increments of ¹⁄₃EV.
To select X or T, or to choose another setting after selecting 1/3 STEP, X, T, or B, hold the shutter
speed dial lock release while rotating the dial.
1
34 2
¹⁄₈₀₀₀ – ¹⁄₂s
1 – 4s (red)
X (flash sync; 0 578)
1/3STEP (¹⁄₃EV steps)
When [Electronic front-curtain shutter] is selected for Custom Setting d5 [Shutter type], rotating
the shutter speed dial to ¹⁄₈₀₀₀ or ¹⁄₄₀₀₀ sets shutter speed to ¹⁄₂₀₀₀s.
Long bulb or time exposures are not available in mode S even when the shutter speed dial is
rotated to B (“Bulb”) or T (“Time”). Select mode M for long exposures.
133 Exposure
1
2
3
4
A (Aperture-Priority Auto)
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera automatically adjusts shutter
speed for optimal exposure.
Aperture can be adjusted by rotating the sub-command dial.
The minimum and maximum values for aperture vary with the lens.
134 Exposure
Shutter speed and aperture can be adjusted with reference to
the exposure indicators.
Rotate the shutter speed dial to choose a shutter speed.
To choose the shutter speed using touch controls or the main
command dial, rotate the shutter speed dial to 1/3STEP. Shutter
speed can be set to X, Bulb, or Time, or to values between ¹⁄₈₀₀₀s
and 30s in increments of ¹⁄₃EV.
M (Manual)
You control both shutter speed and aperture. Choose this mode for long time-exposures of such
subjects as fireworks or the night sky (“Bulb” or “Time” photography, 0 138).
To select X or T, or to choose another setting after selecting 1/3 STEP, X, T, or B, hold the shutter
speed dial lock release while rotating the dial.
1
36 5 4 2
¹⁄₈₀₀₀ – ¹⁄₂s
1 – 4s (red)
B (“Bulb”; 0 138)
T (“Time”; 0 138)
X (flash sync; 0 578)
1/3STEP (¹⁄₃EV steps)
When [Electronic front-curtain shutter] is selected for Custom Setting d5 [Shutter type], rotating
the shutter speed dial to ¹⁄₈₀₀₀ or ¹⁄₄₀₀₀ sets shutter speed to ¹⁄₂₀₀₀s.
135 Exposure
1
2
3
4
5
6
Aperture can be adjusted by rotating the sub-command dial.
The minimum and maximum values for aperture vary with the
lens.
DExposure Indicators
The exposure indicators in the monitor and viewfinder show whether the photograph would be under-
or over-exposed at current settings. The exposure indicators can be read as follows:
Display Optimal exposure Underexposed by 1/3EV Overexposed by over 3 1/3EV
Monitor
Viewfinder
The orientation of the exposure indicators can be reversed using Custom Setting f8 [Reverse
indicators].
DExposure Warning
The displays will flash if the selected settings exceed the limits of the exposure metering system.
136 Exposure
Tip: Extended Shutter Speeds
For shutter speeds as slow as 900s (15 minutes), select [ON] for Custom Setting d6 [Extended shutter
speeds (M)] and choose the desired shutter speed after rotating the shutter speed dial to 1/3STEP.
Tip: Long Exposures
At speeds slower than 1s, the shutter speed displayed by the camera may differ from the actual
exposure time. The actual exposure times at shutter speeds of 15 and 30 seconds, for example, are
respectively 16 and 32 seconds. The exposure time will again match the selected shutter speed at
speeds of 60 seconds and slower.
Tip: Auto ISO Sensitivity Control (Mode M)
If auto ISO sensitivity control (0 155) is enabled, ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted for
optimal exposure at the selected shutter speed and aperture.
137 Exposure
Long Time-Exposures (Mode M Only)
The camera offers two options for long time-exposures: “Bulb” and “Time”. Long time-exposures can
be used for pictures of fireworks, night scenery, the stars, or moving lights.
A 35-second exposure shot at a shutter speed of “Bulb” and an aperture of f/25
Shutter speed Description
Bulb The shutter remains open while the shutter-release button is held down.
Time The exposure starts when the shutter-release button is pressed and ends when the
button is pressed a second time.
Keep the camera steady, for example by using a tripod.
Rotate the mode selector to M.
138 Exposure
1
2
Rotate the shutter speed dial to choose a shutter speed of
B (“Bulb”) or T (“Time”).
Bulb Time
If the shutter speed dial is currently set to 1/3STEP, you can instead select a shutter speed of
Bulb or Time using the main command dial.
Note that the exposure indicators are not displayed.
Focus and start the exposure.
“Bulb”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the exposure. Keep the
shutter-release button pressed during the exposure.
Time”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the exposure.
End the exposure.
“Bulb”: Lift your finger from the shutter-release button.
Time”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down a second time.
139 Exposure
3
4
5
DLong Time-Exposures
Note that “noise” (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels or fog) may be present in long
exposures.
Bright spots and fog can be reduced by choosing [ON] for [Long exposure NR] in the photo
shooting menu.
We recommend using one of the following power sources to prevent loss of power during long
exposures:
A fully-charged battery
An optional EH‑7P charging AC adapter
An optional EH-8P AC adapter connected using the supplied UC‑E25 USB cable (featuring Type C
connectors at both ends)
Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur caused by camera shake.
Note that optional ML‑L7 remote controls function in “Time” mode even when “Bulb” is selected.
140 Exposure
-
-
-
Exposure is locked by pressing the A (g) button.
Keeping the A (g) button pressed locks exposure, preventing
it changing in response to changes in composition or subject
brightness.
An AE-L icon will appear in the shooting display.
If autofocus is enabled, press the shutter-release button halfway
to focus before pressing the A (g) button. This locks both
focus and exposure.
Keeping the A (g) button pressed, recompose the photograph
and shoot.
Autoexposure (AE) Lock
Use autoexposure lock to lock exposure, preventing the camera adjusting exposure automatically.
141 Exposure
Tip: Locking Exposure with the Shutter-Release Button
If [On (half press)] is selected for Custom Setting c1 [Shutter-release button AE-L], exposure will lock
while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Tip: Metered Area
With [Spot metering], exposure will be locked at the value metered in a circle centered on the
current focus point.
With [Center-weighted metering], exposure will be locked at a value weighted toward a 12-mm
circle in the center of the display.
Tip: Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
The following settings can be adjusted while the A (g) button is pressed:
Mode Setting
PShutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 132)
SShutter speed
AAperture
The new values can be confirmed in the shooting display and control panel.
142 Exposure
−1EV No exposure compensation +1EV
Rotate the exposure compensation dial to the desired setting.
Monitor
Viewfinder
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera. It can be
used to make pictures brighter or darker.
Choosing a Value Using the Exposure Compensation Dial
Exposure can be adjusted in the range +3 to –3EV in steps of ¹⁄₃EV.
Higher values make the subject brighter, lower values darker.
Normal exposure can be restored by rotating the exposure compensation dial to 0.
A E icon (and, in photo mode, exposure indicators; 0 136) will appear in the shooting display.
The current value for exposure compensation can be viewed in the information display (photo mode
only) and i menu. To view exposure compensation in the i menu, assign [Exposure compensation]
to the i menu using Custom Setting f1 or g1 [Customize i menu] (0 80).
143 Exposure
Other Methods
When the exposure compensation dial is rotated to C, exposure compensation can be adjusted in the
range +5 to –5EV (or in video mode, +3 to –3EV) using:
the command dials (enabled via Custom Setting b2 [Easy exposure compensation]),
the i menu,
touch controls (self-portrait mode only; 0 49), or
custom controls (0 591, 0 626
Tip: Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator; shutter speed, aperture,
and ISO sensitivity do not change. Actual exposure does not change.
When auto ISO sensitivity control (0 155) is in effect, ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted
according to the value selected for exposure compensation, changing overall exposure.
Tip: Using a Flash
When an optional flash is used, exposure compensation affects both flash level and exposure, altering
the brightness of both the main subject and the background; if desired, the effect can be restricted to
the background using Custom Setting e3 [Exposure comp. for flash].
144 Exposure
Use the [Release mode] item in the photo shooting menu to
choose the operation performed when the shutter-release button
is pressed all the way down.
Release Mode
Choosing a Release Mode
Mode Description
U[Single frame]The camera takes one photograph each time the shutter-release
button is pressed.
V[Continuous L]
The camera takes photographs at a selected rate while the shutter-
release button is pressed.
Choose from rates of from [1fps] to [7fps] using Custom Setting
d1 [CL mode shooting speed].
W[Continuous H]The camera takes photographs at up to 10fps while the shutter-
release button is pressed.
X[Continuous H
(extended)]
The camera takes photographs at up to 15fps while the shutter-
release button is pressed.
A[C30]The camera takes photographs at 30fps while the shutter-release
button is pressed (0 149).
E[Self-timer] Take pictures with the self-timer (0 151).
145 Release Mode
DThe Burst Photography Shooting Display
The shooting display shows the view through the lens in real time during burst photography in
continuous low- and high-speed modes.
DFrame Advance Rate
The maximum frame advance rates for [Continuous H] and [Continuous H (extended)] vary with
camera settings.
Release mode Image quality
Shutter type
[Silent mode]:
[ON]
Mechanical
shutter
Electronic front-
curtain shutter
[Continuous H]
NEF (RAW)/NEF
(RAW)+ Approx. 7.0fps Approx. 8.2fps Approx. 6.5fps
JPEG/HEIF Approx. 7.8fps Approx. 9.4fps Approx. 10fps
[Continuous H
(extended)]
NEF (RAW)/NEF
(RAW)+ Approx. 11fps Approx. 8.3fps
JPEG Approx. 14fps Approx. 15fps
146 Release Mode
DCautions: Burst Photography
Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance, the memory card access lamp
may light for anywhere from a few tens of seconds to around a minute. Do not remove the memory
card while the memory card access lamp is lit. Not only could any unrecorded pictures be lost, but
the camera or memory card could be damaged.
If the camera is switched off while the memory card access lamp is lit, it will not power off until all
pictures in the buffer have been recorded.
If the battery is exhausted while pictures remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled
and the pictures transferred to the memory card.
DContinuous H (Extended)
The camera may be unable to maintain consistent exposure across each burst at some settings. For
consistent exposure across all the shots in each burst, use autoexposure lock (0 141).
The frame advance rate for [Continuous H (extended)] drops to that for [Continuous H] when
[HLG] is selected for [Tone mode] in the photo shooting menu.
147 Release Mode
While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the frame-
count display will show the number of pictures that can be
stored in the memory buffer.
When the buffer is full, the display will show r000 and the frame
rate will drop.
The number shown is approximate. The actual number of photos
that can be stored in the memory buffer varies with camera
settings and shooting conditions.
Tip: The Memory Buffer
Tip: Series
Each series of shots taken during burst photography or high-speed frame capture can be treated
as a group. Use [Series playback] in the playback menu to choose how bursts are handled during
playback.
148 Release Mode
For high-speed burst photography at a rate of 30fps, select [C30]
for [Release mode] in the photo shooting menu.
High-Speed Frame Capture (C30)
The maximum length for bursts taken using high-speed frame capture is approximately four
seconds.
The photos recorded may also include the final pictures from frames buffered while the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway (“Pre-Release Capture”); to choose how much of the buffer is
saved, use Custom Setting d3 [Pre-Release Capture options]. You can also limit the length of the
burst recorded after the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down (0 556).
The touch shutter can be used only to take one picture at a time. Use the shutter-release button for
high-speed frame capture.
149 Release Mode
DHigh-Speed Frame Capture: Restrictions
The choice of image areas is restricted to [FX (36×24)] and [DX (24×16)].
Image quality is fixed at [JPEG/HEIF normal] and pictures are recorded in JPEG format.
Image size is fixed at [Large].
Shutter speed is limited to values of from ¹⁄₈₀₀₀ to ¹⁄₆₀s.
Exposure compensation is restricted to values between −3 and +3EV, even when lower or higher
values (−5 to +5EV) are selected with the exposure compensation dial set to C.
The upper limit for ISO sensitivity is ISO 64000, even when higher values (Hi 0.3 through Hi 1.7) are
selected.
The option chosen for [Minimum shutter speed] will not apply if [ON] is selected for [ISO
sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu.
High-speed frame capture cannot be combined with some camera features, including:
flexible program,
HLG tone mode,
photo flicker reduction,
flash photography,
bracketing,
multiple exposures,
HDR overlay,
interval-timer photography,
time-lapse video recording,
focus shift, and
pixel shift.
Tip: High-Speed Frame Capture
Memory cards with a high write speed are recommended (0 852).
150 Release Mode
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Select [Self-timer] for [Release mode] in the photo
shooting menu.
Frame the shot and focus.
The timer will not start if the shutter cannot be released, as
may be the case, for example, if the camera is unable to focus
when AF‑S is selected for focus mode.
Start the timer.
Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the
timer; the self-timer lamp will begin to flash. The lamp stops
flashing two seconds before the timer expires.
Using the Self-Timer (E)
In self-timer mode, pressing the shutter-release button all the way down starts a timer, and a photo is
taken when the timer expires.
Adjust self-timer settings using Custom Setting c2 [Self-timer].
[Self-timer delay]: Choose the length of the self-timer shutter-release delay.
[Number of shots]: Choose the number of shots taken when the timer expires.
[Interval between shots]: Choose the interval between shots when the number of shots is
more than one.
151 Release Mode
1
2
3
4
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by rotating the ISO sensitivity dial.
Your selection is shown in the shooting display.
Choose from settings of from ISO 100 to 64000.
Manual ISO sensitivity selection is available in video mode only
when [OFF] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto
ISO control (mode M)] in mode M. Otherwise ISO sensitivity
for video recording will be set automatically by the camera. ISO
sensitivity for video recording can be set to values of from ISO
100 to 51200 or Hi 0.3 (ISO 64000 equivalent).
ISO Sensitivity
The camera’s sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) can be adjusted according to the amount of light
available. In general, choosing higher values allows faster shutter speeds at the same aperture.
Adjusting ISO Sensitivity
The ISO Sensitivity Dial
152 ISO Sensitivity
To choose another setting after rotating the ISO sensitivity dial
to C, rotate the dial while holding the ISO sensitivity dial lock
release.
Other Methods
When the ISO sensitivity dial is rotated to C, ISO sensitivity can be adjusted using:
[ISO sensitivity settings]> [ISO sensitivity] in the photo shooting menu,
[ISO sensitivity settings]> [ISO sensitivity (mode M)] in the video recording menu,
touch controls,
the i menu, and
custom controls (0 591, 0 626
The values that can be selected using these methods are listed below.
Still photography: ISO100 to 64000; the camera also supports settings below ISO100 by about
0.3, 0.7, and 1EV (ISO50 equivalent) and above ISO 64000 by about 0.3, 0.7, 1.0, and 1.7EV (ISO
204800 equivalent). An additional setting of [Auto] is available in mode b.
Video recording: ISO100 to 51200; the camera also supports settings above ISO 51200 by 0.3,
0.7, 1, and 2EV (ISO204800 equivalent).
153 ISO Sensitivity
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DHigh ISO Sensitivities
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing pictures to be
taken when lighting is poor and helping prevent blur when the subject is in motion. Note, however,
that the higher the sensitivity, the more likely the picture is to be affected by “noise” in the form of
randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
“Noise” can be reduced by enabling high ISO noise reduction. High ISO noise reduction can be
enabled using the [High ISO NR] items in the photo shooting and video recording menus.
DHi 0.3–Hi 1.7
A setting of [Hi 0.3] corresponds to an ISO sensitivity approximately 0.3EV higher than ISO64000
(ISO80000 equivalent) and [Hi 1.7] to an ISO sensitivity approximately 1.7EV higher (ISO204800
equivalent). Note that pictures taken at these settings are particularly prone to “noise” in the form of
randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
DLo 0.3–Lo 1.0
[Lo 0.3] corresponds to an ISO sensitivity about 0.3EV below ISO100 (ISO80 equivalent). [Lo 1.0]
is roughly 1EV below ISO100 (ISO50 equivalent). Use for larger apertures or slower shutter speeds
when lighting is bright. Highlights may be overexposed. In most cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO [100] or
above are recommended.
154 ISO Sensitivity
Auto ISO sensitivity control can be enabled in modes P, S, A, and
M by selecting [ON] for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO
sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu.
In mode b, auto ISO sensitivity control can be enabled by
selecting [Auto] for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [ISO sensitivity]
in the photo shooting menu.
When auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the shooting display
will show ISO AUTO. When sensitivity is altered from the value
selected by the user, the adjusted value will be shown in the
display.
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Auto ISO sensitivity control automatically adjusts ISO sensitivity if optimal exposure cannot be
achieved at the value selected by the user. You can select an upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control
(200–Hi 1.7) to prevent ISO sensitivity being raised too high.
Enabling Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Maximum sensitivity can be adjusted using the [ISO sensitivity settings] item in the photo
shooting menu.
155 ISO Sensitivity
DCautions: Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
If the value currently selected using the ISO sensitivity dial or [ISO sensitivity] is higher than that
chosen for [Maximum sensitivity], the highest value will serve as the upper limit for auto ISO
sensitivity control.
During flash photography, shutter speed is limited to the range defined by the values selected for
Custom Settings e1 [Flash sync speed] and e2 [Flash shutter speed]. If the value selected for
[Minimum shutter speed] is not in this range, the value selected for Custom Setting e2 [Flash
shutter speed] becomes the effective minimum shutter speed.
Except in mode M, videos are recorded using auto ISO sensitivity control. Auto ISO sensitivity
control can be enabled for video recording in mode M by selecting [ON] for [ISO sensitivity
settings]> [Auto ISO control (mode M)] in the video recording menu.
156 ISO Sensitivity
White balance can be adjusted using the [White balance] item
in the i menu, photo shooting menu, or video recording menu
(0 75, 0 391, 0 494).
White Balance
About White Balance
White balance ensures that colors appear natural regardless of the color of the light source. The
default setting (4) is suitable for use with most light sources, but if it fails to produce the desired
results, other settings can be selected according to the weather or light source.
Adjusting White Balance
At default settings, white balance can also be selected by holding the Fn button and rotating the
main command dial. The selected option is shown by an icon in the shooting display.
157 White Balance
Options for the selected setting, if any, can be chosen by holding the Fn button and rotating the
sub-command dial.
Option Color
temperature* Description
4 [Auto]
The camera adjusts white balance for
optimal results with most light sources.
If an optional flash unit is used, white
balance will be adjusted in accord with the
conditions in effect when the flash fires.
i [Keep white
(reduce warm
colors)]
Approx. 3500–
8000K
Eliminate the warm color cast produced by
incandescent lighting.
j [Keep overall
atmosphere]
Approx. 3500–
8000K
Partially preserve the warm color cast
produced by incandescent lighting.
k [Keep warm
lighting colors]
Approx. 3500–
8000K
Preserve the warm color cast produced by
incandescent lighting.
D [Natural light auto]Approx. 4500–
8000K
White balance is adjusted for non-artificial
light sources, producing more life-like
colors than does [Auto] when used under
natural light.
H [Direct sunlight]Approx. 5200K Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
G [Cloudy]Approx. 6000K Use in daylight under overcast skies.
M [Shade]Approx. 8000K Use in daylight with subjects in shade.
J [Incandescent]Approx. 3000K Use under incandescent lighting.
158 White Balance
Option Color
temperature* Description
I [Fluorescent]
Use under fluorescent lighting; choose a
bulb type according to the light source.
m [Cool-white
fluorescent]Approx. 4200K
n [Day white
fluorescent]Approx. 5000K
o [Daylight
fluorescent]Approx. 6500K
5 [Flash]Approx. 5400K Use for flash photography.
K [Choose color
temperature]
Approx. 2500–
10000K
Direct color-temperature selection.
To choose a color temperature, hold the
Fn button and rotate the sub-command
dial.
L [Preset manual]
Measure white balance directly from a
subject or light source or copy white
balance from an existing photograph.
To choose a white balance preset,
hold the Fn button and rotate the sub-
command dial.
To enter direct measurement mode,
press and hold the Fn button (0 170).
Values when fine-tuning is set to 0.
159 White Balance
-
-
-
*
The photo info [Basic shooting data] page for pictures shot with
4[Auto], D[Natural light auto], or L[Preset manual]
selected for white balance lists the color temperature in effect
at the time the picture was taken (0 207). You can use
this as reference when choosing a value for K[Choose color
temperature].
To view the [Basic shooting data] page during playback, go
to [Playback display options] in the playback menu and place
checks (M) next to [Shooting data] and [Basic shooting data].
Color temperature is not shown for pictures taken using high-
speed frame capture.
White balance can also be adjusted from the photo shooting and
video recording menus.
DD“Natural Light Auto
D[Natural light auto] may not produce the desired results under artificial light. Choose 4[Auto]
or an option that matches the light source.
DStudio Flash Lighting
4[Auto] may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units. Use preset manual white
balance or set white balance to 5[Flash] and use fine-tuning to adjust white balance.
Tip: Auto
Tip: The “White Balance” Options
160 White Balance
Tip: Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer; some may have a red cast while others
appear blue. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, expressed in
Kelvins (K). The lower the color temperature, the redder the cast (q); the higher the temperature, the
bluer the cast (w).
3000 4000 5000 6000 8000 10000
[ K ]
Tip: Choosing a Color Temperature
In general, choose lower values if your pictures have a red cast or to intentionally make pictures bluer,
higher values if your pictures are tinged blue or to intentionally make pictures redder.
161 White Balance
Use the multi selector to position the cursor on the grid. The
selected value is displayed to the right of the grid.
The A (amber)–B (blue) axis corresponds to color
temperature and is ruled in increments of 0.5. A change of 1
is equivalent to approximately 5 mired.
The G (green)–M (magenta) axis has effects similar to color
compensation filters and is ruled in increments of 0.25.
A change of 1 is equivalent to approximately 0.05 diffuse
density units.
If white balance has been fine-tuned, an asterisk (“U”) will
appear in the white balance icon.
Fine-Tuning White Balance
Each white balance option can be fine-tuned by up to six steps in either direction from the center
along both the A (amber)–B (blue) and G (green)–M (magenta) axes.
Using Buttons
Choose a white balance option by holding the Fn button and rotating a command dial.
Keeping the Fn button pressed, fine-tune white balance using the multi selector.
Save changes.
The selected setting takes effect when the Fn button is released.
162 White Balance
1
2
3
Select [White balance] in the photo shooting or video
recording menu, highlight the desired option, and press 2
as often as necessary to display fine-tuning options.
For information on fine-tuning [Preset manual] white balance,
see “Fine-Tuning Preset Manual White Balance” (0 175).
Use the multi selector to position the cursor on the grid. The
selected value is displayed to the right of the grid.
The A (amber)–B (blue) axis corresponds to color
temperature and is ruled in increments of 0.5. A change of 1
is equivalent to approximately 5 mired.
The G (green)–M (magenta) axis has effects similar to color
compensation filters and is ruled in increments of 0.25.
A change of 1 is equivalent to approximately 0.05 diffuse
density units.
If white balance has been fine-tuned, an asterisk (“U”) will
appear in the white balance icon.
Using the Menus
Fine-tune white balance.
Save changes.
Press J to save changes and exit to the menus.
163 White Balance
1
2
3
Pressing J when [White balance] is highlighted in the i menu
displays a list of white balance options. If an option other than
K[Choose color temperature] is highlighted, fine-tuning options
can be displayed by pressing 3. Any changes to fine-tuning
options can be previewed in the display.
G: Increase green
B: Increase blue
A: Increase amber
M: Increase magenta
If white balance has been fine-tuned, an asterisk (“U”) will appear
in the white balance icon.
Tip: The i Menu
Tap the arrows in the display or use the multi selector to fine-tune white balance.
Press J to save changes and return to the i menu.
164 White Balance
To choose a white balance setting using the command dials, press
the Fn button while shooting information is displayed. The selected
setting can be fine-tuned using the multi selector while the Fn
button is pressed.
Tip: The Information Display
Tip: White Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. Selecting more of a color on a given axis
does not necessarily result in that color appearing in pictures. For example, moving the cursor to “B”
(blue) when a “warm” setting such as J[Incandescent] is selected will make pictures slightly “colder
but will not actually make them blue.
Tip: “Mired”
Values in mired are calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106. Any given
change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it
would at higher color temperatures. For example, a change of 1000K produces a much greater change
in color at 3000K than at 6000K. Mired is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation
into account, and as such is the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters.
E.g.: Change in color temperature (in Kelvin): Value in mired
4000K – 3000K = 1000K: 83 mired
7000K – 6000K = 1000K: 24 mired
165 White Balance
Choosing a Color Temperature
Choose a color temperature by entering values for the A (amber)–B (blue) and G (green)–M (magenta)
axes.
Using Buttons
Hold the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to select K[Choose color
temperature].
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the sub-command dial to choose a color
temperature.
Color temperature will change in increments of 1 mired.
166 White Balance
1
2
Use the multi selector to position the cursor on the grid. The
selected value is displayed to the right of the grid.
The A (amber)–B (blue) axis corresponds to color
temperature and is ruled in increments of 0.5. A change of 1
is equivalent to approximately 5 mired.
The G (green)–M (magenta) axis has effects similar to color
compensation filters and is ruled in increments of 0.25.
A change of 1 is equivalent to approximately 0.05 diffuse
density units.
If color temperature has been fine-tuned, an asterisk (“U”) will
appear in the white balance icon.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits and press 1 or 3 to change.
Keeping the Fn button pressed, fine-tune white balance using the multi selector.
Save changes.
The selected setting takes effect when the Fn button is released.
Using the Menus
Select [White balance] in the photo shooting or video recording menu, then highlight
K[Choose color temperature] and press 2.
Choose a color temperature.
167 White Balance
3
4
1
2
After choosing a color temperature, press the W (Q) button to
display fine-tuning options. Use the multi selector to position
the cursor on the grid.
The cursor can be moved up to six steps from the center
along either axis. The selected value is displayed to the right
of the grid.
The A (amber)–B (blue) axis corresponds to color
temperature and is ruled in increments of 0.5. A change of 1
is equivalent to approximately 5 mired.
The G (green)–M (magenta) axis has effects similar to color
compensation filters and is ruled in increments of 0.25.
A change of 1 is equivalent to approximately 0.05 diffuse
density units.
If color temperature has been fine-tuned, an asterisk (“U”) will
appear in the white balance icon.
Fine-tune white balance.
Save changes.
Press J to save changes and exit to the menus.
168 White Balance
3
4
Pressing J when [White balance] is highlighted in the i menu
displays a list of white balance options. When K[Choose color
temperature] is highlighted, color temperature options can be
viewed by pressing 3.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits and press 1 or 3 to change.
To fine-tune the currently-selected value, press the W (Q)
button.
Press J to save changes and return to the i menu.
If color temperature has been fine-tuned, an asterisk (“U”) will
appear in the white balance icon.
DCautions: Color-Temperature Selection
Do not use color-temperature selection with fluorescent light sources; instead, use the
I[Fluorescent] option.
When using color-temperature selection with other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the
selected value is appropriate.
Tip: The i Menu
169 White Balance
Preset Manual
White balance settings such as 4[Auto], J[Incandescent], and K[Choose color temperature]
may fail to produce the desired results under mixed lighting or lighting with a strong color cast. Should
this occur, white balance can be set to a value measured under the light source used in the final
photograph. Two methods are available for setting preset white balance:
Method Description
Direct measurement Measure white balance in a selected area of the frame
(0 170).
Copying a value from existing
photograph Copy white balance from a photo on a memory card (0 174).
Direct Measurement
The camera can store up to six values for preset manual white balance.
Hold the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to select L.
170 White Balance
1
Select direct measurement mode.
Release the Fn button briefly and then press it again
to enter direct measurement mode. L will flash in the
shooting display.
A white balance target (r) will appear in the center of the
frame.
Select a preset.
Hold the Fn button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired white balance preset
(d-1 to d-6) is displayed.
171 White Balance
2
3
Position the white balance target (r) over a white or
gray object and measure a value for preset manual white
balance.
Position the target (r) using the multi selector.
To measure white balance, press the shutter-release button
all the way down or press J. White balance can be
measured multiple times while direct measurement mode
is in effect.
You can also position the target (r) and measure white
balance by tapping the display.
Target selection will not be available if an optional flash
unit is attached. Frame the shot so that the white or gray
reference object is in the center of the display.
If the camera is unable to measure white balance, a message
will be displayed and the camera will return to direct
measurement mode. Try measuring white balance again, for
example with the target (r) positioned over a different area
of the subject.
Press the i button to exit direct measurement mode.
172 White Balance
4
5
White balance presets can be viewed by selecting [White
balance]> L[Preset manual] in the photo shooting menu. To
recall a stored value, highlight a preset using the multi selector and
press J.
DThe Preset Manual White Balance Menu
The preset manual white balance menu can be accessed by selecting [White balance]> L[Preset
manual] in the photo shooting menu. The preset manual white balance menu offers options for
copying values for preset manual white balance from an existing photograph or adding comments to
or protecting white balance presets.
DProtected Presets
White balance presets indicated by g icons are protected and cannot be changed.
DPreset Manual: Selecting a Preset
DDirect Measurement Mode
Direct measurement mode will end if no operations are performed in the time selected for Custom
Setting c3 [Power off delay]> [Standby timer].
DMeasuring White Balance
Preset manual white balance cannot be measured during high-speed frame capture or multiple
exposures.
173 White Balance
Select [White balance] in the photo shooting or video
recording menu, then highlight [Preset manual] and press
2.
Select a destination.
Using the multi selector, highlight the destination preset
(d-1 to d-6).
Press X to view the preset manual white balance menu.
Choose [Select picture].
Highlight [Select picture] and press 2 to view the pictures on
the current memory card.
Highlight the source picture.
Highlight the desired picture using the multi selector.
To view the highlighted picture full frame, press and hold
the X button.
Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an existing photograph to a selected
preset.
174 White Balance
1
2
3
4
The selected preset can be fine-tuned by selecting [Fine-tune] in
the preset manual white balance menu.
To enter a descriptive comment of up to 36 characters for the
current white balance preset, select [Edit comment] in the preset
manual white balance menu. Enter a comment as described in “Text
Entry” (0 74).
To protect the current white balance preset, select [ON] for
[Protect] in the preset manual white balance menu. The preset
cannot be modified as long as [ON] is selected for [Protect].
Copy white balance.
Press J to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected
preset.
If the highlighted photograph has a comment, the comment will be copied to the comment
for the selected preset.
Tip: Fine-Tuning Preset Manual White Balance
Tip: “Edit Comment”
Tip: “Protect”
175 White Balance
5
Picture Controls
About Picture Controls
Choose image processing (“Picture Control”) options for new photos according to the scene or your
creative intent.
Choosing a Picture Control
Picture Controls can be selected using the [Set Picture Control] items in the i menu, photo shooting
menu, and video recording menu. The selected option is shown by an icon in the shooting display.
The only options available when the photo/video selector is rotated to B&Ware [Monochrome],
[Flat Monochrome], and [Deep Tone Monochrome].
Option Description
n[Auto]
The camera automatically adjusts hues and tones based on the
[Standard] (photo mode) or [Neutral] (video mode) Picture
Control.
Q[Standard]Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended for
most situations.
R[Neutral]Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for pictures that
will later be processed or retouched.
S[Vivid]Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for
pictures that emphasize primary colors.
T[Monochrome] Take monochrome pictures.
176 Picture Controls
Option Description
2[Flat Monochrome]Features gentle gradations from highlights to shadows,
producing soft monochrome pictures.
3[Deep Tone
Monochrome]
Choose for slightly darker tones in the range from shadows to
mid-tones, with brightness rapidly increasing as tones progress
from mid-tones to highlights.
o[Portrait] Smooth complexions for natural-looking portraits.
4[Rich Tone Portrait]
Produces more vivid results than [Portrait] while capturing
details of the subject’s complexion and avoiding loss of detail
in highlights. Choose for pictures that will later be processed or
retouched.
p[Landscape]Shoot vibrant landscapes and cityscapes. Choose for pictures
that emphasize blues and greens.
q[Flat]
Details are preserved over a wide tone range, from highlights
to shadows. Choose for pictures that will later be extensively
processed or retouched.
k01
k20
Creative Picture
Controls
Creative Picture Controls offer unique combinations of hue,
tone, saturation, and other settings tuned for particular effects.
Choose from a total of 20 options, including [Dream] and
[Morning].
D“Set Picture Control”
The [Set Picture Control] item in the video recording menu also offers a [Same as photo settings]
option that sets the Picture Control for videos to the same as that used for photographs.
The option selected for [Set Picture Control] takes effect when [SDR] is chosen for [Tone mode] in
the photo shooting menu. To choose a Picture Control when [HLG] is selected for [Tone mode], use
the [Set Picture Control (HLG)] item in the photo shooting menu.
177 Picture Controls
Select a Picture Control.
Select [Set Picture Control] in the photo shooting or video
recording menu and then highlight the desired Picture Control
and press 2.
Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight settings and 4 or 2 to choose a
value. Each press increments the highlighted value by 1.
The options available vary with the Picture Control selected.
To quickly adjust levels for balanced [Sharpening], [Mid-
range sharpening], and [Clarity], highlight [Quick sharp]
and press 4 or 2.
To abandon any changes and start over from default
settings, press the O button.
Save changes and exit.
Press J to save changes. Picture Controls that have been
modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk
(“U”).
Modifying Picture Controls
Picture Controls can be adapted to suit the scene or the photographers creative intent.
Tip: The Sub-command Dial
To adjust the highlighted value in increments of 0.25, rotate the sub-command dial.
178 Picture Controls
1
2
3
Picture Control Settings
Option Description
[Effect level]Displayed only when a Creative Picture Control is selected. Mute or heighten
the effect of the selected Picture Control.
[Quick sharp]
Apply sharpening to areas of contrast within the picture.
Adjusting [Quick sharp] simultaneously adjusts [Sharpening], [Mid-
range sharpening], and [Clarity] for well-balanced results. Choose
higher values for heightened sharpness. Choose lower values for greater
softness.
[Sharpening], [Mid-range sharpening], and [Clarity] each apply to
different areas within the picture. Each can be adjusted individually.
[Sharpening] Apply sharpening to small areas of contrast.
[Mid-range
sharpening]
Apply sharpening to areas of contrast larger than those affected by
[Sharpening] and smaller those affected by [Clarity].
[Clarity]
Apply sharpening to large areas of contrast.
Fine outlines and the brightness and contrast of the picture as a whole
are unaffected.
[Contrast] Adjust overall contrast.
[Brightness]
Brighten or darken mid-tones (tones that fall in the range between
highlights and shadows). The effect does not extend to highlights and
shadows, ensuring that details in these areas of the image are preserved.
Not available with the [Auto] Picture Control or Creative Picture Controls.
[Saturation]
Control the vividness of colors.
Not available with [Monochrome], [Flat Monochrome], [Deep Tone
Monochrome], or certain Creative Picture Controls.
[Hue]
Adjust hue.
Not available with [Auto], [Monochrome], [Flat Monochrome], [Deep
Tone Monochrome], or certain Creative Picture Controls.
[Filter effects]
Displayed only with [Monochrome], [Flat Monochrome], [Deep Tone
Monochrome], and certain Creative Picture Controls. Simulate the effect
of color filters on monochrome pictures.
179 Picture Controls
Option Description
[Toning]
Displayed only with [Monochrome], [Flat Monochrome], [Deep Tone
Monochrome], and certain Creative Picture Controls. Choose a tint for
monochrome pictures. Choose from 9 different tints, including cyanotype
and old-fashioned sepia.
Pressing 3 when an option other than [B&W] (black-and-white) is
selected displays saturation options.
[Toning]
(Creative Picture
Controls)
Displayed only with certain Creative Picture Controls. Choose the shade of
color used.
180 Picture Controls
The j indicator under the value display in the Picture Control
setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting.
Settings can be adjusted in the range [A−2] to [A+2].
DThe j Indicator
D“A” (Auto)
Selecting the [A] (auto) option available for some settings lets the camera adjust the setting
automatically.
Results vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame.
D“Filter Effects”
Choose from the following [Filter effects]:
Option Description
[Y] (yellow)*
These options enhance contrast and can be used to tone down the brightness of
the sky in landscape photographs. Orange [O] produces more contrast than yellow
[Y], red [R] more contrast than orange.
[O] (orange)*
[R] (red)*
[G] (green)* Green softens skin tones. Use for portraits and the like.
The term in parentheses is the name of the corresponding third-party color filter for black-and-
white photography.
DUsing “Filter Effects” with “Deep Tone Monochrome”
[Deep Tone Monochrome] features a strong built-in red filter effect that applies even when [OFF] is
selected for [Filter effects]. Because [Filter effects] cannot be applied more than once, selecting an
option other than [OFF] will disable the built-in red filter effect. Contrast can be reduced by enabling
[Y], [O], and [R].
DThe “Auto” Picture Control
181 Picture Controls
*
Highlighting [Set Picture Control] in the imenu and pressing J
displays a Picture Control list. Highlight a Picture Control, press
3 to display options, and then edit settings while previewing the
effect in the display.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight settings. Press 4 or 2 to choose
a value in increments of 1, or rotate the sub-command dial to
choose a value in increments of 0.25.
The options available vary with the Picture Control selected.
To abandon any changes and start over from default settings,
press the O button.
Press J to save changes.
Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings
are indicated by an asterisk (“U”).
Tip: The i Menu
182 Picture Controls
Highlight [Manage Picture Control] in the photo shooting
or video recording menu and press 2.
Select [Save/edit].
Highlight [Save/edit] and press 2 to view [Choose Picture
Control] options.
Custom Picture Controls
Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls.
Option Description
[Save/edit]Create a new custom Picture Control based on an existing preset or custom Picture
Control, or edit existing custom Picture Controls.
[Rename] Rename custom Picture Controls.
[Delete] Delete custom Picture Controls.
[Load/save] Copy custom Picture Controls to and from a memory card.
Creating Custom Picture Controls
183 Picture Controls
1
2
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture Control and press 2 to display
edit options.
Note that the only Picture Controls available in black-and-
white photo mode are [Monochrome], [Flat Monochrome],
and [Deep Tone Monochrome].
To save a copy of the highlighted Picture Control without
further modification, press J. [Save as] options will be
displayed; proceed to Step5.
The options and procedure are the same as for [Set Picture
Control].
Press J to display [Save as] options when settings are
complete.
To abandon any changes and start over from default
settings, press the O button.
Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control (C-1
through C-9).
Pressing 2 when a destination is highlighted in the previous
step displays the [Rename] text-entry dialog.
The default name, created by adding a two-digit number
to the name of the existing Picture Control, appears in
the text display area. The two-digit number is generated
automatically by the camera.
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen
characters long.
For information on text entry, see “Text Entry” (0 74).
Adjust settings.
Name the Picture Control.
184 Picture Controls
3
4
5
6
Press the X button.
Text entry will end.
The new Picture Control will be added to the Picture Control
list.
185 Picture Controls
7
The original preset Picture Control on which the custom Picture
Control is based is indicated by an icon in the edit display.
The [Load/save] item in the [Manage Picture Control] menu can
be used to copy custom Picture Controls from the camera to a
memory card. You can also delete custom Picture Controls or copy
them from a memory card to the camera (the memory card must
be inserted in the primary slot, as memory cards inserted in the slot
designated as the secondary slot via [Primary slot selection] in the
photo shooting menu will not be detected).
[Copy to camera]: Copy (import) custom Picture Controls from
the memory card to the camera. The Picture Controls are copied
to custom Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera and
can be named as desired.
[Delete from card]: Delete selected custom Picture Controls
from the memory card.
[Copy to card]: Copy (export) a custom Picture Control from the
camera to a memory card. Highlight a destination (1 through
99) for the selected Picture Control and press J to export it to
a “CUSTOMPC” sub-folder, which will automatically be created
under the “NIKON” folder on the memory card.
DThe Original Picture Control Icon
DCustom Picture Control Options
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture
Control was based.
DSharing Custom Picture Controls
Exported Picture Controls can be copied to another memory card using a computer. When copying
Picture Controls to a memory card for import to the camera, be sure to save them to the card’s root
(top) directory or to the “CUSTOMPC” folder under the“NIKON” folder.
186 Picture Controls
Video Recording
Video File Types
Use [Video file type] in the video recording menu to choose the video file type.
You have a choice of MOV and MP4 formats.
Option Description YCbCr
[H.265 10-bit (MOV)]
This option assumes the footage will later undergo editing using
a professional high-performance computer system of the type
typically employed for editing video.
You have a choice of three tone modes: [SDR], [HLG], and
[N-Log].
Footage is recorded using long GOP inter-frame compression.
Audio is recorded in Linear PCM format.
4 : 2 : 0
[H.265 8-bit (MOV)]
This format offers superior compression.
Footage is recorded using long GOP inter-frame compression.
Audio is recorded in Linear PCM format.
[H.264 8-bit (MP4)]
A widely-supported file type.
Footage is recorded using long GOP inter-frame compression.
Audio is recorded in AAC format.
187 Video File Types
Tone Mode
To choose the tone mode, highlight [H.265 10-bit (MOV)] and press 2.
Videos shot using [H.265 8-bit (MOV)] and [H.264 8-bit (MP4)] use [SDR]; tone-mode selection is
not available.
Option Description
[SDR] This mode supports a normal range of brightnesses (dynamic range).
[HLG]This mode supports HDR (high dynamic range; 0 195). It has a wider dynamic range
than SDR.
[N-Log]
This mode uses Nikon’s unique log curve. Choose for pictures with a wide dynamic
range. 3D LUTs for use with N-Log curves can be applied post-production for pictures
that display beautifully on monitors that support Rec. 709 (0 197).
188 Video File Types
Video Frame Size and Rate Options
Video frame size (in pixels) and frame rate can be selected using [Frame size/frame rate] in the video
recording menu. The options available for frame size vary with the settings chosen for [Video file
type] in the video recording menu.
Option1
Video file type
H.265 10-bit/8-bit H.264 8-bit
[3840×2160; 60p]2 4
[3840×2160; 50p]2 4
[3840×2160; 30p]2 4
[3840×2160; 25p]2 4
[3840×2160; 24p]2 4
[1920×1080; 120p]3 4
[1920×1080; 100p]3 4
[1920×1080; 60p]4 4
[1920×1080; 50p]4 4
[1920×1080; 30p]4 4
[1920×1080; 25p]4 4
[1920×1080; 24p]4 4
The frame rates for 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are respectively 119.88 fps, 100 fps,
59.94 fps, 50 fps, 29.97 fps, 25 fps, and 23.976 fps.
Videos are recorded in 4K UHD.
[Electronic VR] in the video recording menu is fixed at [OFF].
189 Video Frame Size and Rate Options
1
2
3
Bit Rate
The bit rate varies with the video file type.
Option
Video file type
H.265 10-bit H.265 8-bit H.264 8-bit
[3840×2160; 60p]
Approx. 340Mbps Approx. 300Mbps
[3840×2160; 50p]
[3840×2160; 30p]
Approx. 190Mbps Approx. 150Mbps
[3840×2160; 25p]
[3840×2160; 24p]
[1920×1080; 120p]
[1920×1080; 100p]
[1920×1080; 60p]
Approx. 100Mbps Approx. 80Mbps Approx. 50Mbps
[1920×1080; 50p]
[1920×1080; 30p]
Approx. 50Mbps Approx. 40Mbps Approx. 30Mbps[1920×1080; 25p]
[1920×1080; 24p]
190 Video Frame Size and Rate Options
Video Recording: Shooting Mode
The exposure settings that can be adjusted during filming vary with the shooting mode:
Mode Aperture Shutter speed ISO sensitivity1
AUTO (b)
P (programmed auto) 2
S (shutter-priority auto) 43 2
A (aperture-priority auto) 4 2
M (manual) 443 44
The maximum ISO sensitivity for videos recorded with [ON] selected for [Electronic VR] in the
video recording menu is ISO 51200.
The upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the [ISO sensitivity settings]>
[Maximum sensitivity] item in the video recording menu.
Shutter speed can be set to values between ¹⁄₂₅s and ¹⁄₈₀₀₀s. The slowest available shutter speed
varies with the frame rate.
If [ON] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO control (mode M)] in the video
recording menu, the upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using [Maximum sensitivity].
191 Video Recording: Shooting Mode
1
2
3
4
The option currently selected is shown by an icon in the display.
If [ON] is chosen for [Image area]> [DX crop alert] in the video
recording menu, an image-area icon will flash in the shooting
display when the DX crop is selected.
Video Image Area Options
The image area for videos can be selected using [Image area]> [Choose image area] in the video
recording menu. The crop used for filming video varies with the option selected. Regardless of the
option selected, the aspect ratio is 16 : 9.
Select [FX] to shoot videos in what is referred to as “FX-based video format”, [DX] to shoot in
“DX-based video format”.
When [1920× 1080; 120p] or [1920× 1080; 100p] is selected for [Frame size/frame rate], image
area is fixed at [FX]. The frame rate changes to 60p or 50p when a DX lens is attached.
Selecting [3840× 2160; 60p] or [3840× 2160; 50p] for [Frame size/frame rate] fixes image area
at [DX].
192 Video Image Area Options
The sizes of the different crops are shown below.
Format Size
FX-based video format Approx. 35.9× 20.2mm
DX-based video format Approx. 23.7× 13.3mm
DX-based video format is selected automatically when a DX lens is attached.
Selecting [ON] for [Electronic VR] in the video recording menu reduces the size of the crop.
193 Video Image Area Options
Points to Note When Filming Videos
Note the following points when recording videos:
Each video can be up to 125 minutes in length.
Each video recorded to a card with a capacity of 32GB or less may be saved across a maximum of
8 files. Each of these files will be a maximum of 4GB in size. The number of files and the length of
each file vary with the options selected for [Frame size/frame rate].
Depending on memory card write speed, shooting may end before the maximum length is reached.
A 0 icon (0 102) indicates that videos cannot be recorded.
[Spot metering] is not available during video recording.
Flash lighting (0 355) cannot be used.
Tip: Adjusting White Balance During Video Recording
White balance can be adjusted during video recording by holding the Fn button and rotating a
command dial.
Tip: Using an External Microphone
Third-party microphones with 3.5mm mini-jack plugs can be used to record audio for videos.
Use [Mic jack plug-in power] in the video recording menu to choose whether the power for the
external microphone is supplied by the camera (0 517).
194 Points to Note When Filming Videos
Recording HLG Video
Video recorded in Hybrid Log Gamma (HLG) format can be used for HDR broadcasting and the like. To
record HLG video, select [H.265 10-bit (MOV)] for [Video file type] in the video recording menu and
choose the [HLG] tone mode.
o will appear in the shooting display.
For optimal color reproduction when viewing HLG footage, use monitors, computers, operating
systems, applications, and other equipment compatible with HLG.
DCautions: HLG Video
Pictures taken with [HLG] selected for tone mode may exhibit more “noise” in the form of
randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines than pictures taken using [SDR] or [N-log].
The lowest value available for the [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Maximum sensitivity] item in the
video recording menu is ISO 800.
The lowest value available for the [ISO sensitivity settings]> [ISO sensitivity (mode M)] item in
the video recording menu is ISO 400.
ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 through Hi 2.0 are not available.
Picture Control settings cannot be adjusted using the [Set Picture Control] item in the video
recording menu. You can control the appearance of HLG videos using [HLG quality] in the video
recording menu.
The [Active D-Lighting] item in the video recording menu is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
The display in the monitor may flicker or appear grainy.
The camera may have trouble focusing using autofocus but this does not indicate a malfunction.
DHDR (HLG) Output
Optimal color reproduction in HDR (HLG) footage output via HDMI can only be achieved if your
storage device, monitor, and other equipment support HDR (HLG). If a signal is received from the
connected device indicating that it supports HDR (HLG), the camera will respond with a “gamma: HLG”
identifier.
195 Recording HLG Video
DCamera Shooting and Playback Displays
When [HLG] is selected for tone mode, the shooting and playback displays in the camera monitor and
viewfinder may include “noise” in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines or may fail
to accurately reproduce highlights and highly-saturated colors. For accurate tone reproduction, use
monitors, computers, operating systems, applications, and other equipment compatible with HLG.
DViewing and Editing HLG Videos
HLG videos can only be viewed and edited using computer software that supports the HLG video
format. Nikon’s NX Studio software shows HLG videos in the thumbnail list but cannot be used to view
or edit them.
196 Recording HLG Video
Recording N-Log Video
Log recording uses light levels digitized via a log function. To enable log recording using Nikon’s
unique “N-Log” log function, select [H.265 10-bit (MOV)] for [Video file type] in the video recording
menu and choose [N-Log] as the tone mode. Choose N‑Log to preserve details in highlights and
shadows and avoid over-saturated colors when recording videos.
n will appear in the shooting display.
The dynamic range for videos shot with ISO sensitivity set as low as possible (ISO 800) is 12 stops
(1300%).
N-Log recording is intended for footage that will be processed using color grading post-production.
Color grading can be used to achieve multiple effects from a single sequence by processing it in
different ways.
Compatible third-party software is required for color grading.
Applying N-Log 3D LUTs during color grading produces video that displays beautifully on monitors
compatible with Rec. 709.
N-Log 3D LUTs are available from the Nikon Download Center.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
DCautions: N-Log Video
The lowest value available for the [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Maximum sensitivity] item in the
video recording menu is ISO 1600.
The lowest value available for the [ISO sensitivity settings]> [ISO sensitivity (mode M)] item in
the video recording menu is ISO 800.
ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 through Hi 2.0 are not available.
[Set Picture Control], [Active D-Lighting], [High ISO NR], [Skin softening], and [Portrait
impression balance] are not available in the video recording menu.
The display in the monitor may flicker or appear grainy.
The camera may have trouble focusing using autofocus but this does not indicate a malfunction.
197 Recording N-Log Video
-
View Assist
You may find that the preview in the shooting display during N-Log recording lacks contrast. Selecting
[ON] for Custom Setting g10 [View assist] simplifies colors for enhanced contrast.
p will appear in the shooting display.
Colors in the actual recorded footage are unaffected.
Contrast is also enhanced when N‑Log footage is viewed on the camera.
198 Recording N-Log Video
Viewing Pictures
Viewing Pictures
Full-Frame Playback
Press the K button to view the most recent picture full frame in the display.
Press 4 to return to the previous frame, 2 to skip to the next frame.
Press 1, 3, or the DISP button to view more information on the current picture (0 202).
199 Viewing Pictures
To view multiple pictures, press the W (Q) button when a picture is
displayed full frame.
Thumbnail Playback
The number of pictures displayed increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each time the W (Q) button is
pressed, and decreases with each press of the X button.
Highlight pictures using 1, 3, 4, or 2.
200 Viewing Pictures
Select [ON] for [Auto-rotate pictures] in the playback menu
to automatically rotate “tall” (portrait) and “wide” (landscape)
orientation pictures according to how the camera is held during
playback: tall pictures will be rotated to display in tall orientation
when the camera is held in wide orientation, while wide pictures will
be rotated to display in wide orientation when the camera is held in
tall orientation.
DTouch Controls
Touch controls can be used when pictures are displayed in the monitor (0 62).
D“Auto-Rotate Pictures”
DPicture Review
When [On] is selected for [Picture review] in the playback menu, photographs are automatically
displayed after shooting; there is no need for you to press the K button.
If [On (monitor only)] is selected, photos will not be displayed in the viewfinder.
In continuous release modes, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph in the
current series displayed.
Pictures are not rotated automatically during picture review even when [ON] is selected for [Auto-
rotate pictures] in the playback menu.
201 Viewing Pictures
Basic information
Exposure data*
Highlight display*
RGB histogram*
1
2
3
4
Shooting data*
Overview data*
None (picture only)*
File info*
5
6
7
8
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on pictures displayed in full-frame playback. Press 1, 3, or the
DISP button to cycle through photo information as shown below.
Displayed only if the corresponding option is selected for [Playback display options] in the
playback menu.
202 Photo Information
*
Voice memo indicator (0 278)
Protect status (0 223)
Retouch indicator (0 238)
Upload marking (0 227)
IPTC preset indicator (0 696)
Focus point (0 123)1
First picture in burst/total number of
pictures in burst (0 658)2
Frame number/total number of frames
Image quality (0 110)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Image size (0 112)
Image area (0 108)
HLG icon (0 386)
Time of recording (0 673)
Date of recording (0 673)
Current card slot
Rating (0 225)
Folder name (0 373)
File name (0 377)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Basic Information
1 3 6 87
9
13 1214 11 10
2 54
17
15
16
18
Displayed only if [Focus point] is selected for [Playback display options] in the playback menu.
Displayed on the first picture in each burst when [Mark first shot in series] is selected for
[Playback display options] in the playback menu.
203 Photo Information
1
2
Current card slot
Folder number–frame number (0 373)
Shooting mode (0 131)
Shutter speed (0 132, 0 135)
1
2
3
4
Aperture (0 134, 0 135)
Exposure compensation value (0 143)
ISO sensitivity (0 152)*
5
6
7
Exposure Data
543 6 7
21
Displayed in red if the picture was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control enabled.
Highlight Display
1
Highlights (areas that may be overexposed) flash in the display.
204 Photo Information
*
1
White balance (0 157)
Color temperature (0 166)
Preset manual (0 170)
White balance fine-tuning (0 162)
1Histogram (RGB channel)
Histogram (red channel)
Histogram (green channel)
Histogram (blue channel)
2
3
4
5
RGB Histogram
2
3
4
5
1
205 Photo Information
To zoom in on the picture in the histogram display, press X. The
histogram will be updated to show only the data for the portion of
the picture visible in the display. Use the multi selector to scroll to
areas of the frame not visible in the monitor. Press W (Q) to zoom
out.
If the picture contains objects with a wide range
of brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be
relatively even.
If the picture is dark, the distribution will be
shifted to the left.
If the picture is bright, the distribution will be
shifted to the right.
DPlayback Zoom
DHistograms
Histograms show tone distribution. Pixel brightness (tone) is plotted on the horizontal axis and the
number of pixels on the vertical axis.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while decreasing
exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of
overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see pictures in the monitor.
DThe Histogram Display
RGB histograms show tone distribution.
Camera histograms may differ from those displayed in imaging applications. Use them as a guide to
actual tone distribution.
206 Photo Information
Metering (0 411)
Shutter type (0 559)
Shutter speed (0 132, 0 135)
Aperture (0 134, 0 135)
Shooting mode (0 131)
ISO sensitivity (0 152)1
Exposure compensation value (0 143)
Optimal exposure tuning (0 550)2
Focal length
1
2
3
4
Lens data
Focus mode (0 114)
AF-area mode (0 116)
Vibration reduction (0 421)
White balance (0 157)3
White balance fine-tuning (0 162)
Color space (0 398)
Camera name
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Shooting Data
View the settings in effect at the time the picture was taken. The shooting data list has multiple pages,
which can be viewed by pressing 1 or 3. The information displayed can be selected using [Playback
display options]> [Detailed shooting data] in the playback menu.
Basic Shooting Data
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
8
9
10 11
Displayed in red if the picture was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control enabled.
Displayed if Custom Setting b5 [Fine-tune optimal exposure] has been set to a value other than
zero.
Also includes the color temperature for pictures taken using 4[Auto], D[Natural light auto],
or L [Preset manual].
207 Photo Information
1
2
3
Flash type
Remote flash control
Flash mode (0 359)
1
2
3
Flash control mode (0 358)
Flash compensation (0 361)
4
Picture Control (0 176)1
HLG Picture Control (0 394)1
HLG quality (0 497)
1Skin softening (0 406)
Portrait impression balance (0 407)2
2
3
Flash Data
Displayed only if photo was taken with optional flash unit (0 354, 0 364).
3
2
1
4
Picture Control/HLG Data
3
2
1
The items displayed vary with the Picture Control in effect when the picture was taken.
Shows the selected mode and fine-tuning value.
208 Photo Information
1
2
High ISO NR (0 402)
Long-exposure noise reduction (0 401)
Active D-Lighting (0 399)
HDR strength (0 444)
1
2
3
Vignette control (0 403)
History of retouches made using
[Retouch] option in playback i menu
(0 238). Changes are listed in the order
applied.
Image comment (0 693)
4
5
6
Photographer (0 694)
1Copyright holder (0 694)
2
Other Shooting Data
4
3
2
1
5
6
Copyright Information
Copyright information is only displayed if recorded using the [Copyright information] item in the
setup menu at the time the picture was taken.
1
2
209 Photo Information
Location Data
Location data must be downloaded from a smart device and are displayed only if embedded in the
picture at the time it was taken.
The items listed vary with the smart device from which the data were acquired.
The location data recorded with videos are those reported at the start of recording.
Note that the camera may be unable to download or display location data from smart devices
depending on the version of the device operating system and/or SnapBridge app used.
210 Photo Information
Caption
Event ID
Headline
Object name
City
State
Country
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Category
Supp. Cat. (supplemental categories)
Byline
Byline title
Writer/Editor
Credit
Source
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
IPTC Data
12
11
10
9
8
13
14
5
4
3
2
1
6
7
211 Photo Information
Frame number/total number of frames
Camera name
Histogram (0 206)
Image quality (0 110)
Image size (0 112)
Image area (0 108)
HLG icon (0 386)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Time of recording (0 673)
Date of recording (0 673)
Current card slot
Folder name (0 373)
File name (0 377)
Rating (0 225)
8
9
10
11
12
13
Overview
2
3
4
9 8 7 6
13
1
5
11
12
10
212 Photo Information
Voice memo indicator (0 278)
Protect status (0 223)
Retouch indicator (0 238)
Upload marking (0 227)
IPTC preset indicator (0 696)
Location data indicator
Image comment indicator (0 693)
Metering (0 411)
Shooting mode (0 131)
Shutter speed (0 132, 0 135)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Aperture (0 134, 0 135)
ISO sensitivity (0 152)1
Focal length
Active D-Lighting (0 399)
Picture Control (0 176)
Color space (0 398)
Flash mode (0 359)2
White balance (0 157)
Color temperature (0 166)
Preset manual (0 170)
White balance fine-tuning (0 162)
Flash compensation (0 361)2
Commander mode2
Exposure compensation value (0 143)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
14
19
20
8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
17 16 15
18
Displayed in red if the picture was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control enabled.
Displayed only if photo was taken with optional flash unit (0 354, 0 364).
213 Photo Information
1
2
Voice memo indicator (0 278)
Protect status (0 223)
Retouch indicator (0 238)
Upload marking (0 227)
1
2
3
4
IPTC preset indicator (0 696)
Focus point (0 123)1
Frame number/total number of frames
First picture in burst/total number of
pictures in burst (0 658)2
Rating (0 225)
5
6
7
8
9
File Info
1 3 6 7
9 8
2 54
Displayed only if [Focus point] is selected for [Playback display options] in the playback menu.
Displayed on the first picture in each burst when [Mark first shot in series] is selected for
[Playback display options] in the playback menu.
214 Photo Information
1
2
The i Button (Playback Mode)
Pressing the i button during playback zoom or full-frame or thumbnail playback displays the i menu
for playback mode. Highlight items and press J or 2 to select.
Press the i button again to return to playback.
Photos
Option Description
[Quick crop]1
Save a copy of the current picture cropped to the area visible in the
display. This option is not available when RGB histograms are displayed
(0 205).
[Manage series]
If [ON] is selected for [Series playback]> [List series as single
thumbnails] in the playback menu, you can use this option to delete,
protect, or mark for upload the current picture and all other pictures in
the same burst.
Note that the pictures can be marked for upload to a computer or FTP
server only.
[Rating] Rate the current picture (0 225).
[Select for upload to
smart device]
Select the current picture for upload (0 227). The option displayed
varies with the destination currently selected for upload.
[Select for upload to
computer]
[Select for upload
(FTP)]
215 The i Button (Playback Mode)
Option Description
[Select all for
computer upload]Mark for upload all pictures meeting the current filter criteria (0 229).
These options are displayed only if the camera is connected to a
computer or FTP server.
Videos over 4GB in size cannot be selected for upload.
[Select all for upload
(FTP)]
[Filtered playback] View only pictures that match selected criteria (0 229).
[Filtered playback
criteria]Choose filter criteria.
[Record voice memo] Add a voice memo to the current picture (0 276).
[Play voice memo] Play the voice memo for the current picture (0 278).
[Retouch] Create a retouched copy of the current picture (0 238).
[Jump to copy on
other card]
If the current picture is one of a pair created with [Backup], [RAW
primary- JPEG secondary], [JPEG primary- JPEG secondary], [RAW
primary- HEIF secondary], or [HEIF primary- HEIF secondary]
selected for [Secondary slot function] in the photo shooting menu,
choosing this option displays the copy on the card in the other slot.
[Choose slot and
folder]
Choose a slot and folder for playback. Highlight a slot and press 2 to
display a list of the folders on the memory card in the selected slot. You
can then highlight a folder and press J to view the pictures it contains.
[Protect]Add protection to or remove protection from the current picture
(0 223).
[Unprotect all]2 Remove protection from all pictures in the folder currently selected for
[Playback folder] in the playback menu.
[IPTC] Embed a selected IPTC preset in the current photo (0 696).
[Side-by-side
comparison]3 Compare retouched copies to the originals.
[Slide show]View a slide show; the current picture and all following pictures are
displayed one at a time in the order recorded (0 231).
Available only during playback zoom.
216 The i Button (Playback Mode)
1
Not available during playback zoom.
Available only when a retouched copy (indicated by a p icon) or the source picture for a retouched
copy is selected.
217 The i Button (Playback Mode)
2
3
Options used to create copy
Source picture
1
2
Retouched copy
3
Tip: “Side-by-Side Comparison”
Choose [Side-by-side comparison] to compare retouched copies with the unretouched originals.
1
2 3
The source picture is displayed on the left, the retouched copy on the right.
The options used to create the copy listed at the top of the display.
Press 4 or 2 to switch between the source picture and the retouched copy.
If the copy is an overlay created from multiple source pictures, press 1 or 3 to view the other
pictures.
If the source has been copied multiple times, press 1 or 3 to view the other copies.
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button.
Press J to return to playback with the highlighted picture displayed full frame.
To exit to playback, press the K button.
The source picture will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that is now
protected.
The source picture will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that has since
been deleted.
218 The i Button (Playback Mode)
Videos
Option Description
[Rating] Rate the current picture (0 225).
[Select for upload
to computer]Select the current picture for upload (0 227). These options are displayed
only if the camera is connected to a computer or FTP server.
[Select for upload
(FTP)]
[Select all for
computer upload]Mark for upload all pictures meeting the current filter criteria (0 229).
These options are displayed only if the camera is connected to a
computer or FTP server.
Videos over 4GB in size cannot be selected for upload.
[Select all for
upload (FTP)]
[Filtered playback] View only pictures that match selected criteria (0 229).
[Filtered playback
criteria]Choose filter criteria.
[Volume control] Adjust playback volume.
[Trim video]Trim footage from the current video and save the edited copy in a new file
(0 270).
[Choose slot and
folder]
Choose a slot and folder for playback. Highlight a slot and press 2 to
display a list of the folders on the memory card in the selected slot. You can
then highlight a folder and press J to view the pictures it contains.
[Protect] Add protection to or remove protection from the current picture (0 223).
[Unprotect all]Remove protection from all pictures in the folder currently selected for
[Playback folder] in the playback menu.
[Slide show]View a slide show; the current picture and all following pictures are
displayed one at a time in the order recorded (0 231).
219 The i Button (Playback Mode)
Videos (Playback Paused)
Option Description
9[Trim video] Trim unwanted footage (0 270).
4[Save current frame] Save a selected frame as a JPEG still (0 273).
1[Save consecutive frames]Save the frames in a selected length of footage as a series of
individual JPEG images (0 274).
[Volume control] Adjust playback volume.
220 The i Button (Playback Mode)
To zoom in on a photo displayed in full-frame playback, press
X or J or give the display two quick taps. Large, medium, and
small [FX (36×24)]-format photos can respectively be zoomed
in to maximums of approximately 24×, 18×, and 12×. Faces
detected during zoom are indicated by white borders; rotate the
sub-command dial to view other faces.
A navigation window appears
at the bottom right corner of
the display when the zoom
ratio is altered, with the area
currently visible indicated by a
yellow border. A bar below the
navigation window shows the
zoom ratio, turning green at 1 : 1
(100%). The navigation window
clears from the display after a
few seconds.
Playback Zoom
Using Playback Zoom
Operation Description
Zoom in/zoom out
Press the X button or use stretch gestures to zoom in. To zoom
out, press W (Q) or use pinch gestures.
View other areas of
picture
Use the multi selector or glide gestures to view areas of the picture
not visible in the monitor. Keep the multi selector pressed to scroll
rapidly to other areas of frame.
Crop picture To crop the picture to the area currently visible in the monitor, press
i and select [Quick crop].
221 Playback Zoom
Faces detected during zoom are
indicated by white borders in the
navigation window. Rotate the
sub-command dial or tap the on-
screen guide to view other faces.
Operation Description
Select faces
View other pictures
Rotate the main command dial to view the same location in other
photos without changing the zoom ratio (selecting a video cancels
zoom). You can also view other photos by tapping the e or f icon
at the bottom of the display.
Protect pictures Press the A (g) button to toggle protection for the current picture
on or off (0 223).
Exit to shooting mode Press the shutter-release button halfway or press the K button to
exit.
View menus Press the G button to view the menus.
222 Playback Zoom
Press the A (g) button.
Protected pictures are marked with a P icon.
To remove protection, display the picture or highlight it in
the thumbnail list and press A (g) again.
Protecting Pictures from Deletion
Pictures can be protected to prevent their being deleted accidentally. Protected pictures will however
be deleted when the memory card is formatted (0 671).
Select a picture.
Display the picture in full-frame playback or playback zoom.
Alternatively, you can highlight the picture in the thumbnail list using the multi selector.
223 Protecting Pictures from Deletion
1
2
DVoice Memos
Protecting photos also protects any voice memos recorded with the pictures. Voice memos cannot be
protected separately.
DCaution: Uploading Protected Pictures via FTP
The copies on the FTP server will not be protected even if the originals are. Markings can be added
using ratings.
Tip: Removing Protection from All Pictures
To remove protection from all pictures in the folder or folders currently selected for [Playback folder]
in the playback menu, press the A (g) and O buttons for about two seconds during playback.
224 Protecting Pictures from Deletion
Select the desired picture with the multi selector and press
the i button.
Highlight [Rating] and press 2.
Choose a rating.
Rotate the main command dial to highlight the desired rating
and press J to select. Choose from ratings of from zero to five
stars, or select d to mark the picture as a candidate for later
deletion.
Rating Pictures
Rate pictures.
225 Rating Pictures
1
2
3
Tip: Ratings
Ratings can also be viewed in NX Studio.
Tip: Rating Pictures Using Camera Controls
If [Rating] has been assigned to a control using Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls (playback)],
pictures can be rated by holding the control and rotating the main command dial.
226 Rating Pictures
Highlight [Select for upload to smart device], [Select for
upload to computer], or [Select for upload (FTP)] and press
J.
Pictures destined for a smart device are marked with a W
icon, while those destined for a computer or ftp server are
marked with s.
Selecting Pictures for Upload
Follow the steps below to select the current picture for upload to a smart device, computer, or FTP
server.
The i menu items used to select pictures for upload vary with the type of device connected:
[Select for upload to smart device]: Displayed when the camera is connected to a smart device
using [Connect to smart device] in the network menu (0 725).
[Select for upload to computer]: Displayed when the camera is connected to a computer using
[Connect to computer] in the network menu (0 731).
[Select for upload (FTP)]: Displayed when the camera is connected to an FTP server using
[Connect to FTP server] in the network menu (0 736).
Videos cannot be selected for upload when the camera is connected to a smart device via the
SnapBridge app.
The maximum file size for videos uploaded by other means is 4GB.
Select the desired picture and press the i button.
227 Selecting Pictures for Upload
-
-
-
1
2
DRemoving Upload Marking
Repeat Steps1–2 to remove upload marking from selected pictures.
228 Selecting Pictures for Upload
Highlight options and press J to select (M) or deselect (U). During
filtered playback, only pictures that meet all criteria marked with a
check ( M) will be displayed.
Filtered Playback
Select [Filtered playback] in the i menu to view only pictures that meet the criteria chosen for
[Filtered playback criteria] in the playback menu or playback i menu.
“Filtered Playback Criteria”
Option Description
[Protect]M: Include protected pictures.
[Picture type]M: Include pictures of the selected types.
[Rating]M: Include pictures with selected ratings.
[Select for upload to
computer]
Select (M) [Uploaded pictures] to include pictures previously
uploaded to a computer or FTP server.
Select (M) [Pictures not uploaded] to include pictures that
have yet to be uploaded.
Select (M) both options to include both pictures that have and
pictures that have yet to be uploaded.
[Select for upload (FTP)]
[Voice memo]M: Include pictures with voice memos.
[Retouched pictures]M: Include retouched pictures.
229 Filtered Playback
During filtered playback, a white border appears around the
display.
To end filtered playback, select [Filtered playback] again.
230 Filtered Playback
Select the starting picture using the multi selector and
press the i button.
The slide show starts with the selected picture and continues
through all the pictures recorded after it.
Highlight [Slide show] and press 2.
To choose how long photos are displayed, highlight [Frame
interval] and press 2.
Viewing Slide Shows
To view a slide show in which pictures are played back one at a time in the order recorded, select [Slide
show] in the i menu. You can also choose how long any photos in the show are displayed.
Highlight [Start] and press J.
The slide show will start.
In the case of videos, the option selected for [Frame interval] is ignored; instead, the starting
frame will be displayed for short time before video playback begins.
When the show ends, a message will be displayed before normal playback resumes.
231 Viewing Slide Shows
1
2
3
During the Show
The following operations can be performed while the show is in progress:
Operation Description
Skip back/skip ahead Press 4 to return to the previous frame, 2 to skip to the next frame.
View additional photo info Press 1 or 3 to choose the photo info displayed. To hide photo
info, select [None (picture only)].
Adjust volume Press X to increase volume, W (Q) to decrease.
Exit to playback mode Press J to end the slide show and return to the playback display.
232 Viewing Slide Shows
Select the desired picture with the multi selector and press
the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
To exit without deleting the picture, press K.
Press O again.
The picture will be deleted.
Deleting Pictures
Follow the steps below to delete pictures from memory cards. Note that pictures cannot be recovered
once deleted. Pictures that are protected, however, cannot be deleted.
Using the Delete Button
Press the O button to delete the current picture.
233 Deleting Pictures
1
2
If the picture selected in the playback display when the O button
is pressed was recorded with two memory cards inserted and
an option other than [Overflow] selected for [Secondary slot
function], you will be prompted to choose whether to delete both
copies or only the copy on the card in the current slot (0 379).
Tip: Deleting Copies
234 Deleting Pictures
Deleting Multiple Pictures
Use [Delete] in the playback menu to delete multiple pictures at once. Note that depending on the
number of pictures, some time may be required for deletion.
Option Description
Q[Selected pictures] Delete selected pictures.
d[Candidates for
deletion]Delete pictures rated d (candidate for deletion).
i[Pictures shot on
selected dates]Delete all pictures taken on selected dates.
R[All pictures]
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for [Playback
folder] in the playback menu.
If two memory cards are inserted, you can select the card
from which pictures will be deleted.
Deleting Selected Pictures
Select pictures.
Highlight pictures and press the W (Q) button to select; selected pictures are marked with
a check ( ). To remove the check ( ) and deselect the current picture press the W (Q)
button again.
Repeat until all the desired pictures are selected.
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button.
235 Deleting Pictures
1
Delete the pictures.
Press J; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Highlight [Yes] and press J to delete the selected pictures.
Select dates.
Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to
select; selected dates are marked with M icons. Selected
dates can be deselected by pressing 2 again.
Repeat until you have selected all the desired dates.
Candidates for Deletion
Select pictures.
The camera will list all pictures rated d (candidate for deletion). Pictures you do not currently
wish to delete can be deselected by highlighting them using the multi selector and pressing
W (Q).
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button.
Delete the pictures.
Press J; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Highlight [Yes] and press J to delete the selected pictures.
Pictures Shot on Selected Dates
236 Deleting Pictures
2
1
2
1
Delete the pictures.
Press J; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Highlight [Yes] and press J to delete all the pictures taken
on the selected dates.
Choose a memory card.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the slot containing the memory card
from which the pictures will be deleted and press J.
Delete the pictures.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed showing the name
of the folder containing the photos to be deleted. Highlight
[Yes] and press J to delete all pictures from the folder. The
folder is that previously selected via [Playback folder] in the
playback menu.
Note that depending on the number of pictures, some time
may be required for deletion.
Deleting All Pictures
237 Deleting Pictures
2
1
2
Retouched copies can be created from existing pictures. Retouched
copies are saved to new files, separate from the original pictures.
Retouching Photographs
Retouching Photographs
Option Description
[RAW processing (current
picture)]
Save a copy of the current NEF (RAW) picture in another
format such as JPEG (0 241).
[RAW processing (multiple
pictures)]
Select multiple existing NEF (RAW) pictures for conversion to
JPEG or other formats (0 241).
[Trim] Create a cropped copy of the current photograph (0 253).
[Resize (current picture)] Create a small copy of the current photograph (0 254).
[Resize (multiple pictures)]Create small copies from one or more existing photos
(0 254).
[D-Lighting] Brighten shadows (0 257).
[Straighten] Straighten pictures (0 258).
[Distortion control]
Reduce barrel distortion in pictures taken with wide-angle
lenses or pin-cushion distortion in pictures taken with
telephoto lenses (0 259).
[Perspective control] Reduce the effects of perspective (0 260).
[Monochrome]Create a monochrome copy of the current photograph
(0 261).
238 Retouching Photographs
Select the desired picture with the multi selector and press
the i button.
You will not need to select a picture if you are using
[RAW processing (multiple pictures)] or [Resize (multiple
pictures)], as you will be prompted to choose the pictures
later.
Option Description
[Overlay (add)]Overlay two pictures to create a new picture in JPEG format
(0 262).
[Lighten]
Compare the pixels at each point in multiple pictures and
select the brightest to create a new picture in JPEG format
(0 264).
[Darken]
Compare the pixels at each point in multiple pictures and
select the darkest to create a new picture in JPEG format
(0 264).
[Motion blend]
The camera examines a selected burst of pictures to detect
moving subjects and overlays them to create a single JPEG
image (0 267).
Highlight [Retouch] and press 2.
Highlight the desired option and press 2.
Select retouch options.
For more information, see the section for the selected item.
To exit without creating a retouched copy, press K. This will return you to the playback
display.
Create a retouched copy.
For more information, see the section for the selected item.
Retouched copies are indicated by a p icon.
239 Retouching Photographs
1
2
3
4
5
DCautions: Retouch
The camera may not be able to display or retouch images that were taken or retouched using other
cameras or that have been retouched on a computer.
If no actions are performed for a brief period, the display will turn off and any unsaved changes
will be lost. To increase the time the display remains on, choose a longer menu display time using
Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]> [Menus].
DCautions: Retouching Copies
Most items can be applied to copies created using other retouch options, although multiple edits
may result in reduced image quality or unnatural colors.
The effect produced may vary with the order in which edits are performed.
Some items may be unavailable depending on the items used to create the copy.
[Retouch] items in the i menu that cannot be applied to the current picture are grayed out and
unavailable.
DImage Quality
Copies created from NEF (RAW) pictures will be saved in JPEG or HEIF at an [Image quality] of
[JPEG/HEIF finem].
Copies created from JPEG and HEIF pictures are the same quality as the original.
In the case of dual-format pictures recorded to the same memory card at image-quality settings of
RAW+ JPEG/HEIF, only the NEF (RAW) copy will be retouched.
DImage Size
Except in the case of copies created with [RAW processing (current picture)], [RAW processing
(multiple pictures)], [Trim], [Resize (current picture)], and [Resize (multiple pictures)], copies are
the same size as the original.
240 Retouching Photographs
Display an NEF (RAW) picture shot with [SDR] selected for
tone mode and then press the i button.
Select [Retouch] in the i menu, then highlight [RAW
processing (current picture)] and press 2.
RAW Processing
RAW processing is used to save NEF (RAW) pictures in other formats, such as JPEG. Depending on the
tone mode selected when the picture was taken, copies can be saved in either JPEG or HEIF format.
DCaution: RAW Processing
RAW processing is available only with NEF (RAW) images created with this camera. Pictures in other
formats and NEF (RAW) photos taken with other cameras or NX Tether cannot be selected.
Processing Photos Shot Using the “SDR” Tone
Mode
Applying RAW processing to photos shot with [SDR] selected for tone mode creates JPEG copies.
Processing the Current Picture
241 RAW Processing
1
2
Choose a destination.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a card slot and press J.
You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one
memory card is inserted.
Choose settings for the JPEG copy in the [RAW processing] display.
The following settings can be adjusted:
Image quality (0 110)
Image size (0 112)
Exposure compensation (0 143)
White balance (0 157)
Set Picture Control (0 176)
Color space (0 398)
Active D-Lighting (0 399)
High ISO NR (0 402)
Vignette control (0 403)
Diffraction compensation (0 404)
Portrait impression balance (0 407)
The settings in effect when the photograph was taken will in some cases appear below the
preview.
To use the setting in effect when the photograph was taken, if applicable, select [Original].
The effects can be previewed in the edit display. To view the unedited picture, press and hold
the DISP button.
[Exposure compensation] can only be set to values between –2 and +2EV.
Copy the photograph.
Highlight [EXE] and press J to create a JPEG copy of the selected photograph.
242 RAW Processing
3
4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5
Display an NEF (RAW) picture shot with [SDR] selected for
tone mode and then press the i button.
Select [Retouch] in the i menu, then highlight [RAW
processing (multiple pictures)] and press 2.
Choose how pictures will be selected and where the copies
will be saved.
Processing Multiple Pictures
Option Description
[Select picture(s)]Create JPEG copies of selected NEF (RAW) pictures. Multiple NEF
(RAW) pictures can be selected.
[Select date]Create JPEG copies of all NEF (RAW) pictures taken on selected
dates.
[Select folder] Create JPEG copies of all NEF (RAW) pictures in a selected folder.
[Choose destination]Choose the destination for the JPEG copies. You will not be
prompted to select the slot if only one memory card is inserted.
If you chose [Select picture(s)], proceed to Step5.
243 RAW Processing
1
2
3
Select the source slot.
Highlight the slot with the card containing the NEF (RAW)
images and press 2.
You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one
memory card is inserted.
If you chose [Select picture(s)]:
Highlight pictures using the multi selector.
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold
the X button.
To select the highlighted picture, press the W (Q) button.
Selected pictures are marked with a check ( ). To remove
the check ( ) and deselect the current picture, press the
W (Q) button again. All pictures will be processed using the
same settings.
Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select date]:
Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to
select (M) or deselect (U).
All eligible images taken on dates marked with a check (M)
will be processed using the same settings.
Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select folder]:
Highlight a folder and press J to select; all eligible images in
the selected folder will be processed using the same settings.
Select photographs.
244 RAW Processing
4
5
Choose settings for the JPEG copies in the [RAW processing] display.
The following settings can be adjusted:
Image quality (0 110)
Image size (0 112)
Exposure compensation (0 143)
White balance (0 157)
Set Picture Control (0 176)
Color space (0 398)
Active D-Lighting (0 399)
High ISO NR (0 402)
Vignette control (0 403)
Diffraction compensation (0 404)
Portrait impression balance (0 407)
To use the setting in effect when the photographs were taken, if applicable, select [Original].
The effects can be previewed in the edit display. To view unedited pictures, press and hold
the DISP button.
[Exposure compensation] can only be set to values between –2 and +2EV.
Copy the photographs.
Highlight [EXE] and press J to display a confirmation dialog and then highlight [Yes] and
press J to create JPEG copies of the selected photos.
To cancel the operation before all copies have been created, press the G button; when a
confirmation dialog is displayed, highlight [Yes] and press J.
245 RAW Processing
6
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
7
Display an NEF (RAW) picture shot with [HLG] selected for
tone mode and then press the i button.
Choose a picture marked with the HLG icon.
Select [Retouch] in the i menu, then highlight [RAW
processing (current picture)] and press 2.
Choose a destination.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a card slot and press J.
You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one
memory card is inserted.
Processing Photos Shot Using the “HLG” Tone
Mode
Applying RAW processing to photos shot with [HLG] selected for tone mode creates HEIF copies.
NEF (RAW) pictures taken with [HLG] selected for tone mode can also be saved in JPEG format
(0 248). Note, however, that the JPEG copies may exhibit more “noise” in the form of randomly-
spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines than do JPEG copies created from NEF (RAW) pictures taken with
[SDR] selected for tone mode.
Processing the Current Picture
246 RAW Processing
1
2
3
Choose settings for the HEIF copy in the [RAW processing (HEIF)] display.
The following settings can be adjusted:
Image quality (0 110)
Image size (0 112)
Exposure compensation (0 143)
White balance (0 157)
Picture Control (HLG; 0 394)
High ISO NR (0 402)
Vignette control (0 403)
Diffraction compensation (0 404)
Portrait impression balance (0 407)
To RAW processing (JPEG)
The settings in effect when the photograph was taken will in some cases appear below the
preview.
To use the setting in effect when the photograph was taken, if applicable, select [Original].
The effects can be previewed in the edit display. To view the unedited picture, press and hold
the DISP button.
[Exposure compensation] can only be set to values between –2 and +2EV.
[Color space] is fixed at “BT.2100“.
[Active D-Lighting] cannot be adjusted.
Copy the photograph.
Highlight [EXE (save in HEIF format)] and press J to create an HEIF copy of the current
photograph.
247 RAW Processing
4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5
Tip: Creating JPEG Copies from RAW Photos Shot Using the HLG Tone Mode
Selecting [To RAW processing (JPEG)] in Step4 displays the [RAW processing (JPEG)] dialog, where
you can adjust settings for saving the copy in JPEG format. To save the JPEG copy, highlight [EXE (save
in JPEG format)] and press J.
Exposure for JPEG copies created by applying [RAW processing (JPEG)] to RAW photos shot in
HLG will be around 2EV lower than that of JPEG copies created from RAW photos shot with [SDR]
selected for tone mode. Exposure can be corrected as desired using the [Exposure compensation]
option in the [RAW processing (JPEG)] dialog.
[Set Picture Control] appears in the [RAW processing (JPEG)] display in place of [Set Picture
Control (HLG)]. [Original] cannot be selected.
You will be able to choose options for [Color space] and [Active D-Lighting]. Note, however, that
choosing an option for [Active D-Lighting] may result in “noise” in the form of randomly-spaced
bright pixels, fog, or lines.
To return to the [RAW processing (HEIF)] display, select [To RAW processing (HEIF)] in the [RAW
processing (JPEG)] dialog.
The values selected in the [RAW processing (HEIF)] and [RAW processing (JPEG)] displays are
stored separately and are not reset after processing or when you switch from one display to another
using [To RAW processing (JPEG)] or [To RAW processing (HEIF)].
248 RAW Processing
Display an NEF (RAW) picture shot with [HLG] selected for
tone mode and then press the i button.
Choose a picture marked with the HLG icon.
Select [Retouch] in the i menu, then highlight [RAW
processing (multiple pictures)] and press 2.
Choose how pictures will be selected and where the copies
will be saved.
Processing Multiple Pictures
Option Description
[Select picture(s)]Create HEIF copies of selected NEF (RAW) pictures. Multiple NEF
(RAW) pictures can be selected.
[Select date]Create HEIF copies of all NEF (RAW) pictures taken on selected
dates.
[Select folder] Create HEIF copies of all NEF (RAW) pictures in a selected folder.
[Choose destination]Choose the destination for the HEIF copies. You will not be
prompted to select the slot if only one memory card is inserted.
If you chose [Select picture(s)], proceed to Step5.
249 RAW Processing
1
2
3
Select the source slot.
Highlight the slot with the card containing the NEF (RAW)
images and press 2.
You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one
memory card is inserted.
If you chose [Select picture(s)]:
Highlight pictures using the multi selector.
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold
the X button.
To select the highlighted picture, press the W (Q) button.
Selected pictures are marked with a check ( ). To remove
the check ( ) and deselect the current picture, press the
W (Q) button again. All pictures will be processed using the
same settings.
Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select date]:
Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to
select (M) or deselect (U).
All eligible images taken on dates marked with a check (M)
will be processed using the same settings.
Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select folder]:
Highlight a folder and press J to select; all eligible images in
the selected folder will be processed using the same settings.
Select photographs.
250 RAW Processing
4
5
Choose settings for the HEIF copies in the [RAW processing (HEIF)] display.
The following settings can be adjusted:
Image quality (0 110)
Image size (0 112)
Exposure compensation (0 143)
White balance (0 157)
Picture Control (HLG; 0 394)
High ISO NR (0 402)
Vignette control (0 403)
Diffraction compensation (0 404)
Portrait impression balance (0 407)
To RAW processing (JPEG)
To use the setting in effect when the photographs were taken, if applicable, select [Original].
The effects can be previewed in the edit display. To view unedited pictures, press and hold
the DISP button.
[Exposure compensation] can only be set to values between –2 and +2EV.
[Color space] is fixed at “BT.2100“.
[Active D-Lighting] cannot be adjusted.
Copy the photographs.
In [RAW processing (HEIF)] display, highlight [EXE (save in HEIF format)] and press J to
create HEIF copies of the selected photos.
To cancel the operation before all copies have been created, press the G button; when a
confirmation dialog is displayed, highlight [Yes] and press J.
251 RAW Processing
6
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
7
Tip: Creating JPEG Copies from RAW Photos Shot Using the HLG Tone Mode
Selecting [To RAW processing (JPEG)] in Step6 displays the [RAW processing (JPEG)] dialog, where
you can adjust settings for saving the copies in JPEG format. To save the JPEG copies, highlight [EXE
(save in JPEG format)] and press J.
Exposure for JPEG copies created by applying [RAW processing (JPEG)] to RAW photos shot in
HLG will be around 2EV lower than that of JPEG copies created from RAW photos shot with [SDR]
selected for tone mode. Exposure can be corrected as desired using the [Exposure compensation]
option in the [RAW processing (JPEG)] dialog.
[Set Picture Control] appears in the [RAW processing (JPEG)] display in place of [Set Picture
Control (HLG)]. [Original] cannot be selected.
You will be able to choose options for [Color space] and [Active D-Lighting]. Note, however, that
choosing an option for [Active D-Lighting] may result in “noise” in the form of randomly-spaced
bright pixels, fog, or lines.
To return to the [RAW processing (HEIF)] display, select [To RAW processing (HEIF)] in the [RAW
processing (JPEG)] dialog.
The values selected in the [RAW processing (HEIF)] and [RAW processing (JPEG)] displays are
stored separately and are not reset after processing or when you switch from one display to another
using [To RAW processing (JPEG)] or [To RAW processing (HEIF)].
252 RAW Processing
The crop size appears at upper left in the crop display. The size of
the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio.
Trim
Create a cropped copy of the current photograph. The photograph is displayed with the selected crop
shown in yellow; create a cropped copy as described below.
Operation Description
Size the crop Press X or W (Q) to choose the crop size.
Change the crop aspect ratio Rotate the main command dial to choose the crop aspect ratio.
Position the crop Use the multi selector to position the crop.
Save the crop Press J to save the current crop as a separate file.
DCautions: Cropped Pictures
Depending on the size of the cropped copy, playback zoom may not be available when cropped
copies are displayed.
253 Trim
Select [Retouch] in the i menu, then highlight [Resize
(current picture)] and press 2.
Choose a destination.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a card slot and press J.
You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one
memory card is inserted.
Highlight the desired size and press J.
A copy will be saved at the selected size.
Resize
Create small copies of selected photographs. Use [Resize (current picture)] to resize the current
picture, or [Resize (multiple pictures)] to resize multiple pictures.
DCaution: Resize
Depending on the copy size, playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.
DResizing Cropped Pictures
Pictures cropped to aspect ratios of 4 : 3 or 3 : 4 cannot be resized.
Resizing the Current Picture
254 Resize
1
2
3
Select [Retouch] in the i menu, then highlight [Resize
(multiple pictures)] and press 2.
Choose a size.
Highlight [Choose size] and press 2.
Highlight the desired size (length in pixels) using 1 and 3
and press J.
Choose how pictures are selected.
Option Description
[Select picture(s)]Resize selected pictures. Multiple
pictures can be selected.
[Select date]Resize all pictures taken on selected
dates.
[Select folder] Resize all pictures in a selected folder.
If you chose [Select picture(s)], proceed to Step5.
Resizing Multiple Pictures
255 Resize
1
2
3
Select the source slot.
Highlight the slot with the card containing the desired
pictures and press 2.
You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one
memory card is inserted.
If you chose [Select picture(s)]:
Highlight pictures using the multi selector.
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold
the X button.
To select the highlighted picture, press the W (Q) button.
Selected pictures are marked with a check ( ). To remove
the check ( ) and deselect the current picture, press the W
(Q) button again. The selected pictures will all be copied at
the size selected in Step2.
Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select date]:
Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to
select (M) or deselect (U).
All pictures taken on dates marked with a check (M) will be
copied at the size selected in Step2.
Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and
press J to save the resized copies.
To cancel the operation before all copies have been created,
press the G button; when a confirmation dialog is
displayed, highlight [Yes] and press J.
Choose pictures.
If you chose [Select folder]:
Highlight a folder and press J to select; all pictures in the selected folder will be copied at the
size selected in Step2.
256 Resize
4
5
6
Before After
Press 1 or 3 to choose the amount of correction performed.
The effect can be previewed in the edit display.
Press J to save the retouched copy.
D-Lighting
D-Lighting brightens shadows. It is ideal for dark or backlit photographs.
The effect can be previewed in the edit display. To view the unedited picture, press and hold the DISP
button.
257 D-Lighting
Rotate pictures by up to ±5° in increments of approximately 0.25°.
The effect can be previewed in the edit display. To view the
unedited picture, press and hold the DISP button.
The greater the rotation, the more will be trimmed from the
edges.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the amount of straightening performed.
Press J to save the retouched copy.
Straighten
258 Straighten
Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion, reducing barrel
distortion in pictures taken with wide-angle lenses or pincushion
distortion in pictures taken with telephoto lenses.
If the camera detects distortion, it will offer a choice of [Auto]
and [Manual]. Select [Auto] to let the camera correct distortion
automatically.
If the camera is unable to detect distortion, the only option
available will be [Manual]. Select [Manual] to reduce distortion
manually.
Note that [Manual] must be used with copies created using the
[Auto] option and with photos taken using the [Auto distortion
control] option in the photo shooting menu.
When [Manual] is selected, the effect can be previewed in the
display. To view the unedited picture, press and hold the DISP
button.
Press 1 to reduce pin-cushion distortion, 3 to reduce barrel
distortion. Press J to save changes and return to the previous
display.
Press J to save the retouched copy.
Distortion Control
DCaution: Distortion Control
Note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out.
259 Distortion Control
Create copies that reduce the horizontal and vertical effects of
perspective in photos taken looking up from the base of a tall
object.
The effect can be previewed in the edit display. To view the
unedited picture, press and hold the DISP button.
Note that greater amounts of perspective control result in more
of the edges being cropped out.
For horizontal correction, highlight J and press 2. Press 1 to
stretch the left edge, 3 to stretch the right. Press J to save
changes and return to the previous display.
For vertical correction, highlight K and press 2. Press 1 to
stretch the top edge, 3 to stretch the bottom. Press J to save
changes and return to the previous display.
Highlight N and press J to save the retouched copy.
Before After
Perspective Control
260 Perspective Control
The effect can be previewed in the edit display. To view the
unedited picture, press and hold the DISP button.
Highlighting [Sepia] or [Cyanotype] and pressing 2 displays
saturation options for the selected monochrome tint; choose
from [High], [Normal], and [Low]. Press J to save changes and
return to the tint menu.
Press J to save the retouched copy.
Monochrome
Copy photographs in a selected monochrome tint.
Option Description
[Black-and-white] Copy photographs in black-and-white.
[Sepia] Copy photographs in sepia.
[Cyanotype] Copy photographs in blue-and-white monochrome.
261 Monochrome
Select [Retouch] in the i menu, then highlight [Overlay
(add)] and press 2.
Select photographs.
Highlight pictures using the multi selector.
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold
the X button.
To select the highlighted picture, press the W (Q) button.
Selected pictures are marked with a check ( ). To remove
the check ( ) and deselect the current picture, press the W
(Q) button again.
Pictures with different image areas cannot be selected.
Press J to proceed once the second picture is selected.
Adjust balance.
The overlay can be previewed in the display. Press 1 or 3 to
adjust the balance between the two pictures. Press 1 to make
the first picture more visible and the second less, 3 for the
opposite effect.
Overlay (Add)
Combine two existing photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the
originals.
262 Overlay (Add)
1
2
3
Save the overlay.
Press J to save the overlay.
DCautions: “Overlay (Add)
Colors and brightness in the preview may differ from the final picture.
Only pictures created with this camera can be selected. Pictures created with other models cannot
be selected.
The overlay will be the same size as the smallest of the two component pictures.
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording, metering, shutter speed, aperture,
shooting mode, exposure compensation, focal length, and picture orientation) and values for white
balance and Picture Control as the first of the two pictures selected. Copyright information, however,
is not copied to the new picture. The comment is similarly not copied; instead, the comment
currently active on the camera, if any, is appended.
263 Overlay (Add)
4
“Lighten” and “Darken”
The camera compares multiple selected pictures and selects only the brightest or darkest pixels at each
point in the picture to create a single new JPEG copy.
Select [Retouch] in the i menu, then highlight [Lighten] or [Darken] and press 2.
[Lighten]: The camera compares the pixels in each picture and uses only the brightest.
[Darken]: The camera compares the pixels in each picture and uses only the darkest.
Choose how pictures are selected.
Option Description
[Select individual
pictures]Select pictures for the overlay one-by-one.
[Select consecutive
pictures]
Select two pictures; the overlay will include the two pictures and
all the pictures between them.
[Select folder] The overlay will include all pictures in the selected folder.
Select the source slot.
Highlight the slot with the card containing the desired pictures and press 2.
You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one memory card is inserted.
264 “Lighten” and “Darken”
1
2
3
Select the pictures.
If you chose [Select individual pictures]:
Highlight pictures using the multi selector.
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button.
To select the highlighted picture, press the W (Q) button. Selected pictures are marked with
a check ( ). To remove the check ( ) and deselect the current picture, press the W (Q)
button again. The selected pictures will be combined using the option selected in Step1.
Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select consecutive pictures]:
All pictures in a range chosen using the multi selector will be combined using the option
selected in Step1.
Use the W (Q) button to select the first and last pictures in the desired range.
The first and last pictures are indicated by icons and the pictures between them by
icons.
You can alter your selection by using the multi selector to highlight different pictures to
serve as the first or last frame. Press the A (g) button to choose the current picture as
the new start or end point.
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button.
Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select folder]:
Highlight the desired folder and press J to overlay all pictures in the folder using the option
selected in Step1.
Save the overlay.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and press J to save the overlay and
display the resulting picture.
To interrupt the process and display a confirmation dialog before the operation is complete,
press the G button; to save the current overlay “as is” without adding the remaining
pictures, highlight [Save and exit] and press J. To exit without creating an overlay, highlight
[Discard and exit] and press J.
265 “Lighten” and “Darken”
4
-
-
-
5
DCautions: “Lighten” and “Darken”
Only pictures created with this camera can be selected. Pictures created with other models cannot
be selected.
The overlay will include only pictures created with the same options selected for [Image area]>
[Choose image area] in the photo shooting menu.
The image quality setting for the completed overlay is that of the highest quality picture it contains.
Overlays that include NEF (RAW) pictures will be saved at an image quality of [JPEG/HEIF finem].
All JPEG pictures in the overlay must be the same size.
“Noise” (in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) increases with the number of
pictures in the overlay.
Noise will be less noticeable if the pictures for the overlay were shot with 0 or a negative value
selected for the [Sharpening] Picture Control parameter.
Noise becomes noticeable in overlays that include around 50 pictures or more.
266 “Lighten” and “Darken”
-
-
Select [Retouch] in the i menu, then highlight [Motion
blend] and press 2.
Select the pictures.
Highlight pictures using the multi selector.
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold
the X button.
To select the highlighted picture, press the W (Q) button.
Selected pictures are marked with a check ( ). To remove
the check ( ) and deselect the current picture, press the W
(Q) button again.
Motion blends can contain between 5 and 20 pictures.
Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
Check the results.
Check the results of the overlay in the preview display.
To return to Step3 and choose different pictures, tap Z or
press 4.
To proceed with the current selection, press J; a
confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Motion Blend
The camera examines a selected burst of pictures to detect moving subjects and overlays them to
create a single JPEG image.
Select the source slot.
Highlight the slot with the card containing the desired pictures and press 2.
You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one memory card is inserted.
267 Motion Blend
1
2
3
4
Save the overlay.
Highlight [Yes] in the confirmation dialog and press J to save
the overlay.
DCautions: “Motion Blend”
The final picture may differ from the preview both in how it looks (including color and brightness)
and in how the pictures are combined.
Only pictures created with this camera can be selected. Pictures created with other models cannot
be selected.
[Motion blend] is intended for bursts shot with the camera on a tripod, with a fixed background
and moving subjects. The desired results may consequently not be achieved with bursts shot
without a tripod.
The overlay will include only pictures created with the same options selected for [Image area]>
[Choose image area] in the photo shooting menu.
The image quality setting for the completed overlay is that of the highest quality picture it contains.
Overlays that include NEF (RAW) pictures will be saved at an image quality of [JPEG/HEIF finem].
All JPEG pictures in the overlay must be the same size.
268 Motion Blend
5
Editing Videos
Editing Videos
Videos can be edited using the following options:
Option Description
9[Trim video] Trim unwanted footage.
4[Save current frame] Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
1[Save consecutive frames]Save the frames in a selected length of footage as a series of
individual JPEG images.
[Volume control] Volume can also be adjusted while playback is paused.
These options are available only with videos recorded with [H.265 8-bit (MOV)] or [H.264 8-bit
(MP4)] selected for [Video file type] in the video recording menu.
269 Editing Videos
Pause the video on the new opening frame.
Press J to start playback. Press 3 to pause.
Your approximate position in the video can be ascertained
from the video progress bar.
Press 4 or 2 or rotate the command dials to locate the
desired frame.
Press the i button, highlight [Trim video], and press 2.
Trimming Videos
Trim unwanted footage.
Display a video full frame.
270 Trimming Videos
1
2
3
Choose the start point.
To create a copy that begins from the current frame, highlight
[Start point] and press J.
Confirm the new start point.
If the desired frame is not currently displayed, press 4 or 2
to advance or rewind a frame at a time.
Rotate the main command dial one stop to skip ahead or
back 10 frames.
Rotate the sub-command dial one stop to skip ahead or
back 10s.
Choose the end point.
Press the A (g) button to switch to the end-point selection
tool (x) and then select the closing frame (x) as described in
Step5.
Press 1 to create the copy.
271 Trimming Videos
4
5
6
7
Preview the copy.
To preview the copy, highlight [Preview] and press J (to
interrupt the preview and return to the save options menu,
press 1).
To abandon the current copy and return to Step5, highlight
[Cancel] and press J.
Choose a save option.
Choose [Save as new file] to save the edited copy as a new
file. To replace the original video with the edited copy, choose
[Overwrite existing file].
Save the copy.
Press J to save the copy.
DCautions: Trimming Videos
The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the memory card.
Videos less than two seconds long cannot be edited using [Trim video].
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
Tip: Removing Opening or Closing Footage
To remove only the closing footage from a video, highlight [End point] and press J in Step4, select
the closing frame, and proceed to Step7 without pressing the A (g) button in Step6.
To remove only the opening footage, proceed to Step7 without pressing the A (g) button in
Step6.
Tip: The i Menu “Trim Video” Option
Videos can also be edited using the [Trim video] item in the i menu.
272 Trimming Videos
8
9
10
Pause the video on the desired frame.
Press 3 to pause playback.
Your approximate position in the video can be ascertained
from the video progress bar.
Press 4 or 2 or rotate the command dials to locate the
desired frame.
Press the i button and highlight [Save current frame].
Press J to create a JPEG copy of the current frame.
Saving the Current Frame as a JPEG Still
Stills can be created from individual frames of existing videos. You can create a single still from the
current frame or a series of stills from a selected length of footage.
D“Save Current Frame”
Stills are saved at the dimensions selected for [Frame size/frame rate] in the video recording menu
when the video was recorded.
They cannot be retouched.
273 Saving the Current Frame as a JPEG Still
1
2
Pause the video on the desired frame.
Press 3 to pause playback.
Your approximate position in the video can be ascertained
from the video progress bar.
Press 4 or 2 or rotate the command dials to locate the
desired frame.
Press the i button, highlight [Save consecutive frames]
and press 2.
Choose a destination.
Choose the destination.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a card slot and press J.
You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one
memory card is inserted.
Choose the length of footage.
Choose the length of footage that will be saved as stills.
Creating Stills from a Selected Length of
Footage
The frames in a selected length of footage can be saved as a series of individual JPEG images.
274 Creating Stills from a Selected Length of Footage
1
2
3
4
Press J.
The selected footage will be saved as a series of JPEG stills. The number varies with the video
frame rate.
D“Save Consecutive Frames”
Stills are saved at the dimensions selected for [Frame size/frame rate] in the video recording menu
when the video was recorded.
They cannot be retouched.
275 Creating Stills from a Selected Length of Footage
5
Select the photograph.
Only one voice memo can be recorded per picture; additional
voice memos cannot be recorded for pictures already marked
with a h icon. The existing voice memo must be deleted
before another can be recorded (0 279).
Select [Record voice memo] in the i menu.
To start recording, press the i button, highlight [Record
voice memo], and press J.
During recording, the camera displays a b icon and a
countdown of the remaining recording time, in seconds.
Pictures with voice memos are indicated by h icons.
Voice Memos
Recording Voice Memos
Voice memos up to 60 seconds long can be added to photographs.
Press J.
Recording will end.
276 Recording Voice Memos
1
2
3
DRecording Not Available
Voice memos cannot be added to videos or Image Dust Off reference data.
DRecording Restrictions
Voice memos cannot be recorded if:
the photo/video selector is rotated to 1 or
a multiple exposure is in progress.
DCaution: Recording Voice Memos
Touch controls are disabled and other pictures cannot be displayed while recording is in progress.
DInterrupting Recording
Pressing the shutter-release button or operating other camera controls may end recording. During
interval-timer photography, recording ends about two seconds before the next shot is taken; recording
also ends when the camera is turned off.
DStorage Location
Voice memos for pictures taken with two memory cards inserted and [Backup], [RAW primary- JPEG
secondary], [JPEG primary- JPEG secondary], [RAW primary- HEIF secondary], or [HEIF primary-
HEIF secondary] selected for [Secondary slot function] in the photo shooting menu are recorded
with the copies on both cards.
DVoice Memo File Names
Voice memo file names have the form “DSC_nnnn.WAV”. The voice memo has the same file number
(“nnnn”) as the picture with which it is associated. For example, the voice memo for the picture
“DSC_0002.JPG” would have the file name “DSC_0002.WAV”. Voice memo file names can be viewed on
a computer.
Voice memos for photos recorded with [Adobe RGB] selected for [Color space] in the photo
shooting menu have names of the form “_DSCnnnn.WAV”.
Voice memos for photos recorded with a prefix other than “DSC” selected for [File naming] in the
photo shooting menu will be recorded with the selected prefix in place of “DSC”.
Tip: Recording Using Buttons
Voice memos can be recorded using a control to which [Voice memo] has been assigned using
Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls (playback)].
277 Recording Voice Memos
To play voice memos when viewing photographs marked with h
icons, press the i button, highlight [Play voice memo], and press
J.
Playing Voice Memos
DInterrupting Playback
Pressing the shutter-release button or operating other camera controls may end playback. Playback
ends automatically when another picture is selected or the camera is turned off.
Tip: Using Buttons for Voice Memo Playback
Voice memos can be played by pressing a control to which [Play voice memo] has been assigned
using Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls (playback)]. Press again to end playback.
278 Playing Voice Memos
To delete the voice memo from the current photo, press the O
button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed as shown.
To delete both the photo and the voice memo, highlight [Picture
and voice memo] and press O.
To delete only the voice memo, highlight [Voice memo only]
and press O.
To exit without deleting either the photo or the voice memo,
press D.
With dual-format pictures, you may opt to delete the voice
memo only from the picture on the card in the current slot by
choosing [Selected picture] in the confirmation dialog and then
selecting [Voice memo only].
Deleting Voice Memos
279 Playing Voice Memos
Connecting to HDMI TVs and
Recorders
Connecting to HDMI Devices
The camera can be connected to TVs, recorders, and other devices featuring HDMI connectors. Use a
third-party Type D HDMI cable. The cable must be purchased separately. Always turn the camera off
before connecting or disconnecting a cable.
1
2
HDMI connector for connection to camera
HDMI connector for connection to external device*
Choose a cable with a connector that matches the connector on the HDMI device.
280 Connecting to HDMI Devices
1
2
*
TVs
After tuning the TV to the HDMI input channel, turn the camera on and press the K button to view
pictures on the television screen.
Audio playback volume can be adjusted using the controls on the TV. Camera controls cannot be
used.
If the camera is paired with a smart device running the SnapBridge app, the device can be used to
control playback remotely while the camera is connected to a TV. See SnapBridge online help for
details.
281 TVs
Recorders
In video mode, the camera can record directly to connected HDMI recorders.
If a memory card is inserted in the camera when it is connected to a recorder, video will be recorded
both to the recorder and the memory card. If no memory card is inserted, the footage will be
recorded only to the external device.
282 Recorders
Adjusting Settings
Use the [HDMI] item in the setup menu to adjust settings for HDMI output.
Option Description
[Output resolution]
The format for output to HDMI devices can be selected from [Auto],
[2160p (progressive)], [1080p (progressive)], [1080i (interlaced)],* and
[720p (progressive)].
[Output range]
The RGB video signal input range varies with the HDMI device. [Auto],
which matches the output range to the HDMI device, is recommended
in most situations. If the camera is unable to determine the correct RGB
video signal output range for the HDMI device, you can choose from the
following options:
[Limited range]: For devices with an RGB video signal input range of
16 to 235. Choose this option if you notice a loss of detail in shadows.
[Full range]: For devices with an RGB video signal input range of 0 to
255. Choose this option if you notice that shadows are “washed out” or
too bright.
[Output shooting
info]
Choose whether shooting information is displayed on the HDMI device. If
[ON] is selected, icons and other information in the shooting display will
be recorded with the footage saved to external recorders.
[Mirror camera info
display]
Choose whether the display in the camera monitor remains on while an
HDMI device is connected.
If [OFF] is selected, the display will remain off, reducing the drain on
the camera battery.
[Mirror camera info display] will be fixed at [ON] while [OFF] is
selected for [Output shooting info].
Video will not be output at 1080i when [Auto] is selected for [Output resolution] even when a
recorder that supports this option is connected. Choose [1080i (interlaced)] for interlaced output.
283 Recorders
*
“Output Resolution”
When [Auto] is selected for [HDMI]> [Output resolution] in the setup menu, the camera
automatically detects whether the external recorder supports the frame size and rate selected on
the camera. If it does not, the camera will search for a supported resolution and frame rate in the
order listed below. If no supported resolution and frame rate is found, output will be suspended.
Frame size/frame rate Output resolution/frame rate search order
[3840×2160; 60p]1080/60p V 2160/30p V 1080/30p
[3840×2160; 50p]1080/50p V 2160/25p V 1080/25p
[3840×2160; 30p]2160/30p V 1080/30p
[3840×2160; 25p]2160/25p V 1080/25p
[3840×2160; 24p]2160/24p V 1080/24p
[1920×1080; 120p]1080/120p V 1080/60p V 1080/30p
[1920×1080; 100p]1080/100p V 1080/50p V 1080/25p
[1920×1080; 60p]1080/60p V 1080/30p
[1920×1080; 50p]1080/50p V 1080/25p
[1920×1080; 30p] 1080/30p
[1920×1080; 25p] 1080/25p
[1920×1080; 24p] 1080/24p
When an option other than [Auto] is selected for [HDMI]> [Output resolution] in the setup menu,
the signal will be output at the selected resolution. HDMI output will be suspended if:
output resolution is higher than the current frame size or
the recorder does not support the selected output resolution.
284 Recorders
-
-
DFrame Rates for “Output Resolution” Options Other Than “Auto”
Video recording rates of 120p, 100p, 60p, or 50p will be adjusted as follows if not compatible with the
frame rate chosen for the external recorder.
120p: The frame rate will first drop to 60p. If 60p is also not supported, it will drop to 30p.
100p: The frame rate will first drop to 50p. If 50p is also not supported, it will drop to 25p.
60p: The frame rate will drop to 30p.
50p: The frame rate will drop to 25p.
DFrame Rates for an “Output Resolution” of “1080i (Interlaced)”
Footage filmed at a frame rate of 120p, 60p, 30p, or 24p is output at 60i. Footage filmed at 100p, 50p,
or 25p is output at 50i.
DFrame Rates for an “Output Resolution” of “720p (Progressive)”
Footage filmed at a frame rate of 120p, 60p, 30p, or 24p is output at 60p. Footage filmed at 100p, 50p,
or 25p is output at 50p.
DZoom
The camera display can be zoomed in by pressing the X button during recording, but this has no effect
on the footage output to the recorder.
285 Recorders
YCbCr and Bit Depth
The YCbCr value and bit depth for footage output to external HDMI devices varies with the options
selected for [Video file type] and [Frame size/frame rate] in the video recording menu.
Video file type Frame size/frame rate YCbCr and bit depth
H.265 10-bit (MOV)
3840×2160 60p/50p/30p/
25p/24p 4 : 2 : 2 10-bit
1920×1080
H.265 8-bit (MOV)
3840×2160 60p/50p/30p/
25p/24p 4 : 2 : 2 8-bit
1920×1080
H.264 8-bit (MP4) 1920×1080 4 : 2 : 2 8-bit
DRecording to External Recorders That Support a Bit Depth of 10Bits
The HDMI signal will be output at a bit depth of 10 bits only to HDMI recorders that support this
option.
286 Recorders
HDMI Output and Tone Mode
The tone mode selected via [Video file type] in the video recording menu applies to video output via
HDMI. Equipment that supports HDR (HLG) is required when [HLG] is selected.
External Recording Control
Choosing [ON] for [External rec. cntrl (HDMI)] in the video recording menu allows camera controls to
be used to start and stop recording on the external recorder.
For information on whether your recorder supports external recording control, consult the
manufacturer.
The camera display will turn off automatically when the time selected for Custom Setting c3
[Power off delay]> [Standby timer] expires, ending HDMI output. When recording videos to an
external device, select [Standby timer] and choose [No limit] or a time longer than the anticipated
recording time.
An icon will be displayed in the camera monitor when [ON] is selected: A is displayed if no
footage is currently being recorded, B while videos are being recorded. During recording, check
the recorder and recorder display to ensure that footage is being saved to the device.
Note that selecting [ON] may disrupt the footage output to the device.
287 Recorders
Use the SnapBridge app for wireless connections between the
camera and your smartphone or tablet (“smart device”).
Connecting to Smart Devices
The SnapBridge App
The SnapBridge app can be downloaded from the Apple App Store® or on Google Play™.
Visit the Nikon website for the latest SnapBridge news.
Carefully read any license agreements or the like displayed when SnapBridge is launched and only
proceed if you are willing to accept them.
288 The SnapBridge App
What SnapBridge Can Do for You
The tasks that can be performed using the SnapBridge app are outlined below. For details, see the
SnapBridge app online help:
https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html
Downloading Pictures from the Camera
Download existing pictures to your smart device. They can also be downloaded automatically as they
are taken.
Remote Photography
Control the camera and take pictures from the smart device.
DCan’t Connect?
If you have trouble establishing a connection with the smart device, try:
turning the camera and smart device off and then on again, or
checking wireless settings on the smart device.
289 The SnapBridge App
Wireless Connections
Use the SnapBridge app for wireless connections between the camera and your smart device. You can
connect via either Bluetooth (0 290) or Wi-Fi (0 294). Connecting using Bluetooth allows pictures
to be uploaded automatically as they are taken.
Connecting via Bluetooth (Pairing)
Before connecting via Bluetooth for the first time, you will need to pair the camera and smart device.
DBefore Pairing
Enable Bluetooth on the smart device. For details, see the documentation provided with the device.
Ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged to prevent the devices
turning off unexpectedly.
Check that there is space available on the camera memory card.
290 Wireless Connections
Some operations are performed using the camera, others on the
smart device.
Camera: Select [Connect to smart device]> [Pairing
(Bluetooth)] in the network menu, then highlight [Start
pairing] and press J.
The camera name will be displayed in the monitor.
Pairing
Pair the camera and smart device as described below.
Additional instructions are available via SnapBridge online help.
Smart device: Launch the SnapBridge app and tap [Connect to camera] in the tab.
If this is the first time you have launched the app, you should instead tap [Connect to camera]
in the welcome display.
Smart device: Follow the on-screen instructions.
When prompted, tap the category for your camera and then tap the “pairing” option when
prompted to choose the connection type.
Tap the camera name when prompted.
291 Wireless Connections
1
2
3
The camera and smart device will each display a message
when pairing is complete. The camera will then automatically
exit to the menus.
Camera/smart device: After confirming that the camera and smart device display the
same authentication code, follow the on-screen instructions on both devices to complete
pairing.
Tap the pairing button on the smart device and press the J button on the camera.
The camera and smart device are now paired.
For information on using the SnapBridge app, see online help.
292 Wireless Connections
4
DPairing Error
If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera and tapping the button on the smart
device in Step4, the device will display an error message and pairing will fail.
If you are using an Android device, tap [OK] and return to Step1.
If you are using an iOS device, dismiss the SnapBridge app and check that it is not running in the
background, then request iOS to “forget” the camera before returning to Step1. The request to
“forget” the camera is made via the iOS “Settings” app.
DDisabling Bluetooth
To disable Bluetooth, select [OFF] for [Connect to smart device]> [Pairing (Bluetooth)]>
[Bluetooth connection] in the camera network menu.
Connecting to a Previously-Paired Smart Device
Once the smart device has been paired with the camera, you will be able to connect simply by
enabling Bluetooth on both the smart device and camera and launching the SnapBridge app.
293 Wireless Connections
Some operations are performed using the camera, others on the
smart device.
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Mode)
In Wi-Fi mode, the camera connects directly to the smart device via Wi-Fi, no Bluetooth pairing
required.
DBefore Connecting (Wi-Fi Mode)
Enable Wi-Fi on the smart device. For details, see the documentation provided with the device.
Ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged to prevent the devices
turning off unexpectedly.
Check that there is space available on the camera memory card.
Connecting
Follow the steps below to establish a connection between the camera and smart device in Wi-Fi mode.
Additional instructions are available via SnapBridge online help.
Smart device: Launch the SnapBridge app, open the tab, tap , and select [Wi-Fi
mode].
If this is the first time you have launched the app, you should instead tap [Connect to camera]
in the welcome display. When prompted, tap the category for your camera and then tap the
“Wi‑Fi” option when prompted to choose the connection type.
Camera/smart device: Turn the camera on when prompted.
Do not use any of the controls in the app at this point.
294 Wireless Connections
1
2
Camera: Select [Connect to smart device]> [Wi-Fi
connection] in the network menu, then highlight [Establish
Wi-Fi connection] and press J.
The camera SSID and password will be displayed.
The camera will display a message stating that the
connection is complete.
Smart device: Follow the on-screen instructions to establish a Wi-Fi connection.
On iOS devices, the “Settings” app will launch. Tap [<Settings] to open [Settings], then
scroll up and tap [Wi‑Fi] (which you’ll find near the top of the settings list) to display Wi-Fi
settings.
In the Wi-Fi settings display, select the camera SSID and enter the password displayed by the
camera in Step3.
Smart device: After adjusting device settings as described in Step4, return to the
SnapBridge app.
After establishing a Wi-Fi connection to the camera, the smart device will display Wi-Fi mode
options.
295 Wireless Connections
3
4
5
The camera and smart device are now connected via Wi-Fi.
For information on using the SnapBridge app, see online help.
DTerminating Wi-Fi Mode
To end the Wi-Fi connection, tap in the SnapBridge tab. When the icon changes to , tap
and select [Exit Wi-Fi mode.].
296 Wireless Connections
Install Nikon’s NX Studio software on your computer to download
pictures from cameras connected via USB (0 298).
You can also control the camera using NX Tether software.
Type
-
C
Connect to computers using the camera’s built-in wireless LAN
(0 302).
The connection can be used to upload pictures (0 332) or to
control the camera remotely from computers on the network
running NX Tether software (0 337).
Connect to FTP servers using the camera’s built-in wireless LAN
(0 316).
The connection can be used to upload pictures via FTP (0 332).
FTP
Connecting to Computers or FTP
Servers
Making the Connection
The camera can be connected to a computer or FTP server using any of the methods below.
Computers: Connecting via USB
Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
297 Making the Connection
Computers: Connecting via USB
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable. You can then use NX Studio software to copy
pictures to the computer for viewing and editing.
Installing NX Studio
You will need an Internet connection when installing NX Studio. Visit the Nikon website for the latest
information, including system requirements.
Download the latest NX Studio installer from the website below and follow the on-screen
instructions to complete installation.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
Note that you may be unable to download pictures from the camera using earlier versions of NX
Studio.
298 Computers: Connecting via USB
Copying Pictures to a Computer Using NXStudio
See online help for detailed instructions.
Connect the camera to the computer.
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory card is inserted, connect the supplied
USB cable as shown.
Tip: Using a Card Reader
Pictures can also be copied from memory cards inserted in third-party card readers connected
to the computer. You should however check that the card is compatible with the card reader.
Turn the camera on.
The Nikon Transfer2 component of NX Studio will start. Nikon Transfer2 image transfer
software is installed as part of NX Studio.
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select Nikon Transfer2.
If Nikon Transfer2 does not start automatically, launch NX Studio and click the “Import” icon.
299 Computers: Connecting via USB
1
2
Click [Start Transfer].
Pictures on the memory card will be copied to the computer.
Turn the camera off.
Disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete.
300 Computers: Connecting via USB
3
4
Some computers may be configured to display an AutoPlay prompt
when the camera is connected.
Click the dialog and then click [Nikon Transfer2] to select Nikon
Transfer2.
DWindows
DmacOS
If Nikon Transfer2 does not start automatically, confirm that the camera is connected and then launch
Image Capture (an application that comes with macOS) and select Nikon Transfer2 as the application
that opens when the camera is detected.
DCaution: Transferring Videos
Do not attempt to transfer videos from the memory card while it is inserted in a camera of a different
make or model. Doing so could result in the videos being deleted without being transferred.
DCautions: Connecting to Computers
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress.
Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Be sure also to keep the
connectors straight when disconnecting the cable.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting a cable.
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged.
DUSB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard.
Connect the camera to a pre-installed USB port.
301 Computers: Connecting via USB
Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
The camera can connect to computers via Wi-Fi (built-in wireless LAN).
DConnecting to Multiple Devices
The camera can connect to only one type of device (computer, FTP server, or smart device) at a time.
End the current connection before attempting to connect to a device of a different type.
DCan’t Connect?
If you have trouble connecting, try:
turning the camera off and then on again,
checking wireless settings on the computer, or
restarting the computer.
Tip: Wireless LAN Errors
For information on wireless-related errors, see “Troubleshooting Wireless LAN Connections” (0 339).
The Wireless Transmitter Utility
Before you will be able to connect to a wireless LAN, you will need to pair the camera with the
computer using Nikon’s Wireless Transmitter Utility software.
Once the devices are paired, you will be able to connect to the computer from the camera.
The Wireless Transmitter Utility is available for download from the Nikon Download Center. Check
the version and system requirements and be sure to download the latest version.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
302 Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
The camera and computer connect via direct
wireless link. The camera acts as a wireless LAN
access point, letting you connect when working
outdoors and in other situations in which the
FTP server is not already connected to a wireless
network and eliminating the need for complicated
adjustments to settings. The computer cannot
connect to the Internet while connected to the
camera.
Before proceeding, check that the Wireless
Transmitter Utility (0 302) is installed on the
computer.
Select [Connect to computer] in the network menu, then
highlight [Network settings] and press 2.
Highlight [Create profile] and press J.
Connecting to Computers via Wireless LAN
The camera can connect to computers either by direct wireless link (access-point mode) or via a
wireless router on an existing network, including home networks (infrastructure mode).
Direct Wireless Connection (Access-Point Mode)
303 Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
1
2
Name the new profile.
To proceed to the next step without changing the default
name, press X.
Whatever name you choose will appear in the network
menu [Connect to computer]> [Network settings] list.
To rename the profile, press J. For information on text
entry, see “Text Entry” (0 74). Press X to proceed after
entering a name.
Highlight [Direct connection to computer] and press J.
The camera SSID and encryption key will be displayed.
304 Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
3
4
Windows:
Click the wireless LAN icon in the taskbar.
Select the SSID displayed by the camera in Step4.
When prompted to enter the network security key, enter
the encryption key displayed by the camera in Step4. The
computer will initiate a connection to the camera.
macOS:
Click the wireless LAN icon in the menu bar.
Select the SSID displayed by the camera in Step4.
When prompted to enter the network security key, enter
the encryption key displayed by the camera in Step4. The
computer will initiate a connection to the camera.
Start pairing.
When prompted, launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the
computer.
Select the camera in the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
Select the name displayed by the camera in Step6 and click
[Next].
Establish a connection to the camera.
305 Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
5
6
7
In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, enter the authentication
code displayed by the camera.
The camera will display an authentication code.
Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the
Wireless Transmitter Utility and click [Next].
Complete the pairing process.
When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is
complete, press J.
In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, click [Next]; you will
be prompted to choose a destination folder. For more
information, see online help for the Wireless Transmitter
Utility.
A wireless connection will be established between the camera and computer when pairing is
complete.
306 Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
8
9
Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the profile name will be
displayed in green in the camera [Connect to computer]
menu.
If the profile name is not displayed in green, connect to the
camera via the wireless network list on your computer.
A wireless connection has now been established between the camera and the computer.
Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as described under “Uploading
Pictures” (0 332) in the chapter titled “What You Can Do When the Camera Is Connected to a
Computer or FTP Server.
For information on controlling the camera from a computer using NX Tether, see the section
on “Camera Control” (0 337) in the chapter titled “What You Can Do When the Camera Is
Connected to a Computer or FTP Server.
Tip: Firewall Settings
TCP port 15740 and UDP port 5353 are used for connections to computers. File transfer may be
blocked if the server firewall is not configured to allow access to these ports.
307 Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
10
The camera connects to a computer on an existing
network (including home networks) via a wireless
router. The computer can still connect to the
Internet while connected to the camera.
Before proceeding, check that the Wireless
Transmitter Utility (0 302) is installed on the
computer.
Select [Connect to computer] in the network menu, then
highlight [Network settings] and press 2.
Highlight [Create profile] and press J.
Name the new profile.
To proceed to the next step without changing the default
name, press X.
Whatever name you choose will appear in the network
menu [Connect to computer]> [Network settings] list.
To rename the profile, press J. For information on text
entry, see “Text Entry” (0 74). Press X to proceed after
entering a name.
Connecting in Infrastructure Mode
DInfrastructure Mode
Connection to computers beyond the local area network is not supported. You can connect only to
computers on the same network.
308 Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
1
2
3
Highlight [Search for Wi-Fi network] and press J.
The camera will search for networks currently active in the
vicinity and list them by name (SSID).
To connect without entering an SSID or encryption key, press
X in Step4. Next, press J and choose from the options below.
After connecting, proceed to Step7.
D“Easy Connect”
Option Description
[Push-button WPS]For routers that support push-button WPS. Press the WPS button on
the router and then press the camera J button to connect.
[PIN-entry WPS]
The camera will display a PIN. Using a computer, enter the PIN on the
router. For more information, see the documentation provided with
the router.
309 Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
4
Choose a network.
Highlight a network SSID and press J.
The band on which each SSID operates is indicated by an
icon.
Encrypted networks are indicated by a h icon. If the selected
network is encrypted (h), you will be prompted to enter the
encryption key. If the network is not encrypted, proceed to
Step7.
If the desired network is not displayed, press X to search
again.
Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by blank entries in
the network list.
To connect to a network with a hidden SSID, highlight a
blank entry and press J. Next, press J; the camera will
prompt you to provide an SSID.
Enter the network name and press X. Press X again; the
camera will now prompt you to enter the encryption key.
DHidden SSIDs
310 Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
5
Enter the encryption key.
Press J and enter the encryption key for the wireless router.
For more information, see the documentation for the
wireless router.
Press X when entry is complete.
Press X again to initiate the connection. A message will
be displayed for a few seconds when the connection is
established.
311 Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
6
Obtain or select an IP address.
Highlight one of the following options and press J.
Start pairing.
When prompted, launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the
computer.
Option Description
[Obtain automatically]
Select this option if the network is configured to supply the IP
address automatically. A “configuration complete” message will be
displayed once an IP address has been assigned.
[Enter manually]
Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually.
Press J; you will be prompted to enter the IP address.
Rotate the main command dial to highlight segments.
Press 4 or 2 to change the highlighted segment and press J
to save changes.
Next, press X; a “configuration complete” message will be
displayed. Press X again to display the sub-net mask.
Press 1 or 3 to edit the sub-net mask and press J; a
configuration complete” message will be displayed.
Press J to proceed when the “configuration complete” message is displayed.
312 Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
7
8
9
Select the camera in the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
Select the name displayed by the camera in Step9 and click
[Next].
In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, enter the authentication
code displayed by the camera.
The camera will display an authentication code.
Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the
Wireless Transmitter Utility and click [Next].
313 Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
10
11
Complete the pairing process.
When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is
complete, press J.
In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, click [Next]; you will
be prompted to choose a destination folder. For more
information, see online help for the Wireless Transmitter
Utility.
Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the profile name will be
displayed in green in the camera [Connect to computer]
menu.
A wireless connection will be established between the camera and computer when pairing is
complete.
A wireless connection has now been established between the camera and the computer.
Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as described under “Uploading
Pictures” (0 332) in the chapter titled “What You Can Do When the Camera Is Connected to a
Computer or FTP Server.
For information on controlling the camera from a computer using NX Tether, see the section
on “Camera Control” (0 337) in the chapter titled “What You Can Do When the Camera Is
Connected to a Computer or FTP Server.
314 Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
12
13
Ending the Connection to the Computer
You can end the connection by:
turning the camera off, or
selecting [End current connection] for [Connect to computer]> [Network settings] in the
network menu.
DAccess-Point Mode
An error will occur if the computers wireless connection is disabled before the camera’s. Disable
camera’s connection first.
315 Computers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
The camera can connect to FTP servers via Wi-Fi (built-in wireless LAN).
DConnecting to Multiple Devices
The camera can connect to only one type of device (computer, FTP server, or smart device) at a time.
End the current connection before attempting to connect to a device of a different type.
DCan’t Connect?
If you have trouble connecting, try:
turning the camera off and then on again,
checking wireless settings on the FTP server, or
restarting the FTP server.
Tip: Wireless LAN Errors
For information on wireless-related errors, see “Troubleshooting Wireless LAN Connections” (0 339).
316 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
The camera and FTP server connect via direct
wireless link. The camera acts as a wireless LAN
access point, letting you connect when working
outdoors and in other situations in which the
FTP server is not already connected to a wireless
network and eliminating the need for complicated
adjustments to settings.
FTP
Select [Connect to FTP server] in the network menu, then
highlight [Network settings] and press 2.
Connecting to FTP Servers via Wireless LAN
The camera can connect to FTP servers either by direct wireless link (access-point mode) or via a
wireless router on an existing network, including home networks (infrastructure mode).
DFTP Servers
Servers can be configured using standard FTP services—including IIS (Internet Information Services)
—available with Windows 11 and Windows 10.
Internet FTP connections and connection to FTP servers running third-party software are not
supported.
DFTPS Servers
Before connecting to a server via FTPS, you will need to load a root certificate onto the camera. This
can be done using [Connect to FTP server]> [Options]> [Manage root certificate]> [Import
root certificate] in the network menu.
Contact the network administrator for the FTPS server in question for information on acquiring root
certificates.
Direct Wireless Connection (Access-Point Mode)
317 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
1
Highlight [Create profile] and press J.
Highlight [Connection wizard] and press 2.
The connection wizard will launch.
Choose [Configure manually] to configure settings manually.
Name the new profile.
To proceed to the next step without changing the default
name, press X.
Whatever name you choose will appear in the network
menu [Connect to FTP server]> [Network settings] list.
To rename the profile, press J. For information on text
entry, see “Text Entry” (0 74). Press X to proceed after
entering a name.
DManual Configuration
318 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
2
3
4
Highlight [Direct connection to computer] and press J.
The camera SSID and encryption key will be displayed.
Windows:
Click the wireless LAN icon in the taskbar.
Select the SSID displayed by the camera in Step5.
When prompted to enter the network security key, enter
the encryption key displayed by the camera in Step5. The
computer will initiate a connection to the camera.
macOS:
Click the wireless LAN icon in the menu bar.
Select the SSID displayed by the camera in Step5.
When prompted to enter the network security key, enter
the encryption key displayed by the camera in Step5. The
computer will initiate a connection to the camera.
Establish a connection to the camera.
319 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
5
6
Choose the server type.
Highlight [FTP], [SFTP] (SSH FTP), or [FTPS] (FTP-SSL) and
press J to display a dialog where you can choose a login
method.
Log in.
Highlight one of the following options and press J.
Option Description
[Anonymous login]
Select this option if the server does not require a user ID or password.
This option can only be used with servers that are configured for
anonymous login. If login is successful, the camera will prompt you to
choose a destination.
[Enter user ID]
Enter a user ID and password. Press J to log in when entry is
complete. If login is successful, the camera will prompt you to choose
a destination.
Tip: Firewall Settings
The ports used for FTP vary with the server type. The port numbers are listed below.
[FTP]: TCP ports 21 and 32768 through 61000
[SFTP]: TCP ports 22 and 32768 through 61000
[FTPS]: TCP ports 21 and 32768 through 61000
File transfer may be blocked if the server firewall is not configured to allow access to the
appropriate ports.
320 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
7
8
-
-
-
Choose a destination folder.
Highlight one of the following options and press J.
Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the profile name will be
displayed in green in the camera [Connect to FTP server]
menu.
If the profile name is not displayed in green, connect to the
camera via the wireless network list on the FTP server.
“FTP” will appear in the camera shooting display once a
connection is established. If a connection error occurs, this
indicator will be displayed in red together with a C icon.
Option Description
[Home folder]
Select this option to select the servers home folder as the
destination for pictures uploaded from the camera. A “setup
complete” dialog will be displayed if the operation is successful.
[Enter folder name]
Enter the destination folder name manually. The folder must already
exist on the server. Enter the folder name and path when prompted
and press J to display the “setup complete” dialog.
A wireless connection has now been established between the camera and the FTP server.
Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the FTP server as described under
“Uploading Pictures” (0 332) in the chapter titled “What You Can Do When the Camera Is
Connected to a Computer or FTP Server.
321 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
9
10
The camera connects to an FTP server on an
existing network (including home networks) via a
wireless router.
FTP
Select [Connect to FTP server] in the network menu, then
highlight [Network settings] and press 2.
Highlight [Create profile] and press J.
Connecting in Infrastructure Mode
Tip: Infrastructure Mode
Infrastructure mode supports connection to FTP servers on different networks.
322 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
1
2
Highlight [Connection wizard] and press 2.
The connection wizard will launch.
Choose [Configure manually] to configure settings manually.
Name the new profile.
To proceed to the next step without changing the default
name, press X.
Whatever name you choose will appear in the network
menu [Connect to FTP server]> [Network settings] list.
To rename the profile, press J. For information on text
entry, see “Text Entry” (0 74). Press X to proceed after
entering a name.
DManual Configuration
323 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
3
4
Highlight [Search for Wi-Fi network] and press J.
The camera will search for networks currently active in the
vicinity and list them by name (SSID).
To connect without entering an SSID or encryption key, press
X in Step5. Next, press J and choose from the options below.
After connecting, proceed to Step8.
D“Easy Connect”
Option Description
[Push-button WPS]For routers that support push-button WPS. Press the WPS button on
the router and then press the camera J button to connect.
[PIN-entry WPS]
The camera will display a PIN. Using a computer, enter the PIN on the
router. For more information, see the documentation provided with
the router.
324 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
5
Choose a network.
Highlight a network SSID and press J.
The band on which each SSID operates is indicated by an
icon.
Encrypted networks are indicated by a h icon. If the selected
network is encrypted (h), you will be prompted to enter the
encryption key. If the network is not encrypted, proceed to
Step8.
If the desired network is not displayed, press X to search
again.
Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by blank entries in
the network list.
To connect to a network with a hidden SSID, highlight a
blank entry and press J. Next, press J; the camera will
prompt you to provide an SSID.
Enter the network name and press X. Press X again; the
camera will now prompt you to enter the encryption key.
DHidden SSIDs
325 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
6
Enter the encryption key.
Press J and enter the encryption key for the wireless router.
For more information, see the documentation for the
wireless router.
Press X when entry is complete.
Press X again to initiate the connection. A message will
be displayed for a few seconds when the connection is
established.
326 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
7
Obtain or select an IP address.
Highlight one of the following options and press J.
Choose the server type.
Highlight [FTP], [SFTP] (SSH FTP), or [FTPS] (FTP-SSL) and
press J to display a dialog where you can enter the server
address.
Option Description
[Obtain automatically]
Select this option if the network is configured to supply the IP
address automatically. A “configuration complete” message will be
displayed once an IP address has been assigned.
[Enter manually]
Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually.
Press J; you will be prompted to enter the IP address.
Rotate the main command dial to highlight segments.
Press 4 or 2 to change the highlighted segment and press J
to save changes.
Next, press X; a “configuration complete” message will be
displayed. Press X again to display the sub-net mask.
Press 1 or 3 to edit the sub-net mask and press J; a
configuration complete” message will be displayed.
Press J to proceed when the “configuration complete” message is displayed.
327 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
8
9
10
Press J to enter the server URL or IP address.
Press X when entry is complete.
Press X again to connect to the FTP server. You will be
prompted to choose a login method.
Enter the server address.
328 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
11
Log in.
Highlight one of the following options and press J.
Option Description
[Anonymous login]
Select this option if the server does not require a user ID or password.
This option can only be used with servers that are configured for
anonymous login. If login is successful, the camera will prompt you to
choose a destination.
[Enter user ID]
Enter a user ID and password. Press J to log in when entry is
complete. If login is successful, the camera will prompt you to choose
a destination.
Tip: Firewall Settings
The ports used for FTP vary with the server type. The port numbers are listed below.
[FTP]: TCP ports 21 and 32768 through 61000
[SFTP]: TCP ports 22 and 32768 through 61000
[FTPS]: TCP ports 21 and 32768 through 61000
File transfer may be blocked if the server firewall is not configured to allow access to the
appropriate ports.
329 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
12
-
-
-
Choose a destination folder.
Highlight one of the following options and press J.
Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the profile name will be
displayed in green in the camera [Connect to FTP server]
menu.
“FTP” will appear in the camera shooting display once a
connection is established. If a connection error occurs, this
indicator will be displayed in red together with a C icon.
Option Description
[Home folder]
Select this option to select the servers home folder as the
destination for pictures uploaded from the camera. A “setup
complete” dialog will be displayed if the operation is successful.
[Enter folder name]
Enter the destination folder name manually. The folder must already
exist on the server. Enter the folder name and path when prompted
and press J to display the “setup complete” dialog.
A wireless connection has now been established between the camera and the FTP server.
Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the FTP server as described under
“Uploading Pictures” (0 332) in the chapter titled “What You Can Do When the Camera Is
Connected to a Computer or FTP Server.
330 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
13
14
Ending the Connection to the FTP Server
You can end the connection by:
turning the camera off, or
selecting [End current connection] for [Connect to FTP server]> [Network settings] in the
network menu.
DAccess-Point Mode
An error will occur if the FTP server’s wireless connection is disabled before the camera’s. Disable
camera’s connection first.
331 FTP Servers: Connecting via Wireless LAN
Before uploading pictures, connect the camera to the destination
via wireless LAN (0 302, 0 316). After creating a profile,
confirm that the profile name is listed in green in the [Connect to
computer] or [Connect to FTP server] display.
To upload pictures to a computer, select [Picture transfer] for
[Connect to computer]> [Connection type] in the network
menu.
What You Can Do When the Camera Is
Connected to a Computer or FTP Server
Wireless LAN connections can be used to upload pictures or control the camera remotely.
Uploading Pictures
Pictures can be selected for upload during playback. They can also be uploaded automatically as they
are taken.
DCaution: Access Point Mode
Select a host profile and enable camera Wi-Fi before connecting.
DDestination Folders for Upload to a Computer
By default, pictures are uploaded to the following folders:
Windows: \Users\(user name)\Pictures\Wireless Transmitter Utility
macOS: /Users/(user name)/Pictures/Wireless Transmitter Utility
The destination folder can be selected using the Wireless Transmitter Utility. For more information,
see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
332 What You Can Do When the Camera Is
Connected to a Computer or FTP Server
-
-
Select a picture and press the i button.
The i menu items used to select pictures for upload vary with
the type of device connected.
Highlight [Select for upload to computer] or [Select for
upload (FTP)] and press J.
A white “priority upload” icon will appear on the picture. If
the camera is currently connected to a network, upload will
begin immediately and the icon will turn green.
Otherwise, upload will begin when a connection is
established.
Repeat Steps2–3 to upload additional pictures.
Selecting Pictures for Upload
Press the K button on the camera and select full-frame or thumbnail playback.
DRemoving Upload Marking
Repeat Steps2–3 to remove upload marking from selected pictures.
To remove upload marking from all pictures, select [Connect to computer] or [Connect to FTP
server] in the network menu and choose [Options]> [Deselect all?].
Tip: Filtering Pictures for Upload
The [Filtered playback] item in the playback i menu can be used to display only pictures that meet
chosen criteria (0 229). The pictures can then all be selected for upload by highlighting [Select all for
computer upload] or [Select all for upload (FTP)] in the i menu and pressing J.
333 What You Can Do When the Camera Is
Connected to a Computer or FTP Server
1
2
3
To upload new photos as they are taken, select [Connect to
computer] or [Connect to FTP server] in the network menu and
choose [ON] for [Options]> [Auto upload].
Upload status is indicated by the upload icon.
Uploading Photos as They Are Taken
Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the memory card. Be sure a memory card
is inserted in the camera.
Videos are not uploaded automatically. They must instead be uploaded manually from the playback
display.
The Upload Icon
s (white): Priority upload
The picture has been manually selected for upload. Pictures marked with this icon will be uploaded
before pictures marked W (“upload”).
W (white): Upload
The picture has been selected for upload but upload has not yet begun.
X (green): Uploading
Upload in progress.
Y (blue): Uploaded
Upload complete.
334 What You Can Do When the Camera Is
Connected to a Computer or FTP Server
The “Connect to Computer”/“Connect to FTP Server”
Upload Status Display
The [Connect to computer] and [Connect to FTP server] displays show the following:
4 3 2
1
Status:
The status of the connection to the host. The profile name is displayed in green when a
connection is established.
While files are being transferred, the status display shows “Now uploading” preceded by the
name of the file being sent. Errors are also displayed here.
The display for [Connect to FTP server] also includes error codes (0 340).
Signal strength: The wireless signal strength.
Band: The band used by the wireless network to which the camera is connected in
infrastructure mode.
Pictures/time remaining: The number of pictures remaining and the time needed to send
them. The time remaining is an estimate only.
335 What You Can Do When the Camera Is
Connected to a Computer or FTP Server
1
2
3
4
DLoss of Signal
Wireless transmission may be interrupted if the signal is lost. Upload of pictures with upload marking
can be resumed by turning the camera off and then on again once the signal has been re-established.
DCaution: During Upload
Do not remove the memory card during upload.
DVoice Memos
Voice memos will be included when the associated pictures are transmitted. They cannot, however, be
uploaded separately.
DTurning the Camera Off
The camera saves transfer marking when turned off and resumes upload when next turned on.
DCaution: Uploading Protected Pictures via FTP
The copies on the FTP server will not be protected even if the originals are. Markings can be added
using ratings (0 225).
336 What You Can Do When the Camera Is
Connected to a Computer or FTP Server
Before using NX Tether, connect the camera and computer via
wireless LAN (0 302). After creating a profile, confirm that the
profile name is listed in green in the [Connect to computer]
display.
Select [Camera control] for [Connect to computer]>
[Connection type] in the network menu.
Camera Control
The camera can be controlled from a computer running NX Tether software. Photos can be saved
directly to the computer instead of to the memory card and can consequently be taken even when no
memory card is inserted in the camera.
Note that the camera standby timer does not expire in camera control mode.
Launch the copy of NX Tether installed on the host computer.
Control the camera using NX Tether.
For information on taking pictures using NX Tether, see NX Tether online help.
337 What You Can Do When the Camera Is
Connected to a Computer or FTP Server
1
2
3
The “Connect to Computer” Camera Control Display
The [Connect to computer] display shows the following:
1
3 2
Status: The status of the connection to the host. The profile name is displayed in green when
a connection is established. Errors are also displayed here (0 339).
Signal strength: The wireless signal strength.
Band: The band used by the wireless network to which the camera is connected in
infrastructure mode.
DLoss of Signal
Loss of signal while the camera is connected to a wireless network may disrupt the connection to the
computer. Select [End current connection] for [Connect to computer]> [Network settings] in the
network menu before connecting to the network again. When the signal is re-established, the camera
will reconnect to the computer and resume upload of any pictures that have yet to be transferred.
Note that upload cannot be resumed if you turn the camera off before transfer is complete.
338 What You Can Do When the Camera Is
Connected to a Computer or FTP Server
1
2
3
Troubleshooting Wireless LAN
Connections
Refer to this section for information on errors involving wireless LAN connections.
For information on the Wireless Transmitter Utility, see the utility’s online help.
Problems and Solutions
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
Problem Solution
The camera displays a wireless error.
The camera displays a TCP/IP error.
The camera displays an FTP error.
Connection settings require adjustment. Check
settings for the wireless router, FTP server, or host
computer and adjust camera settings appropriately
(0 302, 0 316).
Check the error code, if any. For more information, see
“Error Codes” (0 340).
“Connecting to computer” does not clear
from the camera display.Check firewall settings (0 307, 0 320).
The camera displays a “no memory card”
error.
The memory card is inserted incorrectly or not at all.
Check that card is inserted correctly (0 82).
Upload is interrupted and fails to resume. Upload will resume if the camera is turned off and
then on again (0 336).
The connection is unreliable.
If the camera is connected in infrastructure mode,
check that the router is set to a channel between 1
and 8 (0 731, 0 736).
339 Troubleshooting Wireless LAN Connections
Error Codes
The following messages and error codes may be displayed if an error occurs while the camera is
connected to an FTP server via wireless LAN.
[Wireless Error.]
Error code Solution
Err.11
Confirm that the device to which you are attempting to connect is on.
Check the SSID (0 736).
Err.12
Confirm that you are using the correct password for the selected SSID.
Confirm that you are using the correct authentication method (0 736).
Err.13
Confirm that the device to which you are attempting to connect is on.
Turn the camera off and then on again.
Err.1F Turn the camera off and then on again.
[TCP/IP Error.]
Error code Solution
Err.21 Check that the TCP/IP address and sub-net mask are correct (0 736).
Err.22 Duplicate TCP/IP address. Choose a different address (0 736).
[PTP/IP Error.]
Error code Solution
Err.41 Turn the camera off and then on again.
340 Troubleshooting Wireless LAN Connections
[FTP Error.]
Error code Solution
Err.31 Check that the FTP server address is correct (0 736).
Err.32 Check that the login name and password are correct (0 736).
Err.34 Check that the destination folder name is correct (0 736).
Err.35 Confirm that the destination folder is not write-protected.
Err.36 Check the DNS (0 736).
Err.37
Check firewall settings (0 320).
Check PASV mode settings (0 736).
Err.3F Turn the camera off and then on again.
[Error authenticating FTP server credentials.]
Error code Solution
Err.61 Check that the FTP server supports TLS 1.2 or later.
Err.62
Check that you are using the correct root certificate (0 317, 0 742).
Err.63
Err.64 The camera cannot connect because the FTP server has requested a
client certificate. Check FTP server settings.
Err.65 Turn the camera off and then on again.
341 Troubleshooting Wireless LAN Connections
A master camera can be used to release the
shutters on up to ten remote cameras in the same
group (0 343).
Synchronize the clocks on multiple cameras via a
network (0 353).
Connecting to Other Cameras
What Inter-camera Connections Can Do
for You
Camera-Based Remote Photography (Synchronized
Release)
Clock Synchronization (Synchronize Date and
Time)
342 What Inter-camera Connections Can Do for You
Select [Connect to other cameras] in the network menu,
then highlight [Network settings] and press 2.
Highlight [Create profile] and press J.
Name the new profile.
To proceed to the next step without changing the default
name, press X.
Whatever name you choose will appear in the network
menu [Connect to other cameras]> [Network settings]
list.
To rename the profile, press J. For information on text
entry, see “Text Entry” (0 74). Press X to proceed after
entering a name.
Synchronized Release
Configuring and Using Synchronized Release
Follow the steps below to create host profiles for synchronized release. Each camera saves the pictures
it takes to its own memory card. Repeat the process to create identical profiles for each camera.
343 Synchronized Release
1
2
3
Highlight [Search for Wi-Fi network] and press J.
The camera will search for networks currently active in the
vicinity and list them by name (SSID).
To connect without entering an SSID or encryption key, press
X in Step4. Next, press J and choose from the options
below.
D“Easy Connect”
Option Description
[Push-button WPS]For routers that support push-button WPS. Press the WPS button
on the router and then press the camera J button to connect.
[PIN-entry WPS]
The camera will display a PIN. Using a computer, enter the PIN on
the router. For more information, see the documentation provided
with the router.
After connecting, proceed to Step7.
344 Synchronized Release
4
Choose a network.
Highlight a network SSID and press J.
The band on which each SSID operates is indicated by an
icon.
Encrypted networks are indicated by a h icon. If the selected
network is encrypted (h), you will be prompted to enter the
encryption key. If the network is not encrypted, proceed to
Step7.
If the desired network is not displayed, press X to search
again.
Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by blank entries in
the network list.
To connect to a network with a hidden SSID, highlight a
blank entry and press J. Next, press J; the camera will
prompt you to provide an SSID.
Enter the network name and press X. Press X again; the
camera will now prompt you to enter the encryption key.
DHidden SSIDs
345 Synchronized Release
5
Enter the encryption key.
Press J and enter the encryption key for the wireless router.
For more information, see the documentation for the
wireless router.
Press X when entry is complete.
Press X again to initiate the connection. A message will
be displayed for a few seconds when the connection is
established.
346 Synchronized Release
6
Obtain or select an IP address.
Highlight one of the following options and press J.
Highlight [Group name], press 2, and enter a group name.
Enter a group name for the synchronized cameras. Group
names can be up to eight characters long.
All master and remote cameras on the network must be in
the same group.
Option Description
[Obtain automatically]
Select this option if the network is configured to supply the IP
address automatically. A “configuration complete” message will be
displayed once an IP address has been assigned.
It is recommended that you note the remote camera IP
address, as you will need it in subsequent steps.
[Enter manually]
Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually.
Press J; you will be prompted to enter the IP address.
Rotate the main command dial to highlight segments.
Press 4 or 2 to change the highlighted segment and press J
to save changes.
Next, press X; a “configuration complete” message will be
displayed. Press X again to display the sub-net mask.
Press 1 or 3 to edit the sub-net mask and press J; a
configuration complete” message will be displayed.
Press J to proceed when the “configuration complete” message is displayed.
The profile name is displayed when a connection is established.
347 Synchronized Release
7
8
9
Highlight [Master/remote] and press 2.
Choose a role for each camera from “master” and “remote”.
[Master camera]: Pressing the shutter-release button on the
master camera releases the shutters on the remote cameras.
Each group can have only one master. If the group has
multiple master cameras, only the first to connect to the
network will actually serve in that capacity.
[Remote camera]: The shutters on the remote cameras are
synchronized with the shutter on the master camera.
On the master camera, highlight [Remote camera list] and
press 2.
Cameras assigned the remote camera role in Step10 are added
to the master camera’s remote camera list. The master camera
can store information for up to 10 remote cameras in slots [01]
through [10].
Highlight the desired slot and press 2.
Remote camera options will be displayed.
Highlight [Address] and press 2.
You will be prompted to enter an IP address.
Repeat Steps1 through 10 for the remaining cameras.
When configuring remote cameras, be sure to select [Remote camera] in Step10.
348 Synchronized Release
10
11
12
13
14
Enter the remote camera IP address.
Enter the remote camera IP address you noted in Step7.
Rotate the main command dial to highlight segments.
Press 4 or 2 to change the highlighted segment and press
J to save changes.
Press X to add the remote camera to the master camera
remote camera list and establish a connection.
To view a remote camera’s IP address, select [Connect to other
cameras]> [Network settings] in the camera’s network menu,
highlight a synchronized release host profile, press 2, and
select [TCP/IP].
Tip: Viewing Remote Camera IP Addresses
349 Synchronized Release
15
The master camera shows the number of cameras in the
group currently connected or not connected.
The shooting display for the master camera shows a k icon
together with the number of remote cameras connected.
Add the remaining remote cameras.
When connecting to wireless networks, the cameras will display the band used by the
selected SSID.
DConnection Errors
In the event of remote camera connection errors, the remote camera count in the master
camera shooting display will turn red and instead show the number of remote cameras that
failed to connect.
Take pictures.
Pressing the shutter-release button on the master camera releases the shutters on the remote
cameras.
350 Synchronized Release
16
17
To view remote camera status, highlight [Remote camera list] on
the master camera and press 2.
Remote cameras are identified by IP address.
Remote camera status is displayed as follows:
[Connected]: Normal connection.
[Busy]: The camera is being controlled from another master
camera.
[Error]: One of the following errors has been detected:
The remote camera standby timer has expired.
The remote camera is off.
The remote camera is not in the same group as the master
camera.
The IP address is incorrect.
[OFF]: Either
no remote camera has been assigned to the slot, or
[OFF] is selected for [Connect to remote camera] on the
camera in question.
Highlighting a remote camera with the [Connected] label and
pressing 2 displays the number of pictures awaiting upload
from the camera via FTP, FTP connection status, the battery level,
and the number of exposures remaining.
The entries for the remote cameras previously used for
synchronized release will show the time of the most recent shot.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Tip: Suspending Synchronized Release
To temporarily disable synchronized release without ending the camera’s connection to the network,
select [OFF] for [Connect to other cameras]> [Synchronized release] in the network menu.
Tip: Viewing Remote Camera Status
351 Synchronized Release
To edit remote camera settings from the master camera,
highlight the camera in the remote camera list and press 2.
To temporarily suspend the connection to the selected
camera, select [OFF] for [Connect to remote camera].
To temporarily suspend synchronized release on the selected
camera, select [OFF] for [Synchronized release].
If desired, you can then edit the camera’s IP address by
highlighting [Address] and pressing 2. To reconnect, select
[ON] for [Connect to remote camera]. No connection will
be established if no remote camera exists at the specified
address.
-
-
-
352 Synchronized Release
On the master camera, select [Connect to other cameras],
then highlight [Synchronize date and time] and press 2.
Master camera clock settings will be displayed.
[Synchronize date and time] is not available on the remote
cameras.
[Synchronize date and time] will not be available if no
camera is connected to the network.
Synchronizing Camera Clocks
When the cameras are connected to the network using [Connect to other cameras] in the network
menu, the clocks on all cameras in the current group connected can be set to the time and date
reported by the master camera. Synchronization applies to all options in the setup menu [Time zone
and date] display.
Connect the cameras to the network using [Connect to other cameras]> [Network
settings] in the network menu.
For more information, see “Synchronized Release” (0 343).
Press J.
The clocks on the remote cameras will be set to the date and time reported by the master
camera.
A message will be displayed when the process is complete.
Press J again to return to the [Connect to other cameras] display.
353 Synchronizing Camera Clocks
1
2
3
Take pictures using a flash unit mounted on the camera. See the following
pages for more information (0 355).
Take pictures with one or more remote flash units using wireless
flash control (Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL). For more
information, see “What Is Remote Flash Photography?” (0 364).
Flash Photography
“On-Camera” Versus “Remote”
You can take pictures using an optional flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe or one or
more remote flash units.
When using a flash, select [OFF] for [Silent mode] in the setup menu.
Camera-Mounted Flash Units
Remote Flash Photography
354 “On-Camera” Versus “Remote”
Mount a flash unit on the camera accessory shoe.
See the documentation supplied with each Speedlight for
information on mounting the unit on the camera.
Using an On-Camera Flash
Turn on the camera and flash unit.
The flash will begin charging; the flash-ready indicator (c) will appear in the shooting display
when charging is complete.
Choose the flash control mode (0 358) and flash mode (0 359).
Adjust shutter speed and aperture.
Take pictures.
355 Using an On-Camera Flash
1
2
3
4
5
DShutter Speed
Shutter speed can be set as follows when an optional flash unit is used:
Shooting mode Shutter speed
bSet automatically by camera (¹⁄₂₀₀s–¹⁄₆₀s)
P, ASet automatically by camera (¹⁄₂₀₀s–¹⁄₆₀s)*
S¹⁄₂₀₀s–30s
M¹⁄₂₀₀s–30s, Bulb, Time
Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30s if slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or slow sync with
red-eye reduction is selected for flash mode.
DCaution: Third-Party Flash Units
The camera cannot be used with flash units that would apply voltages over 250V to the camera’s
X contacts or short-circuit contacts on the accessory shoe. Use of such flash units could not only
interfere with normal operation of the camera but also damage the flash sync circuits of the camera
and/or flash.
356 Using an On-Camera Flash
*
Di-TTL Flash Control
When an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System is attached and set to
TTL, the camera uses monitor pre-flashes for balanced or standard “i-TTL fill-flash” flash control. i-TTL
flash control is not available with flash units that do not support the Nikon Creative Lighting System.
The camera supports the following types of i-TTL flash control:
Flash control Description
i-TTL balanced fill-flash
The camera uses “i-TTL balanced fill-flash” flash control for a natural
balance between the main subject and ambient background lighting.
After the shutter-release button is pressed and immediately before the
main flash, the flash unit emits a series of monitor pre-flashes which the
camera uses to optimize flash output for a balance between the main
subject and ambient background lighting.
Standard i-TTL fill-flash
Flash output is adjusted to bring lighting in the frame to a standard
level; the brightness of the background is not taken into account.
Recommended for shots in which the main subject is emphasized at
the expense of background details, or when exposure compensation is
used.
Standard i-TTL fill-flash is activated automatically when [Spot metering] is selected.
357 Using an On-Camera Flash
When an optional SB‑500, SB‑400, or SB‑300 flash unit is mounted
on the camera, the flash control mode, flash level, and other flash
settings can be adjusted using the [Flash control]> [Flash control
mode] item in the photo shooting menu.
Settings for flash units other than the SB‑500, SB‑400, and
SB‑300 can only be adjusted using flash unit controls.
Flash Control Mode
Option Description
[TTL]Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions.
For additional adjustments to output, use [Flash compensation].
[Manual]Choose the flash level manually.
Flash output is selected using [Manual output amount].
358 Flash Control Mode
Flash Modes
The flash mode can be selected via the [Flash mode] item in the photo shooting menu.
The options available vary with the shooting mode.
Option Description Available in
I[Fill flash]
(front-curtain sync)
This mode is recommended in most situations.
In modes P and A, shutter speed will
automatically be set to values between ¹⁄₂₀₀s
(or ¹⁄₈₀₀₀s with auto FP high-speed sync) and
¹⁄₆₀s.
b, P, S, A, M
J[Red-eye reduction]
Use for portraits. The flash unit or camera red-
eye reduction lamp will light before the flash
fires, reducing “red-eye”.
The desired results may not be achieved
if the subject or camera moves before
the shutter is released (this setting is not
recommended with moving subjects or in
other situations requiring a quick shutter
response).
b, P, S, A, M
L[Slow sync]
As for “fill flash”, except that shutter speed
slows automatically to capture background
lighting at night or under low light.
Note that photos may be prone to blurring
due to camera shake at slow shutter speeds.
Use of a tripod is recommended.
P, A
K
[Slow sync+ red-eye]
(red-eye reduction
with slow sync)
Use to include background lighting in portraits.
Red-eye reduction is combined with slow
shutter speeds to capture background lighting
at night or under low light.
Note that photos may be prone to blurring
due to camera shake at slow shutter speeds.
Use of a tripod is recommended.
P, A
359 Flash Modes
Option Description Available in
M[Rear-curtain sync]
The flash fires just before the shutter closes,
creating the effect of a stream of light behind
moving light sources.
Selecting mode P or A after choosing this
option sets the flash mode to slow sync.
Note that photos may be prone to blurring
due to camera shake at slow shutter speeds.
Use of a tripod is recommended.
P, S, A, M
s[Flash off] The flash does not fire. b, P, S, A, M
DStudio Strobe Lighting
Rear-curtain sync may not correctly synchronize with studio flash systems.
360 Flash Modes
Flash output can be adjusted using the [Flash compensation] item
in the photo shooting menu.
Choose from values of from −3 to +1EV in increments of ¹⁄₃EV.
In general, choose positive values for brighter lighting, negative
values to ensure that the subject is not too brightly lit.
At values other than ±0.0, a Y icon will appear in the shooting
display.
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash
compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the
camera is turned off.
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to deliberately alter flash output, for example in order to change the
brightness of the subject relative to the background. Flash output can be increased to make the main
subject appear brighter, reduced to prevent glare, or otherwise fine-tuned to produce the desired
result.
Adjusting Flash Compensation
361 Flash Compensation
Assign [FV lock] to a control using Custom Setting f2
[Custom controls (shooting)].
FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output for optional CLS-compatible flash units, letting you take
multiple photos or recompose shots without changing the flash level. Your subject need not be in the
center of the frame, giving you more freedom when composing shots.
Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture.
FV lock is not available in b mode.
Mount a flash unit that supports FV lock on the camera accessory shoe.
Turn the flash unit on and choose a flash control mode of TTL or monitor pre-flash qA or
A.
If you are using an SB‑500, SB‑400, or SB‑300 mounted on the camera accessory shoe,
choose [TTL] for [Flash control]> [Flash control mode].
For information on other flash units, see the documentation provided with the unit.
Focus.
Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter-release button halfway to
focus.
362 FV Lock
1
2
3
4
Flash output will lock and an FV lock icon (r) will appear in
the shooting display.
Recompose the shot.
Lock flash level.
After confirming that the flash-ready indicator (c) appears in the shooting display, press the
[FV lock] control; the flash unit will emit a monitor pre-flash to determine the appropriate
flash level.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot.
If desired, additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock. Repeat Steps6 to 7 to take
additional shots.
Release FV lock.
Press the [FV lock] control to release FV lock and confirm that the FV lock icon (r) no longer
appears in the shooting display.
363 FV Lock
5
6
7
8
Remote Flash Photography
What Is Remote Flash Photography?
Take pictures with one or more remote flash units using wireless flash control (Advanced Wireless
Lighting, or AWL). For information on using a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe, see
“Using an On-Camera Flash” (0 355).
Throughout this chapter, operations involving an accessory connected to the camera are indicated
by C, operations involving remote flash units by f. For more information on using remote flash
units (f), see the documentation provided with the flash unit.
364 What Is Remote Flash Photography?
Remote flash units can be controlled via optical signals from an
optional flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe and
functioning as a master flash (optical AWL). For information on
compatible flash units, see “Features Available with CLS-Compatible
Flash Units” (0 789).
If the flash unit in question is an SB‑500, settings can be adjusted
from the camera. For more information, see “Using Optical AWL
with the SB‑500” (0 366). See the documentation provided
with the flash units for more information.
Settings for other flash units must be adjusted using flash unit
controls. For more information, see the documentation provided
with the flash unit in question.
Controlling Remote Flash Units
365 Controlling Remote Flash Units
Mount the flash unit on the camera accessory shoe. Select [Optical
AWL] for [Flash control]> [Wireless flash options] in the photo
shooting menu and take pictures using group flash control. Settings
for the flash units in each group can be adjusted separately.
C: Highlight [Group flash options] in the [Flash control]
display and press 2.
Using Optical AWL with the SB‑500
366 Controlling Remote Flash Units
1
C: Adjust flash output and choose the channel and flash
control mode.
Choose the flash control mode and flash level for the master
flash and the remote flash units in each group.
Choose Channel [3].
The following options are available:
Option Description
TTL i-TTL flash control.
qAAuto aperture. Available only with compatible flash units.
MChoose the flash level manually.
–– (off) The remote units do not fire. [Comp.] cannot be adjusted.
f: Set the remote flash units to Channel [3].
f: Group the remote flash units.
Choose a group (A or B).
There is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used. The practical
maximum, however, is three per group, as the light emitted by the remote flash units will
interfere with performance if more flash units are used.
C/f: Compose the shot and arrange the flash units.
See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information.
Test-fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally. To test fire the units, use
the test flash button on the master flash.
367 Controlling Remote Flash Units
2
3
4
5
C/f: Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready lights for all flash units
are lit.
368 Controlling Remote Flash Units
6
To view the photo shooting menu, select the C tab in the camera
menus.
The Photo Shooting Menu
Menu Items and Defaults
The options in the photo shooting menu are listed below, together with their default settings.
[Reset photo shooting menu]: —
[Storage folder]
[Rename]: NCZ_F
[Select folder by number]: 100
[Select folder from list]: —
[File naming]: DSC
[Primary slot selection]: SD card slot
[Secondary slot function]: Overflow
[Image area]
[Choose image area]: FX (36×24)
[DX crop alert]: OFF
[Tone mode]: SDR
[Image quality]: JPEG/HEIF normal
[Image size settings]
[Image size]: Large
[Enable DX image sizes]: OFF
[Image size (DX)]: Large
[RAW recording]: High efficiencym
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[ISO sensitivity]: 100
[Auto ISO sensitivity control]: OFF
[Maximum sensitivity]: 64000
[Maximum sensitivity with c]: Same as without flash
[Minimum shutter speed]: Auto
[White balance]: Auto—Keep overall atmosphere
[Set Picture Control]: Auto
[Manage Picture Control]: —
369 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Set Picture Control (HLG)]: Standard
[Color space]: sRGB
[Active D-Lighting]: Off
[Long exposure NR]: OFF
[High ISO NR]: Normal
[Vignette control]: Normal
[Diffraction compensation]: ON
[Auto distortion control]: ON
[Skin softening]: Off
[Portrait impression balance]: Off
[Photo flicker reduction]: OFF
[Metering]: Matrix metering
[Flash control]
[Flash control mode]: TTL
[Wireless flash options]: Off
[Flash mode]: Fill flash
[Flash compensation]: 0.0
[Release mode]: Single frame
[Focus mode]: Single AF
[AF-area mode]: Single-point AF
[AF/MF subject detection options]: Auto
[MF subject detection area]: MF subject detection off
[Vibration reduction]: Normal
[Link VR to focus point]: ON
[Auto bracketing]
[Auto bracketing on/off]: OFF
[Auto bracketing set]: AE & flash bracketing
[Number of shots]: 3F
[Increment]: 1.0
[Multiple exposure]
[Multiple exposure mode]: Off
[Number of shots]: 2
[Overlay mode]: Average
[Save individual pictures (RAW)]: ON
[Overlay shooting]: ON
[Select first exposure (RAW)]: —
[HDR overlay]
[HDR mode]: Off
[HDR strength]: Auto
[Save individual pictures (RAW)]: OFF
[Interval timer shooting]
[Choose start day/time]: Now
[Interval]: 1 min.
370 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Intervals×shots/interval]: 0001×1
[Exposure smoothing]: ON
[Electronic shutter options]
[Electronic shutter]: ON
[Volume]: 0
[Interval priority]: OFF
[Focus before each shot]: OFF
[Options]: Off
[Starting storage folder]
[New folder]: U
[Reset file numbering]: U
[Time-lapse video]
[Interval]: 5s
[Shooting time]: 25min.
[Exposure smoothing]: ON
[Electronic shutter options]
[Electronic shutter]: ON
[Volume]: 0
[Choose image area]: FX
[Video file type]: H.265 8-bit (MOV)
[Frame size/frame rate]: 3840×2160; 30p
[Interval priority]: OFF
[Focus before each shot]: OFF
[Destination]: SD card slot
[Focus shift shooting]
[No. of shots]: 100
[Focus step width]: 5
[Interval until next shot]: 0
[First-frame exposure lock]: ON
[Electronic shutter options]
[Electronic shutter]: ON
[Volume]: 0
[Focus position auto reset]: OFF
[Starting storage folder]
[New folder]: U
[Reset file numbering]: U
[Pixel shift shooting]
[Pixel shift shooting mode]: Off
[Number of shots]: 16
[Delay]: 2s
[Interval until next shot]: 0
371 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Reset Photo Shooting Menu
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Reset all photo shooting menu settings to their default values.
Photo shooting menu settings cannot be reset while a multiple exposure is in progress.
372 Reset Photo Shooting Menu
Folder
Folder number
Folder name
1
2
3
Storage Folder
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored.
D“Storage Folder”
Changes to [Storage folder] made in the photo shooting menu apply in the video recording menu
and vice versa.
Renaming Folders
The default folder name, which appears after the folder number, is “NCZ_F”. To choose a different
five-character folder name for new folders, select [Rename].
Existing folders cannot be renamed.
If desired, the default name can be restored for subsequent folders by pressing and holding the O
button while the keyboard is displayed.
373 Storage Folder
Choose [Select folder by number].
Highlight [Select folder by number] and press 2 to display
the [Select folder by number] dialog.
The card on which the new folder will be created is
underlined in the card slot display area at the top right
corner of the [Select folder by number] dialog. The card
used for new folders depends on the option currently
selected for [Secondary slot function] in the photo
shooting menu.
“Select Folder by Number
The folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored can be selected by number. If a folder with the
specified number does not already exist, a new folder will be created.
Choose a folder number.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits.
To change the highlighted digit, press 1 or 3.
Save changes and exit.
If a folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y icon will be displayed to the
left of the folder number. Press J to complete the operation and return to the main menu; if
you chose a folder marked W or X, it will be selected as the folder for new pictures.
If you chose a folder number that does not already exist, a new folder will be created with
that number when you press J.
In either case, subsequent pictures will be stored in the chosen folder.
To exit without changing the storage folder, press the G button.
DFolder Icons
Folders in the [Select folder by number] dialog are shown by W if empty, by Y if full (containing
either 5000 pictures or a picture numbered 9999), or by X if partially full. A Y icon indicates that no
further pictures can be stored in the folder.
374 Storage Folder
1
2
3
Choose [Select folder from list].
Highlight [Select folder from list] and press 2 to display the
[Select folder from list] dialog.
“Select Folder from List”
To choose from a list of existing folders:
Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
Select the highlighted folder.
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the main menu.
Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder.
375 Storage Folder
1
2
3
DCautions: Folder and File Numbers
When the current folder number reaches 999, the camera will no longer be able to create new
folders and the shutter release will be disabled if:
the current folder contains 5000 pictures (in addition, video recording will be disabled if the
camera calculates that the number of files needed to record a video of the maximum length
would result in the folder containing over 5000 files), or
the current folder contains a picture numbered 9999 (in addition, video recording will be
disabled if the camera calculates that the number of files needed to record a video of the
maximum length would result in a file numbered over 9999).
If there is space on the memory card, you will nevertheless be able to continue shooting by:
creating a folder with a number less than 999 and selecting it as the storage folder, or
changing the options selected for [Frame size/frame rate] or [Video file type] before recording
videos.
DStartup Time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large number
of files or folders.
376 Storage Folder
-
-
-
-
File Naming
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Pictures are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” followed by a four-digit number and a
three-letter extension. [File naming] is used to select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the
file name. For information on text entry, see “Text Entry” (0 74).
DFile Names
File names take the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx, where nnnn is a number from 0001 to 9999 and xxxis one
of the following extensions, assigned according to the options selected for image quality and file
type:
NEF: NEF (RAW) format, used when RAW is selected for image quality
JPG: JPEG format, used if an image quality other than RAW is chosen with SDR selected for tone
mode
HIF: HEIF, used if an image quality other than RAW is chosen with HLG selected for tone mode
MOV: MOV videos
MP4: MP4 videos
NDF: Dust off reference data
Pictures created with [Adobe RGB] selected for [Color space] in the photo shooting menu have file
names of the form “_DSCnnnn.xxx.
The NEF (RAW) and JPEG photographs in each pair of pictures recorded at image-quality settings
of RAW+ JPEG/HEIF have the same file names but different extensions (“.NEF” for the NEF (RAW)
photo and “.JPG” for the JPEG copy).
The NEF (RAW) and HEIF photographs in each pair of pictures recorded at image-quality settings
of RAW+ JPEG/HEIF have the same file names but different extensions (“.NEF” for the NEF (RAW)
photo and “.HIF” for the HEIF copy).
377 File Naming
-
-
-
-
-
-
Primary Slot Selection
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose which of the SD and microSD memory card slots functions as the primary slot when two
memory cards are inserted.
Option Description
[SD card slot] The SD memory card slot functions as the primary slot.
[microSD card slot] The microSD memory card slot functions as the primary slot.
Tip: Recording Videos
The slot to which videos are recorded is selected using [Destination] in the video recording menu.
378 Primary Slot Selection
Secondary Slot Function
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose the role played by the card in the secondary slot when two memory cards are inserted in the
camera.
Option Description
P[Overflow]The card in the secondary slot is used only when the card in the primary
slot is full.
Q[Backup]Each picture is recorded twice, once to the card in the primary slot and
again to the card in the secondary slot.
R
[RAW
primary-
JPEG
secondary]
This option is available when [SDR] is selected for tone mode.
NEF (RAW) copies of photos taken at settings of RAW + JPEG are
recorded only to the card in the primary slot, JPEG copies only to the
card in the secondary slot.
Pictures taken at other image quality settings are recorded twice at the
same setting, once to the card in the primary slot and again to the card
in the secondary slot.
O
[JPEG
primary-
JPEG
secondary]
This option is available when [SDR] is selected for tone mode.
Two JPEG copies are recorded, one to each memory card.
The copy saved to the card in the primary slot is recorded at the image
quality and size selected in the photo shooting menu. The copy saved
to the card in the secondary slot is saved at an image quality of [JPEG/
HEIF basic] and a size of either [Medium] or [Small]. The size can
be selected by pressing 2 when [JPEG primary- JPEG secondary] is
highlighted.
At image qualities of RAW or RAW +, this option is equivalent to
[Backup].
a
[RAW
primary-
HEIF
secondary]
This option is available when [HLG] is selected for tone mode.
NEF (RAW) copies of photos taken at settings of RAW + HEIF are
recorded only to the card in the primary slot, HEIF copies only to the
card in the secondary slot.
Pictures taken at other image quality settings are recorded twice at the
same setting, once to the card in the primary slot and again to the card
in the secondary slot.
379 Secondary Slot Function
Option Description
b
[HEIF
primary-
HEIF
secondary]
This option is available when [HLG] is selected for tone mode.
Two HEIF copies are recorded, one to each memory card.
The copy saved to the card in the primary slot is recorded at the image
quality and size selected in the photo shooting menu. The copy saved
to the card in the secondary slot is saved at an image quality of [JPEG/
HEIF basic] and a size of either [Medium] or [Small]. The size can
be selected by pressing 2 when [HEIF primary- HEIF secondary] is
highlighted.
At image qualities of RAW or RAW +, this option is equivalent to
[Backup].
380 Secondary Slot Function
DCaution: “RAW Primary- JPEG Secondary”
If [ON] is selected for [Multiple exposure]> [Save individual pictures (RAW)] in the photo shooting
menu, or if [ON] is selected for [HDR overlay]> [Save individual pictures (RAW)] in the photo
shooting menu, unprocessed copies of the individual NEF (RAW) photos that make up each multiple
exposure or HDR picture will be recorded to both memory cards together with the JPEG composite,
regardless of the option selected for image quality.
Tip: When an Option Other than “Overflow” Is Selected
The shooting display shows the number of exposures remaining on the card with the least amount
of space available.
The shutter release is disabled when either card is full.
Tip: Viewing Dual-Format Photos
Use the [Dual-format recording PB slot] item in the playback menu to choose the slot from which
dual-format photos are played back.
When viewing dual-format photos, you can view the other copy using [Jump to copy on other
card] in the i menu.
Tip: Recording Videos
The slot to which videos are recorded is selected using [Destination] in the video recording menu.
381 Secondary Slot Function
Pressing O when a picture created using either of these options
is highlighted during playback displays a confirmation message.
To delete only the copy on the card in the current slot, highlight
[Selected picture] and press O again.
To delete both copies, highlight [Same pictures on x & z] and
press O.
If a voice memo is appended to the picture, a confirmation
dialog will be displayed. To delete only the voice memo,
highlight [Voice memo only] and press O.
Deleting Copies
When deleting pictures recorded using [Backup], [RAW primary- JPEG secondary], [JPEG primary-
JPEG secondary], [RAW primary- HEIF secondary], or [HEIF primary- HEIF secondary], you have
the choice of erasing either both copies or only the copy on the card in the current slot.
Tip: Delete Options
Use the [Delete pictures from both slots] item in the playback menu to choose the options displayed
when a picture is deleted.
382 Secondary Slot Function
Image Area
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Adjust image area settings. For more information, see “Adjusting Image Area Settings” (0 108), part
of the section on “Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)” in the “Shooting Settings”
chapter.
383 Image Area
Tone Mode
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
The camera offers a choice of two tone modes: [SDR] and [HLG].
Option Description
[SDR]This mode supports a normal range of brightnesses (dynamic range). Pictures taken while
this option is selected are stored in JPEG format (extension “*.JPG”).
[HLG]
This mode supports HDR (high dynamic range). Pictures taken while this option is
selected are stored in HEIF format (extension “*.HIF”). It has a wider dynamic range than
SDR.
“HLG” appears in the shooting display when this option is selected.
For optimal tone reproduction when viewing HLG pictures, use monitors, computers,
operating systems, applications, and other equipment compatible with HLG. For more
information, visit the following website:
https://onlinemanual.nikonimglib.com/notice/hlg_setting_guide/en/
384 Tone Mode
DTaking Photos in HLG
Pictures taken with [HLG] selected for tone mode exhibit more “noise“ (in the form of randomly-
spaced bright pixels, fog, and lines) than do pictures taken using [SDR].
Selecting values between ISO 100 and 320 on the ISO sensitivity dial sets ISO sensitivity to ISO 400.
The lowest value available for the [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Maximum sensitivity] item in the
photo shooting menu is ISO 800.
ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 through Hi 1.7 are not available.
The video file type for time-lapse videos is fixed at [H.265 10-bit (MOV)].
[Color space] in the photo shooting menu is fixed at "BT.2100".
[Active D-Lighting], [Multiple exposure], and [HDR overlay] are not available in the photo
shooting menu.
[C30] cannot be selected for release mode and Custom Setting d3 [Pre-Release Capture options]
is not available.
DCaution: HLG Photos
Pictures shot with [HLG] selected for tone mode are subject to the following restrictions:
Image overlay is not available with HLG photos. HLG photos will not be displayed in the picture
selection dialogs for the various image overlay options available via [Retouch] in the playback i
menu.
You can download HLG photos using the SnapBridge app but may not be able to view them in
some versions of the app or operating system.
DCamera Shooting and Playback Displays
When [HLG] is selected for tone mode, the shooting and playback displays in the camera monitor and
viewfinder may include “noise” in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines or may fail
to accurately reproduce highlights and highly-saturated colors. In addition, abrupt tone discontinuities
may be visible in the camera monitor or viewfinder when photos are displayed full-frame, although the
photos themselves are unaffected. For accurate tone reproduction, use monitors, computers, operating
systems, applications, and other equipment compatible with HLG.
385 Tone Mode
Tip: HLG
Hybrid Log-Gamma (HLG) technology was developed for television broadcasting and other high-
definition applications.
Compared with Standard Dynamic Range (SDR), it increases the amount of detail that can be
expressed in the upper half of the tone range for greater rendering potential.
It matches SDR in the level of detail that can be expressed in the lower portion of the tone range to
ensure compatibility with non-HDR displays.
Tip: Picture Controls
Photos shot with [SDR] selected for tone mode can be processed using the [Set Picture Control]
and [Manage Picture Control] items in the photo shooting menu.
Photos shot with [HLG] selected for tone mode can be processed using the [Set Picture Control
(HLG)] item in the photo shooting menu.
Tip: Viewing and Editing HLG Photos
HLG (HEIF) photos can be viewed and edited using Nikon’s NX Studio software.
NX Studio can be downloaded free of charge from the Nikon Download Center.
Some of the options available for editing HLG photos are more limited than is the case with photos
shot with [SDR] selected for tone mode.
386 Tone Mode
Image Quality
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose a file format for photographs. For more information, see “Adjusting Image Quality” (0 110),
part of the section on “Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)” in the “Shooting
Settings” chapter.
387 Image Quality
Image Size Settings
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose the size, in pixels, of pictures recorded with the camera. For more information, see “Choosing
an Image Size” (0 112), part of the section on “Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and
Size)” in the “Shooting Settings” chapter.
388 Image Size Settings
RAW Recording
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose a compression type for NEF (RAW) photographs. In descending order by the size of the files
produced, the options are: [Lossless compression], [High efficiencym], and [High efficiency].
[High efficiencym] produces pictures that compare favorably in quality to those produced by
[Lossless compression] and are higher in quality than those produced by [High efficiency].
389 RAW Recording
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for photographs.
Option Description
[ISO sensitivity]
View the ISO sensitivity selected with the ISO sensitivity dial.
When the dial is rotated to C, this option can also be used to adjust
ISO sensitivity. Choose from settings of ISO100 to 64000, settings below
ISO100 by about 0.3, 0.7, and 1EV (ISO 50 equivalent), and settings above
ISO 64000 by about 0.3, 0.5, 1, and 1.7EV (ISO 204800 equivalent). An
[Auto] option is available in b mode.
[Auto ISO
sensitivity control]
Select [ON] to enable auto ISO sensitivity control. If [OFF] is selected, ISO
sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected with the ISO sensitivity
dial. [Maximum sensitivity], [Maximum sensitivity with c], and [Minimum
shutter speed] options are available when [ON] is selected.
[Maximum
sensitivity]Choose an upper limit for ISO sensitivity to prevent it being raised too high.
[Maximum
sensitivity with c]
Choose the upper ISO sensitivity limit for photos taken using an optional
flash unit.
[Minimum shutter
speed]
Choose the shutter speed below which auto ISO sensitivity control will kick
in to prevent underexposure in modes P and A; options range from ¹⁄₄₀₀₀
to 30s. If [Auto] is selected, the camera will choose the minimum shutter
speed based on lens focal length. For example, the camera will automatically
choose faster minimum shutter speeds to prevent blur caused by camera
shake when a long lens is attached.
To view auto shutter-speed selection options, highlight [Auto] and press
2. Auto shutter-speed selection can be fine-tuned by choosing faster
or slower minimums. Faster settings can be used to reduce blur when
photographing fast-moving subjects.
Shutter speeds may drop below the selected minimum if optimal
exposure cannot be achieved at the ISO sensitivity chosen for [Maximum
sensitivity].
390 ISO Sensitivity Settings
White Balance
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Adjust white balance to match the color of the light source. For more information, see “White Balance”
(0 157) in the “Shooting Settings” chapter.
391 White Balance
Set Picture Control
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose image processing (“Picture Control”) options for new photos according to the scene or your
creative intent. For more information, see “Picture Controls” (0 176) in the “Shooting Settings”
chapter.
392 Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls. For more information, see “Custom Picture
Controls” (0 183) in the “Picture Controls” section of the “Shooting Settings” chapter.
393 Manage Picture Control
Select [HLG] for [Tone mode] in the photo shooting menu.
Select [Set Picture Control (HLG)] in the photo shooting
menu and choose a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control and press 2.
Set Picture Control (HLG)
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose image processing (“Picture Control”) options for photos taken with [HLG] selected for tone
mode.
Option Description
c[Standard]Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended for most
situations.
d[Monochrome] Take monochrome photographs.
e[Flat]Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or
retouched.
Modifying HLG Picture Controls
HLG Picture Controls can be adapted to suit the scene or the photographer’s creative intent.
394 Set Picture Control (HLG)
1
2
Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight settings and 4 or 2 to choose a
value. Each press increments the highlighted value by 1.
The options available vary with the Picture Control selected.
To quickly adjust levels for balanced [Sharpening], [Mid-
range sharpening], and [Clarity], highlight [Quick sharp]
and press 4 or 2.
To abandon any changes and start over from default
settings, press the O button.
Save changes and exit.
Press J to save changes. Picture Controls that have been
modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk
(“U”).
Tip: The Sub-command Dial
To adjust the highlighted value in increments of 0.25, rotate the sub-command dial.
395 Set Picture Control (HLG)
3
4
HLG Picture Control Settings
Option Description
[Quick sharp]
Apply sharpening to areas of contrast within the picture.
Adjusting [Quick sharp] simultaneously adjusts [Sharpening], [Mid-
range sharpening], and [Clarity] for well-balanced results. Choose
higher values for heightened sharpness. Choose lower values for greater
softness.
[Sharpening], [Mid-range sharpening], and [Clarity] each apply to
different areas within the picture. Each can be adjusted individually.
[Sharpening] Apply sharpening to small areas of contrast.
[Mid-range
sharpening]
Apply sharpening to areas of contrast larger than those affected by
[Sharpening] and smaller those affected by [Clarity].
[Clarity]
Apply sharpening to large areas of contrast.
Fine outlines and the brightness and contrast of the picture as a whole
are unaffected.
[Contrast] Adjust overall contrast.
[Highlights] Adjust highlights. Choose higher values to make highlights brighter.
[Shadows]Adjust shadows. Choose higher values to make shadows brighter and
details more distinct.
[Saturation]Control the vividness of colors.
Not available with [Monochrome].
[Hue]Adjust hue.
Not available with [Monochrome].
[Filter effects]Displayed only with [Monochrome]. Simulate the effect of color filters on
monochrome pictures.
[Toning]
Displayed only with [Monochrome]. Choose a tint for monochrome
pictures. Choose from 9 different tints, including cyanotype and old-
fashioned sepia.
Pressing 3 when an option other than [B&W] (black-and-white) is
selected displays saturation options.
396 Set Picture Control (HLG)
The j indicator under the value display in the Picture Control
setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting.
DThe j Indicator
D“Filter Effects”
Choose from the following [Filter effects]:
Option Description
[Y] (yellow)*
These options enhance contrast and can be used to tone down the brightness of
the sky in landscape photographs. Orange [O] produces more contrast than yellow
[Y], red [R] more contrast than orange.
[O] (orange)*
[R] (red)*
[G] (green)* Green softens skin tones. Use for portraits and the like.
The term in parentheses is the name of the corresponding third-party color filter for black-and-
white photography.
397 Set Picture Control (HLG)
*
Color Space
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction. [sRGB] is
recommended for general-purpose printing and display. With a broader gamut of colors than [sRGB],
[Adobe RGB] is a better choice for professional publication and commercial printing.
DCaution: Color Space
The selected color space may be overwritten when pictures are opened in third-party software. NX
Studio can open pictures in the color space selected on the camera.
DAdobe RGB
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB pictures require applications, displays, and printers that
support color management.
398 Color Space
[Off][Y Auto]
Active D‑Lighting
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating pictures with natural contrast. Use for high-
contrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly-lit outdoor scenery through a door or
window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. Active D-Lighting is most effective when
used with matrix metering.
Option Description
Y[Auto]The camera automatically adjusts Active D-Lighting in response to shooting
conditions.
Z[Extra high]
Choose the amount of Active D-Lighting performed from (in order from high
to low) [Extra high], [High], [Normal], and [Low].
P[High]
Q[Normal]
R[Low]
c[Off] Active D-Lighting off.
399 Active D‑Lighting
The selected option is shown by an icon in the shooting display.
DCautions: Active D-Lighting
Depending on the subject, “noise” in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines may
appear in photos taken with Active D-Lighting.
In mode M, [YAuto] is equivalent to [QNormal].
Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.
This function does not apply at high ISO sensitivities (Hi 0.3–Hi 1.7), including high sensitivities
selected via auto ISO sensitivity control.
400 Active D‑Lighting
Long-exposure noise reduction is performed after the photo
is taken. During processing, the message, “[Performing noise
reduction]” will appear in the shooting display. Pictures cannot
be taken until the message has cleared from the display. The time
needed to record photos after shooting roughly doubles.
Long Exposure NR
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Select [ON] to reduce “noise” (bright spots or fog) in photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than
1s.
DCaution: Long-Exposure Noise Reduction
If the camera is turned off before processing is complete, the picture will be saved but noise reduction
will not be performed.
401 Long Exposure NR
High ISO NR
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced
bright pixels).
Option Description
[High]
Reduce noise in photographs taken at all ISO sensitivities. The higher the sensitivity,
the greater the effect. Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from (in order
from high to low) [High], [Normal], and [Low].
[Normal]
[Low]
[Off]Noise reduction is performed only as required. The amount of noise reduction
performed is always lower than when [Low] is selected.
402 High ISO NR
Vignette Control
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Vignette control reduces “vignetting”—a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph—by an
amount that varies from lens to lens. Its effects are most noticeable at maximum aperture.
Option Description
e[High]
Choose the amount of vignette control performed from (in order from high to
low) [High], [Normal], and [Low].
g[Normal]
f[Low]
[Off] Vignette control disabled.
DCaution: Vignette Control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, JPEG pictures may exhibit “noise” (fog)
or over- or under-exposure at the edge of the frame that introduces variations in peripheral brightness.
In addition, custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have been modified from default
settings may not produce the desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor.
DVignette Control
Changes to [Vignette control] in the photo shooting menu apply in the video recording menu and
vice versa.
403 Vignette Control
Diffraction Compensation
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Select [ON] to reduce diffraction at small apertures (high f-numbers).
DDiffraction Compensation
Changes to [Diffraction compensation] in the photo shooting menu apply in the video recording
menu and vice versa.
404 Diffraction Compensation
Auto Distortion Control
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Select [ON] as required to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-angle lenses and to
reduce pin-cushion distortion when shooting with long lenses. Note that [ON] may be selected
automatically with some lenses, in which case this item will be grayed out and unavailable.
DAuto Distortion Control
Changes to [Auto distortion control] in the photo shooting menu apply in the video recording menu
and vice versa.
405 Auto Distortion Control
Skin Softening
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Pictures taken when the face of a human portrait subject is detected will automatically be processed to
soften the subject’s complexion.
Option Description
[High] Choose the amount of skin softening performed from (in order from high to low)
[High], [Normal], and [Low].
The camera can perform skin softening on up to three subjects at a time.
If more than one human portrait subject is detected, a gray focus point will appear
over each of the subjects. If [Auto-area AF] is selected for [AF-area mode], H and F
icons will appear on the focus point selected by the camera. The focus point can be
positioned by pressing 4 or 2 to choose the subject to which skin softening applies.
[Normal]
[Low]
[Off] Skin softening off.
DSkin Softening: Restrictions
Skin softening cannot be combined with some camera features, including:
high-speed frame capture,
multiple exposures, and
HDR overlay.
406 Skin Softening
Select [Portrait impression balance] in the photo shooting
menu.
Highlight a mode from [Mode1] through [Mode3] and
press 2.
Options for the selected mode will be displayed.
Adjust hue and brightness.
Press 4 or 2 to adjust hue on the M (magenta)–Y (yellow)
axis. Magenta increases as you move toward M, amber
(yellow) as you move toward Y.
Press 1 or 3 to adjust brightness. Brightness increases as
the values go up and decreases as they go down.
The selected values are displayed to the right of the grid.
To restore default settings, press the O button.
Portrait Impression Balance
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Fine-tune hue and brightness settings for human portrait subjects and save the results for application
during shooting as [Mode1], [Mode2], or [Mode3].
Creating Portrait Impression Balance Modes
407 Portrait Impression Balance
1
2
3
Save changes.
Press J to save changes and exit to the menus.
Modes that have been altered from default values are indicated by asterisks (“U”).
Repeat Steps1 through 4 to create additional modes.
Applying Saved Modes
To enable portrait impression balance during shooting, select the desired mode ([Mode1] through
[Mode3]) for [Portrait impression balance] in the photo shooting menu.
D“Portrait Impression Balance”
[Portrait impression balance] will not be available if:
[Monochrome], [Flat Monochrome], [Deep Tone Monochrome], or [Creative Picture Control] is
selected for [Set Picture Control], or
[Monochrome] is selected for [Set Picture Control (HLG)].
DCaution: Using Portrait Impression Balance
Portrait impression balance may affect areas of the image that are similar in color to the skin of portrait
subjects.
Tip: Previewing the Results
If [Portrait impression balance] has been assigned a place in the i menu using Custom Setting f1
[Customize i menu], you can select this option, rotate the main command dial to choose a mode,
and then adjust hue and brightness using the multi selector while previewing their effects on the
subject framed in the display.
408 Portrait Impression Balance
4
Photo Flicker Reduction
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Selecting [ON] reduces the effects of flicker from such light sources as fluorescent or mercury-vapor
lamps.
Flicker can cause uneven exposure or (in photographs taken in continuous release modes)
inconsistent exposure or coloration.
If flicker reduction does not produce the desired results, turn the camera off and aim it at the
subject or light source before turning it on again.
If [ON] is selected and flicker is detected when the shutter is released, a green I will appear next to
the FLICKER icon in the shooting display.
During burst photography, the camera will behave as described below.
In continuous high-speed (extended) mode, priority will be given to frame rate. The display
will briefly go dark with the first shot in each burst but not with the subsequent shots.
In continuous high-speed and continuous low-speed modes, priority will be given to flicker
reduction. The display will briefly go dark each time the shutter is released and the frame rate
may drop or become erratic.
409 Photo Flicker Reduction
-
-
D“Photo Flicker Reduction”
Flicker reduction may slightly delay shutter response.
Flicker reduction can detect flicker at 100 and 120Hz (associated respectively with AC power
supplies of 50 and 60Hz). The desired results may not be achieved if the frequency of the power
supply changes during burst photography.
Flicker may not be detected or the desired results may not be achieved depending on the light
source and shooting conditions, for example with scenes that are brightly lit or feature dark
backgrounds.
The desired results may also not be achieved with decorative lighting displays and other non-
standard lighting.
The actual effects of photo flicker reduction may differ from those visible in the display.
DContinuous High-Speed (Extended)
Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results during long bursts.
D“Photo Flicker Reduction”: Restrictions
[Photo flicker reduction] does not take effect under some conditions, including:
during HDR overlay,
during high-speed frame capture, and
in silent mode.
410 Photo Flicker Reduction
Metering
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure.
Option Description
L[Matrix metering]
The camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure
according to tone distribution, color, composition, and distance for
results close to those seen by the naked eye.
M[Center-weighted
metering]
The camera assigns the greatest weight to the center of the frame.
This mode can, for example, be used with subjects that dominate
the composition.
Center-weighted metering is also recommended when using filters
with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
The size of the area assigned the greatest weight can be selected
using Custom Setting b4 [Center-weighted area].
The metered area can be displayed or hidden using Custom
Settings d17 [Custom monitor shooting display] and d18
[Custom viewfinder shooting display].
N[Spot metering]
The camera meters a circle with a diameter of 4mm/0.16in.
(equivalent to approximately 1.5% of the frame). This ensures that
the subject will be correctly exposed even when the background is
much brighter or darker.
The metered area is centered on the current focus point. If [Auto-
area AF] is selected for AF-area mode (0 116), the camera will
instead meter the center focus point.
t[Highlight-
weighted metering]
The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights. Use this
option to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when
photographing spotlit performers on stage.
411 Metering
Choose a flash control mode and flash level and adjust other
settings for SB‑500, SB‑400, or SB‑300 flash units mounted on the
camera accessory shoe.
The options available in the flash control display vary with the
option selected for [Flash control mode].
Settings for flash units other than the SB‑500, SB‑400, and
SB‑300 can only be adjusted using flash unit controls.
Flash Control
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Adjust settings for wireless remote flash units or optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory
shoe.
For information on adjusting settings for optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory
shoe, see “Using an On-Camera Flash” (0 355).
For information on adjusting settings for wireless remote flash units, see “What Is Remote Flash
Photography?” (0 364).
Flash Control Mode
Option Description
[TTL] Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions.
[Manual] Choose the flash level manually.
412 Flash Control
Adjust settings for simultaneous wireless control of multiple remote
flash units. This option is available only when an SB‑500 flash unit is
mounted on the camera.
Wireless Flash Options
Option Description
Y[Optical AWL]The remote flash units are controlled using low-intensity flashes emitted by
the master flash (0 365).
[Off] Remote flash photography disabled.
Group Flash Options
Adjust settings for the units in each group when using optional remote flash units. This option is
available only when an SB-500 flash unit is mounted on the camera.
413 Flash Control
Flash Mode
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose a flash mode for camera-mounted or remote optional flash units. For more information, see
“Flash Modes” (0 359) in “Flash Photography”.
414 Flash Mode
Flash Compensation
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Flash compensation is used to deliberately alter the output of optional flash units, for example in order
to change the brightness of the subject relative to the background. Flash output can be increased to
make the main subject appear brighter, reduced to prevent glare, or otherwise fine-tuned to produce
the desired result (0 361).
415 Flash Compensation
Release Mode
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose the operation performed when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down. For
more information, see “Release Mode” (0 145) in the “Shooting Settings” chapter.
416 Release Mode
Focus Mode
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Control how the camera focuses. For more information, see “Focus Mode” (0 114), part of the section
on “Focus” in the “Shooting Settings” chapter.
417 Focus Mode
AF-Area Mode
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus. For more information, see “AF-Area
Mode” (0 116), part of the section on “Focus” in the “Shooting Settings” chapter.
418 AF-Area Mode
AF/MF Subject Detection Options
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose the type of subject to which the camera gives priority when focusing. For more information,
see “Subject Detection” (0 120), part of the section on “Focus” in the “Shooting Settings” chapter.
419 AF/MF Subject Detection Options
MF Subject Detection Area
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose the manual focus subject detection area. For more information, see “Using Subject Detection
with Manual Focus” (0 121) in the “Subject Detection” portion of the “Focus” section.
420 MF Subject Detection Area
Vibration Reduction
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose whether to enable vibration reduction. The options available vary with the lens.
Option Description
C[Normal] Choose for enhanced vibration reduction when photographing static subjects.
D[Sport]Choose when photographing athletes and other subjects that are moving
rapidly and unpredictably.
[Off] Vibration reduction is disabled.
DCautions: Using Vibration Reduction
Vibration reduction may be unavailable with some lenses.
We recommend that you wait for the image in the display to stabilize before shooting.
When [Normal] is selected for lenses that support vibration reduction, the image in the viewfinder
may jiggle before the shutter is released, but this is a natural consequence of how vibration
reduction is performed and does not indicate a malfunction. [Sport] or [Off] can be used should
you find the motion distracting.
[Sport] is recommended for panning shots. In [Normal] and [Sport] modes, vibration reduction
applies only to motion that is not part of the pan. If the camera is panned horizontally, for example,
vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake.
[Normal] and [Sport] are also recommended if the camera is mounted on a tripod or monopod.
Note, however, that [Off] may be a better choice with some tripods depending on shooting
conditions. Settings may vary from lens to lens; consult the lens documentation for more
information.
If an F mount lens with a vibration reduction switch is attached via an optional FTZ II/FTZ mount
adapter, [Vibration reduction] will be grayed out and unavailable. Use the lens switch for vibration
reduction.
421 Vibration Reduction
Link VR to Focus Point
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Choose whether vibration reduction is optimized to reduce blur at the current focus point.
Option Description
[ON] Optimize vibration reduction to reduce blur at the current focus point.
[OFF] Optimize vibration reduction to reduce blur at the center of the frame.
DCautions: “Link VR to Focus Point”
Enabling this option configures vibration reduction to minimize blur at the focus point active when
the shutter is released. Its effects cannot be previewed in the shooting display.
Selecting [ON] for [Link VR to focus point] will minimize blur at the center of the frame instead of
the current focus point if:
a Z mount lens with built-in vibration reduction is attached,
[Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode and multiple focus points are displayed, or
video recording is in progress.
422 Link VR to Focus Point
-
-
-
Auto Bracketing
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly
with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Bracketing can be used in situations in which getting the
right settings is difficult and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to
experiment with different settings for the same subject.
Option Description
[Auto bracketing on/off] Select [ON] to enable bracketing.
[Auto bracketing set]
Choose the type of bracketing performed.
[AE & flash bracketing]: The camera varies exposure and flash level
over a series of photographs.
[AE bracketing]: The camera varies exposure over a series of
photographs.
[Flash bracketing]: The camera varies flash level over a series of
photographs.
[WB bracketing]: The camera creates multiple copies of each
photograph, each with a different white balance.
[ADL bracketing]: The camera varies Active D-Lighting (ADL) over a
series of photographs.
[Number of shots] Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
[Increment]Choose the bracketing increment for all [Auto bracketing set] options
except [ADL bracketing].
[Amount]
Choose the amount by which Active D-Lighting changes during
bracketing sequences shot with [ADL bracketing] selected for [Auto
bracketing set].
423 Auto Bracketing
No exposure compensation −1EV +1EV
Highlight [Auto bracketing] in the photo shooting menu
and press 2.
Select [AE & flash bracketing], [AE bracketing], or [Flash
bracketing] for [Auto bracketing set].
[Number of shots] and [Increment] options will be displayed.
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
Highlight [Number of shots] and press 4 or 2 to choose the
number of shots.
Exposure and Flash Bracketing
424 Auto Bracketing
1
2
3
Choose the bracketing increment.
Highlight [Increment] and press 4 or 2 to choose the
bracketing increment.
The size of the increment can be chosen from 0.3 (¹⁄₃EV),
0.7 (²⁄₃EV), 1.0 (1EV), 2.0 (2EV), and 3.0 (3EV). Bracketing
programs with an increment of 2.0 or 3.0EV offer a
maximum of 5 shots. If a value of 7 or 9 was selected in
Step3, the number of shots will automatically be set to 5.
Select [ON] for [Auto bracketing on/off].
Selecting [ON] enables bracketing, and an icon will appear in
the shooting display.
The bracketing programs with an increment of 0.3 are listed below.
[Number of shots]Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator No. of shots Bracketing order
3F 3 0/-0.3/+0.3
5F 5 0/−0.7/−0.3/+0.3/+0.7
7F 70/−1.0/−0.7/−0.3/
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0
9F 90/−1.3/−1.0/−0.7/−0.3/
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0/+1.3
425 Auto Bracketing
4
5
Take pictures.
Take the number of pictures in the bracketing program.
The modified values for shutter speed and aperture are
shown in the display.
No. shots: 3
Increment: 0.7
Display after first shot
While bracketing is in effect, the shooting display shows a bracketing icon, a bracketing
progress indicator, and the number of shots remaining in the bracketing sequence. After each
shot, a segment will disappear from the indicator and the number of shots remaining will be
reduced by one.
Exposure changes due to bracketing are added to those made with exposure compensation.
426 Auto Bracketing
6
Tip: Bracketing Options
When [AE & flash bracketing] is selected, the camera varies both exposure and flash level. Select
[AE bracketing] to vary only exposure, [Flash bracketing] to vary only flash level. Note that flash
bracketing is available in i-TTL and, where supported, auto aperture (qA) flash control modes only
(0 357, 0 789).
In self-timer mode, the number of copies selected for [Auto bracketing]> [Number of shots] will
be created each time the shutter is released, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2
[Self-timer]> [Number of shots].
Tip: Exposure and Flash Bracketing
In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the
bracketing program has been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button
is pressed.
If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume
from the first shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
427 Auto Bracketing
Tip: Exposure Bracketing
The settings (shutter speed and/or aperture) altered during exposure bracketing vary with the shooting
mode.
Mode Setting
PShutter speed and aperture1
SAperture1
AShutter speed1
MShutter speed2, 3, 4
If [ON] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the photo
shooting menu, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the
limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded.
If [ON] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the photo
shooting menu, the camera will vary ISO sensitivity.
Use Custom Setting e6 [Auto bracketing (mode M)] to choose whether the camera varies both
shutter speed and aperture or any one of shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity when [OFF]
is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the photo shooting
menu.
Shutter speed will not be adjusted if [ON] is chosen for Custom Setting d6 [Extended shutter
speeds (M)] and a shutter speed slower than 30 s is selected.
Cancelling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, select [OFF] for [Auto bracketing]> [Auto bracketing on/off] in the photo
shooting menu. If you select [ON] after selecting [OFF], bracketing will resume from the first shot in
the sequence.
428 Auto Bracketing
1
2
3
4
Highlight [Auto bracketing] in the photo shooting menu
and press 2.
Select [WB bracketing] for [Auto bracketing set].
[Number of shots] and [Increment] options will be displayed.
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
Highlight [Number of shots] and press 4 or 2 to choose the
number of shots.
White Balance Bracketing
429 Auto Bracketing
1
2
3
Choose the bracketing increment.
Highlight [Increment] and press 4 or 2 to choose the
bracketing increment.
The size of the increment can be chosen from 1 (1 step), 2 (2
steps), or 3 (3 steps).
Each step is equivalent to 5 mired. Higher “A” values
correspond to increased amounts of amber. Higher “B”
values correspond to increased amounts of blue.
Select [ON] for [Auto bracketing on/off].
Selecting [ON] enables bracketing, and an icon will appear in
the shooting display.
The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below.
[Number of
shots]
White balance
bracketing
indicator
No. of
shots
White balance
increment Bracketing order
3F 3 1 0/A1/B1
5F 5 1 0/A2/A1/B1/B2
7F 7 1 0/A3/A2/A1/
B1/B2/B3
9F 9 1 0/A4/A3/A2/A1/
B1/B2/B3/B4
430 Auto Bracketing
4
5
Take pictures.
Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have
a different white balance.
Modifications to white balance are added to the white
balance adjustment made with white balance fine-tuning.
If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater
than the number of exposures remaining, the shutter release
will be disabled. Shooting can begin when a new memory
card is inserted.
DWhite Balance Bracketing Restrictions
White balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+
JPEG/HEIF.
Tip: White Balance Bracketing
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber–blue axis in the white balance
fine-tuning display). No adjustments are made on the green–magenta axis.
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the camera will power off only
after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded.
In self-timer mode, the number of copies specified in the white balance bracketing program will be
created each time the shutter is released, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2
[Self-timer]> [Number of shots].
Cancelling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, select [OFF] for [Auto bracketing]> [Auto bracketing on/off] in the photo
shooting menu.
431 Auto Bracketing
6
Highlight [Auto bracketing] in the photo shooting menu
and press 2.
Select [ADL bracketing] for [Auto bracketing set].
[Number of shots] and [Amount] options will be displayed.
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
Highlight [Number of shots] and press 4 or 2 to choose
the number of shots.
ADL Bracketing
432 Auto Bracketing
1
2
3
Choose the Active D-Lighting amount.
Highlight [Amount] and press 4 or 2 to choose the Active
D-Lighting setting for the second shot when the number of
shots in the bracketing sequence is 2.
The number of shots determines the bracketing sequence:
No. of shots Bracketing sequence
2 Off → Value selected in Step4
3 Off → Low → Normal
4 Off → Low → Normal → High
5 Off → Low → Normal → High → Extra high
If you chose more than two shots, proceed to Step5.
The bracketing sequence varies with the Active D-Lighting amount as follows:
Amount Bracketing sequence
[OFF L] Off → Low
[OFF N] Off → Normal
[OFF H] Off → High
[OFF H+] Off → Extra high
[OFF AUTO] Off → Auto
433 Auto Bracketing
4
Select [ON] for [Auto bracketing on/off].
Selecting [ON] enables bracketing, and an icon will appear in
the shooting display.
Take pictures.
Take the number of pictures in the bracketing program.
While bracketing is in effect, the shooting display shows an
ADL bracketing icon and the number of shots remaining in
the bracketing sequence. After each shot, the number of
shots remaining will be reduced by one.
434 Auto Bracketing
5
6
DADL Bracketing
In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the
bracketing program has been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button
is pressed.
If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume
from the first shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
In self-timer mode, the number of copies selected for [Auto bracketing]> [Number of shots] will
be created each time the shutter is released, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2
[Self-timer]> [Number of shots].
Cancelling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, select [OFF] for [Auto bracketing]> [Auto bracketing on/off] in the photo
shooting menu.
435 Auto Bracketing
Multiple Exposure
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Record two to ten NEF (RAW) exposures as a single photograph.
Option Description
[Multiple exposure
mode]
[On (series)]: Take a series of multiple exposures. To end multiple
exposure photography, select [Multiple exposure mode] again and
choose [Off].
[On (single photo)]: End multiple exposure photography after
creating a single multiple exposure.
[Off]: End multiple exposure photography.
[Number of shots]Choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single
photograph.
[Overlay mode]
[Add]: The exposures are overlaid without modification; gain is not
adjusted.
[Average]: Gain is adjusted before the exposures are overlaid. The
gain for each exposure is equal to 1 divided by the total number of
exposures taken. For example, in a photo made by combining two
exposures, the gain for each exposure will be set to ¹⁄₂, while in a
photo combining three exposures, gain will be set to ¹⁄₃.
[Lighten]: The camera compares the pixels in each picture and uses
only the brightest.
[Darken]: The camera compares the pixels in each picture and uses
only the darkest.
436 Multiple Exposure
Option Description
[Save individual
pictures (RAW)]
[ON]: Save both the multiple exposure and the shots that make it up;
the pictures are saved in NEF (RAW) format.
[OFF]: Discard the individual shots and save only the multiple
exposure.
[Overlay shooting]If [ON] is selected, earlier exposures will be superimposed on the view
through the lens. The earlier exposures aid composition of the next shot.
[Select first exposure
(RAW)]
Choose the first exposure from the NEF (RAW) pictures on the memory
card.
437 Multiple Exposure
Highlight [Multiple exposure] in the photo shooting menu
and press 2.
Choose an option for [Multiple exposure mode].
Highlight [Multiple exposure mode] and press 2.
Highlight a multiple exposure mode using 1 or 3 and press
J.
If [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is selected, an icon
will appear in the display.
Choose a value for [Number of shots] (number of
exposures).
Highlight [Number of shots] and press 2.
Choose the number of exposures using 1 or 3 and press J.
Select an [Overlay mode].
Highlight [Overlay mode] and press 2.
Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J.
Creating a Multiple Exposure
438 Multiple Exposure
1
2
3
4
Choose a setting for [Save individual pictures (RAW)].
To save both the multiple exposure and the shots that make
it up, select [ON]; the individual shots are saved in NEF (RAW)
format. To save only the multiple exposure, select [OFF].
Choose an option for [Overlay shooting].
Select [ON] to superimpose earlier exposures on the view
through the lens. You can use the earlier exposures as a guide
when composing subsequent shots.
Choose an option for [Select first exposure (RAW)].
To choose the first exposure from existing NEF (RAW)
photos, highlight [Select first exposure (RAW)] and press
2.
Highlight the desired picture using the multi selector.
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold
the X button.
After highlighting the desired picture, press J.
439 Multiple Exposure
5
6
7
Start shooting.
Take the selected number of shots. If you used [Select first
exposure (RAW)] to select an existing NEF (RAW) picture
as the first exposure in Step7, shooting will start from the
second exposure.
Once you have taken the selected number of shots, the
pictures will be overlaid to create a multiple exposure.
Multiple exposures are recorded in JPEG format regardless
of the option selected for image quality.
If [On (series)] is selected for [Multiple exposure mode],
you can continue to take additional multiple exposures until
[Off] is selected.
If [On (single photo)] is selected for [Multiple exposure
mode], the camera will exit multiple exposure mode once
the number of shots selected in Step3 has been taken.
440 Multiple Exposure
8
The i Menu
Pictures can be viewed by pressing the K button while a multiple exposure is in progress. The most
recent shot in the current multiple exposure is indicated by a $ icon; pressing the i button when this
icon is present displays the multiple exposure i menu.
Highlight items and press J to select.
You also have the option of using touch controls after pressing the i button.
Option Description
[View progress] View a preview created from the exposures recorded to the current point.
[Retake last exposure] Retake the most recent exposure.
[Save and exit] Create a multiple exposure from the exposures taken to current point.
[Discard and exit]
Exit without recording a multiple exposure.
If [ON] is selected for [Save individual pictures (RAW)], the individual
exposures will be saved separately.
441 Multiple Exposure
DCautions: Multiple Exposure
If you use the menus or view pictures in the display while shooting a multiple exposure, remember
that shooting will end and the multiple exposure will be recorded if no operations are performed for
about 40 seconds (or in the case of menus, about 90 seconds). The time available to record the next
exposure can be extended by choosing longer times for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]>
[Playback] or [Menus].
Multiple exposures may be affected by “noise” in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or
lines.
In continuous shooting modes, the camera records all exposures in a single burst. If [On (single
photo)] is selected, multiple exposure shooting will end after the first multiple exposure is recorded.
If [On (series)] is selected, an additional multiple exposure will be recorded each time the shutter-
release button is pressed.
In self-timer mode, the interval between each shot in the exposure is selected using Custom Setting
c2 [Self-timer]> [Interval between shots]. Regardless of the value selected for the c2 [Number
of shots] option, shooting will however end after the number of shots selected for the multiple
exposure.
Multiple exposures may end if settings are changed while shooting is in progress.
Shooting settings and photo info for multiple exposure photographs are those for the first
exposure.
Do not remove or replace the memory card while a multiple exposure is in progress.
Memory cards cannot be formatted while a multiple exposure is in progress. Some menu items will
be grayed out and unavailable.
DMultiple Exposure: Restrictions
Multiple exposure cannot be combined with some camera features, including:
b (auto) mode,
video recording,
high-speed frame capture,
bracketing,
HDR overlay,
interval-timer photography,
time-lapse video recording,
focus shift, and
pixel shift.
442 Multiple Exposure
To end a multiple exposure before the specified number of
exposures have been taken, select [Off] for multiple exposure
mode. A multiple exposure will be created from the exposures
that have been recorded to that point (if [Average] is selected
for [Overlay mode], gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of
exposures actually recorded).
Ending Multiple Exposures
The multiple exposure will also end if:
the standby timer expires after the first exposure has been taken, or
you press the K button followed by the i button and select either [Save and exit] or [Discard and
exit].
443 Multiple Exposure
HDR Overlay
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Used with high contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR) preserves details in highlights and
shadows by combining two shots taken at different exposures. Use with high-contrast scenes and
other subjects to preserve a wide range of details, from highlights to shadows.
Option Description
[HDR mode]
[On (series)]: Take a series of HDR photographs. To end HDR
photography, select [HDR mode] again and choose [Off].
[On (single photo)]: End HDR photography after recording a single HDR
photograph.
[Off]: End HDR photography.
[HDR strength]Adjust HDR strength. If [Auto] is selected, the camera will automatically
adjust HDR strength to suit the scene.
[Save individual
pictures (RAW)]
Choose [ON] to save each of the individual shots used to create the HDR
picture; the shots are saved in NEF (RAW) format.
444 HDR Overlay
Highlight [HDR overlay] in the photo shooting menu and
press 2.
Select an [HDR mode].
Highlight [HDR mode] and press 2.
Highlight one of the following options using 1 or 3 and
press J.
If [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is selected, an icon will
appear in the display.
Taking HDR Photographs
We recommend that you use matrix metering when shooting with HDR.
445 HDR Overlay
1
2
Choose an [HDR strength].
Highlight [HDR strength] and press 2.
Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J.
If [Auto] is selected, the camera will automatically adjust
HDR strength to suit the scene.
Choose a setting for [Save individual pictures (RAW)].
Choose [ON] to save each of the individual shots used to
create the HDR picture; the shots are saved in NEF (RAW)
format.
Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera takes two exposures when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way
down.
If [On (series)] is selected for [HDR mode], you can continue to take HDR photographs until
[Off] is selected.
If [On (single photo)] is selected for [HDR mode], HDR will turn off automatically after a
single shot.
HDR photographs are recorded in JPEG format regardless of the option selected for image
quality.
446 HDR Overlay
3
4
5
DCautions: HDR Photography
The edges of the picture will be cropped out.
The desired results may not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting. Use of a
tripod is recommended.
Depending on the scene, you may notice shadows around bright objects or halos around dark
objects. In other cases, the effect produced by HDR may not be particularly noticeable.
Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.
When spot or center-weighted metering is selected, an [HDR strength] setting of [Auto] is
equivalent to [Normal].
Optional flash units will not fire.
In continuous release modes, the camera will not shoot continuously while the shutter-release
button is held all the way down.
Long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”) are not supported. If the shutter speed dial is rotated to
Bulb (“Bulb”) or Time (“Time”), Bulb or Time will flash in the shooting display.
DHDR: Restrictions
HDR cannot be combined with some camera features, including:
b (auto) mode,
photo flicker reduction,
high-speed frame capture,
bracketing,
multiple exposures,
interval-timer photography,
time-lapse video recording,
focus shift, and
pixel shift.
447 HDR Overlay
Interval Timer Shooting
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Take photographs at the selected interval until the specified number of shots has been recorded. When
using the interval timer, select a release mode other than self-timer or high-speed frame capture.
Option Description
[Start]
Start interval timer shooting. Shooting will begin either after about 3s
([Now] selected for [Choose start day/time]) or at a selected date and
time ([Choose day/time]). Shooting will continue at the selected interval
until all shots have been taken.
[Choose start day/
time]
Choose a start option. Select [Now] to start shooting immediately, [Choose
day/time] to start shooting at a chosen date and time.
[Interval] Specify the interval between shots in hours, minutes, and seconds.
[Intervals×shots/
interval]Choose the number of intervals and the number of shots per interval.
[Exposure
smoothing]
Selecting [ON] allows the camera to adjust exposure to match the previous
shot.
Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in
apparent variations in exposure. This can be addressed by shortening
the interval between shots.
Exposure smoothing will not take effect in mode M if [OFF] is selected
for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the
photo shooting menu.
[Electronic shutter
options]
Choose whether to use the electronic shutter.
When [ON] is selected for [Electronic shutter], the electronic shutter
will be used regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d5
[Shutter type].
The volume of the sound made when the electronic shutter is released
can be chosen using [Volume].
448 Interval Timer Shooting
Option Description
[Interval priority]
[ON]: Enable interval priority to ensure that frames shot in modes P and
A are taken at the chosen interval.
Flash photography is disabled.
Release priority is enabled regardless of the options selected for
Custom Settings a1 [AF-C priority selection] and a2 [AF-S priority
selection].
If [ON] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO
sensitivity control] and the time chosen for [Minimum shutter
speed] is longer than the interval, the time selected for the interval
will take priority over the selected shutter speed.
[OFF]: Disable interval priority to ensure that photos are correctly
exposed.
[Focus before each
shot]
If [ON] is selected, the camera will focus between shots. Select [OFF] to
focus at a fixed distance.
[Options]
Combine interval-timer photography with other options.
[AE bracketing]: Perform exposure bracketing during interval-timer
photography.
[Time-lapse video]: Use the photos taken during interval-timer
photography to create a time-lapse video with an aspect ratio of 16 : 
9.
The camera saves both the photos and the time-lapse video.
Selecting [1:1 (24×24)] for [Image area]> [Choose image area] in
the photo shooting menu disables the shutter release.
Videos created using [Time-lapse video] are recorded in the [sRGB]
color space, regardless of the option selected for [Color space] in the
photo shooting menu.
[Off]: Do not perform additional operations during interval-timer
photography.
[Starting storage
folder]
Highlight options and press J or 2 to select (M) or deselect (U).
[New folder]: A new folder is created for each new sequence.
[Reset file numbering]: File numbering is reset to 0001 whenever a new
folder is created.
449 Interval Timer Shooting
-
-
-
-
-
-
Highlight [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting
menu and press 2.
Highlight [Choose start day/
time] and press 2.
Highlight an option and press
J.
Interval-Timer Photography
DBefore Shooting
Take a test shot at current settings.
Before proceeding, select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and make sure that the camera
clock is set to the correct time and date.
We recommend using one of the following power sources to prevent loss of power while shooting is
in progress:
A fully-charged battery
An optional EH‑7P charging AC adapter
An optional EH-8P AC adapter connected using the supplied UC‑E25 USB cable (featuring Type C
connectors at both ends)
Adjust interval timer settings.
Choose the start day and time.
To start shooting immediately, select [Now].
To start shooting at a chosen date and time, select [Choose day/time]. Choose the date
and time and press J.
450 Interval Timer Shooting
-
-
-
1
2
-
-
Highlight [Interval] and press
2.
Choose an interval (in hours,
minutes, and seconds) and
press J.
Highlight [Intervals×shots/
interval] and press 2.
Choose the number of
intervals and the number of
shots per interval and press
J.
Choose the interval between shots.
Choose the number of intervals and number of shots per interval.
In single frame release mode, the photographs for each interval will be taken at the rate
for continuous high-speed release mode.
Enable or disable exposure smoothing.
Highlight [Exposure smoothing] and press 2 to select [ON] or [OFF].
Selecting [ON] allows the camera to adjust exposure to match the previous shot.
451 Interval Timer Shooting
-
-
Highlight [Electronic shutter
options] and press 2.
Highlight [Electronic shutter]
and press 2 to select [ON] or
[OFF].
Choose whether to use the electronic shutter.
The volume of the sound made when the electronic shutter is released can be chosen
using [Volume].
Choose an interval priority option.
Highlight [Interval priority] and press 2 to select [ON] or [OFF].
Choose whether the camera focuses between shots.
Highlight [Focus before each shot] and press 2 to select [ON] or [OFF].
If [ON] is selected for [Focus before each shot], the camera will focus before each shot
according to the option currently selected for focus mode.
452 Interval Timer Shooting
-
-
Highlight [Options] and press
2.
Highlight [AE bracketing] or
[Time-lapse video] and press
J.
Highlight [Starting storage
folder] and press 2.
After highlighting the desired
options and pressing J to
turn them on (M) or off (U),
press 4.
Highlight [Start] and press J.
If [Now] was selected for [Choose start day/time] in Step2,
shooting will start after about 3s.
Otherwise shooting will start at the time selected for
[Choose start day/time]> [Choose day/time].
The display turns off during shooting.
Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots
have been taken.
Choose additional options.
If you selected [AE bracketing], choose values for [Number of shots] and [Increment];
if you selected [Time-lapse video], choose settings for [Video file type], [Frame size/
frame rate], and [Destination].
Choose starting folder options.
453 Interval Timer Shooting
-
3
The memory card access lamp flashes between shots.
If the display is turned on by pressing the shutter-release button
halfway, the message [Interval timer shooting] will be displayed
and the 7 icon will flash. If [Time-lapse video] is selected for
[Options], a 8 icon will also be displayed.
DDuring Shooting
Pausing Interval-Timer Photography
Interval-timer photography can be paused between intervals by pressing J or by selecting [Interval
timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu, highlighting [Pause], and pressing J. Note that the
menus may not be displayed when the G button is pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very
short.
If [Time-lapse video] is selected for [Options], pressing J between intervals will end interval-timer
photography.
454 Interval Timer Shooting
Highlight [Restart option] and press 2, then highlight [Choose
day/time] and press 2.
Choose a starting date and time and press J.
Highlight [Restart] and press J.
Resuming Interval-Timer Photography
Interval timer shooting can be resumed as described below.
To resume shooting immediately:
Highlight [Restart] and press J.
To resume shooting at a specified time:
455 Interval Timer Shooting
-
-
-
Ending Interval-Timer Photography
To end interval-timer photography before all the photos are taken, select [Interval timer shooting]
in the photo shooting menu, highlight [Off], and press J. Note that the menus may not be displayed
when the G button is pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short. In this case you will
need to press J to pause interval-timer photography and then select [Interval timer shooting] in the
photo shooting menu, highlight [Off], and press J.
456 Interval Timer Shooting
DCautions: Interval-Timer Photography
Choose an interval longer than the time needed to take the selected number of shots at the
predicted shutter speed. Note that during actual interval-timer photography, the camera must not
only take shots at the selected interval but must also have sufficient time to complete the exposures
and perform such tasks as processing the photographs. If the interval is too short to take the
selected number of photos, the camera may skip to the next interval without shooting.
If the interval is too short, the total number of shots taken may be less than that selected for
[Intervals×shots/interval].
If you are using a flash, choose an interval longer than the time needed for the flash to charge. If the
interval is too short, the flash may fire at less than the power needed for full exposure.
If shooting cannot proceed at current settings—for example, if shutter speed is set to “Bulb” or
Time, the [Interval] is [00:00'00"], or the start time is in less than a minute—a warning will be
displayed.
If [ON] is selected for [Electronic shutter options] > [Electronic shutter], the shutter will sound
with every shot unless [Volume] is set to [0] (note that this applies even when [ON] is selected for
[Silent mode] in the setup menu).
If [Time-lapse video] is selected for [Options], the standby timer will not expire during interval-
timer photography, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]>
[Standby timer].
Selecting [HLG] for [Tone mode] in the photo shooting menu fixes [Options] > [Time-lapse
video]> [Video file type] at [H.265 10-bit (MOV)].
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken. Insert
another memory card and resume shooting (0 455).
Depending on memory card performance and shooting conditions, shooting may end before the
selected number of shots have been taken or the selected number of intervals is complete.
Interval timer shooting will pause if:
the camera is turned off and then on again (when the camera is off, batteries and memory cards
can be replaced without ending interval-timer photography), or
the photo/video selector is rotated from photo mode to black-and-white photo mode or vice
versa, or
self-timer or high-speed frame capture is selected for release mode.
Changing camera settings while the interval timer is active may cause shooting to end.
457 Interval Timer Shooting
-
-
-
DRelease Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the specified number of shots at each
interval.
DAdjusting Settings Between Shots
Pictures can be viewed and shooting and menu settings adjusted between shots. Note, however, that
the display will turn off and shooting will resume a few seconds before the next shot is taken.
DInterval-Timer Photography: Restrictions
Interval-timer photography cannot be combined with some camera features, including:
video recording,
long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”),
the self-timer,
high-speed frame capture,
bracketing,
multiple exposures,
HDR overlay,
focus shift, and
pixel shift.
DInterval Timer Settings
Turning the camera off or selecting a new release mode does not affect interval-timer photography
settings.
DRestoring Default Settings
Shooting menu settings cannot be reset while interval-timer photography is in progress.
458 Interval Timer Shooting
Time-Lapse Video
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to create a time-lapse video.
Option Description
[Start]
Start time-lapse recording. Shooting starts after about 3s and continues
at the interval selected for [Interval] for the time selected for [Shooting
time].
[Interval] Choose the interval between shots, in minutes and seconds.
[Shooting time]Choose how long the camera will continue to take pictures, in hours and
minutes.
[Exposure
smoothing]
Selecting [ON] smooths abrupt changes in exposure.
Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in
apparent variations in exposure. This can be addressed by shortening
the interval between shots.
Exposure smoothing will not take effect in mode M if [OFF] is selected
for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the
photo shooting menu.
[Electronic shutter
options]
Choose whether to use the electronic shutter.
When [ON] is selected for [Electronic shutter], the electronic shutter
will be used regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d5
[Shutter type].
The volume of the sound made when the electronic shutter is released
can be chosen using [Volume].
[Choose image area] Choose the image area for time-lapse videos from [FX] and [DX].
[Video file type] Choose the video file type for the final video.
[Frame size/frame
rate]
Choose the frame size and rate for the final video. The options available
vary with the setting chosen for [Video file type].
459 Time-Lapse Video
Option Description
[Interval priority]
[ON]: Enable interval priority to ensure that frames shot in modes P
and A are taken at the chosen interval.
Release priority is enabled regardless of the options selected for
Custom Settings a1 [AF-C priority selection] and a2 [AF-S priority
selection].
If [ON] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO
sensitivity control] and the time chosen for [Minimum shutter
speed] is longer than the interval, the time selected for the interval
will take priority over the selected shutter speed.
[OFF]: Disable interval priority to ensure that photos are correctly
exposed.
[Focus before each
shot]If [ON] is selected, the camera will focus between shots.
[Destination]Choose the slot used to record time-lapse videos when two memory
cards are inserted.
460 Time-Lapse Video
-
-
Highlight [Time-lapse video] in the photo shooting menu
and press 2.
Highlight [Interval] and press
2.
Choose an interval (in minutes
and seconds) and press J.
Recording Time-Lapse Videos
DBefore Shooting
Time-lapse videos are shot using the video crop.
Take test shots and check the results in the monitor.
Before proceeding, select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and make sure that the camera
clock is set to the correct time and date.
We recommend using one of the following power sources to prevent loss of power while shooting is
in progress:
A fully-charged battery
An optional EH‑7P charging AC adapter
An optional EH-8P AC adapter connected using the supplied UC‑E25 USB cable (featuring Type C
connectors at both ends)
Adjust time-lapse video settings.
Choose the interval between shots.
Choose an interval longer than the slowest anticipated shutter speed.
461 Time-Lapse Video
-
-
-
1
2
-
Highlight [Shooting time]
and press 2.
Choose a shooting time (in
hours and minutes) and press
J.
Highlight [Electronic shutter
options] and press 2.
Highlight [Electronic shutter]
and press 2 to select [ON] or
[OFF].
Choose the total shooting time.
The maximum shooting time is 23 hours and 59 minutes.
Enable or disable exposure smoothing.
Highlight [Exposure smoothing] and press 2 to select [ON] or [OFF].
Selecting [ON] smooths abrupt changes in exposure.
Choose whether to use the electronic shutter.
The volume of the sound made when the electronic shutter is released can be chosen
using [Volume].
462 Time-Lapse Video
-
-
-
Highlight [Choose image
area] and press 2.
Highlight an option and press
J.
Highlight [Video file type]
and press 2.
Highlight an option and press
J.
Highlight [Frame size/frame
rate] and press 2.
Highlight an option and press
J.
Choose the image area.
Choose a video file type.
Choose the frame size and rate.
463 Time-Lapse Video
Highlight [Destination] and
press 2.
Highlight the slot that will
be used to record time-lapse
videos when two memory
cards are inserted and press
J.
Choose an interval priority option.
Highlight [Interval priority] and press 2 to select [ON] or [OFF].
Choose whether the camera focuses between shots.
Highlight [Focus before each shot] and press 2 to select [ON] or [OFF].
If [ON] is selected for [Focus before each shot], the camera will focus before each shot
according to the option currently selected for focus mode.
Choose a destination.
464 Time-Lapse Video
-
Highlight [Start] and press J.
Shooting starts after about 3s.
The display turns off during shooting.
The camera takes pictures at interval selected for [Interval]
for the time selected for [Shooting time] in Step2.
The memory card access lamp flashes between shots.
If the display is turned on by pressing the shutter-release button
halfway, the message [Interval timer shooting] will be displayed
and the 8 icon will flash.
DDuring Shooting
Ending Shooting
To end shooting before all the photos are taken, press J or select [Time-lapse video] in the photo
shooting menu, highlight [Off], and press J. Note that the menus may not be displayed when the G
button is pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short.
A video will be created from the frames shot to the point where shooting ended and normal
photography will resume.
465 Time-Lapse Video
3
Frame size/frame rate
Length recorded/maximum length
Memory card indicator
1
2
3
DCalculating the Length of the Final Video
The total number of frames in the final video can be calculated by dividing the shooting time
selected in Step2 by the interval, rounding up, and adding 1.
The length of the final video can then be calculated by dividing the number of shots by the
frame rate selected for [Frame size/frame rate] (for example, a 48-frame video recorded with
[1920×1080; 24p] selected for [Frame size/frame rate] will be about two seconds long).
DPicture Review
The K button cannot be used to view pictures while shooting is in progress. The current frame will
however be displayed for a few seconds after each shot if [On] or [On (monitor only)] is selected
for [Picture review] in the playback menu. Note that other playback operations cannot be performed
while the frame is displayed. The current frame may not be displayed if the interval is very short.
466 Time-Lapse Video
DCautions: Time-Lapse Videos
Sound is not recorded with time-lapse videos.
The shutter speed and the time needed to record the picture to the memory card may vary from
shot to shot. As a result, camera may be unable to take shots at the selected interval.
Shooting will not begin if a time-lapse video cannot be recorded at current settings, for example if:
the value selected for [Interval] is longer than that selected for [Shooting time],
[00:00'00"] is selected for [Interval] or [Shooting time], or
the memory card is full.
Time-lapse photography will not start if the recording time is shown in red in the [Time-lapse
video] display. Adjust the [Interval] or [Shooting time].
If [ON] is selected for [Electronic shutter options] > [Electronic shutter], the shutter will sound
with every shot unless [Volume] is set to [0] (note that this applies even when [ON] is selected for
[Silent mode] in the setup menu).
Selecting [HLG] for [Tone mode] in the photo shooting menu fixes [Video file type] at [H.265
10-bit (MOV)].
The K button cannot be used to view pictures while time-lapse recording is in progress.
For consistent coloration, choose a white balance setting other than 4[Auto] or D[Natural
light auto] when recording time-lapse videos.
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]> [Standby timer], the
standby timer will not expire while recording is in progress.
Shooting may end if camera controls are used, settings are changed, or an HDMI cable is
connected. A video will be created from the frames shot to the point where shooting ended.
The following end shooting without a beep sounding or a video being recorded:
Disconnecting the power source
Ejecting the memory card
467 Time-Lapse Video
-
-
-
-
-
DAdjusting Settings Between Shots
Shooting and menu settings can be adjusted between shots. Note, however, that the monitor will turn
off approximately 2s before the next shot is taken.
DTime-Lapse Videos: Restrictions
Time-lapse video recording cannot be combined with some camera features, including:
video recording,
long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”),
the self-timer,
high-speed frame capture,
bracketing,
multiple exposures,
HDR overlay,
interval-timer photography,
focus shift, and
pixel shift.
468 Time-Lapse Video
Focus Shift Shooting
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
Focus shift automatically varies focus over a series of shots. Use it to take photos that will later be
combined using focus stacking to create a single picture with increased depth of field. Before using
focus shift, choose a focus mode of AF‑S or AF‑C and a release mode other than self-timer or
high-speed frame capture.
Option Description
[Start]Start shooting. The camera will take the selected number of shots,
changing the focus distance by the selected amount with each shot.
[No. of shots] Choose the number of shots (maximum 300).
[Focus step width]Focus shift varies the focus distance over a series of photographs.
Choose the amount the focus distance changes with each shot.
[Interval until next
shot]
Choose the interval between shots, in seconds.
To ensure correct exposure when using a flash, choose an interval
long enough for the flash to charge.
[First-frame exposure
lock]
[ON]: The camera locks exposure for all shots at the setting for the
first frame.
[OFF]: The camera adjusts exposure before each shot.
[Electronic shutter
options]
Choose whether to use the electronic shutter.
When [ON] is selected for [Electronic shutter], the electronic shutter
will be used regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d5
[Shutter type].
The volume of the sound made when the electronic shutter is released
can be chosen using [Volume].
[Focus position auto
reset]
[ON]: Focus will return to the starting position once all the shots
in the current sequence have been taken. This saves you having to
refocus each time when photographing subjects at the same focus
distance several times in succession.
[OFF]: Focus remains fixed at the position for the final shot in the
sequence. This allows you to start from the most recent focus position
when photographing a single subject over multiple consecutive series.
469 Focus Shift Shooting
Option Description
[Starting storage
folder]
Highlight options and press J or 2 to select (M) or deselect (U).
[New folder]: A new folder is created for each new sequence.
[Reset file numbering]: File numbering is reset to 0001 whenever a
new folder is created.
470 Focus Shift Shooting
Highlight [Focus shift shooting] in the photo shooting
menu and press 2.
Focus Shift Photography
DBefore Shooting
Take a test shot at current settings.
We recommend using one of the following power sources to prevent loss of power while shooting is
in progress:
A fully-charged battery
An optional EH‑7P charging AC adapter
An optional EH-8P AC adapter connected using the supplied UC‑E25 USB cable (featuring Type C
connectors at both ends)
Focus.
During focus shift, the camera takes a series of shots starting from a selected focus position
and continuing toward infinity. Given that shooting ends when infinity is reached, the starting
focus position should be slightly in front of (i.e., closer to the camera than) the closest point
on the subject.
Do not move the camera after focusing.
471 Focus Shift Shooting
-
-
-
1
2
Highlight [No. of shots] and
press 2.
Choose the number of shots
and press J.
Highlight [Focus step width]
and press 2.
Choose a focus step width
and press J.
Adjust focus shift settings.
Choose the number of shots.
The maximum number of shots is 300.
We recommend taking more shots than you think you’ll need. You can winnow them down
during focus stacking.
More than 100 shots may be required for photographs of insects or other small objects.
On the other hand, only a few may be needed to photograph a landscape from front to
back with a wide-angle lens.
Choose the amount the focus distance changes with each shot.
Press 4 to reduce the focus step width, 2 to increase.
Note that high settings increase the risk that some areas will be out of focus when the
shots are stacked. A value of 5 or less is recommended.
Try experimenting with different settings before shooting.
472 Focus Shift Shooting
3
-
-
-
-
-
-
Highlight [Interval until next
shot] and press 2.
Choose the interval between
shots and press J.
Choose the interval until next shot.
Choose the interval between shots, in seconds.
To ensure correct exposure when using a flash, choose an interval long enough for the
flash to charge. A setting of [00] is recommended when shooting without a flash.
Enable or disable first-frame exposure lock.
Highlight [First-frame exposure lock] and press 2 to select [ON] or [OFF].
[OFF] is recommended if lighting and other conditions will not change during shooting,
[ON] when photographing landscapes and the like under variable lighting.
Selecting [ON] locks exposure at the value for the first shot, ensuring that all photos have
the same exposure. Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may however
result in apparent variations in exposure. This can be addressed by selecting [OFF].
473 Focus Shift Shooting
-
-
-
-
Highlight [Electronic shutter
options] and press 2.
Highlight [Electronic shutter]
and press 2 to select [ON] or
[OFF].
Choose whether to use the electronic shutter.
The volume of the sound made when the electronic shutter is released can be chosen
using [Volume].
Choose whether the focus position returns to the starting position at the end of each
sequence.
Highlight [Focus position auto reset] and press 2 to select [ON] or [OFF].
We recommend selecting [ON] when using focus shift to photograph subjects at the same
focus distance multiple times in succession.
If [OFF] is selected, focus will remain fixed at the position for the final shot in the
sequence.
474 Focus Shift Shooting
-
-
-
Highlight [Starting storage
folder] and press 2.
After highlighting the desired
options and pressing J to
turn them on (M) or off (U),
press 4.
Highlight [Start] and press J.
Shooting starts after about 3s.
The display turns off during shooting.
The camera takes photographs at the selected interval,
starting at the focus distance selected at the start of
shooting and progressing out toward infinity by the selected
focus step distance with each shot.
Shooting ends when the selected number of shots has been
taken or focus reaches infinity.
Choose starting folder options.
Ending Focus Shift Photography
To end shooting before all shots have been taken, either:
select [Focus shift shooting] in the photo shooting menu, highlight [Off], and press J, or
press the shutter-release button halfway or press the J button between shots.
475 Focus Shift Shooting
4
DDuring Shooting
The memory card access lamp flashes between shots.
DCautions: Focus Shift Photography
The shutter speed and the time needed to record the picture may vary from shot to shot. As a
result, the camera may be unable to take shots at the selected interval.
Shooting ends when focus reaches infinity, and consequently depending on the focus position at
the start of shooting, shooting may end before the selected number of shots has been taken.
If [ON] is selected for [Electronic shutter options] > [Electronic shutter], the shutter will sound
with every shot unless [Volume] is set to [0] (note that this applies even when [ON] is selected for
[Silent mode] in the setup menu).
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]> [Standby timer], the
standby timer will not expire while shooting is in progress.
If you are using a flash, choose an interval longer than the time needed for the flash to charge. If the
interval is too short, the flash may fire at less than the power needed for full exposure.
If shooting cannot proceed at current settings, for example because shutter speed is set to “Bulb”
or Time”, a warning will be displayed.
Changing camera settings while focus shift photography is in progress may cause shooting to end.
DFocus Shift Photography: Restrictions
Focus-shift photography cannot be combined with some camera features, including:
video recording,
long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”),
the self-timer,
high-speed frame capture,
bracketing,
multiple exposures,
HDR overlay,
interval-timer photography,
time-lapse video recording, and
pixel shift.
476 Focus Shift Shooting
Tip: Aperture
Given that pictures shot at very small apertures (high f-numbers) may lack definition, we recommend
that you choose apertures wider (f-numbers lower) than f/8–f/11.
Tip: Close-ups
Because focus depth is reduced at short focus distances, we recommend choosing smaller focus steps
and increasing the number of shots when photographing subjects close to the camera.
477 Focus Shift Shooting
Pixel Shift Shooting
G buttonUCphoto shooting menu
The camera automatically shoots a series of NEF (RAW) photos, changing the position of the image
sensor with each one. The photos can be blended using Nikon’s NXStudio software to create a single
high-resolution image.
Option Description
[Pixel shift shooting
mode]
[On (series)]: Take multiple series of pixel shift photos. To end pixel
shift photography, select [Pixel shift shooting mode] again and
choose [Off].
[On (single photo)]: End pixel shift photography after recording a
single series.
[Off]: End pixel shift photography.
[Number of shots]
Choose the number of photos taken each time the shutter-release
button is pressed. Long series require more time to record but produce
better-quality results when blended into a single image.
[Delay]Choose the delay between the shutter-release button being pressed all
the way down and the start of pixel shift photography.
[Interval until next
shot]Choose the interval between shots, in seconds.
478 Pixel Shift Shooting
Highlight [Pixel shift shooting] in the photo shooting
menu and press 2.
Taking Photos Using Pixel Shift
DBefore Shooting
Pixel shift is intended for pictures of landscapes, buildings, and other static subjects shot with the
camera on a tripod. The desired results may consequently not be achieved with moving subjects or
shots taken without a tripod.
To improve the image quality of the resulting pixel-shift blended pictures, we recommend
performing pixel mapping via [Pixel mapping] in the setup menu before shooting.
Take a test shot at current settings.
We recommend using one of the following power sources to prevent loss of power while shooting is
in progress:
A fully-charged battery
An optional EH‑7P charging AC adapter
An optional EH-8P AC adapter connected using the supplied UC‑E25 USB cable (featuring Type C
connectors at both ends)
DNXStudio
Be sure to download and install the latest version from the Nikon Download Center. Earlier versions
may not support pixel shift blending.
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it steady.
479 Pixel Shift Shooting
-
-
-
1
2
Select a [Pixel shift shooting mode].
Highlight [Pixel shift shooting mode] and press 2.
Highlight the desired option using 1 or 3 and press J.
If [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is selected, an icon will
appear in the display.
Image quality will be fixed at [RAW].
The electronic shutter will be used regardless of the option
selected for Custom Setting d5 [Shutter type].
-
-
Choose the [Number of shots].
Highlight [Number of shots] and press 2.
Choose the number of shots using 1 or 3 and press J.
480 Pixel Shift Shooting
3
4
Choose a value for [Delay].
Highlight [Delay] and press 2. You can now choose the
delay between the shutter-release button being pressed all
the way down and the start of pixel shift photography.
Choose a delay (in seconds) using 1 or 3 and press J.
Choose a value for [Interval until next shot].
Highlight [Interval until next shot] and press 2. You can
now choose the interval between shots, in seconds.
Choose an interval (in seconds) using 1 or 3 and press J.
Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.
Press the shutter-release button all the way down; the camera will begin taking NEF (RAW)
photos after the time selected for [Delay] and continue until all the shots selected for
[Number of shots] have been taken.
Shooting may continue for some time depending on the value selected for [Number of
shots].
If [On (series)] is selected for [Pixel shift shooting mode], you can continue to take
photographs using pixel shift until [Off] is selected.
If [On (single photo)] is selected for [Pixel shift shooting mode], pixel shift will end
automatically after a single series.
481 Pixel Shift Shooting
5
6
7
Blend the NEF (RAW) photos using NXStudio.
See NXStudios online help for detailed instructions.
The desired results may not be achieved if the subject moved or lighting changed during
shooting.
Ending Pixel Shift
To end pixel-shift photography before all the photos in the current series have been taken, press the J
button between shots.
482 Pixel Shift Shooting
8
DDuring Shooting
The memory card access lamp flashes between shots.
DCautions: Pixel Shift
Optional flash units will not fire.
In continuous release modes, the camera will not shoot continuously while the shutter-release
button is held all the way down.
Changing camera settings while pixel shift is in progress may cause shooting to end.
Long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”) are not supported. If the shutter speed dial is rotated to B
(“Bulb”) or T (“Time”), [Bulb] or [Time] will flash in the shooting display.
The focus mode for autofocus is fixed at AF-S. If the option currently selected for AF-area mode is
available only with AF-C, the AF-area mode will switch to single-point AF.
Custom Setting d6 [Extended shutter speeds (M)] is fixed at [OFF].
DPixel Shift: Restrictions
Pixel shift cannot be combined with some camera features, including:
video recording,
the self-timer,
high-speed frame capture,
long exposure noise reduction,
vibration reduction,
bracketing,
multiple exposures,
interval-timer photography,
time-lapse video recording, and
focus shift.
483 Pixel Shift Shooting
To view the video recording menu, select the 1 tab in the camera
menus.
The Video Recording Menu
Menu Items and Defaults
The options in the video recording menu are listed below, together with their default settings.
[Reset video recording menu]: —
[Storage folder]
[Rename]: NCZ_F
[Select folder by number]: 100
[Select folder from list]: —
[File naming]: DSC
[Destination]: SD card slot
[Video file type]: H.265 8-bit (MOV)
[Frame size/frame rate]: 3840×2160; 30p
[Image area]
[Choose image area]: FX
[DX crop alert]: OFF
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[Maximum sensitivity]: 51200
[Auto ISO control (mode M)]: ON
[ISO sensitivity (mode M)]: 100
[White balance]: Same as photo settings
[Set Picture Control]: Same as photo settings
[Manage Picture Control]: —
[HLG quality]
[Quick sharp]: 0
[Contrast]: 0
[Saturation]: 0
[Hue]: 0
[Active D-Lighting]: Off
[High ISO NR]: Normal
[Vignette control]: Normal
484 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Diffraction compensation]: ON
[Auto distortion control]: ON
[Skin softening]: Same as photo settings
[Portrait impression balance]: Off
[Video flicker reduction]: Auto
[Metering]: Matrix metering
[Focus mode]: Full-time AF
[AF-area mode]: Single-point AF
[AF/MF subject detection options]
[Subject detection]: Auto
[AF when subject not detected]: ON
[MF subject detection area]: MF subject detection off
[Vibration reduction]: Same as photo settings
[Electronic VR]: OFF
[Microphone sensitivity]: Auto
[Attenuator]: OFF
[Frequency response]: Wide range
[Wind noise reduction]: OFF
[Mic jack plug-in power]: ON
[Headphone volume]: 15
[Timecode]
[Record timecodes]: Off
[Count-up method]: Record run
[Timecode origin]
[Drop frame]: ON
[External rec. cntrl (HDMI)]: OFF
485 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
Reset Video Recording Menu
G buttonU1video recording menu
Reset all video recording menu settings to their default values.
486 Reset Video Recording Menu
Storage Folder
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored. More information is available in the
section devoted to the [Storage folder] item in the photo shooting menu (0 373).
D“Storage Folder”
Changes to [Storage folder] made in the photo shooting menu apply in the video recording menu
and vice versa.
487 Storage Folder
File Naming
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose the three-letter prefix used in naming the files in which videos are stored; the default prefix is
“DSC” (0 377).
488 File Naming
Destination
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose the slot to which videos are recorded when two memory cards are inserted.
The menu shows the time available on each card.
Recording ends automatically when no time remains on the current card.
489 Destination
Video File Type
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose the video file type. For more information, see the section on “Video File Types” (0 187) in the
“Video Recording” chapter.
490 Video File Type
Frame Size/Frame Rate
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose the video frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. For more information, see the section on “Video
Frame Size and Rate Options” (0 189) in the “Video Recording” chapter.
491 Frame Size/Frame Rate
Image Area
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose a video crop. For more information, see the section on “Video Image Area Options” (0 192)
in the “Video Recording” chapter.
492 Image Area
Adjust the following ISO sensitivity settings for use in video mode.
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G buttonU1video recording menu
Option Description
[Maximum sensitivity]
Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control from
values between ISO 200 and Hi 2.0.
The selected value serves as the upper limit for ISO sensitivity
in modes P, S, and A and when [ON] is selected for [Auto ISO
control (mode M)] in mode M.
[Auto ISO control (mode
M)]
[ON]: Enable auto ISO sensitivity control in mode M.
[OFF]: Use the value selected for [ISO sensitivity (mode M)].
Regardless of the option selected, auto ISO sensitivity control is
used in modes other than M.
[ISO sensitivity (mode M)]Choose the ISO sensitivity for mode M from values between ISO
100 and Hi 2.0.
DCautions: Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
At high ISO sensitivities, “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may increase.
At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have difficulty focusing.
The foregoing can be prevented by choosing a lower value for [ISO sensitivity settings]>
[Maximum sensitivity].
493 ISO Sensitivity Settings
White Balance
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose the white balance for videos. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the option currently
selected for photos (0 157).
494 White Balance
Set Picture Control
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose a Picture Control for videos. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the option currently
selected for photos (0 176).
495 Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
G buttonU1video recording menu
Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls (0 183).
496 Manage Picture Control
HLG Quality
G buttonU1video recording menu
Adjust HLG video image processing options for use when [HLG] is chosen as the tone mode for [Video
file type]> [H.265 10-bit (MOV)] in the video recording menu.
Option Description
[Quick sharp]
Apply sharpening to areas of contrast within the picture.
Adjusting [Quick sharp] simultaneously adjusts [Sharpening], [Mid-
range sharpening], and [Clarity] for well-balanced results. Choose
higher values for heightened sharpness. Choose lower values for
greater softness.
[Sharpening], [Mid-range sharpening], and [Clarity] each apply to
different areas within the picture. Each can be adjusted individually.
[Sharpening] Apply sharpening to small areas of contrast.
[Mid-range
sharpening]
Apply sharpening to areas of contrast larger than those affected by
[Sharpening] and smaller those affected by [Clarity].
[Clarity]
Apply sharpening to large areas of contrast.
Fine outlines and the brightness and contrast of the picture as a whole
are unaffected.
[Contrast] Adjust overall contrast.
[Saturation] Control the vividness of colors.
[Hue] Adjust hue.
497 HLG Quality
Active D‑Lighting
G buttonU1video recording menu
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating videos with natural contrast.
Option Description
Z[Extra high]
Choose the amount of Active D-Lighting performed from (in order from high
to low) [Extra high], [High], [Normal], and [Low].
P[High]
Q[Normal]
R[Low]
[Off] Active D-Lighting off.
498 Active D‑Lighting
High ISO NR
G buttonU1video recording menu
Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels) in videos recorded at high ISO sensitivities (0 402).
499 High ISO NR
Vignette Control
G buttonU1video recording menu
Reduce vignetting in videos (0 403).
DVignette Control
Changes to [Vignette control] in the photo shooting menu apply in the video recording menu and
vice versa.
500 Vignette Control
Diffraction Compensation
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose whether to reduce diffraction in videos (0 404).
DDiffraction Compensation
Changes to [Diffraction compensation] in the photo shooting menu apply in the video recording
menu and vice versa.
501 Diffraction Compensation
Auto Distortion Control
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose whether to reduce barrel and pin-cushion distortion in videos (0 405).
DAuto Distortion Control
Changes to [Auto distortion control] in the photo shooting menu apply in the video recording menu
and vice versa.
502 Auto Distortion Control
Skin Softening
G buttonU1video recording menu
Adjust skin softening settings for video recording. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the option
currently selected for photos (0 406).
DRestrictions on Skin Softening in Video Mode
Skin softening will not be performed if [N-Log] is chosen for tone mode when [H.265 10-bit (MOV)]
is selected for [Video file type] in the video recording menu.
503 Skin Softening
Portrait Impression Balance
G buttonU1video recording menu
Adjust portrait impression balance settings for video recording (0 407).
504 Portrait Impression Balance
Video Flicker Reduction
G buttonU1video recording menu
Reduce flicker and banding in the shooting display and in footage recorded under fluorescent or
mercury-vapor lighting.
Choose [Auto] to allow the camera to automatically choose the correct frequency.
If [Auto] fails to produce the desired results, select [50Hz] or [60Hz] according to the frequency of
the local power supply. Choose [50Hz] for areas with a 50Hz power supply, [60Hz] for areas with a
60Hz power supply.
Changes to [Video flicker reduction] also apply to the shooting display in photo mode.
DCautions: “Video Flicker Reduction”
If [Auto] fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the frequency of the local
power supply, test both the 50 and 60Hz options and choose the one that produces the best
results.
Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright. If this is the case,
try choosing a smaller aperture (higher f-number).
Flicker reduction may fail to produce the desired results in modes other than M. If this is the case,
select mode M and choose a shutter speed adapted to the frequency of the local power supply:
50Hz: ¹⁄₁₀₀s, ¹⁄₅₀s, ¹⁄₂₅s
60Hz: ¹⁄₁₂₅s, ¹⁄₆₀s, ¹⁄₃₀s
505 Video Flicker Reduction
-
-
Metering
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose how the camera meters exposure in video mode. [Spot metering] is not available in the video
recording menu (0 411).
506 Metering
Focus Mode
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose a focus mode for video recording (0 114).
507 Focus Mode
AF-Area Mode
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose an AF-area mode for video recording (0 116).
508 AF-Area Mode
AF/MF Subject Detection Options
G buttonU1video recording menu
Subject Detection
Choose the type of subject to which the camera gives priority when focusing in video mode (0 120).
AF When Subject Not Detected
Choose whether the camera focuses if unable to detect a subject of the type selected for [Subject
detection] when [Full-time AF] is selected for focus mode.
If [ON] is selected, the camera will initiate autofocus whether or not a subject of the selected type is
detected.
Select [OFF] to disable autofocus when no subject of the selected type is detected.
509 AF/MF Subject Detection Options
MF Subject Detection Area
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose the manual focus subject detection area. For more information, see “Using Subject Detection
with Manual Focus” (0 121) in the “Subject Detection” portion of the “Focus” section.
510 MF Subject Detection Area
Vibration Reduction
G buttonU1video recording menu
Adjust vibration reduction settings for video mode. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the option
currently selected for photos (0 421).
511 Vibration Reduction
Electronic VR
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction in video mode.
DCaution: Electronic Vibration Reduction
At frame rates of 120p and 100p, electronic vibration reduction is disabled, fixing [Electronic VR] at
[OFF].
512 Electronic VR
If the sound level is displayed in red, the volume is too high.
Reduce microphone sensitivity.
Videos recorded with [Microphone off] selected for [Microphone
sensitivity] are indicated by a 2 icon.
Adjust microphone sensitivity
manually. Choose from values of from
[1] to [20]. The higher the value, the
higher the sensitivity; the lower the
value, the lower the sensitivity.
Microphone Sensitivity
G buttonU1video recording menu
Turn built-in or external microphones on or off or adjust microphone sensitivity.
Option Description
[Auto] Microphone sensitivity is adjusted automatically.
[Manual]
[Microphone off] Turn sound recording off.
DVideos Without Sound
513 Microphone Sensitivity
Attenuator
G buttonU1video recording menu
Select [ON] to reduce microphone gain and prevent audio distortion when recording videos in loud
environments.
514 Attenuator
Frequency Response
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose the range of frequencies to which built-in and external microphones respond.
Option Description
S[Wide range]Record a wide range of frequencies. Choose for everything from music to
the bustling hum of a city street.
T[Vocal range] Choose for human voices.
515 Frequency Response
Wind Noise Reduction
G buttonU1video recording menu
Select [ON] to enable the low-cut filter, reducing noise produced by wind blowing over the built-in
microphone. Note that other sounds may also be affected.
Selecting [ON] for [Wind noise reduction] has no effect on optional stereo microphones. Wind-noise
reduction for optional stereo microphones that support this feature can be enabled or disabled using
microphone controls.
516 Wind Noise Reduction
Mic Jack Plug-in Power
G buttonU1video recording menu
The camera does not provide power to external microphones when [OFF] is selected.
To prevent noise from interference generated by the power supply, we recommend turning plug-in
power [OFF] when using microphones that do not require plug-in power.
For information on whether your microphone requires plug-in power, consult the manufacturer.
517 Mic Jack Plug-in Power
Headphone Volume
G buttonU1video recording menu
Press 1 or 3 to adjust headphone volume.
518 Headphone Volume
Timecode
G buttonU1video recording menu
Choose whether to record time codes giving the hour, minute, second, and frame number for each
frame when shooting videos. Time codes are not included in videos shot with [H.264 8-bit (MP4)]
selected for [Video file type] in the video recording menu.
Option Description
[Record
timecodes]
[On]: Record time codes. The time code appears in the shooting display.
[On (with HDMI output)]: Time codes will be included with footage saved to
external recorders connected to the camera via an HDMI cable. The camera
supports Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, and SUMO-series Monitor recorders.
[Off]: Time codes are not recorded.
[Count-up
method]
[Record run]: Time codes are incremented only while recording is in progress.
[Free run]: Time codes are incremented continuously. Time codes continue to
be incremented while the camera is off.
[Timecode
origin]
[Reset]: Reset the time code to 00:00:00.00.
[Enter manually]: Enter the hour, minute, second, and frame number
manually.
[Current time]: Set the time code to the current time as reported by the
camera clock. Before proceeding, select [Time zone and date] in the setup
menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date.
[Drop frame]Select [ON] to compensate for discrepancies between the frame count and the
actual recording time at frame rates of 30 and 60fps.
519 Timecode
DCaution: HDMI Devices
Selecting [On (with HDMI output)] for [Record timecodes] may disrupt footage output to HDMI
devices.
520 Timecode
External Rec. Cntrl (HDMI)
G buttonU1video recording menu
Selecting [ON] allows camera controls to be used to start and stop recording on the external recorder.
For more information, see the section on “Recorders” (0 282) in the “Connecting to HDMI TVs and
Recorders” chapter.
521 External Rec. Cntrl (HDMI)
To view Custom Settings, select the A tab in the camera menus.
The Custom Settings Menu
Menu Items and Defaults
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual preferences. The Custom
Settings menu is divided into two levels.
522 Menu Items and Defaults
The options in the Custom Settings menu are listed below, together with their default settings. 1
[Reset custom settings]: —
a[Focus]
a1: [AF-C priority selection]: Release
a2: [AF-S priority selection]: Focus
a3: [Focus tracking with lock-on]
[Blocked shot AF response]: 3
a4: [Focus points used]: All points
a5: [Store points by orientation]: Off
a6: [AF activation]: Shutter/AF‑ON
a7: [Focus point persistence]: Auto
a8: [Limit AF-area mode selection]
[Pinpoint AF]: M
[Single-point AF]: L (cannot be deselected)
[Dynamic-area AF (S)]: M
[Dynamic-area AF (M)]: M
[Dynamic-area AF (L)]: M
[Wide-area AF (S)]: M
[Wide-area AF (L)]: M
[Wide-area AF (C1)]: M
[Wide-area AF (C2)]: M
[3D-tracking]: M
[Auto-area AF]: M
a9: [Focus point wrap-around]: OFF
a10: [Focus point display]
[Manual focus mode]: ON
[Dynamic-area AF assist]: ON
[AF-C in-focus display]: OFF
[3D-tracking focus point color]: White
a11: [Built-in AF-assist illuminator]: ON
a12: [Focus peaking]
[Focus peaking display]: OFF
[Focus peaking sensitivity]: 2 (standard)
[Focus peaking highlight color]: Red
a13: [Focus point selection speed]: Normal
a14: [Manual focus ring in AF mode]2: ON
b[Metering/exposure]
b1: [ISO sensitivity step value]: 1/3 step
b2: [Easy exposure compensation]: On
b3: [Matrix metering face detection]: ON
b4: [Center-weighted area]: Standard
523 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
b5: [Fine-tune optimal exposure]
[Matrix metering]: 0
[Center-weighted metering]: 0
[Spot metering]: 0
[Highlight-weighted metering]: 0
c[Timers/AE lock]
c1: [Shutter-release button AE-L]: Off
c2: [Self-timer]
[Self-timer delay]: 10s
[Number of shots]: 1
[Interval between shots]: 0.5s
c3: [Power off delay]
[Playback]: 10s
[Menus]: 1min
[Picture review]: 4s
[Standby timer]: 30s
d[Shooting/display]
d1: [CL mode shooting speed]: 5fps
d2: [Maximum shots per burst]: 200
d3: [Pre-Release Capture options]
[Pre-release burst]: None
[Post-release burst]: Max.
d4: [Sync. release mode options]: Sync
d5: [Shutter type]: Auto
d6: [Extended shutter speeds (M)]: OFF
d7: [Limit selectable image area]
[FX (36×24)]: L (cannot be deselected)
[DX (24×16)]: M
[1:1 (24×24)]: M
[16:9 (36×20)]: M
d8: [File number sequence]: On
d9: [View mode (photo Lv)]: Show effects of settings
[Show effects of settings]: Only when flash is not used
[Adjust for ease of viewing]: Auto
d10: [Starlight view (photo Lv)]: OFF
d11: [Warm display colors]
[Warm display color options]: Off
[Warm color display brightness]: 0
d12: [View all in continuous mode]: ON
d13: [Release timing indicator]: Type B
d14: [Image frame]: ON
d15: [Grid type]: 3×3
d16: [Virtual horizon type]: Type A
524 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
d17: [Custom monitor shooting display]
[Display 1]: L (cannot be deselected)
[Display 2]: M
[Display 3]: M
[Display 4]: M
[Display 5]: M
d18: [Custom viewfinder shooting display]
[Display 1]: L (cannot be deselected)
[Display 2]: M
[Display 3]: M
[Display 4]: M
e[Bracketing/flash]
e1: [Flash sync speed]: 1/200s
e2: [Flash shutter speed]: 1/60s
e3: [Exposure comp. for flash]: Entire frame
e4: [Auto c ISO sensitivity control]: Subject and background
e5: [Modeling flash]: ON
e6: [Auto bracketing (mode M)]: Flash/speed
e7: [Bracketing order]: MTR > under > over
e8: [Flash burst priority]: Prioritize precise flash control
f[Controls]
f1: [Customize i menu]: Set Picture Control, White balance, Image quality, Image size, AF-
area mode/subj. detection, Focus mode, Release mode, Vibration reduction, Custom controls
(shooting), Metering, Airplane mode, View memory card info
f2: [Custom controls (shooting)]
[Fn button]: White balance
[AE-L/AF-L button]: AE/AF lock
[Playback button]: Playback
[DISP button]: Cycle live view info display
[OK button]: Select center focus point
[Command dials]
[Exposure setting]: P:3E/yP*, S: 3E/yTv, A: 3Av/yE, M: 3Av/yTv
[Focus/AF-area mode selection]: 3t/ys
[Sub-command dial zoom role]: Exposure setting
[Video record button]: Live view info display off
[Lens Fn2 button]: AF-ON
[Lens Fn button]: AE/AF lock
[Lens Fn ring (clockwise)]: Recall focus position
[Lens Fn ring (counterclockwise)]: Recall focus position
[Lens memory set button]: Save focus position
[Lens control ring]: (Varies with lens)
f3: [Custom controls (playback)]
525 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Fn button]: None
[AE-L/AF-L button]: Protect
[Playback button]: Resume shooting
[DISP button]: Cycle info display
[OK button]: Zoom on/off
[Video record button]: None
[Main command dial]
[Frame advance]: 1 frame
[Video playback]: 10 frames
[Sub-command dial]
[Frame advance]: 1 frame
[Video playback]: 10s
[Lens Fn button]: None
[Lens Fn2 button]: None
f4: [Touch Fn]
[Enable/disable touch Fn]: OFF
[Assign touch Fn]: Move focus point
[Touch Fn area]
[“Wide” orientation]: Top right quadrant
[Tall” orientation]: Same as wide orientation
f5: [Focus-point lock]: OFF
f6: [Reverse dial rotation]
[Exposure compensation]: U
[Shutter speed/aperture]: U
f7: [Release button to use dial]: OFF
f8: [Reverse indicators]:
f9: [Reverse ring for focus]: OFF
f10: [Focus ring rotation range]: Non-linear
f11: [Control ring response]: High
f12: [Switch focus/control ring roles]: OFF
f13: [Power zoom (PZ) button options]
[Use x/w buttons]: OFF
[Power zoom speed]: +3
f14: [Full-frame playback flicks]
[Flick up]: None
[Flick down]: None
[Flick advance direction]: LeftVRight
g[Video]
g1: [Customize i menu]: Set Picture Control, White balance, Frame size/frame rate, Microphone
sensitivity, AF-area mode/subj. detection, Focus mode, Electronic VR, Vibration reduction, Custom
controls, Wind noise reduction, Airplane mode, Destination
g2: [Custom controls]
[Fn button]: White balance
526 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[AE-L/AF-L button]: AE/AF lock
[Playback button]: Playback
[DISP button]: Cycle live view info display
[OK button]: Select center focus point
[Shutter-release button]: None
[Video record button]: Record videos
[Command dials]
[Exposure setting]: A: 3Av/yE, M: 3Av/yTv
[Focus/AF-area mode selection]: 3t/ys
[Sub-command dial zoom role]: Exposure setting
[Lens Fn button]: AE/AF lock
[Lens Fn2 button]: AF-ON
[Lens Fn ring (counterclockwise)]: Recall focus position
[Lens Fn ring (clockwise)]: Recall focus position
[Lens memory set button]: Save focus position
[Lens control ring]: (Varies with lens)
g3: [Focus-point lock]: OFF
g4: [Limit AF-area mode selection]
[Single-point AF]: L (cannot be deselected)
[Wide-area AF (S)]: M
[Wide-area AF (L)]: M
[Wide-area AF (C1)]: M
[Wide-area AF (C2)]: M
[Subject-tracking AF]: M
[Auto-area AF]: M
g5: [AF speed]: 0
[When to apply]: Always
g6: [AF tracking sensitivity]: 4
g7: [Power zoom (PZ) button options]
[Use x/w buttons]: OFF
[Power zoom speed]
[Pre/post recording]: +3
[During recording]: 0
g8: [Fine ISO control (mode M)]: Off
g9: [Extended shutter speeds (S/M)]: OFF
g10: [View assist]: OFF
g11: [Zebra pattern]
[Pattern tone range]: Zebra pattern off
[Pattern]: Pattern 1
[Highlight threshold]: 250
[Mid-tone range]: Value: 160; range: ±10
g12: [Limit zebra pattern tone range]: No restrictions
527 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
g13: [Grid type]: 3×3
g14: [Brightness information display]: Histogram
g15: [Custom monitor shooting display]
[Display 1]: L (cannot be deselected)
[Display 2]: M
[Display 3]: M
[Display 4]: M
g16: [Custom viewfinder shooting display]
[Display 1]: L (cannot be deselected)
[Display 2]: M
[Display 3]: M
g17: [Red REC frame indicator]: ON
Items modified from default values are indicated by asterisks (“U”).
Available with compatible lenses only.
528 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
2
Reset Custom Settings
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Reset custom settings to their default values.
529 Reset Custom Settings
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses when AF-C is selected.
Option Description
G[Release]Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed
(release priority).
B[Focus+ release]
Priority is normally given to release, but if the subject is dark or low
contrast and the camera is in continuous-release mode, priority will be
given to focus for the first shot in each series. For the remaining shots,
priority will be given to release regardless of focus. This helps ensure
that the first shot in each series is in focus.
F[Focus] Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus priority).
530 a1: AF-C Priority Selection
a2: AF-S Priority Selection
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses when AF-S is selected.
Option Description
G[Release]Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release
priority).
F[Focus] Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus priority).
531 a2: AF-S Priority Selection
Choose how quickly focus responds if something passes between
the subject and the camera when AF‑C is selected for the focus
mode.
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Blocked Shot AF Response
Choose [5] ([Delayed]) to help maintain focus on your original subject.
Choose [1] ([Quick]) to make it easier to shift focus to objects crossing your field of view.
Regardless of the option selected, blocked shot AF response functions in mode[3] when [3D-
tracking] is selected for AF-area mode.
If [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode, blocked shot AF response will function in mode [3]
when [2] or [1] ([Quick]) is selected.
532 a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On
a4: Focus Points Used
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-point selection when an option other
than [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode.
Option Description
4[All points]Every focus point available in the current AF-area mode can be
selected. The number of points available varies with the AF-area mode.
5[Alternating points]
The number of available focus points is reduced to one quarter of the
number available when [All points] is selected. Use for quick focus-
point selection. The number of points available for [Pinpoint AF] is not
affected.
533 a4: Focus Points Used
Camera rotated 90° counter-
clockwise
Landscape (wide) orientation Camera rotated 90° clockwise
a5: Store Points by Orientation
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether separate focus points can be selected for “wide” (landscape) orientation, for “tall”
(portrait) orientation with the camera rotated 90° clockwise, and for “tall” orientation with the camera
rotated 90° counterclockwise.
Select [Off] to use the same focus point regardless of camera orientation.
534 a5: Store Points by Orientation
Camera rotated 90° counter-
clockwise
Landscape (wide) orientation Camera rotated 90° clockwise
Select [Focus point] to enable separate focus-point selection. To enable separate selection of both
the focus point and AF-area mode, choose [Focus point and AF-area mode].
535 a5: Store Points by Orientation
a6: AF Activation
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether the shutter-release button can be used to focus.
Option Description
[Shutter/AF‑ON] The camera focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
[AF‑ON only] The camera does not focus when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Highlighting [AF-ON only] and pressing 2 displays [Out-of-focus release] options.
Option Description
[Enable] Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority).
[Disable]
Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus priority).
Press the shutter-release button all the way down to shoot after focusing using
a control to which AF-ON has been assigned via Custom Setting f2 [Custom
controls (shooting)].
DCaution: “Pinpoint AF
If [Pinpoint AF] is selected for AF-area mode with Custom Setting a6 [AF activation] set to [AF‑ON
only] and [Disable] chosen for [Out-of-focus release], the shutter can be released whether or not the
subject is in focus.
536 a6: AF Activation
a7: Focus Point Persistence
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether the focus point selected by the camera continues in use after you change AF-area
modes using a control to which [AF-area mode] or [AF-area mode + AF-ON] has been assigned via
Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)]. This only applies if you change AF-area modes while
focusing with the shutter-release button pressed halfway.
Option Description
[Auto]The focus point last chosen by the camera before you switched AF-area modes remains in
effect.
[Off] The focus point last chosen by the user is restored.
Focus-point persistence applies if while the control is pressed, you switch from an AF-area mode
such as [Auto-area AF] in which the focus point is chosen automatically to a mode in which the
focus point is selected manually.
537 a7: Focus Point Persistence
Highlight options and press J or 2 to select (M) or deselect (U).
Modes marked with a check (M) are available for selection via
the sub-command dial.
To complete the operation, press G.
a8: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the AF-area modes that can be selected by rotating the sub-command dial while pressing a
control to which [Focus mode/AF-area mode] has been assigned using Custom Setting f2 [Custom
controls (shooting)].
538 a8: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection
a9: Focus Point Wrap-Around
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of the display to another. If [ON]
is selected, focus-point selection will “wrap around” from top to bottom, bottom to top, right to left,
and left to right, so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the display is
highlighted selects the corresponding point at the left edge.
539 a9: Focus Point Wrap-Around
[ON] ([Dynamic-area AF (M)]) [OFF]
a10: Focus Point Display
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose from the focus point display options below.
Manual Focus Mode
Option Description
[ON] The focus point is displayed at all times in manual focus mode.
[OFF] The focus point is displayed only during focus-point selection.
Dynamic-Area AF Assist
Choose whether both the selected focus point and the surrounding focus points are displayed in
dynamic-area AF mode.
Option Description
[ON] Display both the selected focus point and surrounding focus points.
[OFF] Display only the selected focus point.
540 a10: Focus Point Display
AF-C In-Focus Display
Choose whether the focus point changes color when the subject is in focus in focus mode AF‑C.
Option Description
[ON] The focus point is displayed in green when the camera judges that the subject is in focus.
[OFF]The active focus point is displayed in red or yellow at all times, whether or not the camera
is in focus.
3D-Tracking Focus Point Color
The color of the focus point displayed when [3D-tracking] is selected for AF-area mode can be chosen
from [White] and [Red].
541 a10: Focus Point Display
a11: Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist the focus operation in photo mode
when lighting is poor.
Option Description
[ON]In photo mode, the illuminator will light as required when AF‑S is selected for focus
mode.
[OFF]The illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation. The camera may not be able
to focus when lighting is poor.
DThe AF-Assist Illuminator
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 1–3m (3ft 4in.–9ft 10in.).
Remove lens hoods when using the illuminator.
Do not obstruct the AF-assist illuminator while it is lit.
Some lenses may block the light from the AF-assist illuminator at some or all focus distances.
Information on these restrictions is available from the Nikon Download Center.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
542 a11: Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator
a12: Focus Peaking
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
When focus peaking is enabled in manual focus mode, objects that are in focus are indicated by
colored outlines in the display. You can choose the color.
Focus Peaking Display
Select [ON] to enable focus peaking.
Focus Peaking Sensitivity
Choose focus peaking sensitivity from [3 (high sensitivity)], [2 (standard)], and [1 (low sensitivity)].
The higher the value, the greater the depth that will be shown as being in focus.
Focus Peaking Highlight Color
Choose the highlight color.
543 a12: Focus Peaking
a13: Focus Point Selection Speed
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
The speed at which the camera cycles through focus points while the multi selector is pressed can be
chosen from [Low], [Normal], and [High].
544 a13: Focus Point Selection Speed
a14: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
This item is available with compatible lenses only. Use it to choose whether the lens focus ring can be
used for manual focus in autofocus mode.
Option Description
[ON]
Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the lens focus ring (autofocus with manual
override). The focus ring can be used for manual focus while the shutter-release button
is pressed halfway. To refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from the shutter-release
button and then press it halfway again.
[OFF] The lens focus ring cannot be used for manual focus in autofocus mode.
545 a14: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether adjustments to ISO sensitivity made with the ISO sensitivity dial rotated to C are made
in increments of ¹⁄₃ or 1EV. If the value currently selected for ISO sensitivity is not available at the
chosen setting, ISO sensitivity will be set to the nearest available value.
546 b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value
b2: Easy Exposure Compensation
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether exposure compensation can be adjusted using a command dial when the exposure
compensation dial is rotated to C.
Option Description
[On (Auto reset)]Exposure compensation can be adjusted using a command dial. Exposure
compensation is reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer expires.
[On]
Exposure compensation can be adjusted using a command dial. Exposure
compensation is not reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer
expires.
Exposure compensation will however be reset when the camera turns off if
b is selected for shooting mode.
[Off]Exposure compensation can be adjusted only using the exposure
compensation dial.
This option takes effect in modes P, S, A, and b. Easy exposure compensation is not available in
mode M.
The command dial used varies with the mode.
547 b2: Easy Exposure Compensation
b3: Matrix Metering Face Detection
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether exposure is adjusted for the faces of human portrait subjects detected by the camera
when [Matrix metering] is selected.
Option Description
[ON] The camera adjusts exposure for faces.
[OFF] Exposure is not adjusted according to whether faces have been detected.
548 b3: Matrix Metering Face Detection
b4: Center-Weighted Area
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
When [Center-weighted metering] is selected, the camera assigns the greatest weight to an area in
the center of the shooting display when setting exposure.
Option Description
R[Small]The camera assigns the greatest weight to an area equivalent to a circle
8mm in diameter.
S[Standard]The camera assigns the greatest weight to an area equivalent to a circle
12mm in diameter.
T[Average] Weighting is based on the average of the entire frame.
549 b4: Center-Weighted Area
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure value selected by the
camera; exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each metering
method. Exposure can be adjusted up for brighter exposures or
down for darker exposures in the range +1 to –1EV in steps of
¹⁄₆EV. The default is zero.
b5: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
DFine-Tuning Exposure
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b5 [Fine-tune optimal exposure], the exposure
compensation icon (E) will not be displayed. The only way to determine how much exposure has been
altered is to view the amount in the fine-tuning menu for Custom Setting b5.
550 b5: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether exposure locks when the shutter-release button is pressed.
Option Description
O[On (half press)] Pressing the shutter-release button halfway locks exposure.
P[On (burst mode)]Exposure only locks while the shutter-release button is pressed all the
way down.
[Off] Pressing the shutter-release button does not lock exposure.
551 c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
c2: Self-Timer
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of shots taken, and the interval between
shots in self-timer mode.
Option Description
[Self-timer delay] Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
[Number of shots]Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots taken each time the shutter-
release button is pressed; choose from values of from 1 to 9.
[Interval between
shots]
Choose the interval between shots when [Number of shots] is more than
1.
552 c2: Self-Timer
c3: Power Off Delay
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose how long the displays remain on, and how long the camera waits before returning from
picture review to shooting mode, when no operations are performed.
Longer power-off delays reduce battery endurance.
Option Description
[Playback]Choose how long the monitor or viewfinder waits to turn off after playback
starts.
[Menus]Choose how long the monitor or viewfinder waits to turn off after menus are
displayed.
[Picture review]
Choose how long the camera waits to return to the shooting display after
picture review starts when [On] or [On (monitor only)] is selected for [Picture
review] in the playback menu.
[Standby timer]
Choose how long the exposure displays in the control panel, monitor, and
viewfinder remain on after the shooting display is activated.
The monitor and viewfinder dim a few seconds before the standby timer
expires.
If [10 s] is selected, the timer will be extended to 20 seconds while the i
menu is displayed.
553 c3: Power Off Delay
d1: CL Mode Shooting Speed
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the frame advance rate for continuous low-speed release mode from options ranging from 1
to 7fps.
554 d1: CL Mode Shooting Speed
d2: Maximum Shots per Burst
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous release modes can be
set to any value between 1 and 200.
No limits are placed on the number of shots that can be taken in a single burst when:
shutter speed is set to 1s or slower in mode S or M, or
[ON] is selected for [Silent mode] in the setup menu.
DThe Memory Buffer
Custom Setting d2 [Maximum shots per burst] is used to select the number of shots that can be
taken in a single burst. The number of shots that can be taken before the memory buffer fills and
shooting slows varies with image quality and other settings. When the buffer is full, the camera will
display “r000” and the frame advance rate will drop.
555 d2: Maximum Shots per Burst
-
-
Pre-release Capture standby (maximum 90s)
Portion of buffer recorded to memory card at release ([Pre-
release burst])
Pictures taken after release ([Post-release burst])
Complete high-speed burst
1
2
3
4
d3: Pre-Release Capture Options
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the length of the burst recorded from the end of the memory buffer when, and the maximum
length of the burst recorded after, the shutter-release is pressed all the way down in high-speed frame
capture mode.
2
1
3
4
556 d3: Pre-Release Capture Options
A Y icon appears in the shooting display when an option other
than [None] is selected for [Pre-release burst]. While the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway, a green dot (I) will appear in the
icon to show that buffering is in progress.
If the shutter-release button is pressed halfway for more than
about 90seconds, I will change to C and Pre-Release Capture
will be cancelled. No pre-release burst will be recorded if the
shutter-release button is pressed the rest of the way down while
C is displayed. Pre-Release Capture can be resumed by lifting
your finger from the shutter-release button and then pressing it
halfway again.
The Y icon will start to flash 30 seconds before Pre-Release
Capture is cancelled.
Option Description
[Pre-release burst]
If an option other than [None] is selected, the camera will buffer frames
while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, but only the frames
added to the buffer in the final n seconds, where n is the value selected
for [Pre-release burst], will be recorded to the memory card when the
shutter-release button is pressed all the way down (“Pre-Release Capture”).
If the interval between the shutter-release button being pressed halfway
and its being pressed all the way down is shorter than the time selected,
only the frames saved to the buffer while the button was pressed halfway
will be recorded.
[Post-release burst]
Choose the maximum length of time the camera will continue to take
pictures after the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down: [1s],
[2s], [3s], or [Max.]. Shooting can continue for up to about 4s when [Max.]
is selected.
557 d3: Pre-Release Capture Options
d4: Sync. Release Mode Options
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether the shutters on the remote cameras are synchronized with the shutter on the master
camera when using the [Connect to other cameras] item in the network menu.
For information on synchronized release using [Connect to other cameras] in the network menu,
see the section on “Synchronized Release” (0 343) in the “Connecting to Other Cameras” chapter.
558 d4: Sync. Release Mode Options
d5: Shutter Type
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the type of shutter used for photographs.
Option Description
6[Auto]
The camera chooses the shutter type automatically according to
shutter speed. The electronic front-curtain shutter is used to reduce
blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter speeds.
7[Mechanical shutter] The camera uses the mechanical shutter for all photos.
v[Electronic front-
curtain shutter]The camera uses the electronic front-curtain shutter for all photos.
D“Mechanical Shutter
[Mechanical shutter] is not available with some lenses.
D“Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter
The fastest shutter speed available when [Electronic front-curtain shutter] is selected is ¹⁄₂₀₀₀s.
559 d5: Shutter Type
d6: Extended Shutter Speeds (M)
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Extend the range of shutter speeds available in mode M; the slowest shutter speed available when
[ON] is selected is 900s (15 minutes). Extended shutter speeds can be used for pictures of the night
sky and other long exposures.
When [ON] is selected and shutter speed set to 60s or slower, the control panel will show an
exposure progress display.
At speeds slower than 1s, the shutter speed displayed by the camera may differ from the actual
exposure time. The actual exposure times at shutter speeds of 15 and 30 seconds, for example, are
respectively 16 and 32 seconds. The exposure time will again match the selected shutter speed at
speeds of 60 seconds and slower.
560 d6: Extended Shutter Speeds (M)
Highlight options and press J or 2 to select (M) or deselect (U).
Modes marked with a check (M) are available for selection via
the command dials.
To complete the operation, press G.
d7: Limit Selectable Image Area
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the options that can be accessed by rotating a command dial in the i menu or while pressing
a control to which image area has been assigned.
561 d7: Limit Selectable Image Area
d8: File Number Sequence
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose a file numbering option.
Option Description
[On]
When a new folder is created or a new memory card is inserted in the camera, file
numbering will continue from the last number used. This simplifies file management by
minimizing the occurrence of duplicate file names when multiple cards are used.
[Off]
When a new folder is created or a new memory card is inserted, file numbering restarts
from 0001. If the current folder already contains pictures, file numbering will instead
continue from the highest file number in the current folder.
If you select [Off] after selecting [On], the camera will store the current file number. File
numbering will resume from the previously-stored value the next time [On] is selected.
[Reset]
Reset the file numbering for [On]. If the current folder is empty, file numbering will restart
from 0001 with the next picture taken. If the current folder contains pictures, the next
picture taken will be assigned a file number by adding one to the highest file number in
the current folder.
562 d8: File Number Sequence
DFile Number Sequence
If a picture is taken when the current folder contains a picture numbered 9999, a new folder will be
created and file numbering will restart from 0001.
When the current folder number reaches 999, the camera will no longer be able to create new
folders and the shutter release will be disabled if:
the current folder contains 5000 pictures (in addition, video recording will be disabled if the
camera calculates that the number of files needed to record a video of the maximum length
would result in the folder containing over 5000 files), or
the current folder contains a picture numbered 9999 (in addition, video recording will be
disabled if the camera calculates that the number of files needed to record a video of the
maximum length would result in a file numbered over 9999).
To resume shooting, choose [Reset] for Custom Setting d8 [File number sequence] and then either
format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.
DFolder Numbering
If a picture is taken when the current folder contains 5000 pictures or a picture numbered 9999, a
new folder will be created and selected as the current folder.
The new folder is assigned a number one higher than current folder number. If a folder with that
number already exists, the new folder will be assigned the lowest available folder number.
563 d8: File Number Sequence
-
-
d9: View Mode (Photo Lv)
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether the camera adjusts the preview in the viewfinder or monitor to reflect how shooting
settings will affect the hue and brightness of the final picture. Regardless of the option selected, the
effects of camera settings are always visible in video mode.
Option Description
V
[Show
effects of
settings]
The effects of white balance, Picture Controls, exposure compensation, and
other settings that affect color and exposure are visible in the shooting
display. Pressing 2 when [Show effects of settings] is highlighted displays
[Always] and [Only when flash is not used] options.
[Always]: The effects of settings are also visible when a flash unit is
attached and ready to fire.
This setting is recommended when the display is used for adjustments to
background exposure.
The main subject may appear dark in the shooting display.
The brightness of the scene shown in the shooting display may differ
from that of the actual subject if TTL is selected for flash control mode
with [ON] selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO sensitivity
control] in the photo shooting menu.
[Only when flash is not used]: Display brightness is adjusted for ease of
viewing (as per [Adjust for ease of viewing]) when a flash unit is attached
and ready to fire. The effects of settings on colors are visible regardless.
V will appear in the shooting display.
564 d9: View Mode (Photo Lv)
-
-
-
Option Description
W
[Adjust
for ease
of
viewing]
The effects of changes to settings such as white balance, Picture Controls,
and exposure compensation are not visible in the shooting display. Pressing
2 when [Adjust for ease of viewing] is highlighted displays [Auto] and
[Custom] options.
[Auto]: Color, brightness, and other settings are adjusted for ease of
viewing, making it easier to frame pictures and perform other tasks.
[Custom]: Press 2 to make individual adjustments to [White balance], [Set
Picture Control], and [Brighten shadows].
[White balance]: Choose from [Preview current setting], [Auto], and
[Choose color temperature]. Select [Choose color temperature] to
choose the color temperature for the shooting display.
[Set Picture Control]: Choose from [Preview current setting] and
[Adjust for ease of viewing].
[Brighten shadows]: Choose whether or by how much the camera
brightens shadows (dark areas) in the display; the available options are
[Off], [+1], [+2], and [+3]. The higher the value, the greater the effect.
W will appear in the shooting display.
565 d9: View Mode (Photo Lv)
-
-
-
d10: Starlight View (Photo Lv)
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Select [ON] to brighten the display for ease of viewing in dark environments (starlight view). Note that
the display may become slightly jerky when starlight view is in effect.
566 d10: Starlight View (Photo Lv)
d11: Warm Display Colors
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Use warmer colors with reduced brightness in the shooting, menu, and/or playback displays. This
makes the displays easier to view with vision adapted to dark environments during astronomical
photography and the like.
Option Description
[Warm display
color options]
Choose from the following options.
[Mode 1]: Use warmer colors in the shooting, menu, and playback displays.
[Mode 2]: Use warmer colors in the menu display. Warmer colors are also
used for the icons and other information in the shooting and playback
displays, but not for the view through the lens or the content of pictures
themselves.
[Off]: Warm colors are not used.
[Warm color
display
brightness]
Press 1 or 3 to adjust warm color display brightness. Choose higher values
for increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.
567 d11: Warm Display Colors
d12: View All in Continuous Mode
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
If [OFF] is selected, the display will go blank during burst photography.
568 d12: View All in Continuous Mode
d13: Release Timing Indicator
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose how the display responds when the shutter is released in high-speed frame capture mode.
Option Description
[Type A] The display goes dark when the shutter is released.
[Type B] Borders appear at the top, bottom, and sides of the frame when the shutter is released.
[Type C] Borders appear at the sides of the frame when the shutter is released.
[Off] A release timing indicator is not displayed when the shutter is released.
569 d13: Release Timing Indicator
d14: Image Frame
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Select [OFF] to hide the white border around the shooting displays in the monitor and viewfinder.
570 d14: Image Frame
d15: Grid Type
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose a framing grid for the shooting display. The selected grid can be displayed by placing a check
(M) next to b in the list for Custom Setting d17 [Custom monitor shooting display] (0 575) or
d18 [Custom viewfinder shooting display] (0 577).
571 d15: Grid Type
[Type A]: A large indicator showing roll and pitch fills the display.
[Type B]: A roll indicator appears at the bottom of the display and
a pitch indicator at its right edge.
d16: Virtual Horizon Type
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose a virtual horizon for the shooting display. The selected virtual horizon can be displayed by
placing a check (M) next to D in the list for Custom Setting d17 [Custom monitor shooting display]
(0 575) or d18 [Custom viewfinder shooting display] (0 577).
The indicators are displayed in green when the camera is level.
572 d16: Virtual Horizon Type
*
Roll
Option
Camera rotated clockwise Camera rotated counterclockwise
[Type A]
[Type B]
573 d16: Virtual Horizon Type
Pitch
Option
Camera tilted forward Camera tilted back
[Type A]
[Type B]
DThe Virtual Horizon Display
Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back.
The camera will not display the virtual horizon or pitch and roll indicators when held at angles at which
tilt cannot be measured.
574 d16: Virtual Horizon Type
Highlight items ([Display 2] through [Display 5]) and press J to
select (M) or deselect (U). Only displays marked with a check (M)
can be accessed by pressing the DISP button during shooting.
[Display 1] cannot be deselected.
To choose indicators that appear in displays [Display 1] through
[Display 4], highlight the corresponding option and press 2. You
can then highlight items and press J to select (M) or deselect (U).
d17: Custom Monitor Shooting Display
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the monitor displays accessible by pressing the DISP button during shooting.
Option Description
A[Basic shooting
info]
View the shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture, and other
basic shooting info.
B[Detailed
shooting info]
View the focus mode, AF-area mode, white balance, and other
detailed shooting info.
C[Touch controls]View options that can be accessed via touch controls, including
touch AF and the i menu.
D[Virtual horizon]Enable the virtual horizon. The display type can be selected
using Custom Setting d16 [Virtual horizon type].
E[Histogram] Enable the RGB histogram.
b[Framing grid]Enable the framing grid. The display type can be selected using
Custom Setting d15 [Grid type].
F[Center indicator] Display crosshairs at the center of the frame.
575 d17: Custom Monitor Shooting Display
Option Description
G[Center-weighted
area]
Add an 8 or 12mm circle to the center of the shooting
display whenever [Center-weighted metering] is selected for
[Metering] in the photo shooting menu.
The size of the circle varies with the option selected for
Custom Setting b4 [Center-weighted area]. The circle is not
displayed when [Average] is selected for Custom Setting b4
[Center-weighted area].
[Display 5] consists solely of the information display and cannot be customized.
To complete the operation, press G.
576 d17: Custom Monitor Shooting Display
d18: Custom Viewfinder Shooting Display
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the viewfinder displays accessible by pressing the DISP button during shooting.
Highlight items ([Display 2] through [Display 4]) and press J to select (M) or deselect (U). Only
displays marked with a check (M) can be accessed by pressing the DISP button during shooting.
[Display 1] cannot be deselected.
To choose indicators that appear in displays [Display 1] through [Display 4], highlight the
corresponding option and press 2. You can then highlight items and press J to select (M) or
deselect (U). Apart from [Touch controls], the options are the same as those for Custom Setting
d17 [Custom monitor shooting display] (0 575).
To complete the operation, press G.
577 d18: Custom Viewfinder Shooting Display
e1: Flash Sync Speed
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the flash sync speed.
Option Description
[1/200s (Auto FP)]
Flash sync speed is set to ¹⁄₂₀₀s. With compatible flash units, auto FP high-
speed sync will automatically be enabled at shutter speeds faster than ¹⁄₂₀₀s.
In modes P and A, auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the actual
shutter speed is faster than ¹⁄₂₀₀s. If the flash supports auto FP high-speed
sync, the camera can select shutter speeds as fast as ¹⁄₈₀₀₀s (or ¹⁄₂₀₀₀s
if [Electronic front-curtain shutter] is selected for Custom Setting d5
[Shutter type]).
In modes S and M, the user can select shutter speeds as fast as ¹⁄₈₀₀₀s
when using flash units that support auto FP high-speed sync (or ¹⁄₂₀₀₀s
if [Electronic front-curtain shutter] is selected for Custom Setting d5
[Shutter type]).
Rotating the shutter speed dial to X in modes S and M sets shutter speed
to ¹⁄₂₀₀s.
[1/200s]
Flash sync speed set to selected value, which can be from ¹⁄₂₀₀ to ¹⁄₆₀s.
Rotating the shutter speed dial to X in modes S and M sets shutter speed
to the selected flash sync speed.
Shutter speed will also be set to the selected flash sync speed in modes S
and M if a higher speed is chosen using the shutter speed dial.
[1/160s]
[1/125s]
[1/100s]
[1/80s]
[1/60s]
578 e1: Flash Sync Speed
DCaution: Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Depending on the shutter speed, horizontal lines may appear in pictures taken using auto FP high-
speed sync when [1/200s (Auto FP)] is selected. This effect can be mitigated by:
choosing a slower shutter speed or
adjusting flash output.
Tip: Choosing a Fixed Flash Sync Speed
To fix shutter speed at the value selected for Custom Setting e1 [Flash sync speed] in modes S and M,
rotate the shutter speed dial to X. An X (flash sync lock) icon will appear with the flash sync speed in
the shooting display.
Tip: Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Auto FP high-speed sync allows the flash to be used at shutter speeds as fast as ¹⁄₈₀₀₀s (or ¹⁄₂₀₀₀s if
[Electronic front-curtain shutter] is selected for Custom Setting d5 [Shutter type]). When [1/200s
(Auto FP)] is selected, the camera automatically enables auto FP high-speed sync at shutter speeds
faster than the flash sync speed. This makes it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced
depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright sunlight.
579 e1: Flash Sync Speed
e2: Flash Shutter Speed
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the slowest shutter speed available with a flash in mode P or A.
Regardless of the setting chosen for Custom Setting e2 [Flash shutter speed], shutter speeds can be
as slow as 30s in modes S and M or at flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye
reduction with slow sync.
580 e2: Flash Shutter Speed
e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure compensation is used.
Option Description
YE[Entire frame]The camera adjusts both the flash level and exposure. This changes
the exposure for the entire frame.
E[Background only] Exposure compensation is adjusted for the background only.
581 e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash
e4: Auto cISO Sensitivity Control
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled.
Option Description
e[Subject and
background]
The camera takes both the main subject and background lighting
into account when adjusting ISO sensitivity.
f[Subject only]ISO sensitivity is adjusted only to ensure that the main subject is
correctly exposed.
582 e4: Auto cISO Sensitivity Control
e5: Modeling Flash
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
If [ON] is selected when the camera is used with an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative
Lighting system, pressing a control to which [Preview] has been assigned using Custom Setting f2
[Custom controls (shooting)] will emit a modeling flash.
583 e5: Modeling Flash
e6: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
The settings affected when bracketing is enabled in mode M and [OFF] is selected for [ISO sensitivity
settings]> [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu are determined by the options
selected for [Auto bracketing]> [Auto bracketing set] in the photo shooting menu and the option
chosen for Custom Setting e6 [Auto bracketing (mode M)].
Custom Setting e6 [Auto bracketing
(mode M)]
Photo shooting menu [Auto bracketing]> [Auto
bracketing set]
AE& flash bracketing AE bracketing
F[Flash/speed] Shutter speed and flash level Shutter speed
G[Flash/speed/aperture]Shutter speed, aperture, and
flash level
Shutter speed and
aperture
H[Flash/aperture] Aperture and flash level Aperture
9[Flash/ISO sensitivity] ISO sensitivity and flash level ISO sensitivity
I[Flash only] Flash level
When [ON] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the photo
shooting menu, the camera will vary flash level and/or ISO sensitivity as per [Flash/ISO sensitivity],
regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting e6 [Auto bracketing (mode M)].
DFlash Bracketing
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or qA (auto aperture) flash control.
584 e6: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)
e7: Bracketing Order
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the order in which the shots in the bracketing program are taken.
Option Description
H[MTR> under> over]The unmodified shot is taken first, followed by the shot with the
lowest value, followed by the shot with the highest value.
I[Under> MTR> over] Shooting proceeds in order from the lowest to the highest value.
Custom Setting e7 [Bracketing order] has no effect on the order of the shots taken when [ADL
bracketing] is selected for [Auto bracketing]> [Auto bracketing set] in the photo shooting
menu.
585 e7: Bracketing Order
e8: Flash Burst Priority
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether optional flash units emit monitor pre-flashes before each shot during burst
photography in high- or low-speed continuous release mode.
Option Description
c
[Prioritize
frame advance
rate]
The flash unit emits a monitor pre-flash before the first shot in each
sequence and locks output at the metered value for the remaining shots.
The frame advance rate drops less than when [Prioritize precise flash
control] is selected.
An FV lock icon (r) will appear in the shooting display during burst
photography.
q
[Prioritize
precise flash
control]
The flash unit emits a monitor pre-flash before each shot and adjusts
flash output as required. The frame advance rate may drop in some
circumstances.
Tip: “Continuous H (Extended)” Mode
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting e8 [Flash burst priority], the camera will
prioritize the frame advance rate when [Continuous H (extended)] is selected for release mode.
586 e8: Flash Burst Priority
f1: Customize i Menu
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the items listed in the i menu displayed when the i button is pressed in photo mode.
Highlight a position in the i menu, press J, and select the desired item.
The following items can be assigned to the i menu.
Option 0
J[Choose image area]0 108
f[Tone mode]0 384
8[Image quality]0 110
o[Image size]0 112
N[View memory card info]0 589
E[Exposure compensation]0 143
9[ISO sensitivity settings]0 152
m[White balance]0 157
h[Set Picture Control]0 176
g[Set Picture Control (HLG)]0 394
p[Color space]0 398
y[Active D-Lighting]0 399
q[Long exposure NR]0 401
r[High ISO NR]0 402
h[Skin softening]0 406
i[Portrait impression balance]0 407
587 f1: Customize i Menu
Option 0
w[Metering]0 411
c[Flash mode]0 414
Y[Flash compensation]0 415
s[Focus mode]0 114
7[AF-area mode/subj. detection]0 116, 0 120
u[Vibration reduction]0 421
t[Auto bracketing]0 423
$[Multiple exposure]0 436
2[HDR overlay]0 444
7[Interval timer shooting]0 448
8[Time-lapse video]0 459
9[Focus shift shooting]0 469
5[Pixel shift shooting]0 478
F[Focus tracking with lock-on]0 532
L[Silent mode]0 704
j[Pre-Release Capture options]0 556
v[Release mode]0 145
6[Shutter type]0 559
w[Custom controls (shooting)]0 591
m[View mode (photo Lv)]0 564
z[Split-screen display zoom]0 590
588 f1: Customize i Menu
Option 0
W[Focus peaking]0 543
3[Monitor/viewfinder brightness]0 674, 0 676
v[Warm display colors]0 567
u[Airplane mode]0 724
W[Wireless remote connection (ML-L7)]0 729
View Memory Card Info
View the slot currently selected as the destination for new pictures and the options used to record
pictures when two memory cards are inserted. This option can be used to view but not to change the
option selected.
The options used to record pictures when two memory cards are inserted can be selected using
[Secondary slot function] in the photo shooting menu.
589 f1: Customize i Menu
If [Split-screen display zoom] is assigned to the i menu, you can
select [Split-screen display zoom] to simultaneously zoom in on
two areas that are aligned horizontally but are in different parts of
the frame (split-screen display zoom). The locations of the areas are
indicated by the two frames (r) in the navigation window in the
bottom right corner of the display.
Zooming in simultaneously on two widely-separated but
horizontally-aligned areas of the frame makes it easier to level
pictures of buildings or other wide objects.
Use the X and W (Q) buttons to zoom in and out.
Press 4 or 2 to scroll the selected area left or right. Use the J
button to switch between the two areas.
Press 1 or 3 to scroll both areas up or down simultaneously.
To focus on the subject at the center of the selected area, press
the shutter-release button halfway.
To exit split-screen display zoom, press the i button.
Split-Screen Display Zoom
590 f1: Customize i Menu
Choose the roles played by the controls below. Highlight the
desired control and press J.
f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the operations performed in photo mode using lens rings and camera buttons and command
dials.
Option
6[Fn button]
V[AE-L/AF-L button]
q[Playback button]
D[DISP button]
p[OK button]
y[Command dials]
z[Video record button]
3[Lens Fn2 button]
S[Lens Fn button]
R[Lens Fn ring (clockwise)]
S[Lens Fn ring (counterclockwise)]
T[Lens memory set button]
l[Lens control ring]
591 f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
The roles that can be assigned are listed below. The roles available vary with the control.
Role Description
K[Select center
focus point]Pressing the control selects the center focus point.
F[Save focus
position]
Holding the control saves the current focus position.
The saved position can be restored using a control to which
[Recall focus position] has been assigned (“memory recall”).
When saving the focus position, you can choose whether it
can be recalled using any of the controls to which [Recall
focus position] is assigned ([Save to all]) or using only a
specific control ([Save individually]).
For more information, see “Saving and Recalling Focus
Positions” (0 601).
H[Recall focus
position]
Pressing the control recalls a focus position saved using a control
to which [Save focus position] has been assigned.
For more information, see “Saving and Recalling Focus
Positions” (0 601).
z[Switch eyes]Press the control to choose the eye used for focus when the
camera detects the eyes of a human or animal portrait subject.
d[AF-area mode]
Holding the control selects a preset AF-area mode. The AF-area
mode previously in effect is restored when the control is released.
To choose the AF-area mode, press 2 when [AF-area mode]
is highlighted.
5[AF-area mode+
AF-ON]
Holding the control selects a preset AF-area mode and initiates
autofocus. The AF-area mode previously in effect is restored
when the control is released.
To choose the AF-area mode, press 2 when [AF-area mode+
AF-ON] is highlighted.
A[AF-ON] Press the control to focus using autofocus.
F[AF lock only] Focus locks while the control is pressed.
592 f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
Role Description
E[AE lock (Hold)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed. Exposure lock does
not end when the shutter is released. Exposure remains locked
until the control is pressed a second time or the standby timer
expires.
N[AWB lock (hold)]
If [Auto] or [Natural light auto] is selected for white balance,
white balance will lock when the control is pressed (white-
balance lock). White-balance lock does not end when the shutter
is released. The lock will however be released when the control is
pressed a second time or the standby timer expires.
O[AE/AWB lock
(hold)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed. White balance will
also lock provided [Auto] or [Natural light auto] is selected for
white balance. Exposure and white-balance lock do not end when
the shutter is released. The lock will however be released when
the control is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires.
D[AE lock (Reset on
release)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed. Exposure remains
locked until the control is pressed a second time, the shutter is
released, or the standby timer expires.
C[AE lock only] Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
B[AE/AF lock] Focus and exposure lock while the control is pressed.
r[FV lock]Press the control to lock flash value for optional flash units; press
again to cancel FV lock.
h[cDisable/enable]
If the flash is currently enabled, it will be disabled while the
control is pressed. If the flash is currently off, front-curtain sync
will be selected while the control is pressed.
K[Switch FX/DX]
Press the control to switch to [DX (24×16)] when [FX (36×24)]
is chosen for image area. Pressing the control when an option
other than [FX (36×24)] is chosen for image area selects [FX
(36×24)].
a[Photo flicker
reduction]
Press the control to select [ON] for [Photo flicker reduction] in
the photo shooting menu. Press again to select [OFF].
593 f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
Role Description
q[Preview]
While the control is pressed, the shooting display will show how
color, exposure, and depth of field are affected by current photo
settings.
L[Matrix metering]Holding the control selects matrix metering. The setting
previously in effect is restored when the control is released.
M[Center-weighted
metering]
Holding the control selects center-weighted metering. The
setting previously in effect is restored when the control is
released.
N[Spot metering]Holding the control selects spot metering. The setting previously
in effect is restored when the control is released.
t
[Highlight-
weighted
metering]
Holding the control selects highlight-weighted metering. The
setting previously in effect is restored when the control is
released.
1[Bracketing burst]
If the control is pressed when an option other than [WB
bracketing] is selected for [Auto bracketing]> [Auto
bracketing set] in the photo shooting menu in continuous
release mode, the camera will take all the shots in the current
bracketing program and repeat the bracketing burst while
the shutter-release button is pressed. In single-frame release
mode, shooting will end after the first bracketing burst.
If [WB bracketing] is selected for [Auto bracketing set], the
camera will take pictures while the shutter-release button is
pressed and apply white balance bracketing to each shot.
594 f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
Role Description
c[Sync. release
selection]
The chosen control can be used to toggle between remote
release and master or synchronized release when [Synchronized
release] is selected for [Connect to other cameras] in the
network menu. The options available depend on the setting
chosen for Custom Setting d4 [Sync. release mode options].
The following options are available when [Sync] is selected for
[Sync. release mode options]:
[Master release only] (c): Keep the control pressed to
take pictures with the master camera only.
[Remote release only] (d): Keep the control pressed to
take pictures only with the remote cameras.
The following options are available when [No sync] is selected
for [Sync. release mode options]:
[Synchronized release] (6): Keep the control pressed
to synchronize the releases on the master and remote
cameras.
[Remote release only] (d): Keep the control pressed to
take pictures only with the remote cameras.
4[+RAW]
If a JPEG or HEIF option is currently selected for image quality,
“RAW” will appear in the shooting display and an NEF (RAW)
copy will be recorded with the next picture taken after the
control is pressed. The original image quality setting will
be restored when you remove your finger from the shutter-
release button or press the control again, canceling [+RAW].
NEF (RAW) copies are recorded at the settings currently
selected for [RAW recording] in the photo shooting menu.
L[Silent mode] Press the control to enable silent mode. Press again to disable.
M[Cycle live view
info display]
Press the control to cycle the shooting display. The type and
content of the displays available can be chosen using Custom
Settings d17 [Custom monitor shooting display] and d18
[Custom viewfinder shooting display].
b[Live view info
display off]
Press the control to hide icons and other information in the
shooting display. Press again to view.
b[Framing grid]
Press the control to display a framing grid. To hide the grid, press
the control again. The display type can be selected using Custom
Setting d15 [Grid type].
595 f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
-
-
-
-
Role Description
p[Zoom on/off]Press the control to zoom the display in on the area around the
current focus point. Press again to cancel zoom.
D[Virtual horizon]
Press the control to enable the virtual horizon display. Press
again to hide the display. The display type can be selected using
Custom Setting d16 [Virtual horizon type].
k[Starlight view
(photo Lv)]
Press the control to toggle starlight view on. Press again to end
starlight view.
m[View mode
(photo Lv)]
Press the control to switch the option selected for Custom
Setting d10 [View mode (photo Lv)] from [Show effects of
settings] to [Adjust for ease of viewing] or vice versa.
W[Focus peaking
display]
Press the control once to enable focus peaking when MF is
selected for focus mode. Press again to end focus peaking.
8[Enable/disable
touch Fn]Press the control to enable or disable touch Fn.
O[MY MENU] Press the control to display “MY MENU”.
3[Access top item in
MY MENU]
Press the control to jump to the top item in “MY MENU”. Select
this option for quick access to a frequently-used menu item.
K[Playback] Press the control to start playback.
l[Filtered playback]Press the control to view only pictures that meet the criteria
selected for [Filtered playback criteria] in the playback menu.
N[Filtered playback
(select criteria)]
Press the control to jump to [Filtered playback criteria] in the
playback menu.
J[Choose image
area]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose the
image area.
8[Image quality/
size]
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose
an image quality option and the sub-command dial to select
image size.
596 f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
Role Description
E[Exposure
compensation]
When the exposure compensation dial is rotated to C, exposure
compensation can be adjusted either by holding the control and
rotating a command dial or by rotating the lens control ring.
9[ISO sensitivity]
When the ISO sensitivity dial is rotated to C, ISO sensitivity can
be adjusted either by holding the control and rotating the main
command dial or by rotating the lens control ring.
Hold the control and rotate the sub-command dial to select
from ISO AUTO (auto ISO sensitivity control enabled) and ISO
(auto ISO sensitivity control disabled).
m[White balance]
To choose a white balance option, hold the control and rotate the
main command dial. Some options offer sub-options that can be
selected by rotating the sub-command dial.
h[Set Picture
Control]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose a Picture
Control.
g[Set Picture
Control (HLG)]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose an HLG
Picture Control.
y[Active D-Lighting]Press the control and rotate a command dial to adjust Active
D-Lighting.
h[Skin softening]Press the control and rotate a command dial to adjust skin
softening.
i
[Portrait
impression
balance]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose a portrait
impression balance mode.
w[Metering]Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose a
metering option.
I[Flash mode/
compensation]
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose a
flash mode and the sub-command dial to adjust flash output.
v[Release mode]
Hold the control and rotate the main command dial to choose
a release mode. Options for the selected mode, if any, can be
chosen by holding the control and rotating the sub-command
dial.
597 f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
Role Description
z[Focus mode/AF-
area mode]
Hold the control and rotate the main command dial to choose
the focus mode, the sub-command dial to choose the AF-area
mode.
t[Auto bracketing]
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose
the number of shots and the sub-command dial to select the
bracketing increment or Active D-Lighting amount.
$[Multiple
exposure]
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose
the mode and the sub-command dial to choose the number of
shots.
2[HDR overlay]Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose
the mode and the sub-command dial to adjust HDR strength.
5[Pixel shift
shooting]
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose
the pixel shift shooting mode and the sub-command dial to
choose the number of shots.
9[Focus-point lock]To lock focus-point selection, hold the control while using the
multi selector to choose the focus point.
v[1 step spd/
aperture]
Make adjustments to shutter speed and aperture in increments
of 1EV.
In modes S and M, shutter speed can be adjusted in
increments of 1EV by holding the control and rotating the
main command dial.
In modes A and M, aperture can be adjusted in increments of
1EV by holding the control and rotating the sub-command
dial.
w[Choose non-CPU
lens number]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose a lens
number saved using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in the setup
menu.
X[Focus (M/A)]
Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the lens control ring
(autofocus with manual override). The control ring can be used
for manual focus while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. To refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from the
shutter-release button and then press it halfway again.
598 f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
Role Description
q[Aperture] Rotate the lens control ring to adjust aperture.
t[Aperture (open)]
Rotate the lens Fn ring counterclockwise to widen aperture.
This option is enabled automatically when [Aperture (close)] is
selected for [Lens Fn ring (clockwise)].
q[Aperture (close)]
Rotate the lens Fn ring clockwise to narrow aperture. This option
is enabled automatically when [Aperture (open)] is selected for
[Lens Fn ring (counterclockwise)].
[None] The control has no effect.
599 f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
Command Dials
The following roles can be assigned to the command dials. To view options, highlight items and press
2.
Role Description
[Exposure
setting]
Reverse the roles of the main and sub-command dials in selected modes.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight a mode and 1 or 3 to switch roles.
[Focus/AF-area
mode selection]
Switch the roles played by rotating the main and sub-command dials while
holding a control to which [Focus mode/AF-area mode] has been assigned
using Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)].
[Sub-command
dial zoom role]
Choose the role played by the sub-command dial in the zoom display.
Choose [Exposure setting] to change the role played by the sub-command
dial in each mode.
Choose [Zoom] to use the sub-command dial to zoom in or out.
600 f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
Assign [Recall focus position] to a control.
Repeat this step for each of the controls you intend to use for
memory recall.
Select another control in the custom control list and, when
prompted to choose a role, highlight [Save focus position]
and press 2.
Save options will be displayed.
Saving and Recalling Focus Positions
You can save the current focus position by pressing and holding a custom control to which you have
assigned [Save focus position]. The saved focus position can be instantly restored by pressing a
custom control assigned [Recall focus position] (“memory recall”). You may find this useful if you
frequently return to subjects at a fixed focus distance.
[Recall focus position] can be assigned to multiple controls. Focus positions saved by selecting
[Save to all] for [Save focus position] can be recalled using any of the assigned controls. Those
saved by selecting [Save individually] for [Save focus position] can instead be recalled only via a
specific control.
Focus positions can be saved in any focus mode.
The stored distance is however reset when the lens is detached.
DCautions: Saving and Recalling Focus Positions
Focus positions cannot be saved while shooting information is displayed.
The focus position selected when a stored value is recalled may differ from the saved position due
changes in ambient temperature.
Changes to zoom after a focus position is saved tend to alter the position selected when the value is
recalled.
“Save to All”
601 f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
1
2
Highlight [Save to all] and press J.
Focus on the desired subject in the shooting display and
press and hold the control to which [Save focus position] is
assigned.
A F icon will appear in the shooting display if the operation
is successful.
Press any of the controls to which [Recall focus position]
was assigned in Step1.
The saved focus position will be restored.
Although [Recall focus position] can be assigned to
multiple controls, the same focus position will be restored
regardless of the control used.
Holding a control to which [Recall focus position] is
assigned activates manual focus (MF), and the camera will
not refocus if the shutter-release button is pressed halfway
while the control is pressed.
602 f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
3
4
5
Assign [Recall focus position] to multiple controls.
Select another control in the custom control list and, when
prompted to choose a role, highlight [Save focus position]
and press 2.
Save options will be displayed.
Highlight [Save individually] and press J.
Focus on the desired subject in the shooting display and
press and hold the control to which [Save focus position] is
assigned.
A F icon will flash in the shooting display.
“Save Individually”
603 f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
1
2
3
4
Press the button you intend to use for recall of the focus
position saved in Step4.
Of the controls to which [Recall focus position] was
assigned in Step1, press the control you intend to use for
recall of the focus position saved in Step4.
A message will appear in the shooting display if the
operation is successful.
Repeat Steps4 to 5 to save additional focus positions to the
other controls to which [Recall focus position] is assigned.
Press the control for the desired focus position.
The focus position saved to the control in question will be
restored.
Holding a control to which [Recall focus position] is
assigned activates manual focus (MF), and the camera will
not refocus if the shutter-release button is pressed halfway
while the control is pressed.
604 f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
5
6
Choose the roles played by the controls below. Highlight the
desired control and press J.
f3: Custom Controls (Playback)
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the operations performed during playback using camera buttons and command dials.
Option
6[Fn button]
V[AE-L/AF-L button]
q[Playback button]
D[DISP button]
p[OK button]
z[Video record button]
y[Main command dial]
3[Sub-command dial]
S[Lens Fn button]
3[Lens Fn2 button]
605 f3: Custom Controls (Playback)
The roles that can be assigned to these controls are listed below. The roles available vary with the
control.
Role Description
g[Protect] Press the control to toggle protection for the current picture on or off.
p[Zoom on/off]
Press the control to zoom the display in on the area around the
current focus point (the zoom ratio is selected in advance). Press
again to cancel zoom.
To choose the zoom ratio, highlight [Zoom on/off] and press 2.
Zoom on/off is available in both full-frame and thumbnail
playback.
l[Filtered
playback]
Press the control to view only pictures that meet the criteria selected
for [Filtered playback criteria] in the playback menu.
N
[Filtered
playback
(select
criteria)]
Press the control to jump to [Filtered playback criteria] in the
playback menu.
O[Start series
playback]
Pressing the control when a picture from a burst is displayed full
frame starts automated playback (0 658). The pictures will play
back while the control is pressed, at a speed higher than when the
multi selector is used. Playback stops when the control is released or
the last picture in the burst is displayed.
b[Voice memo] Use the control for voice memo operations.
K
[Select for
upload to
computer]
Press the control to upload the current picture to a computer or FTP
server with which the camera is currently connected.
To view upload options, highlight [Select for upload to computer]
or [Select for upload (FTP)] and press 2. Highlight options and
press J to select (M) or deselect (U).
[Priority upload]: If this option is selected (M), pressing the
control to mark a picture for upload will move it to the front of
the upload queue.
[Protect]: If this option is selected (M), pressing the control to
mark a picture for upload will simultaneously protect it.
[Rating]: If this option is selected (M), pressing the control to
mark a picture for upload will simultaneously assign it a preset
rating. Press 2 to choose the rating.
N[Select for
upload (FTP)]
606 f3: Custom Controls (Playback)
-
-
-
Role Description
n[Thumbnail
on/off]
Press the control to toggle between full-frame and 4-, 9-, or 72-frame
thumbnail playback.
o[View
histograms]
A histogram is displayed while the control is pressed. The histogram
display is available in both full-frame and thumbnail playback.
W[Choose slot
and folder]
Press the control to display the [Choose slot and folder] dialog,
where you can then choose a slot and folder for playback.
M[Cycle info
display]
Press the control to cycle the photo information display during full-
frame playback. The pages available can be chosen using [Playback
display options] in the playback menu.
P[Resume
shooting]Press the control to end playback and return to shooting mode.
c[Rating]
To rate the current picture in playback mode, press the control and
rotate the main command dial.
To display rating options, highlight [Rating] and press 2. If an
option other than [None] is selected, the chosen rating can be
assigned to pictures simply by pressing the selected control.
Pressing the control again selects a “no star” rating.
[None] The control has no effect.
607 f3: Custom Controls (Playback)
Command Dials
The following roles can be assigned to the command dials. To view options, highlight items and press
2.
Frame Advance
Choose the number of frames that can be skipped by rotating the command dials during full-frame
playback.
Option Description
[1 frame] Skip forward or back a frame at a time.
[10 frames] Skip forward or back 10 frames at a time.
[50 frames] Skip forward or back 50 frames at a time.
c[Rating] Skip to the next or previous picture with the selected rating.
P[Protect] Skip to the next or previous protected picture.
C[Photos only] Skip to the next or previous photo.
1[Videos only] Skip to the next or previous video.
W[Folder] Rotate the dial to select a folder.
7[Page] View the next or previous page of thumbnails.
c[Skip to first shot in
series]
Select this option to skip all but the first shot in each burst displayed
when scrolling through pictures with the command dials. Pictures
that are not part of a burst will not be skipped.
608 f3: Custom Controls (Playback)
Video Playback
Choose the roles played by the command dials during video playback.
Option Description
[1 frame] Advance or rewind a frame at a time.
[5 frames] Advance or rewind 5 frames at a time.
[10 frames] Advance or rewind 10 frames at a time.
[2s] Skip forward or back 2s at a time.
[5s] Skip forward or back 5s at a time.
[10s] Skip forward or back 10s at a time.
[First/last frame] Skip to the first or last frame.
609 f3: Custom Controls (Playback)
Touch Fn is available only when the monitor is in storage
position with the screen facing outward.
f4: Touch Fn
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Use monitor touch controls to adjust settings while framing pictures in the viewfinder.
Enable/Disable Touch Fn
Select [ON] to enable touch Fn.
610 f4: Touch Fn
Assign Touch Fn
The roles that can be assigned to touch Fn are listed below.
Role Description
[Move focus point]
The focus point can be positioned by sliding a finger over the touch Fn area.
You can also position the focus point by double-tapping the desired location
in the monitor.
[Switch eyes]
When the camera detects the eyes of a human or animal portrait subject,
you can choose the eye used for focus by tapping the touch Fn area in the
monitor.
[Framing grid]
Tapping the touch Fn area in the monitor displays a framing grid in the
viewfinder. Tap again to hide the grid. The grid type can be selected using
Custom Setting d15 or g13 [Grid type].
[Zoom on/off]Tap the touch Fn area in the monitor to zoom the display in the viewfinder in
on the area around the current focus point. Tap again to cancel zoom.
[Virtual horizon]
Tap the touch Fn area in the monitor to enable the virtual horizon display
in the viewfinder. Tap again to hide the display. The display type can be
selected using Custom Setting d17 [Virtual horizon type].
Touch Fn Area
Choose the area of the monitor used for touch Fn. The areas for use when the camera is rotated to
take pictures in “tall” and “wide” orientations can be selected separately.
611 f4: Touch Fn
f5: Focus-Point Lock
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Select [ON] to lock focus-point selection on the currently-selected focus point.
Focus point lock does not apply when [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode.
When [3D-tracking] is selected, the focus point will track subject motion while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
612 f5: Focus-Point Lock
f6: Reverse Dial Rotation
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dials for selected operations.
Highlight [Exposure compensation] or [Shutter speed/aperture] and press 2 to select (M) or
deselect (U).
Press G to save changes and exit.
613 f6: Reverse Dial Rotation
f7: Release Button to Use Dial
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Selecting [ON] allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a button and rotating a
command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released. This ends when
the button is pressed again, the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, or the standby timer expires.
[Release button to use dial] applies to the Fn button.
[Release button to use dial] also applies to controls to which certain roles have been assigned
using Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)] or g2 [Custom controls].
614 f7: Release Button to Use Dial
f8: Reverse Indicators
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether certain horizontal indicators in the shooting and other displays are shown with
negative values on the left and positive values on the right, or with positive values on the left and
negative values on the right.
Option Description
VThe indicators are displayed with positive values on the left and
negative values on the right.
WThe indicators are displayed with negative values on the left
and positive values on the right.
615 f8: Reverse Indicators
f9: Reverse Ring for Focus
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Select [ON] to reverse the direction of rotation for the focus or control rings on Z mount lenses during
manual focus.
This option does not support:
certain Z mount lenses that can only be focused manually, or
F mount lenses connected via an FTZ II/FTZ mount adapter.
616 f9: Reverse Ring for Focus
-
-
f10: Focus Ring Rotation Range
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose how far the focus or control rings on Z mount lenses must be rotated to go all the way from
the minimum focus distance to infinity.
Option Description
[Non-linear]
The focus distance changes by a large amount when the ring is rotated rapidly and
by a small amount when the ring is rotated slowly, without regard to how far the
ring is rotated.
[90°]–[720°]
Choose how far the ring must be rotated to go all the way from the minimum focus
distance to infinity. To take focus from the minimum distance to infinity when, for
example, [90°] is selected, the ring need only be rotated 90°. Larger values permit
finer adjustments.
[Max.]Taking focus from the minimum focus distance to infinity requires rotating the ring
the maximum distance permitted at current lens settings.
If the lens does not support rotation range selection, [Focus ring rotation range] will be fixed at
[Non-linear].
617 f10: Focus Ring Rotation Range
f11: Control Ring Response
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose how responsive the lens control ring is when assigned [Aperture], [Power aperture],
[Exposure compensation], or [ISO sensitivity] using Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)]
or g2 [Custom controls].
618 f11: Control Ring Response
f12: Switch Focus/Control Ring Roles
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
If [ON] is selected, the focus ring will perform the role currently assigned to the control ring using
Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)] or g2 [Custom controls].
The control ring functions solely in the [Focus (M/A)] role when [ON] is selected.
This option applies only to compatible lenses.
619 f12: Switch Focus/Control Ring Roles
f13: Power Zoom (PZ) Button Options
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether the X and W (Q) buttons can be used for power zoom during still photography when
a power zoom lens is attached.
Option Description
[Use x/w buttons]Selecting [ON] allows the X and W (Q) buttons to be used for power zoom.
[Power zoom speed]Choose the speed at which power zoom lenses can be zoomed in and out
using the buttons.
620 f13: Power Zoom (PZ) Button Options
f14: Full-Frame Playback Flicks
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the role assigned to the flick up and down or flick left and right gestures during full-frame
playback.
Flick Up/Flick Down
Choose the operation performed by flicking up or down.
Option Description
c[Rating]Assign the current picture a pre-selected rating. The rating can be
chosen by pressing 2.
K[Select for upload
to computer]Mark the current picture for priority upload to a computer.
N[Select for upload
(FTP)]Mark the current picture for priority upload to an FTP server.
g[Protect] Protect the current picture.
W[Voice memo]
Flick to start recording a voice memo. If a memo already exists for
the current picture, flicking instead begins playback of the existing
memo. Press J to end recording or playback.
[None] Flicking up or down has no effect.
Pictures selected by flicking up or down when [Rating], [Select for upload to computer], [Select
for upload (FTP)], or [Protect] is selected are indicated by icons (0 203). The marking can be
removed by flicking again in the same direction.
621 f14: Full-Frame Playback Flicks
Flick Advance Direction
Choose the gesture used for frame advance.
Option Description
S[Left←Right] Flick from right to left to view the next picture.
T[Left→Right] Flick from left to right to view the next picture.
622 f14: Full-Frame Playback Flicks
g1: Customize i Menu
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the items listed in the i menu displayed when the i button is pressed in video mode.
Highlight a position in the i menu, press J, and select the desired item.
The following items can be assigned to the i menu.
Option 0
G[Frame size/frame rate]0 189
J[Choose image area]0 192
N[Destination]0 489
E[Exposure compensation]0 143
9[ISO sensitivity settings]0 152
m[White balance]0 157
h[Set Picture Control]0 176
6[HLG quality]0 497
y[Active D-Lighting]0 399
h[Skin softening]0 503
i[Portrait impression balance]0 407
w[Metering]0 506
s[Focus mode]0 114
7[AF-area mode/subj. detection]0 116, 0 120
u[Vibration reduction]0 511
4[Electronic VR]0 512
623 g1: Customize i Menu
Option 0
H[Microphone sensitivity]0 513
5[Attenuator]0 514
6[Frequency response]0 515
7[Wind noise reduction]0 516
8[Headphone volume]0 518
L[Silent mode]0 704
w[Custom controls]0 626
W[Focus peaking]0 543
9[Zebra pattern]0 640
3[Monitor/viewfinder brightness]0 674, 0 676
8[Multi-selector power aperture]0 625
9[Multi selector exposure comp.]0 625
l[View video info]0 625
v[Warm display colors]0 567
u[Airplane mode]0 724
W[Wireless remote connection (ML-L7)]0 729
624 g1: Customize i Menu
View video recording settings. This option can be used to view but
not to change video recording settings.
Multi-Selector Power Aperture
Choose whether the multi selector can be used for power aperture. When [Enable] is selected, holding
1 widens the aperture. Holding 3 narrows the aperture.
Multi Selector Exposure Comp.
Choose whether the multi selector can be used to adjust exposure compensation. Selecting [Enable]
allows exposure compensation to be set by pressing 1 or 3 when the exposure compensation dial is
rotated to C.
View Video Info
625 g1: Customize i Menu
Choose the roles played by the controls below. Highlight the
desired control and press J.
g2: Custom Controls
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the operations performed in video mode using lens rings and camera buttons and command
dials.
Option
6[Fn button]
V[AE-L/AF-L button]
q[Playback button]
D[DISP button]
p[OK button]
G[Shutter-release button]
z[Video record button]
y[Command dials]
S[Lens Fn button]
3[Lens Fn2 button]
S[Lens Fn ring (counterclockwise)]
R[Lens Fn ring (clockwise)]
T[Lens memory set button]
626 g2: Custom Controls
Option
l[Lens control ring]
The roles that can be assigned are listed below. The roles available vary with the control.
Role Description
K[Select center focus
point]Pressing the control selects the center focus point.
F[Save focus
position]
Holding the control saves the current focus position.
The saved position can be restored using a control to which
[Recall focus position] has been assigned (“memory recall”).
When saving the focus position, you can choose whether it
can be recalled using any of the controls to which [Recall
focus position] is assigned ([Save to all]) or using only a
specific control ([Save individually]).
For more information, see “Saving and Recalling Focus
Positions” (0 601).
H[Recall focus
position]
Pressing the control recalls a focus position saved using a
control to which [Save focus position] has been assigned.
For more information, see “Saving and Recalling Focus
Positions” (0 601).
z[Switch eyes]Press the control to choose the eye used for focus when the
camera detects the eyes of a human or animal portrait subject.
A[AF-ON]
Press the control to focus using autofocus.
When AF-C is selected for focus mode, the camera will focus
at the speed selected for Custom Setting g5 [AF speed].
G[Fast AF‑ON]
Press the control to focus using autofocus.
When AF-C is selected for focus mode, the camera will
focus at maximum speed, regardless of the option chosen
for Custom Setting g5 [AF speed].
F[AF lock only] Focus locks while the control is pressed.
627 g2: Custom Controls
Role Description
E[AE lock (Hold)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed. Exposure lock does
not end when recording begins. Exposure remains locked until
the control is pressed a second time or the standby timer
expires.
N[AWB lock (hold)]
If [Auto] or [Natural light auto] is selected for white balance,
white balance will lock when the control is pressed (white-
balance lock). White-balance lock does not end when recording
begins. The lock will however be released when the control is
pressed a second time or the standby timer expires.
O[AE/AWB lock
(hold)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed. White balance will
also lock provided [Auto] or [Natural light auto] is selected
for white balance. Exposure and white-balance lock do not
end when recording begins. The lock will however be released
when the control is pressed a second time or the standby timer
expires.
C[AE lock only] Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
B[AE/AF lock] Focus and exposure lock while the control is pressed.
K[Switch FX/DX] Press the control to switch between [FX] and [DX] image areas.
p[View assist]Press the control to select [ON] for Custom Setting g10 [View
assist]. Press again to select [OFF].
L[Silent mode] Press the control to enable silent mode. Press again to disable.
M[Cycle live view info
display]
Press the control to cycle the shooting display. The type and
content of the displays available can be chosen using Custom
Settings g15 [Custom monitor shooting display] and g16
[Custom viewfinder shooting display].
b[Live view info
display off]
Press the control to hide icons and other information in the
shooting display. Press again to view.
b[Framing grid]
Press the control to display a framing grid. To hide the grid,
press the control again. The display type can be selected using
Custom Setting g13 [Grid type].
628 g2: Custom Controls
Role Description
p[Zoom on/off]Press the control to zoom the display in on the area around the
current focus point. Press again to cancel zoom.
D[Virtual horizon]
Press the control to enable the virtual horizon display. Press
again to hide the display. The display type can be selected
using Custom Setting d16 [Virtual horizon type].
W[Focus peaking
display]
Press the control once to enable focus peaking when MF is
selected for focus mode. Press again to end focus peaking.
8[Enable/disable
touch Fn]Press the control to enable or disable touch Fn.
O[MY MENU] Press the control to display “MY MENU”.
3[Access top item in
MY MENU]
Press the control to jump to the top item in “MY MENU”. Select
this option for quick access to a frequently-used menu item.
K[Playback] Press the control to start playback.
l[Filtered playback]Press the control to view only pictures that meet the criteria
selected for [Filtered playback criteria] in the playback menu.
N[Filtered playback
(select criteria)]
Press the control to jump to [Filtered playback criteria] in the
playback menu.
9[Pattern tone range]Press the control to cycle through zebra pattern tone range
options (0 640).
1[Record videos]Press the control to start recording. Press again to end
recording.
J[Choose image area]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose the
image area for videos. Note that the image area cannot be
changed while recording is in progress.
E[Exposure
compensation]
When the exposure compensation dial is rotated to C, exposure
compensation can be adjusted either by holding the control
and rotating a command dial or by rotating the lens control
ring.
629 g2: Custom Controls
Role Description
9[ISO sensitivity]
When the ISO sensitivity dial is rotated to C, ISO sensitivity
can be adjusted either by holding the control and rotating a
command dial or by rotating the lens control ring.
m[White balance]
Hold the control and rotate the main command dial to adjust
white balance for videos. Some options offer sub-options that
can be selected by rotating the sub-command dial.
h[Set Picture Control]Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose a
Picture Control.
y[Active D-Lighting]Press the control and rotate a command dial to adjust Active
D-Lighting for videos.
h[Skin softening]Press the control and rotate a command dial to adjust skin
softening.
i[Portrait impression
balance]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose a
portrait impression balance mode.
w[Metering]Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose a
metering option for use during video recording.
z[Focus mode/AF-
area mode]
Hold the control and rotate the main command dial to choose
the focus mode, the sub-command dial to choose the AF-area
mode.
9[Focus-point lock]To lock focus-point selection, hold the control while using the
multi selector to choose the focus point.
H[Microphone
sensitivity]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to adjust
microphone sensitivity.
X[Focus (M/A)]
The lens control ring can be used for manual focus regardless
of the option selected for focus mode. To refocus using
autofocus, press the shutter-release button halfway or press a
control to which AF-ON has been assigned.
q[Power aperture] Rotate the lens control ring to adjust aperture.
[None] The control has no effect.
630 g2: Custom Controls
DPower Aperture
Power aperture is available only in modes A and M.
The display may flicker while aperture is adjusted.
Command Dials
The following roles can be assigned to the command dials. To view options, highlight items and press
2.
Role Description
[Exposure
setting]
Reverse the roles of the main and sub-command dials in selected modes.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight a mode and 1 or 3 to switch roles.
[Focus/AF-area
mode selection]
Switch the roles played by rotating the main and sub-command dials while
holding a control to which [Focus mode/AF-area mode] has been assigned
using Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls].
[Sub-command
dial zoom role]
Choose the role played by the sub-command dial in the zoom display.
Choose [Exposure setting] to change the role played by the sub-command
dial in each mode.
Choose [Zoom] to use the sub-command dial to zoom in or out.
631 g2: Custom Controls
g3: Focus-Point Lock
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Select [ON] to lock focus-point selection on the currently-selected focus point.
Focus point lock does not apply when [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode.
When [Subject-tracking AF] is selected, the focus point will track subject motion.
632 g3: Focus-Point Lock
Highlight options and press J or 2 to select (M) or deselect (U).
Modes marked with a check (M) are available for selection via
the sub-command dial.
To complete the operation, press G.
g4: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the AF-area modes that can be selected by rotating the sub-command dial while pressing a
control to which [Focus mode/AF-area mode] has been assigned using Custom Setting g2 [Custom
controls].
633 g4: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection
Choose the focus speed for video mode.
g5: AF Speed
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Use [When to apply] to choose when the selected option applies.
Option Description
D[Always]The camera focuses at the selected speed at all times in video
mode.
E[Only while recording]
Focus is adjusted at the selected speed only while video recording
is in progress. At other times, the camera focuses as quickly as
possible.
DLens Sounds
The sound produced by the lens during focus operations increases with AF speed. The effect is
particularly noticeable at a setting of [+5], so choose lower values if you find the noise distracting.
634 g5: AF Speed
The AF tracking sensitivity for video mode can be set to values of
from 1 to 7.
Choose [7] ([Low]) to help maintain focus on your original
subject.
If the subject leaves the selected focus point when [1] ([High]) is
selected, the camera will respond by quickly shifting focus to a
new subject in the same area.
g6: AF Tracking Sensitivity
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
635 g6: AF Tracking Sensitivity
g7: Power Zoom (PZ) Button Options
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether the X and W (Q) buttons can be used for power zoom during video recording when a
power zoom lens is attached.
Option Description
[Use x/w buttons]Selecting [ON] allows the X and W (Q) buttons to be used for power zoom.
[Power zoom speed]
Choose the speed at which power zoom lenses can be zoomed in and out
using the buttons; if desired, you can choose one speed for use during
recording and another for pre- and post-recording.
Note that the sounds produced by the lens may be audible in footage
recorded during zoom. The effect can be mitigated by selecting a slower
zoom speed.
636 g7: Power Zoom (PZ) Button Options
g8: Fine ISO Control (Mode M)
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Selecting [On (1/6 EV)] allows ISO sensitivity for videos to be adjusted in increments of ¹⁄₆EV in mode
M.
This option takes effect only when ISO sensitivity is adjusted via [ISO sensitivity settings]> [ISO
sensitivity (mode M)] in the video recording menu with the ISO sensitivity dial rotated to C.
Sensitivity can be set to values of from ISO100 to 51200 in increments of ¹⁄₆EV.
637 g8: Fine ISO Control (Mode M)
g9: Extended Shutter Speeds (S/M)
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Select [ON] for access to a range of slower shutter speeds in modes S and M.
When [OFF] is selected, the minimum shutter speed varies with frame rate as follows.
120p: ¹⁄₁₂₅ s
100p: ¹⁄₁₀₀ s
60p: ¹⁄₆₀ s
50p: ¹⁄₅₀ s
30p: ¹⁄₃₀ s
25p: ¹⁄₂₅ s
24p: ¹⁄₂₅ s
When [ON] is selected, the minimum shutter speeds for frame rates of 60p to 24p drop to ¹⁄₄s.
Those for 120p and 100p do not change.
Selecting [ON] and choosing a slow shutter speed helps prevent ISO sensitivity rising too high
during shots of the night sky and other dark subjects.
Videos recorded at slow shutter speeds when [ON] is selected will include repeated multiple copies
of the same frames.
To reduce blur caused by camera shake in videos recorded at slow shutter speeds while [ON] is
selected, we recommend mounting the camera on a tripod.
638 g9: Extended Shutter Speeds (S/M)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
g10: View Assist
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose [ON] for a live preview of video footage recorded with [N‑Log] selected for video tone mode,
but note that the colors in the preview are simplified for enhanced contrast.
Colors in the actual recorded footage are unaffected.
Contrast is also enhanced when N‑Log footage is viewed on the camera.
639 g10: View Assist
Pattern 1 Pattern 2
g11: Zebra Pattern
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose whether a zebra pattern is used to indicate selected tone ranges in video mode.
Pattern Tone Range
Choose the tone range shown by the zebra pattern from [Highlights] or [Mid-tones], or select [Zebra
pattern off] to turn the zebra pattern off. Highlights and mid-tones can be defined using [Highlight
threshold] and [Mid-tone range], respectively.
Pattern
To enable the zebra display, select [Pattern 1] or [Pattern 2].
Highlight Threshold
Choose the brightness needed to trigger the zebra display when [Highlights] is selected for [Pattern
tone range].
Choose from values of from 120 to 255. The lower the value, the greater the range of brightnesses
that will be shown as highlights.
If 255 is selected, the display will show only areas that are potentially overexposed.
640 g11: Zebra Pattern
Choose the brightness needed to trigger the zebra display when
[Mid-tones] is selected for [Pattern tone range].
The mid-tone range is defined as a brightness [Value] and
[Range] of brightnesses centered around the selected value.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight items and press 1 or 3 to change.
Mid-tone Range
DZebra Pattern
If both the zebra display and focus peaking are enabled in manual focus mode, only focus peaking
will take effect. To view the zebra display in manual focus mode, select [OFF] for Custom Setting a12
[Focus peaking]> [Focus peaking display].
641 g11: Zebra Pattern
g12: Limit Zebra Pattern Tone Range
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the tone ranges accessible via controls to which [Pattern tone range] is assigned.
Option Description
[Highlights] The control can be used to cycle between [Highlights] and [Zebra pattern off].
[Mid-tones] The control can be used to cycle between [Mid-tones] and [Zebra pattern off].
[No restrictions]The control can be used to cycle through [Highlights], [Mid-tones], and [Zebra
pattern off].
642 g12: Limit Zebra Pattern Tone Range
g13: Grid Type
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose a framing grid for video mode. The selected grid can be displayed by placing a check (M)
next to b in the list for Custom Setting g15 [Custom monitor shooting display] or g16 [Custom
viewfinder shooting display].
643 g13: Grid Type
Enable the RGB histogram.
The camera displays a wave-form
monitor. The monitor can be displayed
at either of two different sizes.
g14: Brightness Information Display
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose how the camera displays brightness information in video mode. Brightness information of the
selected type can be displayed by placing a check (M) next to E in the list for Custom Setting g15
[Custom monitor shooting display] or g16 [Custom viewfinder shooting display].
Option Description
[Histogram]
[Wave-form
monitor]
[Wave-form
monitor (large)]
644 g14: Brightness Information Display
Highlight items ([Display 2] through [Display 4]) and press J to
select (M) or deselect (U). Only displays marked with a check (M)
can be accessed by pressing the DISP button during shooting.
[Display 1] cannot be deselected.
To choose indicators that appear in displays [Display 1] through
[Display 4], highlight the corresponding option and press 2. You
can then highlight items and press J to select (M) or deselect (U).
g15: Custom Monitor Shooting Display
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the monitor displays accessible by pressing the DISP button in video mode.
Option Description
A[Basic shooting
info]
View the shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture, and other
basic shooting info.
B[Detailed shooting
info]
View the focus mode, AF-area mode, white balance, and other
detailed shooting info.
C[Touch controls]View options that can be accessed via touch controls,
including touch AF and the i menu.
D[Virtual horizon]Enable the virtual horizon. The display type can be selected
using Custom Setting d16 [Virtual horizon type].
E[Brightness
information]
View an RGB histogram or wave-form monitor. The display
type can be selected using Custom Setting g14 [Brightness
information display].
b[Framing grid]Enable the framing grid. The display type can be selected
using Custom Setting g13 [Grid type].
645 g15: Custom Monitor Shooting Display
Option Description
F[Center indicator] Display crosshairs at the center of the frame.
To complete the operation, press G.
646 g15: Custom Monitor Shooting Display
g16: Custom Viewfinder Shooting Display
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
Choose the viewfinder displays accessible by pressing the DISP button in video mode.
Highlight items ([Display 2] or [Display 3]) and press J to select (M) or deselect (U). Only displays
marked with a check (M) can be accessed by pressing the DISP button during shooting. [Display 1]
cannot be deselected.
To choose indicators that appear in displays [Display 1] through [Display 3], highlight the
corresponding option and press 2. You can then highlight items and press J to select (M) or
deselect (U). Apart from [Touch controls], the options are the same as those for Custom Setting
g15 [Custom monitor shooting display].
To complete the operation, press G.
647 g16: Custom Viewfinder Shooting Display
g17: Red REC Frame Indicator
G buttonUACustom Settings menu
If [ON] is selected, a red border will appear around the shooting display while video recording is in
progress. This helps prevent missed shots by alerting you when recording is in progress.
648 g17: Red REC Frame Indicator
To display the playback menu, select the D (playback menu) tab in
the camera menus.
The Playback Menu
Menu Items and Defaults
The options in the playback menu are listed below, together with their default settings.
[Delete]: —
[Playback folder]: All
[Playback display options]
[Focus point]: U
[Mark first shot in series]: U
[Exposure info]: U
[Highlights]: U
[RGB histogram]: U
[Shooting data]: U
[Overview]: U
[None (picture only)]: M
[File info]: U
[Basic shooting data]: M
[Flash data]: M
[Picture Control/HLG data]: M
[Other shooting data]: M
[Copyright info]: M
[Location data]: M
[IPTC data]: M
[Delete pictures from both slots]: Yes (confirmation required)
[Dual-format recording PB slot]: SD card slot
[Filtered playback criteria]
[Protect]: U
[Picture type]: U
649 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Rating]: U
[Select for upload to computer]: U
[Select for upload (FTP)]: U
[Voice memo]: U
[Retouched pictures]: U
[Series playback]
[Auto series playback]: OFF
[List series as single thumbnails]: OFF
[Picture review]: Off
[After delete]: Show next
[After burst, show]: Last picture in burst
[Auto-rotate pictures]: ON
[Copy image(s)]: —
650 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Delete
G buttonUDplayback menu
Delete multiple pictures. For more information, see “Deleting Multiple Pictures” (0 235).
Option Description
Q[Selected pictures] Delete selected pictures.
d[Candidates for
deletion]Delete pictures rated d (candidate for deletion).
i[Pictures shot on
selected dates]Delete all pictures taken on selected dates.
R[All pictures]
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for [Playback
folder] in the playback menu.
If two memory cards are inserted, you can select the card
from which pictures will be deleted.
651 Delete
Playback Folder
G buttonUDplayback menu
Choose a folder for playback.
Option Description
(Folder name)
Pictures in all folders with the selected name will be visible during playback.
Folders can be renamed using the [Storage folder]> [Rename] option in the
photo shooting menu.
[All] Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
[Current] Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during playback.
652 Playback Folder
When this option is selected (M), the
first picture in each burst will be
identified by a c icon and a figure
giving the total number of shots in
the burst.
Playback Display Options
G buttonUDplayback menu
Choose display options for full-frame playback.
Highlight options and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U).
To complete the operation, press G.
 
Option Description
[Focus point]Select (M) this option to view the location of the focus point used when the
picture was taken.
[Mark first shot in
series]
[Exposure info]
The selected (M) information displays can be viewed using the DISP button
or by pressing 1 or 3.
[Highlights]
[RGB histogram]
[Shooting data]
[Overview]
[None (picture
only)]
[File info]
653 Playback Display Options
Option Description
[Basic shooting
data]
The selected (M) options are included in the full-frame playback [Shooting
data] display.
[Flash data]
[Picture
Control/HLG data]
[Other shooting
data]
[Copyright info]
[Location data]
[IPTC data]
654 Playback Display Options
Choose whether deleting a copy of a picture recorded to both
memory cards with an option other than [Overflow] selected for
[Secondary slot function] in the photo shooting menu also deletes
the remaining copy.
Delete Pictures from Both Slots
G buttonUDplayback menu
Option Description
[Yes (confirmation
required)]
Before deleting one copy, you will be prompted to choose whether to delete
the other. To choose the option highlighted by default, press 2.
[Yes][Same pictures on x & z] is always selected; selecting [Yes] in the
confirmation dialog deletes both copies.
[No]The confirmation dialog displayed is the same as that for pictures for which
no second copy exists. Deleting the current picture does not delete the copy.
655 Delete Pictures from Both Slots
Dual-Format Recording PB Slot
G buttonUDplayback menu
Choose the slot from which dual-format pictures recorded with [RAW primary- JPEG secondary],
[JPEG primary- JPEG secondary], [RAW primary- HEIF secondary], or [HEIF primary- HEIF
secondary] selected for [Secondary slot function] in the photo shooting menu are played back.
656 Dual-Format Recording PB Slot
Filtered Playback Criteria
G buttonUDplayback menu
Choose the criteria used to choose the pictures displayed during filtered playback (0 229).
657 Filtered Playback Criteria
Choose options for viewing bursts.
Series Playback
G buttonUDplayback menu
Auto Series Playback
If [ON] is selected, the remaining pictures will play back automatically after the first picture in the burst
has been displayed full frame for a few seconds. Playback ends when the last picture in the burst is
displayed.
List Series as Single Thumbnails
When [ON] is selected, only the first shot in each burst will appear in the thumbnail list. The first
picture in each burst will be identified by a c icon and a figure giving the total number of shots in the
burst.
All the pictures in each burst will be displayed during full-frame playback.
Selecting [ON] for [List series as single thumbnails] allows access to [Manage series] in the
playback i menu (0 215).
658 Series Playback
Picture Review
G buttonUDplayback menu
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed immediately after shooting.
Option Description
[On]
Pictures appear in the currently-selected display (monitor or viewfinder) as
they are taken.
When [Prioritize viewfinder (2)] is selected for monitor mode, the most
recent picture will be displayed in the monitor when you take your eye
from the viewfinder.
[On (monitor only)]
Pictures are displayed after shooting only when the monitor is used to
frame shots. Pictures are not displayed in the viewfinder when [Viewfinder
only] is selected for monitor mode.
[Off]Pictures can only be viewed by pressing the K button.
659 Picture Review
After Delete
G buttonUDplayback menu
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.
Option Description
S[Show next]
The following picture is displayed.
If the deleted picture was the last picture, the preceding picture
will be displayed.
T[Show previous]
The preceding picture is displayed.
If the deleted picture was the first picture, the next picture will be
displayed.
U[Continue as before]
If you were scrolling through pictures in the order recorded, the
following picture will be displayed as described for [Show next].
If you were scrolling through pictures in reverse order, the
preceding picture will be displayed as described for [Show
previous].
660 After Delete
After Burst, Show
G buttonUDplayback menu
Choose whether the photo displayed immediately after a burst of shots is taken in continuous mode is
the first or last shot in the burst.
This option takes effect only when [Off] is selected for [Picture review] in the playback menu.
DSC_0001.jpg DSC_0002.jpg DSC_0003.jpg DSC_0004.jpg DSC_0014.jpg DSC_0015.jpg
1
2 3
Most recent shots (burst)
Displayed if [First picture in burst] is selected
Displayed if [Last picture in burst] is selected
661 After Burst, Show
1
2
3
Auto-Rotate Pictures
G buttonUDplayback menu
If [ON] is selected, the playback display will automatically rotate to match camera orientation, with
the result that “tall” pictures will be rotated to display in “tall” orientation when the camera is held
in ”wide” orientation and “wide” pictures will be rotated to display in “wide” orientation when the
camera is held in “tall” orientation.
DCaution: Auto-Rotate Pictures
Pictures are not rotated automatically during picture review even when [ON] is selected for [Auto-
rotate pictures].
662 Auto-Rotate Pictures
Choose [Select source].
Highlight [Select source] and press 2 to display the [Select
source] dialog.
Select the card containing the pictures to be copied.
Highlight the slot for the card containing the pictures to be
copied and press J to select the highlighted slot and return to
the [Copy image(s)] menu.
Copy Image(s)
G buttonUDplayback menu
Copy pictures from one memory card to another when two memory cards are inserted.
Option Description
[Select source] Choose the card from which pictures will be copied.
[Select picture(s)] Select pictures to be copied.
[Select destination folder]Select the destination folder on the remaining card (the card not
selected for [Select source]).
[Copy picture(s)?] Copy the pictures.
Copying Pictures
663 Copy Image(s)
1
2
Choose [Select picture(s)].
Highlight [Select picture(s)] and press 2 to view the [Select
picture(s)] display.
Select the source folder.
Highlight the folder containing the pictures to be copied
and press 2 to display the [Images selected by default]
menu.
To copy all pictures from the card in the selected slot,
highlight [All pictures in slot], press J, and proceed to
Step10.
Make the initial selection.
Choose the pictures that will be selected by default.
Option Description
[Deselect all]None of the pictures in the chosen folder will be selected by default.
Choose this option when you want to select pictures individually.
[Select all
pictures]
All of the pictures in the chosen folder will be selected by default.
Choose this option if you want to copy all or most of the pictures in
the folder.
[Select protected
pictures]Only the protected pictures in the folder will be selected by default.
664 Copy Image(s)
3
4
5
Select additional pictures.
Highlight pictures and press the W (Q) button to select;
selected pictures are marked with a check ( ). To remove
the check ( ) and deselect the current picture, press the W
(Q) button again.
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold
the X button.
After confirming that all the pictures you want to copy have
marks, press J to return to the [Copy image(s)] menu.
Choose [Select destination folder].
Highlight [Select destination folder] and press 2 to display
[Select destination folder] options.
665 Copy Image(s)
6
7
Choose a destination folder.
Highlight one of the following options and press 2.
Choose [Copy picture(s)?].
Highlight [Copy picture(s)?] and press J to display a
confirmation dialog.
Enter the number of the destination
folder (0 374). If a folder with the
selected number does not already
exist, a new folder will be created.
Choose the destination folder from
a list of existing folders.
Option Description
[Select folder
by number]
[Select folder
from list]
Select the folder.
After entering a folder number or highlighting the folder name, press J to select the folder and
return to the [Copy image(s)] menu.
666 Copy Image(s)
8
9
10
Choose [Yes].
The camera will display the message “Copy?” together with
the number of pictures that will be copied.
Highlight [Yes] and press J to copy the selected pictures.
Press J again to exit when copying is complete.
Pictures will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the
destination card.
If the destination folder contains a file with the same name as
one of the pictures to be copied, a confirmation dialog will be
displayed. Select [Replace existing picture] or [Replace all] to
replace the existing file or files. Protected files in the destination
folder will not be replaced. Select [Skip] to continue without
replacing existing files. Select [Cancel] to exit without copying
any further pictures.
Ratings and protection are copied with the pictures.
To prevent loss of power while copying videos, use one of the
following power sources:
A fully-charged battery
An optional EH‑7P charging AC adapter
An optional EH-8P AC adapter connected using the supplied
UC‑E25 USB cable (featuring Type C connectors at both ends)
-
-
-
DCautions: Copying Pictures
667 Copy Image(s)
11
To view the setup menu, select the B tab in the camera menus.
The Setup Menu
Menu Items and Defaults
The options in the setup menu are listed below, together with their default settings.
[Format memory card]: —
[Language]: (Default varies with country of purchase)
[Time zone and date]
[Time zone]: (Default varies with country of purchase)
[Date and time]: —
[Date format]: (Default varies with country of purchase)
[Daylight saving time]: OFF
[Monitor brightness]: 0
[Monitor color balance]: A-B: 0, G-M: 0
[Viewfinder brightness]: Auto
[Viewfinder color balance]: A-B: 0, G-M: 0
[Finder display size (photo Lv)]: Standard
[Limit monitor mode selection]
[Automatic display switch]: M
[Viewfinder only]: M
[Monitor only]: M
[Prioritize viewfinder (1)]: M
[Prioritize viewfinder (2)]: M
[Auto rotate info display]: ON
[AF fine-tuning options]
[AF fine-tune]: OFF
[Fine-tune and save lens]: —
[Default]: —
[List saved values]: —
[Choose value for current lens]: —
[Non-CPU lens data]
668 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Lens number]: 1
[Focal length (mm)]: ––
[Maximum aperture]: ––
[Save focus position]: OFF
[Save zoom position (PZ lenses)]: OFF
[Auto temperature cutout]: Standard
[Clean image sensor]
[Automatic cleaning]: Clean at shutdown
[Image Dust Off ref photo]: —
[Pixel mapping]: —
[Image comment]
[Attach comment]: OFF
[Copyright information]
[Attach copyright information]: OFF
[IPTC]
[Edit/save]: —
[Delete]: —
[Auto embed during shooting]: Off
[Load/save]: —
[Voice memo options]
[Voice memo control]: Press and hold
[Audio output (playback)]: Speaker/headphones
[Camera sounds]
[Beep on/off]: Off
[Volume]: 2
[Pitch]: Low
[Silent mode]: OFF
[Touch controls]
[Enable/disable touch controls]: Enable
[Glove mode]: OFF
[Self-portrait mode]: ON
[HDMI]
[Output resolution]: Auto
[Output range]: Auto
[Output shooting info]: ON
[Mirror camera info display]: ON
[USB connection priority]: Upload
[Conformity marking]: —
[Battery info]: —
[USB power delivery]: ON
[Energy saving (photo mode)]: OFF
[Slot empty release lock]: Enable release
[Save/load menu settings]: —
669 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Reset all settings]: —
[Firmware version]: —
670 Menu Items and Defaults
Format memory cards. Memory cards that have been formatted in
a computer or another camera should be reformatted using this
option before use. To begin formatting, choose a memory card
slot and select [Yes]. Note that formatting permanently deletes all
pictures and other data on the card.Before formatting, be sure to
make backup copies as required.
Format Memory Card
G buttonUBsetup menu
DCaution: During Formatting
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards until the message [Formatting memory card.]
clears from the display.
671 Format Memory Card
Language
G buttonUBsetup menu
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The languages available vary with the country or
region in which the camera was originally purchased.
672 Language
Time Zone and Date
G buttonUBsetup menu
Change time zones and set the camera clock. We recommend that the camera clock be adjusted
regularly.
Option Description
[Time zone]Choose a time zone. The time selected for [Date and time] is automatically
adjusted for the new time zone.
[Date and time] Set the camera clock to the current time in the selected [Time zone].
[Date format] Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed.
[Daylight saving
time]
Turn daylight saving time [ON] or [OFF]. Selecting [ON] automatically
advances the clock one hour. The default setting is [OFF].
A flashing t icon in the shooting display indicates that the clock has not been set.
673 Time Zone and Date
Monitor Brightness
G buttonUBsetup menu
Press 1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness. Choose higher values for increased brightness, lower values
for reduced brightness.
[Monitor brightness] can only be adjusted when the monitor is the active display. It cannot
be adjusted when [Viewfinder only] is selected for monitor mode or when your eye is to the
viewfinder.
Higher values increase the drain on the battery.
Changing the option selected for [Monitor brightness] in the setup menu when [HLG] is selected
for [Tone mode] in the photo shooting menu or when viewing pictures taken with [HLG] selected
for [Tone mode] changes the distribution of tones in the shooting and playback displays. The
fidelity of reproduction in highlights in particular declines as brightness rises.
674 Monitor Brightness
Color balance is adjusted using the multi selector. Press 1, 3, 4,
or 2 to adjust color balance as shown below. Press J to save
changes.
Increase green
Increase amber
Increase magenta
Increase blue
1
2
3
4
To choose a different picture, press the W (Q) button. Highlight
the desired picture and press J to select it as the reference
image.
To view the highlighted picture full frame, press and hold X.
Monitor Color Balance
G buttonUBsetup menu
Adjust monitor color balance to your taste.
[Monitor color balance] can only be adjusted when the monitor is the active display. It cannot
be adjusted when [Viewfinder only] is selected for monitor mode or when your eye is to the
viewfinder.
Monitor color balance applies only to menus, playback, and the shooting display; photos and videos
taken with the camera are not affected.
The reference image is either the last picture taken or, in playback mode, the picture last displayed.
If the memory card contains no pictures, an empty frame will be displayed instead.
675 Monitor Color Balance
Viewfinder Brightness
G buttonUBsetup menu
Adjust viewfinder brightness. [Viewfinder brightness] can only be adjusted when the viewfinder is the
active display. It cannot be adjusted when the monitor is on or when [Monitor only] is selected for
monitor mode.
Option Description
[Auto] Viewfinder brightness is adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions.
[Manual]Press 1 or 3 to adjust brightness manually. Choose higher values for increased
brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.
Higher values increase the drain on the battery.
Changing the option selected for [Viewfinder brightness] in the setup menu when [HLG] is
selected for [Tone mode] in the photo shooting menu or when viewing pictures taken with [HLG]
selected for [Tone mode] changes the distribution of tones in the shooting and playback displays.
The fidelity of reproduction in highlights in particular declines as brightness rises.
676 Viewfinder Brightness
Viewfinder Color Balance
G buttonUBsetup menu
Adjust viewfinder color balance to your taste. [Viewfinder color balance] can only be adjusted when
the viewfinder is the active display. It cannot be adjusted when the monitor is on or when [Monitor
only] is selected for monitor mode. Otherwise the procedure is the same as for [Monitor color
balance] (0 675).
677 Viewfinder Color Balance
Finder Display Size (Photo Lv)
G buttonUBsetup menu
Choose a magnification for the viewfinder display from [Standard] and [Small]. Selecting [Small]
makes it easier to see the entire subject.
678 Finder Display Size (Photo Lv)
Limit Monitor Mode Selection
G buttonUBsetup menu
Choose the monitor modes that can be selected using the M button.
Highlight options and press J or 2 to select (M) or deselect (U). Options marked with a check (M)
are available for selection.
To complete the operation, press G.
679 Limit Monitor Mode Selection
Auto Rotate Info Display
G buttonUBsetup menu
When [ON] is selected, the indicators in the shooting and playback displays will automatically be
rotated to match camera orientation.
680 Auto Rotate Info Display
List values saved using [Fine-tune and
save lens]. Highlighting a lens in the list
and pressing 2 displays a [Choose lens
number] dialog.
The [Choose lens number] dialog is
used to enter the lens identifier.
In the case of Z mount lenses and
some F mount lenses, the lens serial
number is entered automatically.
AF Fine-Tuning Options
G buttonUBsetup menu
Fine-tune focus for the current lens.
Use only as required.
We recommend that you perform fine-tuning at a focus distance you use frequently. If you perform
focus-tuning at a short focus distance, for example, you may find it less effective at longer
distances.
Option Description
[AF fine-tune] Select [ON] to turn fine-tuning on.
[Fine-tune
and save
lens]
Fine-tune focus for the current lens. Press 1 or 3 to highlight items and press 4
or 2 to choose from values between +20 and −20.
The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal point is from the lens; the
smaller the value, the closer the focal point.
The display shows the current and previous values.
The camera can store values for up to 40 lens types.
If a value already exists for the current lens, you can choose whether to add a
new value or overwrite the existing value.
[Default]
Choose the fine-tuning values for lenses for which no values have previously been
saved using [Fine-tune and save lens]. Press 4 or 2 to choose from values
between +20 and −20.
[List saved
values]
681 AF Fine-Tuning Options
Option Description
[Choose value
for current
lens]
Choose from multiple fine-tuning values saved for lenses of the same type.
DDeleting Saved Values
To delete values saved using [Fine-tune and save lens], highlight the desired lens in the [List saved
values] list and press O.
682 AF Fine-Tuning Options
Creating and Saving Fine-Tuning Values
Attach the lens to the camera.
Select [AF fine-tuning options] in the setup menu, then highlight [Fine-tune and save
lens] and press 2.
An AF fine-tuning dialog will be displayed.
Press 4 or 2 to fine-tune autofocus.
Choose from values between +20 and −20.
The current value is shown by g, the previously-selected value by o.
If a zoom lens is attached, you can choose separate fine-tuning values for maximum angle
(WIDE) and maximum zoom (TELE). Use 1 and 3 to choose between the two.
The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal point is from the lens; the smaller the
value, the closer the focal point.
Press J to save the new value.
683 AF Fine-Tuning Options
1
2
3
4
Choosing a Default Fine-Tuning Value
Select [AF fine-tuning options] in the setup menu, then highlight [Default] and press 2.
Press 4 or 2 to fine-tune autofocus.
Choose from values between +20 and −20.
The current value is shown by g, the previously-selected value by o.
The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal point is from the lens; the smaller the
value, the closer the focal point.
Press J to save the new value.
684 AF Fine-Tuning Options
1
2
3
Non-CPU Lens Data
G buttonUBsetup menu
Record data for non-CPU lenses attached using an optional mount adapter. Recording the focal
length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lenses allows them to be used with some camera features
normally reserved for CPU lenses, such as on-board vibration reduction.
Option Description
[Lens number] Choose a lens identifier.
[Focal length (mm)] Enter the focal length.
[Maximum aperture] Enter the maximum aperture.
685 Non-CPU Lens Data
Save Focus Position
G buttonUBsetup menu
When [ON] is selected, the camera will save the current focus position when turned off and restore it
when next turned on. Note that this increases camera startup times.
Note that even when [ON] is selected, if the temperature, zoom position, or other conditions
change while the camera is off, focus may resume from a different position when the camera is
turned on.
Similarly, note that even when [OFF] is selected, focus may resume from the previously-selected
position depending on the state of the camera and lens.
686 Save Focus Position
Save Zoom Position (PZ Lenses)
G buttonUBsetup menu
If [ON] is selected when a power zoom (PZ) lens is attached, the camera will save the current zoom
position when turned off and restore it when next turned on.
687 Save Zoom Position (PZ Lenses)
When [Standard] is selected, the camera will display first a J and
then a K icon as its internal temperature rises, switching to a
count-down timer if the temperature increases still further.
When [High] is selected, the camera will display J, K, and M
icons as its internal temperature rises, switching to a count-down
timer if the temperature increases still further.
When the count-down timer reaches zero, the camera will turn
off automatically and further photography will be suspended.
Auto Temperature Cutout
G buttonUBsetup menu
The level at which the camera will turn off automatically as its internal temperature rises can be
selected from [Standard] and [High].
DCaution: “High”
Although selecting [High] gives you more time before the camera shuts down, the camera may
become hot to the touch. We recommend using a tripod or other equipment to reduce the time spent
touching the camera.
DCautions: When the Camera Is Hot
In some cases, the count-down timer may be displayed the moment the camera is turned on, even
when [High] is selected.
Image quality may drop when the camera is hot.
Memory cards inserted in a hot camera may also become hot. Wait for the temperature to drop
before handling the camera or memory cards.
688 Auto Temperature Cutout
Clean Image Sensor
G buttonUBsetup menu
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or the body cap is removed may adhere
to the image sensor and affect your photographs. The “clean image sensor” option vibrates the sensor
to remove dust.
Option Description
[Start] Perform image sensor cleaning immediately.
[Automatic cleaning]
[Clean at shutdown]: The image sensor is automatically cleaned during
shutdown each time the camera is turned off.
[Cleaning off]: Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
689 Clean Image Sensor
Highlight [Start] and press J to immediately display the
[Image Dust Off ref photo] dialog.
Highlight [Clean sensor and then start] and press J to
clean the image sensor before starting. The [Image Dust
Off ref photo] dialog will be displayed when image sensor
cleaning is complete.
To exit without acquiring Image Dust Off reference data,
press G.
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
G buttonUBsetup menu
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in NX Studio. Image Dust Off processes NEF
(RAW) pictures to mitigate effects caused by dust adhering to the front of the camera image sensor.
For more information, refer to NX Studios online help.
Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data
Before acquiring Image Dust Off reference data, select photo mode by rotating the photo/video
selector to C.
Choose a start option.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit, featureless white object,
frame the object so that it fills the display and then press the shutter-release button
halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity.
In manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
690 Image Dust Off Ref Photo
1
2
If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera
may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data, in
which case a message will appear and the camera will return
to the display shown in Step1. Choose another reference
object and press the shutter-release button again.
A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on
the camera.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off
reference data.
The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is pressed.
DCaution: Image Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed cannot be used with
photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. Select [Clean sensor and then start]
only if the Image Dust Off reference data will not be used with existing photographs.
DCautions: Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data
An FX-format lens with a focal length of at least 50mm is recommended.
When using a zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
Image Dust Off data cannot be acquired when a DX lens is attached.
The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different
apertures.
Reference images cannot be viewed using computer imaging software.
691 Image Dust Off Ref Photo
3
Pixel Mapping
G buttonUBsetup menu
Pixel mapping checks and optimizes the camera image sensor. If you notice unexpected bright spots
appearing in pictures taken with the camera, perform pixel mapping as described below.
Pixel mapping is available only when a Z mount lens or an optional FTZII/FTZ mount adapter is
attached.
To prevent unexpected loss of power, use one of the following power sources:
A fully-charged battery
An optional EH‑7P charging AC adapter
An optional EH-8P AC adapter connected using the supplied UC‑E25 USB cable (featuring Type C
connectors at both ends)
To start pixel mapping, select [Start]. A message is displayed while the operation is in progress.
DCautions: Pixel Mapping
Do not attempt to operate the camera while pixel mapping is in progress. Do not turn the camera
off or remove or disconnect the power source.
Pixel mapping may not be available if the camera’s internal temperature is elevated.
692 Pixel Mapping
-
-
-
Comments will be attached to pictures taken while [Attach
comment] is [ON].
Image Comment
G buttonUBsetup menu
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed in the NX Studio
[Info] tab.
Input Comment
Input a comment of up to 36 characters. Highlight [Input comment] and press 2 to display a
text-entry dialog. For information on text entry, see “Text Entry” (0 74).
Attach Comment
DPhoto Info
Comments can be viewed on the [Other shooting data] page in the photo information display.
To display the [Other shooting data] page, select (M) both [Shooting data] and [Other shooting
data] for [Playback display options] in the playback menu.
693 Image Comment
Copyright information will be attached to pictures taken while
[Attach copyright information] is [ON].
Copyright Information
G buttonUBsetup menu
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken. Copyright information can be
viewed in the NX Studio [Info] tab.
Artist/Copyright
Enter the names of the photographer (maximum 36 characters) and copyright holder (maximum
54 characters). Highlight [Artist] or [Copyright] and press 2 to display a text-entry dialog. For
information on text entry, see “Text Entry” (0 74).
Attach Copyright Information
694 Copyright Information
DCautions: Copyright Information
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names, make sure that [OFF] is
selected for [Attach copyright information] before lending or transferring the camera to another
person. You will also need to make sure that the artist and copyright fields are blank.
Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the [Copyright
information] option.
DViewing Copyright Information
Copyright information can be viewed on the [Copyright info] page in the photo information
display.
To display the [Copyright info] page, select (M) both [Shooting data] and [Copyright info] for
[Playback display options] in the playback menu.
695 Copyright Information
IPTC presets can be created or edited on the camera and
embedded in new photographs as described below.
IPTC
G buttonUBsetup menu
You can also load IPTC presets created on a computer.
To create IPTC presets and save them to memory cards for later import, use IPTC Preset Manager
(0 700).
Creating, Renaming, Editing, and Copying Presets
Highlight [Edit/save] and press 2 to display the [Select preset to edit or save] list of existing presets.
To edit or rename a preset, highlight it and press 2. To create a new preset, highlight “Unused” and
press 2.
[Rename]: Rename the preset.
[Edit IPTC information]: Display the selected preset (0 699). Selected fields can be edited as
desired.
To copy a preset, highlight it and press X. Highlight the destination, press J, and name the copy.
Deleting Presets
To delete presets, highlight [Delete] and press 2.
696 IPTC
-
-
Highlighting [Auto embed during shooting] and pressing 2
displays a list of presets. Highlight a preset and press J; the
selected preset will be embedded in all subsequent photographs.
To disable embedding, select [Off].
Embedding Presets
DViewing IPTC Data
Embedded presets can be viewed on the [IPTC data] page in the photo information display.
To display the [IPTC data] page, select (M) both [Shooting data] and [IPTC data] for [Playback
display options] in the playback menu.
Copying Presets to a Memory Card
To copy IPTC presets from the camera to a memory card, select [Load/save]> [SD card slot] or
[microSD card slot], then highlight [Copy to card] and press 2. Select the desired preset and
destination (1–99) and press J to copy the preset to the card.
697 IPTC
The camera can store up to ten presets; to copy IPTC presets from a
memory card to a selected destination on the camera, select [Load/
save]> [SD card slot] or [microSD card slot], then highlight [Copy
to camera] and press 2.
Highlight a preset and press J to proceed to the [Select
destination] list. To preview the highlighted preset, press W (Q)
instead of pressing J. After previewing the preset, press J to
proceed to the [Select destination] list.
Highlight a destination and press J to display a dialog where
you can name the preset. Name the preset as desired and press
X to copy the preset to the camera.
In addition to the ten presets mentioned above, the camera can
store up to three XMP/IPTC presets created on a computer and
saved in XMP format. XMP/IPTC presets are not displayed during
playback. Nor can they be copied from the camera to a memory
card.
Copying Presets to the Camera
698 IPTC
DCautions: IPTC Information
The camera supports standard roman alphanumeric characters only. Other characters will not
display correctly except on a computer.
Preset names (0 696) may be up to 18 characters long. If a preset with a longer name is created
using a computer, all characters after the eighteenth will be deleted.
The number of characters that may appear in each field is given below. Any characters over the limit
will be deleted.
Field Max. length
Caption 2000
Event ID 64
Headline 256
Object name 256
City 256
State 256
Country 256
Category 3
Supp. Cat. (supplemental categories) 256
Byline 256
Byline title 256
Writer/editor 256
Credit 256
Source 256
699 IPTC
DIPTC
IPTC is a standard established by the International Press Telecommunications Council (IPTC) with the
intent of clarifying and simplifying the information required when photographs are shared with a
variety of publications.
DIPTC Preset Manager
IPTC presets can be created on a computer and saved to memory cards using IPTC Preset Manager
software. IPTC Preset Manager can be downloaded free of charge from the URL below.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
700 IPTC
Voice Memo Options
G buttonUBsetup menu
Adjust settings for voice memos (0 276, 0 278).
Voice Memo Control
Choose the behavior of controls to which [Voice memo] has been assigned via Custom Setting f3
[Custom controls (playback)].
Option Description
3[Press and hold]Voice memos up to 60 seconds long can be recorded while the control
is pressed.
4[Press to start/
stop]
Recording begins when the control is pressed and ends after about 60
seconds or when the control is pressed a second time.
701 Voice Memo Options
Voice memos are played back over
headphones (if connected) or the
camera’s built-in speaker.
Press 1 or 3 to choose a volume
between [1] and [15].
Press J to save changes and exit.
Audio Output (Playback)
Choose the device used for voice memo playback.
Option Description
5[Speaker/
headphones]
7[HDMI] Voice memos are output to the HDMI terminal at a fixed volume.
6[Off]
Voice memos cannot be played even using controls to which [Voice
memo] has been assigned via Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls
(playback)]. 2 icons are displayed when photographs for which memos
exist are viewed in the monitor.
702 Voice Memo Options
Camera Sounds
G buttonUBsetup menu
Beep On/Off
Turn the beep speaker on or off.
If [On] is selected for [Beep on/off], beeps sound when:
the self-timer counts down,
interval-timer photography, time-lapse video recording, focus shift, or pixel shift ends,
the camera focuses in photo mode (note that this does not apply if AF‑C is selected for focus
mode or if [Release] is selected for Custom Setting a2 [AF‑S priority selection]), or
touch controls are used.
Select [Off (touch controls only)] to disable the beep for touch controls while enabling it for other
purposes.
Volume
Adjust beep volume.
Pitch
Choose the pitch of the beep from [High] and [Low].
DSilent Mode
Selecting [ON] for [Silent mode] in the setup menu mutes the beep speaker.
DCaution: Camera Sounds
Overlapping beeps may play as a single sound.
703 Camera Sounds
-
-
-
-
Silent Mode
G buttonUBsetup menu
Select [ON] to enable the electronic shutter, eliminating the noise and vibration caused by the motion
of the mechanical shutter (“shutter shock”).
Enabling silent mode also suppresses other camera sounds. It does not, however, completely
silence the camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for example during autofocus or aperture
adjustment, in the latter case most noticeably at apertures smaller (i.e., at f-numbers higher) than
f/5.6.
The electronic shutter is used regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d5 [Shutter
type].
The beep speaker is muted regardless of the options selected for [Camera sounds] in the setup
menu.
The frame advance rate may drop in some circumstances.
The [Long exposure NR] and [Photo flicker reduction] options in the photo shooting menu are
disabled.
Optional flash units will not fire.
You may notice the following in the shooting display and in photographs recorded in silent mode:
flicker or banding in scenes lit by such sources as fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps,
distortion associated with motion (individual subjects moving through the frame may be
distorted, or the entire frame may appear distorted if the camera is moved during shooting),
jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, or bright spots, or
bright regions or bands in scenes lit by flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or
when the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source.
Silent mode mutes the beep speaker and dampens other camera sounds, but does not absolve
photographers of the need to respect their subjects’ privacy and image rights.
Tip: The Standby Timer
Even when [ON] is selected for [Silent mode], a sound will be produced when the standby timer is
activated or expires. To mute the standby timer, select [No limit] for Custom Setting c3 [Power off
delay] > [Standby timer].
704 Silent Mode
-
-
-
-
Touch Controls
G buttonUBsetup menu
Adjust settings for monitor touch controls.
Enable/Disable Touch Controls
Enable or disable touch controls. Select [Playback only] to enable touch controls in playback mode
only.
Glove Mode
Selecting [ON] raises the sensitivity of the touch screen, making it easier to use while wearing gloves.
705 Touch Controls
Self-Portrait Mode
G buttonUBsetup menu
Select [OFF] to prevent the camera entering self-portrait mode when the monitor is in the self-portrait
position.
706 Self-Portrait Mode
HDMI
G buttonUBsetup menu
Adjust settings for connection to HDMI devices (0 283).
707 HDMI
USB Connection Priority
G buttonUBsetup menu
Choose the function assigned priority when the camera is connected to a computer via USB.
Option Description
[Upload]
The monitor remains blank while the camera is connected to a computer. The monitor
turns on when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway but upload speeds may
drop.
[Shooting]The monitor remains on while the camera is connected to a computer. Upload speeds
may drop.
708 USB Connection Priority
Conformity Marking
G buttonUBsetup menu
View some of the standards with which the camera complies.
709 Conformity Marking
View information on the battery currently inserted in the camera.
Battery Info
G buttonUBsetup menu
Option Description
[Charge] The current battery level, expressed as a percentage.
[No. of shots] The number of pictures taken since the battery was last charged.
[Battery age]
A five-level display showing battery age.
A value of “0” (k) indicates that battery performance is unimpaired.
A value of “4” (l) indicates that the battery has reached the end of its charging
life. Replace the battery.
DNumber of Shots
[No. of shots] shows the number of times the shutter has been released. Note that the camera may
sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset
manual white balance.
DCharging Batteries at Low Temperatures
Batteries in general exhibit a drop in capacity at low ambient temperatures. Even fresh batteries
charged at temperatures under about 5°C (41°F) may show a temporary increase from “0” to “1” in
the value shown for [Battery age], but the display will return to normal once the battery has been
recharged at a temperature of about 20°C (68°F) or higher.
710 Battery Info
A USB power delivery icon appears in the shooting display when
the camera is powered by an external source.
USB Power Delivery
G buttonUBsetup menu
Choose whether the camera draws power from devices connected via USB. USB power delivery allows
the camera to be used while limiting the drain on the battery.
Option Description
[ON]
The camera draws power from connected devices while on. Connected devices will also
supply power when the camera is off if Bluetooth upload is in progress or the memory
card access lamp is lit.
[OFF] The camera does not draw power from connected devices at any time.
USB power delivery is available from:
computers with built-in Type C USB ports (requires the supplied UC‑E25 USB cable),
optional EH‑7P charging AC adapters, and
optional EH-8P AC adapters (requires the supplied UC‑E25 USB cable).
Power will only be supplied to the camera when the battery is inserted.
711 USB Power Delivery
-
-
-
DComputer USB Power Delivery
Before using a computer to supply power to the camera, check that the computer is equipped with
a Type C USB connector. Use the supplied UC-E25 USB cable (with Type C connectors at both ends)
to connect the camera to the computer.
Depending on the model and product specifications, some computers will not supply current to
power the camera.
Tip: “Power Delivery” Versus “Charging”
The supply of power for camera operations is referred to as “power delivery”, while the term “charging”
is used when power is supplied only to charge the camera battery. The conditions under which the
power supplied by external devices is used to power the camera or charge the battery are shown
below.
Option selected for [USB power
delivery]Power switch External power source used for
[ON]
On (standby timer active)1 Power delivery
On (standby timer off) Charging2
Off Charging2
[OFF]
On (standby timer active)1
On (standby timer off) Charging2
Off Charging2
Includes instances in which the power switch is in the “OFF” position but Bluetooth upload is in
progress or the memory card access lamp is lit.
EN‑EL15c and EN‑EL15b batteries inserted in the camera will charge when the camera is
connected to an optional EH‑7P charging AC adapter, EH-8P AC adapter, or a computer (note
that connections to computers or the EH-8P must be made using the supplied UC‑E25 USB cable).
712 USB Power Delivery
1
2
Energy Saving (Photo Mode)
G buttonUBsetup menu
In photo mode, the shooting display will dim to save power approximately 15 seconds before the
standby timer expires.
Option Description
[ON] Enable energy saving. The display refresh rate may drop.
[OFF]Disable energy saving. Note selecting [OFF] does not stop the shooting display dimming
a few seconds before the standby timer expires.
D“Energy Saving (Photo Mode)”
Note that even when [ON] is selected, energy saving will not function in some situations, including:
when [No limit] or a delay of less than 30 seconds is selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off
delay]> [Standby timer],
in self-portrait mode,
during zoom,
while the camera is connected to another device via HDMI,
while the camera is connected to and exchanging data with a computer or smart device via USB, or
while the camera is connected to an AC adapter.
713 Energy Saving (Photo Mode)
Slot Empty Release Lock
G buttonUBsetup menu
Choose whether the shutter can be released when no memory card is inserted in the camera.
Option Description
a[Release locked] The shutter cannot be released when no memory card is inserted.
b[Enable release]The shutter can be released with no memory card inserted. No pictures
will be recorded; during playback, the camera displays [Demo].
714 Slot Empty Release Lock
Save/Load Menu Settings
G buttonUBsetup menu
Save current camera menu settings to a memory card. You can also load saved settings, allowing menu
settings to be shared among cameras of the same model.
If two memory cards are inserted, the settings will be saved to the card selected for [Primary slot
selection] in the photo shooting menu.
Settings That Can Be Saved and Loaded
The following settings are saved:
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
[File naming]
[Primary slot selection]
[Secondary slot function]
[Image area]
[Tone mode]
[Image quality]
[Image size settings]
[RAW recording]
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[White balance]
[Set Picture Control] (Custom Picture Controls are saved as [Auto])
[Set Picture Control (HLG)]
[Color space]
[Active D-Lighting]
[Long exposure NR]
[High ISO NR]
[Vignette control]
[Diffraction compensation]
[Auto distortion control]
[Skin softening]
[Portrait impression balance]
[Photo flicker reduction]
[Metering]
[Flash control]
[Flash mode]
[Flash compensation]
715 Save/Load Menu Settings
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Release mode]
[Focus mode]
[AF-area mode]
[AF/MF subject detection options]
[MF subject detection area]
[Vibration reduction] (the options available vary with the lens)
[Link VR to focus point]
[Auto bracketing]
716 Save/Load Menu Settings
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
VIDEO RECORDING MENU
[File naming]
[Destination]
[Video file type]
[Frame size/frame rate]
[Image area]
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[White balance]
[Set Picture Control] (Custom Picture Controls are saved as [Auto])
[HLG quality]
[Active D-Lighting]
[High ISO NR]
[Vignette control]
[Diffraction compensation]
[Auto distortion control]
[Skin softening]
[Portrait impression balance]
[Video flicker reduction]
[Metering]
[Focus mode]
[AF-area mode]
[AF/MF subject detection options]
[MF subject detection area]
[Vibration reduction] (the options available vary with the lens)
[Electronic VR]
[Microphone sensitivity]
[Attenuator]
[Frequency response]
[Wind noise reduction]
[Mic jack plug-in power]
[Headphone volume]
[Timecode] (excepting [Timecode origin])
[External rec. cntrl (HDMI)]
717 Save/Load Menu Settings
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CUSTOM SETTINGS MENU: All items
PLAYBACK MENU
[Playback display options]
[Delete pictures from both slots]
[Dual-format recording PB slot]
[Filtered playback criteria]
[Series playback]
[Picture review]
[After delete]
[After burst, show]
[Auto-rotate pictures]
SETUP MENU
[Language]
[Time zone and date] (excepting [Date and time])
[Finder display size (photo Lv)]
[Limit monitor mode selection]
[Auto rotate info display]
[Non-CPU lens data]
[Save focus position]
[Save zoom position (PZ lenses)]
[Auto temperature cutout]
[Clean image sensor]
[Image comment]
[Copyright information]
[IPTC]
[Voice memo options]
[Camera sounds]
[Silent mode]
[Touch controls]
[Self-portrait mode]
[HDMI]
[USB connection priority]
[USB power delivery]
[Energy saving (photo mode)]
[Slot empty release lock]
718 Save/Load Menu Settings
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MY MENU
The current contents of “My Menu”
[Choose tab]
RECENT SETTINGS
The current contents of the recent settings menu (up to 20 items)
[Choose tab]
Save Menu Settings
Save settings to a memory card. If the card is full, an error will be displayed and settings will not be
saved. Saved settings can only be used with other cameras of the same model.
Load Menu Settings
Load saved settings from a memory card. Note that [Load menu settings] is available only when a
memory card containing saved settings is inserted.
DCaution: Saved Settings
Settings are saved to files named “NCSET***”, where “***” is an identifier that varies from camera to
camera. The camera will not be able to load settings if the file name is changed.
719 Save/Load Menu Settings
-
-
-
-
Reset All Settings
G buttonUBsetup menu
Reset all settings except [Language] and [Time zone and date] to their default values. Copyright
information and other user-generated entries are also reset. Once reset, settings cannot be restored.
We recommend that you save settings using the [Save/load menu settings] item in the setup menu
before performing a reset.
720 Reset All Settings
Firmware Version
G buttonUBsetup menu
View the current camera firmware version. Firmware updates can be performed if the memory card
contains new firmware.
The camera displays firmware versions for the camera and attached accessories as follows. Only
accessories currently connected to the camera are listed.
C: Camera firmware
LF/MA: Lens (LF) or mount adapter (MA) firmware
S: Flash firmware
TC: Teleconverter firmware
RG: Remote grip firmware
Tip: Firmware Updates
Updates can be performed using a computer or smart device.
Computer: Check the Nikon Download Center for new firmware. For more information, see the
firmware download page.
Smart device: If the smart device has been paired with the camera using the SnapBridge app, the
app will automatically notify you when updates become available, and you can then download the
update to the camera memory card via the smart device. For more information, see the SnapBridge
apps online help. SnapBridge may not display the notification at the same time that updates are
made available on the Nikon Download Center.
721 Firmware Version
-
-
-
-
-
To view the network menu, select the F tab in the camera menus.
The Network Menu
Menu Items and Defaults
The options in the network menu are listed below, together with their default settings.
[Airplane mode]: OFF
[Connect to smart device]
[Pairing (Bluetooth)]
[Bluetooth connection]: OFF
[Select pictures for upload]
[Auto select for upload]: ON
[Wi-Fi connection]
[Wi-Fi connection settings]
[Authentication/encryption]: WPA2-PSK/WPA3-SAE
[Channel]: Auto
[Upload while off]: ON
[Location data (smart device)]: —
[Wireless remote (ML‑L7) options]
[Wireless remote connection (ML‑L7)]: OFF
[Save wireless remote controller]: —
[Delete wireless remote controller]: —
[Assign Fn1 button]: Playback
[Assign Fn2 button]: Same as camera y button
[Connect to computer]
[Network settings]: —
[Connection type]: Picture transfer
[Options]
[Auto upload]: OFF
[Delete after upload]: OFF
[Upload RAW + JPEG as]
[Overflow/backup]: RAW+ JPEG
[RAW primary- JPEG secondary]: RAW+ JPEG
722 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Upload RAW + HEIF as]
[Overflow/backup]: RAW+ HEIF
[RAW primary- HEIF secondary]: RAW+ HEIF
[JPEG+JPEG slot selection]: Primary slot
[HEIF+HEIF slot selection]: Primary slot
[Upload folder]: —
[Deselect all?]: —
[Connect to FTP server]
[Network settings]: —
[Options]
[Auto upload]: OFF
[Delete after upload]: OFF
[Upload RAW + JPEG as]
[Overflow/backup]: RAW+ JPEG
[RAW primary- JPEG secondary]: RAW+ JPEG
[Upload RAW + HEIF as]
[Overflow/backup]: RAW+ HEIF
[RAW primary- HEIF secondary]: RAW+ HEIF
[JPEG+JPEG slot selection]: Primary slot
[HEIF+HEIF slot selection]: Primary slot
[Overwrite if same name]: OFF
[Protect if marked for upload]: OFF
[Upload marking]: OFF
[Upload folder]: —
[Deselect all?]: —
[Manage root certificate]: —
[Connect to other cameras]
[Synchronized release]: ON
[Network settings]: —
[Group name]: —
[Master/remote]: Master camera
[Remote camera list]: —
[Synchronize date and time]: —
[ATOMOS AirGlu BT options]
[Connect to ATOMOS AirGlu BT]: OFF
[Save ATOMOS AirGlu BT pairing info]: —
[Delete ATOMOS AirGlu BT pairing info]: —
[Camera]: NCZF
[USB]: MTP/PTP
[Router frequency band]: (Default varies with country of purchase)
[MAC address]: —
723 Menu Items and Defaults
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Airplane Mode
G buttonUF network menu
Select [ON] to disable the camera’s built-in Bluetooth and Wi-Fi functions.
724 Airplane Mode
Connect to smartphones or tablets (smart devices) via Bluetooth or
Wi-Fi.
Connect to Smart Device
G buttonUF network menu
Pairing (Bluetooth)
Pair with or connect to smart devices using Bluetooth.
Option Description
[Start pairing] Pair the camera with a smart device (0 290).
[Paired devices] List paired smart devices. To connect, select a device from the list.
[Bluetooth connection] Select [ON] to enable Bluetooth.
725 Connect to Smart Device
Select Pictures for Upload
Select pictures for upload to a smart device. You can also opt to upload pictures as they are taken.
Option Description
[Auto select for upload] Select [ON] to upload pictures as they are taken.
[Manually select for upload]Upload selected pictures. Transfer marking appears on the selected
pictures.
[Deselect all] Cancel upload of all pictures currently selected for transfer.
Wi-Fi Connection
Connect to smart devices via Wi-Fi.
Establish Wi-Fi Connection
Initiate a Wi-Fi connection to a smart device.
The camera SSID and password will be displayed. To connect, select the camera SSID on the smart
device and enter the password (0 294).
Once a connection is established, this option will change to [Close Wi‑Fi connection].
Use [Close Wi-Fi connection] to end the connection when desired.
726 Connect to Smart Device
Wi-Fi Connection Settings
Access the following Wi-Fi settings:
Option Description
[SSID] Choose the camera SSID.
[Authentication/
encryption]
Choose [OPEN], [WPA2-PSK], [WPA3-SAE], or [WPA2-PSK/WPA3-
SAE].
[Password] Choose the camera password.
[Channel]
Choose a channel.
Select [Auto] to have the camera choose the channel
automatically.
Select [Manual] to choose the channel manually.
[Current settings] View current Wi-Fi settings.
[Reset connection
settings]Select [Yes] to reset Wi-Fi settings to default values.
727 Connect to Smart Device
Upload While Off
If [ON] is selected, upload of pictures to smart devices via wireless connections will continue even
when the camera is off.
Location Data (Smart Device)
Display latitude, longitude, altitude, and UTC (Universal Coordinated Time) data downloaded from a
smart device.
For information on downloading location data from smart devices, see the online help for the
SnapBridge app.
Note that the camera may be unable to download or display location data from smart devices
depending on the version of the device operating system and/or SnapBridge app used.
728 Connect to Smart Device
Connect to optional ML‑L7 remote controls via Bluetooth. You can
also choose the roles played by the Fn1 and Fn2 buttons on the
ML‑L7.
For information on connecting to remote control and on the
features they support, see “ML‑L7 Remote Controls” in the
section on “Other Compatible Accessories” (0 818).
Wireless Remote (ML-L7) Options
G buttonUF network menu
Wireless Remote Connection (ML‑L7)
Option Description
[ON] Connect to the ML‑L7 with which the camera has most recently been paired.
[OFF] End an existing connection to an ML‑L7.
Save Wireless Remote Controller
Pair the camera with an ML‑L7. Once the camera has entered pairing mode, press the power button on
the remote control and keep it pressed for over three seconds. The status lamp on the remote control
will start to flash green at a rate of about once every three seconds when pairing is complete.
The camera can be paired with only one remote control at a time. It will respond only to the remote
with which it was last paired.
729 Wireless Remote (ML-L7) Options
Delete Wireless Remote Controller
End pairing between the camera and the remote control.
Assign Fn1 Button/Assign Fn2 Button
Choose the roles played by the Fn1 and Fn2 buttons on the ML‑L7.
Option Description
[Playback]Press the button to start playback. Pressing the button while playback
is in progress ends playback and returns you to the shooting display.
[Same as camera y
button]The button performs the same function as the camera G button.
[Same as camera i
button]The button performs the same function as the camera i button.
[None] Pressing the button has no effect.
730 Wireless Remote (ML-L7) Options
Connect to computers via wireless LAN.
Connect to Computer
G buttonUF network menu
Network Settings
Add camera network profiles. This item can also be used to choose from existing network profiles.
Create Profile
Create new network profiles (0 303).
If more than one profile already exists, you can press J to choose a profile and connect to the
selected network.
To edit an existing profile, highlight it and press 2.
Option Description
[General]
[Profile name]: Rename the profile.
[Password protection]: Select [On] to require that a password be entered before
the profile can be changed. To change the password, highlight [On] and press 2.
731 Connect to Computer
Option Description
[Wireless]
Display connection settings for connection to wireless networks.
Infrastructure mode: Adjust settings for connection to a network via a router.
[SSID]: Enter the network SSID.
[Channel]: Selected automatically.
[Authentication/encryption]: Select the type of encryption used on the
wireless network.
[Password]: Enter the network password.
Access-point mode: Adjust settings for direct wireless connection to the camera.
[SSID]: Choose the camera SSID.
[Channel]: Choose [Auto] or [Manual].
[Authentication/encryption]: Select the type of encryption used on the
wireless network.
[Password]: If an option other than [OPEN] is selected for [Authentication/
encryption], this item can be used to change the camera password.
[TCP/IP]
Adjust TCP/IP settings for infrastructure connections. An IP address is required.
If [ON] is selected for [Obtain automatically], the IP address and sub-net
mask for infrastructure mode connections will be acquired via a DHCP server
or automatic IP addressing.
Select [OFF] to enter the IP address ([Address]) and sub-net mask ([Mask])
manually.
732 Connect to Computer
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Copy to/from Card
Share network profiles.
If two memory cards are inserted, the profiles will be copied to and from the card in the slot
selected for [Primary slot selection] in the photo shooting menu.
Option Description
[Copy profile from
card]
Copy profiles from the root directory of the memory card to the camera
profile list.
[Copy profile to
card]
Copy profiles from the camera to the memory card. Highlight a profile and
press J to copy it to the memory card.
Password-protected profiles cannot be copied.
End Current Connection
End the connection to the current network.
Connection Type
Choose an operating mode for use when the camera is connected to a network.
Option Description
[Picture transfer]Upload photos to a computer as they are taken or upload existing pictures
from the camera memory card.
[Camera control]Use NX Tether software to control the camera and take pictures remotely from
a computer.
733 Connect to Computer
Options
Adjust upload settings.
Auto Upload
Select [ON] to mark new photos for upload as they are taken.
Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the memory card. Be sure a memory card
is inserted in the camera.
Videos are not uploaded automatically. They must instead be uploaded from the playback display
(0 227).
Delete After Upload
Select [ON] to delete photographs from the camera memory card automatically once upload is
complete.
Files marked for transfer before you selected [ON] are not deleted.
Deletion may be suspended during some camera operations.
Upload RAW+ JPEG As
When uploading RAW+ JPEG pictures, choose whether to upload both the NEF (RAW) and JPEG files
or only the NEF (RAW) or JPEG copy. Separate options can be selected for [Overflow/backup] and
[RAW primary- JPEG secondary].
The option selected for [Overflow/backup] takes effect during both auto and manual upload.
The option selected for [RAW primary- JPEG secondary] applies only during auto upload.
Upload RAW+ HEIF As
When uploading RAW+ HEIF pictures, choose whether to upload both the NEF (RAW) and HEIF files or
only the NEF (RAW) or HEIF copy. Separate options can be selected for [Overflow/backup] and [RAW
primary- HEIF secondary].
The option selected for [Overflow/backup] takes effect during both auto and manual upload.
The option selected for [RAW primary- HEIF secondary] applies only during auto upload.
734 Connect to Computer
JPEG+ JPEG Slot Selection
Choose a source slot for auto upload when taking pictures with [JPEG primary- JPEG secondary]
selected for [Secondary slot function] in the photo shooting menu.
HEIF+ HEIF Slot Selection
Choose a source slot for auto upload when taking pictures with [HEIF primary- HEIF secondary]
selected for [Secondary slot function] in the photo shooting menu.
Upload Folder
Mark all photos in a selected folder for upload. Marking will be applied to all photos, regardless of
whether they have been uploaded previously.
Videos will not be marked for upload. They must instead be uploaded from the playback display.
Deselect All?
Remove upload marking from all pictures. Upload of pictures with an “uploading” icon will immediately
be terminated.
735 Connect to Computer
Connect to FTP Server
G buttonUF network menu
Connect to FTP servers via wireless LAN.
Network Settings
Add camera network profiles. This item can also be used to choose from existing network profiles.
Create Profile
Create new network profiles (0 317).
If more than one profile already exists, you can press J to choose a profile and connect to the
selected network.
To edit an existing profile, highlight it and press 2.
Option Description
[General]
[Profile name]: Rename the profile.
[Password protection]: Select [On] to require that a password be entered before
the profile can be changed. To change the password, highlight [On] and press 2.
[Wireless]
Display connection settings for connection to wireless networks.
Infrastructure mode: Adjust settings for connection to a network via a router.
[SSID]: Enter the network SSID.
[Channel]: Selected automatically.
[Authentication/encryption]: Select the type of encryption used on the
wireless network.
[Password]: Enter the network password.
Access-point mode: Adjust settings for direct wireless connection to the camera.
[SSID]: Choose the camera SSID.
[Channel]: Choose [Auto] or [Manual].
[Authentication/encryption]: Select the type of encryption used on the
wireless network.
[Password]: If an option other than [OPEN] is selected for [Authentication/
encryption], this item can be used to change the camera password.
736 Connect to FTP Server
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Option Description
[TCP/IP]
Adjust TCP/IP settings for infrastructure connections. An IP address is required.
[Obtain automatically]: If [ON] is selected, the IP address and sub-net mask for
infrastructure mode connections will be acquired via a DHCP server or automatic
IP addressing. Select [OFF] to enter the IP address ([Address]) and sub-net mask
([Mask]) manually.
[Gateway]: Enter the network’s default gateway address, if required.
[Domain Name Server (DNS)]: If a DNS is present on the same network as the
FTP server, enter its address.
[FTP]
[Server type]: Choose the FTP server type and enter the URL or IP address,
destination folder, and port number. An IP address is required.
[PASV mode]: Select [ON] to enable PASV mode.
[Anonymous login]: Select [ON] for anonymous login. This option can only
be used with servers that are configured for anonymous login. Select [OFF] to
supply a user ID and password.
[Proxy server]: Enable this option as required.
737 Connect to FTP Server
Copy to/from Card
Share network profiles.
If two memory cards are inserted, the profiles will be copied to and from the card in the slot
selected for [Primary slot selection] in the photo shooting menu.
Option Description
[Copy profile from
card]
Copy profiles from the root directory of the memory card to the camera
profile list.
[Copy profile to
card]
Copy profiles from the camera to the memory card. Highlight a profile and
press J to copy it to the memory card.
Password-protected profiles cannot be copied.
End Current Connection
End the connection to the current network.
738 Connect to FTP Server
Options
Adjust upload settings.
Auto Upload
Select [ON] to mark new photos for upload as they are taken.
Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the memory card. Be sure a memory card
is inserted in the camera.
Videos are not uploaded automatically. They must instead be uploaded from the playback display
(0 227).
Delete After Upload
Select [ON] to delete photographs from the camera memory card automatically once upload is
complete.
Files marked for transfer before you selected [ON] are not deleted.
Deletion may be suspended during some camera operations.
Upload RAW+ JPEG As
When uploading RAW+ JPEG pictures, choose whether to upload both the NEF (RAW) and JPEG files
or only the NEF (RAW) or JPEG copy. Separate options can be selected for [Overflow/backup] and
[RAW primary- JPEG secondary].
The option selected for [Overflow/backup] takes effect during both auto and manual upload.
The option selected for [RAW primary- JPEG secondary] applies only during auto upload.
739 Connect to FTP Server
Upload RAW+ HEIF As
When uploading RAW+ HEIF pictures, choose whether to upload both the NEF (RAW) and HEIF files or
only the NEF (RAW) or HEIF copy. Separate options can be selected for [Overflow/backup] and [RAW
primary- HEIF secondary].
The option selected for [Overflow/backup] takes effect during both auto and manual upload.
The option selected for [RAW primary- HEIF secondary] applies only during auto upload.
JPEG+ JPEG Slot Selection
Choose a source slot for auto upload when taking pictures with [JPEG primary- JPEG secondary]
selected for [Secondary slot function] in the photo shooting menu.
HEIF+ HEIF Slot Selection
Choose a source slot for auto upload when taking pictures with [HEIF primary- HEIF secondary]
selected for [Secondary slot function] in the photo shooting menu.
Overwrite If Same Name
Choose [ON] to overwrite files with duplicate names during upload. Choose [OFF] to add numbers to
the names of newly uploaded files as necessary to prevent existing files being overwritten.
Protect If Marked for Upload
Select [ON] to automatically protect files marked for upload. Protection is removed as the files are
uploaded.
740 Connect to FTP Server
Upload Marking
Select [ON] to add a timestamp to the pictures on the camera memory card giving the time of upload.
Upload Folder
Mark all photos in a selected folder for upload. Marking will be applied to all photos, regardless of
whether they have been uploaded previously.
Videos will not be marked for upload. They must instead be uploaded from the playback display.
Deselect All?
Remove upload marking from all pictures. Upload of pictures with an “uploading” icon will immediately
be terminated.
741 Connect to FTP Server
Manage Root Certificate
Load or manage root certificates used for connection to FTPS servers.
Contact the network administrator for the FTPS server in question for information on acquiring root
certificates.
Option Description
[Import root
certificate]
Import a root certificate to the camera from a memory card.
The certificate must be in the card’s root (top) directory.
The camera can import root certificate files named “ROOT.CER”,
“ROOT.CRT”, or “ROOT.PEM”.
Only one root certificate can be stored on the camera at a time. The
existing certificate is overwritten when a new certificate is imported.
Connections established using self-signed root certificates may not
be trustworthy.
[Delete root
certificate]Delete the current root certificate from the camera.
[View root certificate] View the camera’s current root certificate.
[Connect if
authentication fails]Select [ON] to ignore certain authentication errors.
742 Connect to FTP Server
Connect to Other Cameras
G buttonUF network menu
Connect to other cameras for shutter or clock synchronization.
Synchronized Release
Select [ON] to synchronize the shutter release with those of cameras on the same network.
Network Settings
Add camera network profiles. This item can also be used to choose from existing network profiles.
Create Profile
Create new network profiles (0 343).
If more than one profile already exists, you can press J to choose a profile and connect to the
selected network.
To edit an existing profile, highlight it and press 2.
Option Description
[General]
[Profile name]: Rename the profile.
[Password protection]: Select [On] to require that a password be entered before
the profile can be changed. To change the password, highlight [On] and press 2.
[TCP/IP]
Adjust TCP/IP settings for infrastructure connections. An IP address is required.
If [ON] is selected for [Obtain automatically], the IP address and sub-net
mask for infrastructure mode connections will be acquired via a DHCP server
or automatic IP addressing.
Select [OFF] to enter the IP address ([Address]) and sub-net mask ([Mask])
manually.
743 Connect to Other Cameras
Copy to/from Card
Share network profiles.
If two memory cards are inserted, the profiles will be copied to and from the card in the slot
selected for [Primary slot selection] in the photo shooting menu.
Option Description
[Copy profile from
card]
Copy profiles from the root directory of the memory card to the camera
profile list.
[Copy profile to
card]
Copy profiles from the camera to the memory card. Highlight a profile and
press J to copy it to the memory card.
Password-protected profiles cannot be copied.
End Current Connection
End the connection to the current network.
Group Name
Choose a group for synchronized release. Shutter release is synchronized across the cameras on the
network that are in the same group.
Master/Remote
Choose a role for each camera from “master” and “remote”. Pressing the shutter-release button on the
master camera releases the shutters on all remote cameras that are both on the same network and in
the same group.
744 Connect to Other Cameras
Remote Camera List
The master camera lists the remote cameras connected.
Synchronize Date and Time
Set the clocks on the remote cameras to the date and time reported by the master camera (0 353).
745 Connect to Other Cameras
ATOMOS AirGlu BT Options
G buttonUF network menu
Manage wireless Bluetooth connections between the camera and Atomos UltraSync BLUE AirGlu
accessories.
The UltraSync BLUE can be used for simultaneous wireless connections to multiple compatible
cameras or audio recorders. Time codes are transmitted to the connected devices from the
UltraSync BLUE, synchronizing time codes even across devices from a mix of manufacturers. For
information on the maximum number of simultaneous connections, see the Atomos website.
Option Description
[Connect to ATOMOS
AirGlu BT]
Establish a wireless Bluetooth connection to a previously-paired
UltraSync BLUE.
[Save ATOMOS AirGlu
BT pairing info]
Pair the camera with the UltraSync BLUE.
The camera name will be displayed in the camera monitor.
Use the controls on the UltraSync BLUE to pair it with the camera.
For more information, see the documentation for the UltraSync
BLUE.
[Delete ATOMOS AirGlu
BT pairing info]
End the wireless connection between the camera and the UltraSync
BLUE.
[Camera]Choose the name under which the camera is listed on the UltraSync
BLUE.
After establishing a wireless connection to the UltraSync BLUE, select [On] or [On (with HDMI
output)] for [Timecode]> [Record timecodes] in the video recording menu to start receiving time
codes. The time codes will appear in the camera shooting display.
If no time code is received, the shooting display will show “--:--:--:--” (or “00:00:00:00” when an
external device is connected via HDMI). No time codes will be recorded if filming is begun at this
stage.
746 ATOMOS AirGlu BT Options
DCautions: Using the UltraSync BLUE
Time codes will not be recorded if [H.264 8-bit (MP4)] is selected for [Video file type] in the video
recording menu.
The UltraSync BLUE allows users to choose the frame rate. If the value is not a match for that chosen
with the camera, time codes will not be recorded or output via HDMI. Match the frame rate for the
UltraSync BLUE to the video recording frame rate as follows:
Video recording frame rate UltraSync BLUE frame rate
120p, 60p, 30p 29.97fps, 29.97fpsDF
100p, 50p, 25p 25fps
24p 23.98fps
Select 29.97fpsDF for drop-frame recording.
See the documentation for the UltraSync BLUE for information on choosing a frame rate.
The options selected for [Timecode]> [Count-up method], [Timecode origin], and [Drop frame]
in the video recording menu cannot be changed while the camera has a wireless connection to the
UltraSync BLUE.
If the camera loses the wireless connection to the UltraSync BLUE while filming is in progress, it
will continue to record time codes until the end of the current shot, although the time code shown
in the shooting display will switch to “--:--:--:--“ about 60 seconds after the connection is lost. The
time code will reappear when the wireless connection to the UltraSync BLUE is re-established.
The wireless connection to the UltraSync BLUE will end when the camera is turned off or the standby
timer expires. We recommend choosing [No limit] for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]>
[Standby timer].
747 ATOMOS AirGlu BT Options
-
-
USB
G buttonUF network menu
Adjust settings for connection to other devices via USB.
Select [MTP/PTP] when connecting to computers or Android devices via USB.
Select [iPhone] when connecting to iPhones via a third-party USB‑C to Lightning cable in order to
use NXMobileAir (for information on compatible USB‑C to Lightning cables, see the online help for
NXMobileAir).
DCaution: “iPhone”
Selecting [iPhone] enables connection only to iPhones running the NX MobileAir app. If you are not
using NX MobileAir, select [MTP/PTP].
748 USB
Choose the band for the selected SSID when connecting to a
wireless network in infrastructure mode. Select [2.4GHz/5GHz]
to connect to networks operating on either band.
When the camera searches for networks active in the vicinity, it
will list only those operating on the chosen band or bands.
The band is listed to the left of the network SSID.
If you select [2.4GHz/5GHz] when connecting via wireless
routers that operate on both bands, the list will include the SSIDs
in the band or bands detected by the camera.
Router Frequency Band
G buttonUF network menu
749 Router Frequency Band
MAC Address
G buttonUF network menu
View the MAC address.
750 MAC Address
To view [MY MENU], select the O tab in the camera menus.
My Menu/Recent Settings
Menu Items and Defaults
The options in “My Menu” are listed below, together with their default settings.
[Add items]: —
[Remove items]: —
[Rank items]: —
[Choose tab]: MY MENU
751 Menu Items and Defaults
Select [Add items] in [OMY MENU].
Highlight [Add items] and press 2.
Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu containing the item you wish
to add and press 2.
Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and press J.
My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu
G buttonUOmy menu
My Menu can be used to create and edit a customized list of up to 20 items from the photo shooting,
video recording, Custom Settings, playback, setup, and network menus. Items can be added, deleted,
and reordered as described below.
Adding Items to My Menu
752 My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu
1
2
3
Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to position the new item and press J to add it to
My Menu.
Add more items.
The items currently displayed in My Menu are indicated by a
check mark (L).
Items indicated by a V icon cannot be selected.
Repeat Steps 1–4 to select additional items.
753 My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu
4
5
Select items.
Highlight items and press J or 2 to select (M) or deselect.
Continue until all the items you wish to remove are selected
(L).
Remove the selected items.
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press J to
remove the selected items.
Removing Items from My Menu
Select [Remove items] in [OMY MENU].
Highlight [Remove items] and press 2.
DRemoving Items While in My Menu
Items can also be removed by highlighting them in [OMY MENU] and pressing the O button; a
confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O again to remove the selected item.
754 My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu
1
2
3
Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move and press J.
Position the item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or down in My Menu and
press J.
Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition additional items.
Exit to [O MY MENU].
Press the G button to return to [OMY MENU].
Reordering Items in My Menu
Select [Rank items] in [OMY MENU].
Highlight [Rank items] and press 2.
755 My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu
1
2
3
4
Select [Choose tab] in [OMY MENU].
Highlight [Choose tab] and press 2.
Select [mRECENT SETTINGS].
Highlight [mRECENT SETTINGS] in the [Choose tab] menu
and press J.
The name of the menu will change from [MY MENU] to
[RECENT SETTINGS] and the tab icon will change from O
to m.
Displaying “RECENT SETTINGS”
756 My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu
1
2
Menu items are added to the top of the [RECENT SETTINGS] menu
as they are used. The twenty most recently-used settings are listed.
Recent Settings: Accessing Recently-Used
Settings
G button U m recent settings
How Items Are Added to “RECENT SETTINGS”
DRemoving Items from the Recent Settings Menu
To remove an item from the [RECENT SETTINGS] menu, highlight it and press the O button; a
confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O again to remove the selected item.
DDisplaying My Menu
Selecting [RECENT SETTINGS]> [Choose tab] menu displays the items shown in Step2 of “Displaying
RECENT SETTINGS’” (0 756). Highlight [OMY MENU] and press J to view My Menu.
757 Recent Settings: Accessing Recently-Used
Settings
1Check the list of common problems.
Common problems and solutions to them are listed in the following sections:
“Problems and Solutions” (0 760)
Alerts and Error Messages” (0 772)
2Turn the camera off and remove the battery, then wait about a minute, re-insert the
battery and turn the camera on.
DThe camera may continue to write data to the memory card after shooting. Wait at
least a minute before removing the battery.
3Search Nikon websites.
For support information and answers to frequently asked questions, visit the website for
your country or region (0 33).
To download the latest firmware for your camera, visit:
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
4Consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
Troubleshooting
Before Contacting Customer Support
You may be able to resolve any issues with the camera by following the steps below. Check this list
before consulting your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.
758 Before Contacting Customer Support
DRestoring Default Settings
Depending on current settings, some menu items and other features may be unavailable. To access
menu items that are grayed out or features that are otherwise unavailable, try restoring default
settings using the [Reset all settings] item in the setup menu.
Note, however, that wireless network profiles, copyright information, and other user-generated
entries will also be reset. Once reset, settings cannot be restored.
759 Before Contacting Customer Support
Problems and Solutions
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
Battery/Display
The camera is on but does not respond:
Wait for recording and other operations to end.
If the problem persists, turn the camera off.
If the camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the battery.
If you are using an AC adapter, disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter.
Any data currently being recorded will be lost.
Data that have already been recorded are not affected by removing or disconnecting the
power source.
The viewfinder or monitor does not turn on:
Have you changed the monitor mode? Choose a different monitor mode using the M button.
Have you limited the choice of monitor modes available using the [Limit monitor mode
selection] item in the setup menu? Adjust settings as required.
Dust, lint, or other foreign matter on the eye sensor may prevent it functioning normally. Clean
the eye sensor with a blower.
The viewfinder is out of focus:
Rotate the diopter adjustment control to adjust viewfinder focus.
If adjusting viewfinder focus does not correct the problem, set the focus mode to AF‑S and the
AF-area mode to single-point AF. Next, select the center focus point, choose a high-contrast
subject, and focus using autofocus. With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment control
to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder.
760 Problems and Solutions
-
-
The display in the control panel, viewfinder, or monitor turns off without warning:
Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay].
The control panel is unresponsive and dim:
Control panel response times and brightness vary with temperature.
The viewfinder is unresponsive:
The display refresh rate may drop about 20 seconds before the standby timer turns off. The length
of time before the standby timer expires automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c3
[Power off delay]> [Standby timer].
761 Problems and Solutions
Shooting
The camera takes time to turn on:
More time will be needed to find files if the memory card contains large numbers of files or folders.
The shutter cannot be released:
Is a memory card inserted, and if so, does it have space available?
If you selected mode S after selecting a shutter speed of “Bulb” or “Time” in mode M, choose a
different shutter speed.
Is [Release locked] selected for [Slot empty release lock] in the setup menu?
Burst shooting is unavailable:
Burst shooting cannot be used in conjunction with HDR.
Photos are out of focus:
Is the camera in manual focus mode? To enable autofocus, select AF‑S, AF‑C, or AF‑F for focus
mode.
The camera may be unable to focus if:
the subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame,
the subject lacks contrast,
the subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness,
the focus point includes night-time spot lighting or a neon sign or other light source that
changes in brightness,
flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-vapor, or similar lighting,
a cross (star) filter or other special filter is used,
the subject appears smaller than the focus point, or
the subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or a row of windows in a
skyscraper).
In focus mode AF‑C, the focus point may flash while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway, indicating that the camera is no longer able to focus. The focus operation can be
resumed by releasing and then pressing the button again.
762 Problems and Solutions
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
The beep does not sound:
Is [ON] selected for [Silent mode] in the setup menu?
A beep does not sound when the camera focuses with AF‑C selected for focus mode.
Select an option other than [Off] for [Camera sounds]> [Beep on/off] in the setup menu.
The beep does not sound in video mode.
The full range of shutter speeds is not available:
Using a flash restricts the range of shutter speeds available. Flash sync speed can be set to values of
¹⁄₂₀₀–¹⁄₆₀s using Custom Setting e1 [Flash sync speed]. When using flash units that support auto FP
high-speed sync, choose [1/200 s (Auto FP)] for shutter speeds as fast as ¹⁄₈₀₀₀s.
Focus does not lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway:
When AF‑C is selected for focus mode, focus can be locked by pressing the A (g) button.
Focus-point selection is not available:
Focus-point selection is not available when [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode.
The camera is slow to record photos:
Is [ON] selected for [Long exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu?
Photographs and videos do not appear to have the same exposure as the preview shown in
the display:
The effects of changes to settings that affect exposure and color are not visible in the display
when [Adjust for ease of viewing] is selected for Custom Setting d9 [View mode (photo Lv)].
If [Show effects of settings]> [Only when flash is not used] is selected for Custom Setting d9,
display brightness will also be adjusted for ease of viewing (per [Adjust for ease of viewing])
when a flash unit is attached and ready to fire.
Note that changes to [Monitor brightness] and [Viewfinder brightness] have no effect on
pictures recorded with the camera.
763 Problems and Solutions
Flicker or banding appears in video mode:
Select [Video flicker reduction] in the video recording menu and choose an option that matches
the frequency of the local AC power supply.
Bright regions or bands appear:
Bright regions or bands may occur if the subject is lit by a flashing sign, flash, or other light source
with brief duration.
Smudges appear in photographs:
Are there smudges on the front or rear (mount-side) lens elements?
Is there foreign matter on the image sensor? Perform image sensor cleaning.
Pictures are affected by noticeable ghosting or flare:
You may notice ghosting or flare in shots that include the sun or other bright light sources. These
effects can be mitigated by attaching a lens hood or by composing shots with bright light sources
well out of the frame. You can also try such techniques as removing lens filters or choosing a
different shutter speed.
Bokeh is irregular:
With fast shutter speeds and/or fast lenses, you may notice irregularities in how bokeh is shaped.
The effect can be mitigated by choosing slower shutter speeds and/or higher f-numbers.
Shooting ends unexpectedly or does not start:
Shooting may end automatically to prevent the camera overheating, for example if:
the ambient temperature is high,
the camera has been used for extended periods to record videos, or
the camera has been used in continuous release modes for extended periods.
If pictures cannot be taken because the camera is running hot, turn the camera off and wait for
it to cool before trying to take pictures again. Note that the camera may feel warm to the touch,
but this does not indicate a malfunction.
764 Problems and Solutions
-
-
-
Image artifacts appear in the display during shooting:
To reduce noise, adjust settings such as ISO sensitivity, shutter speed, or Active D-Lighting.
At high ISO sensitivities, noise may become more noticeable in long exposures or in pictures
recorded when the camera temperature is elevated.
Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or bright spots may arise as a result of increases in the
temperature of the camera’s internal circuits. Turn the camera off when it is not in use.
Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, lines or unexpected colors may appear if you press the X
button to zoom in on the view through the lens during shooting.
Note that the distribution of noise in the display may differ from that in the final picture.
This issue can sometimes be addressed by checking and optimizing the image sensor. Perform
pixel mapping using [Pixel mapping] in the setup menu.
The camera cannot measure a value for preset manual white balance:
The subject is too dark or too bright.
Certain pictures cannot be selected as sources for preset manual white balance:
Pictures created with cameras of other types cannot serve as sources for preset manual white
balance.
White balance (WB) bracketing is unavailable:
White balance bracketing is not available when an NEF (RAW) or RAW+ JPEG/HEIF option is
selected for image quality.
White balance bracketing cannot be used in multiple exposure and HDR overlay modes.
The effects of [Set Picture Control] differ from picture to picture:
[Auto] is selected for [Set Picture Control] or as the basis for a custom Picture Control created
using [Manage Picture Control], or [A] (auto) is selected for [Quick sharp], [Contrast], or
[Saturation]. For consistent results over a series of photographs, choose a setting other than [A]
(auto).
The option selected for metering cannot be changed:
The option selected for metering cannot be changed during exposure lock.
765 Problems and Solutions
Exposure compensation is not available:
Changes to exposure compensation in mode M apply only to the exposure indicator and have no
effect on shutter speed or aperture.
Uneven shading appears in long exposures:
Uneven shading may appear in long exposures shot at shutter speeds of “Bulb” or “Time. The
effect can be mitigated by selecting [ON] for [Long exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu.
The AF-assist illuminator does not light:
Is [OFF] selected for Custom Setting a11 [Built-in AF-assist illuminator]?
The illuminator does not light in video mode.
The illuminator does not light when AF‑C or MF is selected for focus mode.
Sound is not recorded with videos:
Is [Microphone off] selected for [Microphone sensitivity] in the video recording menu?
Was the video recorded with [Microphone sensitivity]> [Manual] chosen in the video
recording menu and a low sensitivity selected?
766 Problems and Solutions
Playback
NEF (RAW) pictures are not visible during playback:
The camera displays only the JPEG or HEIF copies of pictures taken with [RAW+ JPEG/HEIF finem],
[RAW+ JPEG/HEIF fine], [RAW+ JPEG/HEIF normalm], [RAW+ JPEG/HEIF normal], [RAW+
JPEG/HEIF basicm], or [RAW+ JPEG/HEIF basic] selected for [Image quality].
Pictures taken with other cameras are not displayed:
Pictures recorded with other types of camera may not display correctly.
Not all photos are visible during playback:
Select [All] for [Playback folder] in the playback menu.
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
Is [OFF] selected for [Auto-rotate pictures] in the playback menu?
Auto picture rotation is not available during picture review.
Camera orientation may not be correctly recorded in photos taken with the camera pointing up
or down.
HLG (HEIF) pictures do not display correctly:
Pictures taken with [HLG] selected for [Tone mode] may not display correctly when viewed on other
devices (for example, when output to other devices directly or when opened on a computer after
upload). View the pictures on an HLG-compatible computer or other device. For more information
on viewing HLG pictures on a computer, visit the following website:
https://onlinemanual.nikonimglib.com/notice/hlg_setting_guide/en/
Pictures cannot be deleted:
Are the pictures protected?
Pictures cannot be retouched:
The pictures cannot be further edited with this camera.
There is insufficient space on the memory card to record the retouched copy.
767 Problems and Solutions
The camera displays the message, “Folder contains no pictures”:
Select [All] for [Playback folder] in the playback menu.
NEF (RAW) pictures cannot be printed:
Print JPEG or HEIF copies of the pictures created using a tool such as the [RAW processing
(current picture)] or [RAW processing (multiple pictures)] items accessible via [Retouch] in
the playback i menu.
Copy the pictures to a computer and print them using NX Studio or other software that supports
the NEF (RAW) format.
Pictures are not displayed on HDMI devices:
Confirm that an HDMI cable is correctly connected.
Output to HDMI devices does not function as expected:
Confirm that an HDMI cable is correctly connected.
Photos taken with [HLG] selected for [Tone mode] may not display correctly on devices that are
not HLG-compatible.
Videos may not display correctly when viewed with [ON] selected for [External rec. cntrl
(HDMI)] in the video recording menu.
Pictures may display correctly if default settings are restored using the [Reset all settings] item
in the setup menu.
The Image Dust Off option in NX Studio does not have desired effect:
Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the image sensor and will not have the
desired effect if:
Image Dust Off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed are used with
photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is performed, or
Image Dust Off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed are used with
photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed.
768 Problems and Solutions
The effects of [Set Picture Control], [Set Picture Control (HLG)], [Active D-Lighting], or
[Vignette control] are not visible:
In the case of NEF (RAW) pictures, the effects can only be viewed using Nikon software. View NEF
(RAW) pictures using NX Studio.
Pictures cannot be copied to a computer:
Depending on the operating system, you may be unable to upload pictures when the camera is
connected to a computer. Copy pictures from the memory card to a computer using a card reader
or other device.
769 Problems and Solutions
Bluetooth and Wi‑Fi (Wireless Networks)
Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name):
Navigate to the network menu and confirm both that [OFF] is selected for [Airplane mode]
and that [ON] is selected for [Connect to smart device]> [Pairing (Bluetooth)]> [Bluetooth
connection].
Confirm that [Connect to smart device]> [Wi-Fi connection] is enabled in the network menu.
Try disabling and re-enabling wireless network features on the smart device.
The camera cannot connect to printers and other wireless devices:
The camera cannot establish wireless connections with devices other than smartphones, tablets,
computers, and ML‑L7 remote controls.
Pictures cannot be uploaded to smart devices via auto upload:
If [Foreground] is selected for [Auto link]> [Link mode] in the SnapBridge tab, pictures will
not be uploaded to the smart device automatically while the SnapBridge app is running in the
background. Pictures will only be uploaded when the SnapBridge app is displayed (running in the
foreground) on the smart device.
Check that the camera is paired with the smart device.
Check that the camera and smart device are configured for connection via Bluetooth.
Using the camera for such purposes as viewing videos or retouching pictures may interrupt
upload of pictures at a size of 8megapixels via the SnapBridge app. Try again after ending the
task in progress on the camera.
The camera cannot download location data from the smart device:
The camera may be unable to download or display location data from smart devices depending
on the version of the operating system and/or SnapBridge app used.
If [Foreground] is selected for [Auto link]> [Link mode] in the SnapBridge tab, location
data will not be downloaded to the camera. Instead, they will be embedded in photographs after
they are uploaded to the smart device.
770 Problems and Solutions
Miscellaneous
The date of recording is not correct:
Is the camera clock set correctly? The clock is less accurate than most watches and household
clocks; check it regularly against more accurate timepieces and reset as necessary.
Menu items cannot be selected:
Some items are not available at certain combinations of settings.
[Wireless remote (ML‑L7) options] cannot be selected in the network menu, or the camera
cannot be paired with the remote control using [Wireless remote (ML‑L7) options]> [Save
wireless remote controller].
Check that the camera battery is charged.
Confirm that [OFF] is selected for [Airplane mode] in the network menu.
Confirm that [MTP/PTP] is selected for [USB] in the network menu.
The remote control cannot be used while the camera is connected to another device via USB,
Bluetooth, or Wi-Fi. End the connection.
The camera does not respond to the remote control:
The camera and ML‑L7 remote control are not connected. To connect, press the remote control
power button. If W does not appear in the shooting display, pair the camera and remote control
again (0 818).
Confirm that [ON] is selected for [Wireless remote (ML‑L7) options]> [Wireless remote
connection (ML‑L7)] in the network menu.
Confirm that [MTP/PTP] is selected for [USB] in the network menu.
Confirm that [OFF] is selected for [Airplane mode] in the network menu.
The remote control cannot be used while the camera is connected to another device via USB,
Bluetooth, or Wi-Fi. End the connection.
If you end the connection to the remote control by connecting to a computer or smart
device, the connection can be re-established by selecting [ON] for [Wireless remote (ML‑L7)
options]> [Wireless remote connection (ML‑L7)] in the network menu.
771 Problems and Solutions
Alerts and Error Messages
This section lists the alerts and error messages that appear in the camera display.
Alerts
The following alerts appear in the camera display:
Alert Problem/solution
HLow battery.
Ready a spare battery.
l
Lens is not correctly attached.
Ensure that lens is correctly attached.
Ensure that retractable lenses are extended.
This indicator is also displayed when a non-CPU lens is attached via a
mount adapter, but in this case no action need be taken.
Bulb (flashes)
“Bulb” selected in mode S.
Change shutter speed.
Select mode M.
Time (flashes)
Time” selected in mode S.
Change shutter speed.
Select mode M.
(Exposure
indicators and
shutter speed or
aperture display
flash)
Subject too bright; limits of camera exposure metering system exceeded.
Lower ISO sensitivity.
Mode P: Use third-party ND (neutral density) filter (filter can also be used if
alert is still displayed after following settings are adjusted in mode S or A).
Mode S: Choose faster shutter speed.
Mode A: Choose smaller aperture (higher f‑number).
Subject too dark; limits of camera exposure metering system exceeded.
Increase ISO sensitivity.
Mode P: Use optional flash unit (flash can also be used if alert is still
displayed after following settings are adjusted in mode S or A).
Mode S: Choose slower shutter speed.
Mode A: Choose wider aperture (lower f‑number).
772 Alerts and Error Messages
Alert Problem/solution
c (flashes)
Flash has fired at full power.
Photo may be underexposed. Check distance to subject and settings such as
aperture, flash range, and ISO sensitivity.
Full (flashes)
Memory insufficient to record further photos.
Delete pictures from memory card until there is room for additional pictures
to be recorded. Copy pictures you wish to keep to computer or other device
before proceeding.
Insert new memory card.
Camera has run out of file numbers.
Delete pictures from memory card until there is room for additional pictures
to be recorded. Copy pictures you wish to keep to computer or other device
before proceeding.
Insert new memory card.
Err (flashes)
Camera malfunction.
Press shutter-release button again. If error persists or appears frequently,
consult Nikon-authorized service representative.
Card (flashes) The memory card is write-protected (“locked”).
Slide the lock switch to the “write” position (0 85).
773 Alerts and Error Messages
Error Messages
The following error messages may appear in the camera display:
Message Problem/solution
Shutter release disabled. Recharge
battery.
Battery exhausted.
Replace with spare battery.
Charge battery.
This battery is unable to provide
data to the camera and cannot be
used. For safety, choose a battery
designated for use in this camera.
Battery info not available.
Battery cannot be used. Contact Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Battery level is extremely low; charge battery.
Battery cannot supply data to camera.
Replace third-party batteries with genuine Nikon batteries.
No memory card. The memory card is inserted incorrectly or not at all.
Check that card is inserted correctly.
Cannot access this memory card.
Insert another card.
Error accessing memory card.
Check that camera supports memory card.
Insert new memory card.
If error persists after card has been repeatedly ejected
and reinserted, card may be damaged. Contact retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative.
Unable to create new folder.
Insert new memory card.
Memory card is locked. Slide lock
to "write" position.
The memory card is write-protected (“locked”).
Slide the lock switch to the “write” position (0 85).
This card is not formatted. Format
the card.
Memory card is not correctly formatted.
Format memory card.
Replace with correctly-formatted memory card.
FTZ mount adapter firmware
version not supported. Upgrade
FTZ firmware.
Mount adapter firmware out of date.
Update to the latest version of the mount adapter firmware.
For more information, visit the Nikon website for your country
or region.
774 Alerts and Error Messages
Message Problem/solution
Recording interrupted. Please
wait.
Memory card does not support required video write
speed.
Use card that supports required write speed or change option
selected for [Frame size/frame rate] in video recording
menu.
The camera is too hot. It cannot
be used until it cools. Please wait.
Camera will turn itself off.
Camera’s internal temperature is elevated.
Suspend shooting until camera has cooled.
High battery temperature.
Remove battery and wait for it to cool.
Folder contains no pictures.
Folder contains no pictures.
Insert memory card that contains pictures.
No pictures in folder selected for playback.
Use [Playback folder] item in playback menu to select folder
that contains pictures.
Cannot display this file.
File has been modified using computer application or
does not conform to DCF file standard.
Do not overwrite pictures using computer applications.
File is corrupt.
Do not overwrite pictures using computer applications.
Cannot select this file.
Selected picture cannot be retouched.
Retouch options are available only with pictures taken with or
previously retouched on camera.
This video cannot be edited.
Selected video cannot be edited.
Videos created with other devices cannot be edited.
Videos under two seconds long cannot be edited.
This file cannot be saved to the
destination memory card. See the
camera manual for details.
Files 4GB or larger can only be saved to memory cards
formatted for exFAT. They will not be saved to cards in
other formats such as FAT32.
Use a memory card with a capacity over 64GB formatted in
the camera or keep file size to under 4GB.
775 Alerts and Error Messages
Technical Notes
Compatible Lenses and Accessories
The camera can be used with all Z mount lenses.
Confirm that the lens name includes “NIKKOR Z”.
Be sure to update to the latest versions of the camera and lens firmware. With earlier versions,
some functions may not be available or the camera may fail to correctly detect the lens. The latest
firmware is available from the Nikon Download Center.
For more information on lenses, see the lens documentation available from the Nikon Download
Center.
Tip: Compatible F Mount Lenses
F mount lenses can be mounted on Z mount cameras using an FTZ II/FTZ mount adapter.
Some features may not be available depending on the lens used.
Information on the F mount lenses that can be used with Z mount cameras and on any restrictions that
may apply can be found in Compatible F Mount Lenses. Compatible F Mount Lensesis available from the
Nikon Download Center.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
776 Compatible Lenses and Accessories
Camera Displays
The displays show information on current settings. Other icons or warnings may occasionally be
displayed, for example when settings are changed.
The Monitor
Photo Mode
3 5 8 1461 42 7 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17
18
19
20
777 Camera Displays
Shooting mode (0 131)
Flexible program indicator (0 132)
Out-of-focus indicator (auto-area AF; 
0 95)
Temperature warning (0 688)
Release mode (0 145)
Interval-timer photography indicator
(0 448)
t icon (0 94)
“No memory card” indicator (0 82,
0 780)
Focus mode (0 114)
Time-lapse video indicator (0 459)
AF-area mode (0 116)
Subject detection (0 120)
Flash mode (0 359)
FTP connection status (0 316)
White balance (0 157)
Image quality (0 110)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Active D-Lighting (0 399)
Image size (0 112)
Picture Control (0 176)
Image area (0 108)
Exposure and flash bracketing indicator
(0 424)
WB bracketing indicator (0 429)
ADL bracketing indicator (0 432)
HDR indicator (0 445)
Multiple exposure indicator (0 438)
Pixel shift indicator (0 478)
Number of shots in exposure and flash
bracketing sequence (0 424)
Number of shots in WB bracketing
sequence (0 429)
Number of shots in ADL bracketing
sequence (0 432)
HDR strength (0 445)
Number of shots in multiple exposure
(0 438)
Pre-Release Capture (0 556)
Number of shots in pixel shift sequence
(0 478)
15
16
17
18
19
20
778 Camera Displays
Exposure indicator
Exposure (0 136)
Exposure compensation (0 143)
Auto bracketing (0 423)
Remote camera connection status
(0 343)
i icon (0 75)
Battery indicator (0 84)
USB power delivery (0 711)
Flash-ready indicator (0 355)
Number of exposures remaining (0 85,
0 854)
Camera control mode display (0 337)
Wi-Fi connection indicator (0 294,
0 303, 0 317)
Bluetooth connection indicator (0 725)
Airplane mode (0 724)
ISO sensitivity (0 152)
ISO sensitivity indicator (0 152)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator (0 155)
Exposure compensation indicator
(0 143)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Flash compensation indicator (0 361)
Aperture (0 134, 0 135)
Shutter speed (0 132, 0 135)
FV lock indicator (0 362)
Focus indicator (0 128)
Metering (0 411)
Autoexposure (AE) lock (0 141)
Auto white-balance (AWB) lock (0 591)
Touch shooting (0 60, 0 124)
Vibration reduction indicator (0 421)
Shutter type (0 559)
Silent mode (0 704)
Focal length1
Focus point (0 123)
FLICKER icon (0 409)
“Lens built-in teleconverter enabled”
indicator2
View mode (0 564)
Displayed only in the case of zoom lenses with
no focal length scale.
Display only when a NIKKORZ lens with
a built-in teleconverter is attached and the
teleconverter enabled.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
1
2
20
19
21
22
25
26
27
24
23
18
4
5
3
2
1215 817 1011
16 671314 9
1
779 Camera Displays
DTemperature Warnings
If the camera temperature becomes elevated, a temperature warning and count-down timer will be
displayed. When the timer reaches zero, the shooting display will turn off.
The temperature at which the count-down timer starts can be selected from [Standard] and [High]
using [Auto temperature cutout] in the setup menu.
The timer turns red when the thirty second mark is reached. In some cases, the timer may be
displayed immediately after the camera is turned on.
DHigh-Temperature Warnings
If a high-temperature warning is displayed, wait for the camera to cool and the warnings to clear from
the display before handling the camera, battery, or memory cards.
DNo Memory Card Inserted
If no memory card is inserted, a “no memory card” indicator and [–E–] will appear in the shooting
display.
780 Camera Displays
Shooting mode (0 131)
Flexible program indicator (0 132)
Shutter speed (0 132, 0 135)
1
2
3
Aperture (0 134, 0 135)
Exposure indicator
Exposure (0 136)
Exposure compensation (0 143)
Auto bracketing (0 423)
4
5
The Information Display
3 41 2
5
781 Camera Displays
Wi-Fi connection indicator (0 294,
0 303, 0 317)
Bluetooth connection indicator (0 725)
Exposure and flash bracketing indicator
(0 424)
WB bracketing indicator (0 429)
ADL bracketing indicator (0 432)
HDR indicator (0 445)
Multiple exposure indicator (0 438)
Pixel shift indicator (0 478)
Number of exposures remaining (0 85,
0 854)
Camera control mode display (0 337)
1
2
3
i icon (0 75)
ISO sensitivity (0 152)
ISO sensitivity indicator (0 152)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator (0 155)
FV lock indicator (0 362)
Autoexposure (AE) lock (0 141)
Flash compensation indicator (0 361)
Exposure compensation indicator
(0 143)
Exposure compensation value (0 143)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
6
7
5
8
9
10
782 Camera Displays
t icon (0 94)
Interval-timer photography indicator
(0 448)
Time-lapse video indicator (0 459)
Flash control mode (0 358)
Silent mode (0 704)
Long-exposure noise reduction indicator
(0 401)
Shutter type (0 559)
“Beep” indicator (0 703)
Battery indicator (0 84)
USB power delivery (0 711)
Image size (0 112)
AF-area mode/subject detection (0 116,
0 120)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Focus mode (0 114)
View memory card info (0 589)
Airplane mode (0 724)
Metering (0 411)
Custom controls (shooting) (0 591)
Vibration reduction (0 421)
Release mode (0 145)
Picture Control (0 176)
White balance (0 157)
Image quality (0 110)
Temperature warning (0 688)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
21 3 4 5 6 7 8
15
16
14
20 9
13
19 10
17
21
12
18 11
783 Camera Displays
Recording indicator
“No video” indicator (0 102)
External recording control (0 282)
Length of footage recorded
Timecode (0 519)
Frame size and rate (0 189)
Destination (0 489)
Available recording time
Picture Control (0 176)
Tone mode (0 188)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Image area (0 192)
Video file type (0 187)
Recording indicator (red border; 0 648)
Sound level (0 513)
Microphone sensitivity (0 513)
Electronic VR indicator (0 512)
Headphone volume (0 518)
Zebra pattern (0 640)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Video Mode
13
14
15
1 2 3 5 64
8
9
10
7
1112
784 Camera Displays
The Viewfinder
Photo Mode
12 1331 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
21
19
20
18
17
15
16
14
785 Camera Displays
“Lens built-in teleconverter enabled”
indicator
View mode (0 564)
Release mode (0 145)
Focus mode (0 114)
AF-area mode (0 116)
Subject detection (0 120)
Flash mode (0 359)
White balance (0 157)
Active D-Lighting (0 399)
Picture Control (0 176)
Image quality (0 110)
Image size (0 112)
Image area (0 108)
Out-of-focus indicator (auto-area AF; 
0 95)
Focus point (0 123)
Exposure and flash bracketing indicator
(0 424)
WB bracketing indicator (0 429)
ADL bracketing indicator (0 432)
HDR indicator (0 445)
Multiple exposure indicator (0 438)
Pixel shift indicator (0 478)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Number of shots in exposure and flash
bracketing sequence (0 424)
Number of shots in WB bracketing
sequence (0 429)
Number of shots in ADL bracketing
sequence (0 432)
HDR strength (0 445)
Number of shots in multiple exposure
(0 438)
Pre-Release Capture (0 556)
Number of shots in pixel shift sequence
(0 478)
Flash compensation indicator (0 361)
FTP connection status (0 316)
Remote camera connection status
(0 343)
Wi-Fi connection indicator (0 294,
0 303, 0 317)
Bluetooth connection indicator (0 725)
Airplane mode (0 724)
17
18
19
20
21
786 Camera Displays
USB power delivery (0 711)
Battery indicator (0 84)
Flash-ready indicator (0 355)
Number of exposures remaining (0 85,
0 854)
Camera control mode display (0 337)
ISO sensitivity (0 152)
ISO sensitivity indicator (0 152)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator (0 155)
Exposure compensation indicator
(0 143)
Exposure indicator
Exposure (0 136)
Exposure compensation (0 143)
Auto bracketing (0 423)
Aperture (0 134, 0 135)
Shutter speed (0 132, 0 135)
Flexible program indicator (0 132)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Shooting mode (0 131)
Focus indicator (0 128)
Metering (0 411)
Shutter type (0 559)
Silent mode (0 704)
Vibration reduction indicator (0 421)
Focal length*
Autoexposure (AE) lock (0 141)
Auto white-balance (AWB) lock (0 591)
FV lock indicator (0 362)
Time-lapse video indicator (0 459)
Interval-timer photography indicator
(0 448)
t icon (0 94)
“No memory card” indicator (0 82,
0 780)
Temperature warning (0 688)
FLICKER icon (0 409)
Displayed only in the case of zoom lenses with
no focal length scale.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
15
19
20
21
22
23
24
76
11
1213 10 9 3 1
2
14 48 5
787 Camera Displays
Headphone volume (0 518)
Zebra pattern (0 640)
Picture Control (0 176)
Tone mode (0 188)
Frame size andrate (0 189)
Image area (0 192)
Video file type (0 187)
Available recording time
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Destination (0 489)
Length of footage recorded
Timecode (0 519)
Recording indicator (red border; 0 648)
Electronic VR indicator (0 512)
Microphone sensitivity (0 513)
Sound level (0 513)
External recording control (0 282)
Recording indicator
“No video” indicator (0 102)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Video Mode
11
15
14
13
12
43 5 61 2
7
10
8
9
788 Camera Displays
Compatible Flash Units
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) supports a variety of features thanks to improved
communication between the camera and compatible flash units.
Features Available with CLS-Compatible Flash Units
Flash unit 0
SB-5000 0 790
SB-910/SB-900/SB-800 0 792
SB‑700 0 794
SB-600 0 796
SB-500 0 798
SB-R200 0 800
SB-400 0 802
SB-300 0 804
SU-800 0 806
789 Compatible Flash Units
The SB‑5000
Supported features
Stand-alone
i‑TTL
i‑TTL balanced fill-flash 41
Standard i‑TTL fill-flash 42
qAAuto aperture 4
ANon-TTL auto
GN Distance-priority manual 4
MManual 4
RPT Repeating flash 4
790 Compatible Flash Units
Supported features
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control 4
i‑TTL i‑TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control 4
qAAuto aperture 4
ANon-TTL auto
MManual 4
RPT Repeating flash 4
Remote
i‑TTL i‑TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control 4
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto 43
MManual 4
RPT Repeating flash 4
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting
Color Information Communication (flash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light)
Auto FP high-speed sync 44
FV lock 45
Red-eye reduction 4
791 Compatible Flash Units
Supported features
Camera modeling illumination 4
Unified flash control
Camera flash unit firmware update 4
Not available with spot metering.
Can also be selected via the flash unit.
Choice of qA and A depends on the option selected with the master flash.
Available only in i‑TTL, qA, A, GN, and M flash-control modes.
Available only in i‑TTL flash control mode or when the flash is configured to emit monitor
preflashes in qA or A flash control mode.
The SB‑910, SB‑900, and SB‑800
Supported features
Stand-alone
i‑TTL
i‑TTL balanced fill-flash 41
Standard i‑TTL fill-flash 42
qAAuto aperture 43
ANon-TTL auto 43
GN Distance-priority manual 4
MManual 4
RPT Repeating flash 4
792 Compatible Flash Units
1
2
3
4
5
Supported features
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control 4
i‑TTL i‑TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
qAAuto aperture 4
ANon-TTL auto
MManual 4
RPT Repeating flash 4
Remote
i‑TTL i‑TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control 4
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto 44
MManual 4
RPT Repeating flash 4
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting
Color Information Communication (flash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light)
Auto FP high-speed sync 45
FV lock 46
Red-eye reduction 4
793 Compatible Flash Units
Supported features
Camera modeling illumination 4
Unified flash control
Camera flash unit firmware update 47
Not available with spot metering.
Can also be selected via the flash unit.
qA/A mode selection is performed on the flash unit using custom settings.
Choice of qA and A depends on the option selected with the master flash.
Available only in i‑TTL, qA, A, GN, and M flash-control modes.
Available only in i‑TTL flash control mode or when the flash is configured to emit monitor
preflashes in qA or A flash control mode.
Firmware updates for the SB‑910 and SB‑900 can be performed from the camera.
The SB‑700
Supported features
Stand-alone
i‑TTL
i‑TTL balanced fill-flash 41
Standard i‑TTL fill-flash 4
qAAuto aperture
ANon-TTL auto
GN Distance-priority manual 4
MManual 4
RPT Repeating flash
794 Compatible Flash Units
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Supported features
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control 4
i‑TTL i‑TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control 4
qAAuto aperture
ANon-TTL auto
MManual 4
RPT Repeating flash
Remote
i‑TTL i‑TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control 4
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto
MManual 4
RPT Repeating flash 4
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting
Color Information Communication (flash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light)
Auto FP high-speed sync 42
FV lock 43
Red-eye reduction 4
795 Compatible Flash Units
Supported features
Camera modeling illumination 4
Unified flash control
Camera flash unit firmware update 4
Not available with spot metering.
Available only in i‑TTL, GN, and M flash-control modes.
Available only in i‑TTL flash-control mode.
The SB‑600
Supported features
Stand-alone
i‑TTL
i‑TTL balanced fill-flash 41
Standard i‑TTL fill-flash 42
qAAuto aperture
ANon-TTL auto
GN Distance-priority manual
MManual 4
RPT Repeating flash
796 Compatible Flash Units
1
2
3
Supported features
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control
i‑TTL i‑TTL
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
qAAuto aperture
ANon-TTL auto
MManual
RPT Repeating flash
Remote
i‑TTL i‑TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control 4
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto
MManual 4
RPT Repeating flash 4
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting
Color Information Communication (flash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light)
Auto FP high-speed sync 43
FV lock 44
Red-eye reduction 4
797 Compatible Flash Units
Supported features
Camera modeling illumination 4
Unified flash control
Camera flash unit firmware update
Not available with spot metering.
Can also be selected via the flash unit.
Available only in i‑TTL and M flash-control modes.
Available only in i‑TTL flash-control mode.
The SB‑500
Supported features
Stand-alone
i‑TTL
i‑TTL balanced fill-flash 41
Standard i‑TTL fill-flash 4
qAAuto aperture
ANon-TTL auto
GN Distance-priority manual
MManual 42
RPT Repeating flash
798 Compatible Flash Units
1
2
3
4
Supported features
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control 42
i‑TTL i‑TTL 42
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
qAAuto aperture
ANon-TTL auto
MManual 42
RPT Repeating flash
Remote
i‑TTL i‑TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control 4
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto
MManual 4
RPT Repeating flash 4
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting
Color Information Communication (flash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light) 4
Auto FP high-speed sync 43
FV lock 44
Red-eye reduction 4
799 Compatible Flash Units
Supported features
Camera modeling illumination 4
Unified flash control
Camera flash unit firmware update 4
Not available with spot metering.
Can be selected using the [Flash control] item in the camera menus.
Available only in i‑TTL and M flash-control modes.
Available only in i‑TTL flash-control mode.
The SB‑R200
Supported features
Stand-alone
i‑TTL
i‑TTL balanced fill-flash
Standard i‑TTL fill-flash
qAAuto aperture
ANon-TTL auto
GN Distance-priority manual
MManual
RPT Repeating flash
800 Compatible Flash Units
1
2
3
4
Supported features
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control
i‑TTL i‑TTL
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
qAAuto aperture
ANon-TTL auto
MManual
RPT Repeating flash
Remote
i‑TTL i‑TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control 4
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto
MManual 4
RPT Repeating flash
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting
Color Information Communication (flash)
Color Information Communication (LED light)
Auto FP high-speed sync 41
FV lock 42
Red-eye reduction
801 Compatible Flash Units
Supported features
Camera modeling illumination 4
Unified flash control
Camera flash unit firmware update
Available only in i‑TTL and M flash-control modes.
Available only in i‑TTL flash-control mode.
The SB‑400
Supported features
Stand-alone
i‑TTL
i‑TTL balanced fill-flash 41
Standard i‑TTL fill-flash 4
qAAuto aperture
ANon-TTL auto
GN Distance-priority manual
MManual 42
RPT Repeating flash
802 Compatible Flash Units
1
2
Supported features
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control
i‑TTL i‑TTL
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
qAAuto aperture
ANon-TTL auto
MManual
RPT Repeating flash
Remote
i‑TTL i‑TTL
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto
MManual
RPT Repeating flash
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting
Color Information Communication (flash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light)
Auto FP high-speed sync
FV lock 43
Red-eye reduction 4
803 Compatible Flash Units
Supported features
Camera modeling illumination
Unified flash control
Camera flash unit firmware update
Not available with spot metering.
Can be selected using the [Flash control] item in the camera menus.
Available only in i‑TTL flash-control mode.
The SB‑300
Supported features
Stand-alone
i‑TTL
i‑TTL balanced fill-flash 41
Standard i‑TTL fill-flash 4
qAAuto aperture
ANon-TTL auto
GN Distance-priority manual
MManual 42
RPT Repeating flash
804 Compatible Flash Units
1
2
3
Supported features
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control
i‑TTL i‑TTL
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
qAAuto aperture
ANon-TTL auto
MManual
RPT Repeating flash
Remote
i‑TTL i‑TTL
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto
MManual
RPT Repeating flash
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting
Color Information Communication (flash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light)
Auto FP high-speed sync
FV lock 43
Red-eye reduction
805 Compatible Flash Units
Supported features
Camera modeling illumination
Unified flash control
Camera flash unit firmware update 4
Not available with spot metering.
Can be selected using the [Flash control] item in the camera menus.
Available only in i‑TTL flash-control mode.
The SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander
When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for SB‑5000,
SB‑910, SB‑900, SB‑800, SB‑700, SB‑600, SB‑500, or SB‑R200 flash units. Group flash control is
supported for up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.
Supported features
Stand-alone
i‑TTL
i‑TTL balanced fill-flash
Standard i‑TTL fill-flash
qAAuto aperture
ANon-TTL auto
GN Distance-priority manual
MManual
RPT Repeating flash
806 Compatible Flash Units
1
2
3
Supported features
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control 4
i‑TTL i‑TTL
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control 41
qAAuto aperture
ANon-TTL auto
MManual
RPT Repeating flash
Remote
i‑TTL i‑TTL
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto
MManual
RPT Repeating flash
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting
Color Information Communication (flash)
Color Information Communication (LED light)
Auto FP high-speed sync 42
FV lock 43
Red-eye reduction
807 Compatible Flash Units
Supported features
Camera modeling illumination 4
Unified flash control
Camera flash unit firmware update
Available during close-up photography only.
Not available when RPT is selected as the flash control mode for the remote flash unit.
Available only when i‑TTL is selected as the flash control mode for the remote flash unit or when
the flash is configured to emit monitor preflashes in mode qA.
808 Compatible Flash Units
1
2
3
Notes on Optional Flash Units
Be sure also to consult documentation for the optional flash unit before use.
If the unit supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. This camera
is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the documentation for the SB‑80DX, SB‑28DX, and
SB‑50DX.
If the flash-ready indicator (c) flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken in i‑TTL
or non-TTL auto mode, the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed
(CLS-compatible flash units only).
i‑TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 64 and 12800 equivalent.
At ISO sensitivities over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture
settings.
In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited according to ISO sensitivity, as
shown below:
Maximum aperture (minimum f-number) at ISO equivalent of:
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800
4 5 5.6 7.1 8 10 11 13
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the maximum value for aperture
will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
The SB‑5000, SB‑910, SB‑900, SB‑800, SB‑700, SB‑600, SB‑500, and SB‑400 provide red-eye
reduction in red-eye reduction and slow-sync with red-eye reduction flash modes.
“Noise” in the form of lines may appear in flash photographs taken with an SD-9 or SD-8A high-
performance battery pack attached directly to the camera. Reduce ISO sensitivity or increase the
distance between the camera and the battery pack.
The camera provides AF-assist illumination as required. AF-assist illuminators on optional flash units
will not light.
When an SC‑series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct
exposure may not be achieved in i‑TTL mode. We recommend that you select standard i‑TTL
fill-flash. Take a test shot and view the results in the camera display.
In i‑TTL, do not use any form of flash panel (diffusion panel) other than the flash unit’s built-in flash
panel or supplied bounce adapter. Using other panels may produce incorrect exposure.
809 Compatible Flash Units
*
DFlash Photography
Flash photography cannot be combined with some camera features, including:
silent mode,
video recording,
high-speed frame capture,
HDR overlay, and
pixel shift.
DUsing FV Lock with Optional Flash Units
FV lock is available with optional flash units in TTL and (where supported) monitor pre-flash qA and
monitor pre-flash A flash control modes (see the documentation provided with the flash unit for
more information).
Note that when Advanced Wireless Lighting is used to control remote flash units, you will need to
set the flash control mode for the master or at least one remote group to TTL, qA, or A.
DOther Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto (A) and manual modes. The options available do
not vary with the lens used.
Flash unit Supported features
SB‑80DX, SB‑28DX, SB‑28, SB‑26, SB‑25,
SB‑24
Non-TTL auto, manual, repeating flash, rear-curtain
sync1
SB‑50DX, SB‑23, SB‑29, SB‑21B, SB‑29S Manual, rear-curtain sync1
SB‑30, SB‑272, SB‑22S, SB‑22, SB‑20, SB‑16B,
SB‑15 Non-TTL auto, manual, rear-curtain sync1
Available when the camera is used to select the flash mode.
Mounting an SB‑27 on the camera automatically sets the flash mode to TTL, but setting the flash
mode to TTL disables the shutter release. Set the SB‑27 to A.
810 Compatible Flash Units
1
2
DMetering Areas for FV Lock
The areas metered when FV lock is used with optional flash units are as follows:
Stand-Alone
Flash control mode Metered area
i‑TTL 6-mm circle in center of frame
Auto aperture (qA)Area metered by flash exposure meter
Remote
Flash control mode Metered area
i‑TTL Entire frame
Auto aperture (qA)
Area metered by flash exposure meter
Non-TTL auto (A)
DFlash Compensation for Optional Flash Units
In i‑TTL and auto aperture (qA) flash control modes, the flash compensation selected with the
optional flash unit or with [Flash control] in the camera photo shooting menu is added to the flash
compensation selected with the [Flash compensation] item in the photo shooting menu.
811 Compatible Flash Units
Tip: Modeling Illumination
Pressing the control to which [Preview] has been assigned using Custom Setting f2 [Custom
controls (shooting)] causes CLS-compatible flash units to emit a modeling flash.
This feature can be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting to preview the total lighting effect
achieved with multiple flash units.
The effects of shadows cast by the flash are best observed directly rather than in the shooting
display.
Modeling illumination can be turned off by selecting [OFF] for Custom Setting e5 [Modeling flash].
Tip: Studio Strobe Lighting
To adjust the color and brightness of the view through the lens so that shots are easier to frame, select
[Adjust for ease of viewing] for Custom Setting d9 [View mode (photo Lv)].
812 Compatible Flash Units
Other Compatible Accessories
A variety of accessories are available for your Nikon camera.
DCompatible Accessories
Availability may vary with country or region.
See our website or brochures for the latest information.
Power Sources
EN‑EL15c Rechargeable Li-ion Battery: EN‑EL15c batteries can be used with Nikon Z f digital
cameras.
EN‑EL15b and EN‑EL15a batteries can also be used. Note, however, that fewer pictures can be
taken on a single charge than with the EN‑EL15c (0 857).
MH‑25a Battery Charger: The MH‑25a can be used to recharge EN‑EL15c batteries.
EH‑7P Charging AC Adapter/EH-8P AC Adapter: When connected to the camera via USB,
these adapters can be used to charge batteries inserted in the camera.
The battery will not charge while the camera is on.
The EH‑7P and EH-8P cannot be used to charge EN‑EL15a batteries.
The EH‑7P and EH-8P can be used to power the camera; to do so, select [ON] for [USB power
delivery] in the setup menu. For more information, see “USB Power Delivery” (0 711).
Connections for power supply or battery charging using the EH‑8P must be made via the
supplied UC‑E25 USB cable.
Filters
Neutral Color (NC) filters can be used to protect the lens.
Filters may cause ghosting when the subject is framed against a bright light, or when a bright
light source is in the frame. Filters can be removed if ghosting occurs.
Matrix metering may not produce the desired results with filters with exposure factors (filter
factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C‑PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S, ND400,
A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). We suggest that [Center-weighted metering] be selected instead. See the
documentation provided with the filter for details.
Filters intended for special-effects photography may interfere with autofocus or the in-focus
indicator (I).
813 Other Compatible Accessories
-
-
-
-
-
USB Cables
UC-E24 USB Cable: A USB cable with a Type C connector for connection to the camera and a
Type A connector for connection to the USB device.
UC-E25 USB Cable: A USB cable with two Type C connectors.
Sync Terminal Adapters
AS‑15 Sync Terminal Adapter: An adapter for the accessory shoe that allows studio flash
equipment and the like to be connected via a sync terminal.
Accessory Shoe Covers
BS-1 Accessory Shoe Cover: A cover protecting the accessory shoe when no flash unit is attached.
Body Caps
BF-N1 Body Cap: The body cap prevents dust entering the camera when no lens is in place.
Viewfinder Eyepiece Accessories
DK-33 Rubber Eyecup: A rubber eyecup that comes fitted to the camera. It can be removed by
holding the eyepiece release (q) and rotating the eyecup in the direction shown (w).
To re-attach the eyecup, align the mark on the rear of the eyecup (r) with the mark on the camera
body (e) and rotate the eyecup as shown until it clicks into place (t).
814 Other Compatible Accessories
Flash Units
SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, SB-400, and SB-300
Speedlights: These units can be mounted on the camera for flash photography. Some also
support wireless remote control for off-camera flash photography with multiple flash units.
See the documentation supplied with each Speedlight for information on mounting the unit
on the camera.
For more information on flash photography, see “Using an On-Camera Flash” (0 355), “What
Is Remote Flash Photography?” (0 364), and “Compatible Flash Units” (0 789).
SB‑R200 Wireless Remote Speedlight: A flash unit for wireless remote flash photography.
SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander: A wireless commander for use with SB-5000, SB-910,
SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and SB-R200 flash units. Flash units can be divided into
up to three groups for remote flash control. The SU‑800 itself is not equipped with a flash.
Mount Adapters
FTZII/FTZ Mount Adapter: An adapter that allows NIKKOR F mount lenses to be used with digital
cameras that support interchangeable Z mount lenses.
For information on attaching, removing, maintaining, and using mount adapters, refer to the
product documentation.
Update to the latest version of the mount adapter firmware if so prompted after attaching the
adapter. Information on performing firmware updates is available via the Nikon website for
your country or region.
Microphones
ME-1 Stereo Microphone: Connect the ME-1 to the camera microphone jack to record stereo
sound. Using an external microphone also reduces the chance of picking up equipment noise,
such as the sounds produced during video recording when focus is achieved using autofocus.
ME-W1 Wireless Microphone: A wireless Bluetooth microphone. Use the ME‑W1 for off-camera
recording.
815 Other Compatible Accessories
-
-
*
Remote Controls
ML‑L7 Remote Control: Pair the ML‑L7 with the camera for remote photography and video
recording.
Remote Grips
MC-N10 Remote Grip: When connected to the camera, the MC-N10 can be used for such tasks
as video recording, photography, and adjusting camera settings. It comes equipped with a rosette
for attachment to third-party camera equipment. With the MC-N10 mounted on third-party camera
equipment via an ARRI-compatible rosette adapter, you can keep moving subjects in focus while
panning the camera to track their motion, or use its conveniently-placed controls to adjust settings
such as exposure and white balance without touching the camera.
816 Other Compatible Accessories
DCharging Batteries
Compatible batteries can be charged using the devices below.
Battery MH‑25a battery charger EH‑7P charging AC adapter/
EH-8P AC adapter
EN‑EL15c 4 4
EN‑EL15b 4 4
EN‑EL15a 4
DAttaching and Removing the Accessory Shoe Cover
The BS-1 accessory shoe cover slides into the shoe as shown. To remove the cover, hold the camera
firmly, press the cover down with a thumb and slide it in the direction shown.
817 Other Compatible Accessories
ML‑L7 Remote Controls
When paired with the camera via Bluetooth, optional ML‑L7 remote controls can be used to control the
camera remotely during still photography, video recording, and the like.
The ML‑L7 remote control must be paired with the camera before use.
The camera can be paired with only one remote at a time. If paired successively with more than one
remote, the camera will respond only to the remote with which it was last paired.
In addition to the present document, you will also need to consult the documentation for the ML‑L7
remote control.
DCautions: Using Remote Controls
Remote controls cannot be used when:
[ON] is selected for [Airplane mode] in the network menu,
[iPhone] is selected for [USB] in the network menu, or
while the camera is connected to and exchanging data with another device via USB.
The camera cannot connect to a remote control while connected to another device via Bluetooth or
Wi-Fi or vice versa.
818 Other Compatible Accessories
-
-
-
Parts of the ML‑L7 Remote Control: Names and Functions
Control Function
1 “−” button Performs the same function as the camera W (Q) button.
2 “+” button Performs the same function as the camera X button.
3Video record
button Press once to start video recording and again to stop.
4Power
button
Press the button to turn the remote control on.
The remote control will automatically connect to the camera with which
it is currently paired, assuming it is nearby.
If you keep the button pressed for over three seconds, the remote
control will enter pairing mode.
Pressing the power button while the remote control is on turns off the
remote control, after which the status lamp will turn off.
5 Status lamp The color and behavior of the status lamp indicates remote control and
shooting status (0 821).
819 Other Compatible Accessories
-
-
Control Function
6Shutter-release
button
Press the button to release the shutter.
The remote control shutter-release button cannot be pressed halfway.
The remote control shutter-release button cannot be kept pressed for
burst photography.
The procedure for taking photographs at a shutter speed of “Bulb” is
the same as that for “Time”.
7 Multi selector Performs the same function as the multi selector on the camera.
8J (select) button Performs the same function as the J button on the camera.
9
Fn1 (Function
1)/Fn2 (Function
2) buttons
Perform the roles assigned via the network menu using [Wireless remote
(ML-L7) options]> [Assign Fn1 button] and [Assign Fn2 button].
At default settings, the remote control Fn1 button is used to start
playback and Fn2 button to display the menus.
820 Other Compatible Accessories
Tip: The Remote Control Status Lamp (Z f)
Color Behavior Status
Green Flashes approximately once a second Searching for paired camera.
Green Flashes quickly (approximately twice a second) Pairing.
Green Flashes approximately once every three seconds Connected to camera.
Orange Flashes once Photography started.
Orange Flashes twice “Bulb” or “Time” photography ended.
Red Flashes once Video recording started.
Red Flashes twice Video recording ended.
Tip: Adjusting Focus from the Camera
The shutter-release button on the remote control cannot be pressed halfway; to focus before shooting,
press the camera shutter-release button halfway, lock focus, and only then press the shutter-release
button on the remote control. To allow focus to be locked by pressing the camera shutter-release
button halfway, you will need to adjust camera settings as described below.
To enable focus lock when AF‑S is selected for focus mode, choose [Focus] for Custom Setting a2
[AF‑S priority selection].
To enable focus lock when AF‑C is selected for focus mode, choose [Focus] or [Focus+ release] for
Custom Setting a1 [AF‑C priority selection].
Tip: The Standby Timer
To reactivate the camera after the standby timer has expired and the monitor and viewfinder have
turned off, turn the remote control on and press and hold its shutter-release or video-record button.
821 Other Compatible Accessories
Go to [Wireless remote (ML‑L7) options] in the camera
network menu, highlight [Save wireless remote controller],
and press J.
The camera will enter pairing mode.
Any existing wireless connection to a smart device or
computer will end.
W and Z will appear in the shooting display.
Connecting for the First Time (Pairing)
The remote control must be paired with the camera before use.
Keep the power button on the remote control pressed for over three seconds.
The camera and remote control will begin pairing. During pairing, the status lamp on the
remote control will flash about twice a second.
A connection will be established between the camera and remote control when pairing is
complete.
If a message is displayed stating that pairing has failed, repeat the pairing process from
Step1.
822 Other Compatible Accessories
1
2
Go to [Wireless remote (ML‑L7) options] in the camera
network menu and select [ON] for [Wireless remote
connection (ML-L7)].
Connecting to a Paired Remote
Press the remote control power button.
The camera and remote will connect automatically.
823 Other Compatible Accessories
1
2
Software
The following Nikon software can be used with the camera. For more information, visit the Nikon
website for your country or region.
Computer Software
Nikon computer software is available from the Nikon Download Center. Check the version and
system requirements and be sure to download the latest version.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
NX Tether: Use for tethered photography when the camera is connected to a computer.
Exposure, white balance, and other camera settings can be adjusted remotely using controls
in the computer display.
NX Studio*: View and edit photos and videos shot with Nikon digital cameras. NX Studio can
be used to fine-tune files in Nikon’s unique NEF/NRW (RAW) format and convert them to JPEG,
TIFF, or HEIF (NEF/RAW processing). It supports not only NEF/NRW (RAW) pictures but also JPEG,
TIFF, and HEIF photos shot with Nikon digital cameras for such tasks as editing tone curves and
enhancing brightness and contrast.
Existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as earlier versions may be unable
to download pictures from the camera or open NEF (RAW) pictures.
Wireless Transmitter Utility: The Wireless Transmitter Utility is required if the camera is to
be connected to a network. Pair the camera with the computer and download pictures over a
wireless network.
Webcam Utility: The Webcam Utility lets you use your camera as a webcam when it is connected
to the computer via USB. The camera will appear as “Webcam Utility” in web conferencing apps.
Selecting “Webcam Utility” converts the camera into a webcam. For information on compatible
cameras, system requirements, and using the Webcam Utility, as well as on the precautions to be
observed during use, see the Webcam Utility page in the Nikon Download Center.
824 Software
*
Smartphone (Tablet) Apps
Smartphone (tablet) apps are available from the Apple App Store® and on Google Play™. For the
latest information on our apps, visit the Nikon website.
SnapBridge: Download photos and videos from the camera to your smart device via a wireless
connection.
NX MobileAir* (offers in-app purchases): Import pictures from a camera connected to your
smart device via USB and upload them wirelessly to an FTP server.
Supported features and operating systems vary by country and region.
825 Software
*
Caring for the Camera
Long-Term Storage
Remove the battery if the product will not be used for an extended period. Before removing the
battery, confirm that the camera is off.
Do not store the camera in locations that:
are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%,
are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as televisions or radios, or
are exposed to temperatures above 50°C (122°F) or below −10°C (14°F).
Cleaning
The procedure varies with the part that requires cleaning. The procedures are detailed below.
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
Camera Body
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at
the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled water and dry the
camera thoroughly.
Important: Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause product malfunction. Damage due
to the presence of foreign matter inside the camera is not covered under warranty.
Lens and Viewfinder
These glass elements are easily damaged: remove dust and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol
blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid that could damage glass elements. To
remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean
with care.
826 Caring for the Camera
For maximum effect, hold the camera in normal orientation (base
down).
Select [Clean image sensor] in the setup menu, then highlight
[Start] and press J to begin cleaning.
Camera controls cannot be used while cleaning is in progress. Do
not remove or disconnect the power source.
The setup menu will be displayed when cleaning is complete.
The Monitor
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing smudges, fingerprints, and other oily stains, wipe
the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this could result in
damage or malfunction.
Image Sensor Cleaning
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or the body cap is removed may adhere
to the image sensor and affect your photographs. The “clean image sensor” option vibrates the sensor
to remove dust.
The image sensor can be cleaned at any time from the menus, or cleaning can be performed
automatically when the camera is turned off. If image sensor cleaning fails to resolve the problem,
contact a Nikon-authorized service representative.
Using the Menus
827 Caring for the Camera
Select [Automatic cleaning] for [Clean image sensor].
Pressing 2 when [Automatic cleaning] is highlighted displays
[Automatic cleaning] options.
Highlight an option.
Press J to select the highlighted option.
Cleaning the Image Sensor at Shutdown
Option Description
6[Clean at shutdown]The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown each
time the camera is turned off.
[Cleaning off] Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
DCautions: Image Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls interrupts any image sensor cleaning begun in response to the operation of
the power switch.
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image sensor cleaning may be
temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again
after a short wait.
828 Caring for the Camera
1
2
Holding the camera so that light can enter, examine the
image sensor for dust or lint.
If no foreign objects are present, proceed to Step4.
Remove any dust and lint from the sensor with a blower.
Do not use a blower-brush. The bristles could damage the
sensor.
Dirt that cannot be removed with a blower can only be
removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel. Under no
circumstances should you touch or wipe the sensor.
Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter cannot be removed from the image sensor using image sensor cleaning, the sensor
can be cleaned manually as described below. Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate
and easily damaged; we recommend that manual cleaning be performed only by a Nikon-authorized
service representative.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
Replace the lens or supplied body cap.
829 Caring for the Camera
1
2
3
4
DForeign Matter on the Image Sensor
Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are removed or exchanged (or in rare
circumstances lubricant or fine particles from the camera itself) may adhere to the image sensor, where
it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To prevent entry of foreign matter when
attaching the body cap or exchanging lenses, avoid dusty environments and be sure to remove all dust
and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the camera mount, lens mount, or body cap. To
protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the supplied body cap. Should you
encounter foreign matter that cannot be removed using the image sensor cleaning option (0 827),
clean the image sensor as described in “Manual Cleaning” (0 829), or have the sensor cleaned by
Nikon-authorized service personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the
sensor can be retouched using the clean image options available in some imaging applications.
DServicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing; Nikon recommends that the camera be
inspected once every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that
fees apply to these services).
Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used
professionally.
Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional flash units, should be
included when the camera is inspected or serviced.
830 Caring for the Camera
Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
Cautions: Using the Camera
Do Not Drop
Do not drop the camera or lens or subject them to blows. The product may malfunction if subjected
to strong shocks or vibration.
Keep Dry
Keep the camera dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism caused by water inside the camera can not
only be expensive to repair but can in fact cause irreparable damage.
Avoid Sudden Changes in Temperature
Taking the camera from a warm to a cold environment or vice versa may cause damaging
condensation inside and outside the camera. Place the camera in a sealed bag or plastic case before
taking it across a temperature boundary. The camera can be taken from the bag or case once it has
had time to adjust to the new temperature.
Keep Away from Strong Magnetic Fields
Static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could
interfere with the monitor, corrupt data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal
circuitry.
Keep Credit Cards and Other Such Magnetic Storage Devices Away from the Camera and Lens
Data stored on the device could be corrupted.
Do Not Leave the Lens Pointed at the Sun
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other bright light source. Intense light may damage the
image sensor or cause fading or “burn in”. Photographs taken with the camera may exhibit a white
blur effect.
831 Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the image
sensor, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air
currents from a blower. These actions could scratch or otherwise
damage the sensor.
Lasers and Other Bright Light Sources
Do not direct lasers or other extremely bright light sources toward the lens, as this could damage
the camera’s image sensor.
Cleaning
When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with
a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a
cloth lightly dampened in fresh water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In rare instances, static
electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or go dark; this does not indicate a malfunction.
The display will soon return to normal.
Cleaning the Lens and Viewfinder
These glass elements are easily damaged: remove dust and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol
blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid that could damage glass elements.
To remove fingerprints and other stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft
cloth and wipe the lens carefully.
Do Not Touch the Image Sensor
Cleaning the Image Sensor
For information on cleaning the image sensor, see “Image Sensor Cleaning” (0 827) and “Manual
Cleaning” (0 829).
The Lens Contacts
Keep the lens contacts clean. Avoid touching them with your fingers.
832 Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
Store in a Well-Ventilated Area
To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store the camera
with naphtha or camphor moth balls, next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, or where it will be exposed to extremely high temperatures, for example near a heater or
in an enclosed vehicle on a hot day. Failure to observe these precautions could result in product
malfunction.
Long-Term Storage
To prevent damage caused for example by leaking battery fluid, remove the battery if the product
will not be used for an extended period. Store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant.
Do not, however, store the leather camera case in a plastic bag, as this may cause the material to
deteriorate. Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to
absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals. To prevent mold or mildew, take the
camera out of storage at least once a month, insert the battery, and release the shutter a few times.
Turn the Product Off Before Removing or Disconnecting the Power Source
Removing or disconnecting the power source while the camera is on could damage the product.
Particular care should be taken not to remove or disconnect the power source while pictures are
being recorded or deleted.
833 Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
Monitor/Viewfinder
The monitor and viewfinder are constructed with extremely high precision; at least 99.99% of
pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or defective. Hence while these
displays may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black),
this is not a malfunction. Pictures recorded with the device are unaffected. Your understanding is
requested.
Pictures in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor. It could malfunction or suffer damage. Dust or lint can be
removed with a blower. Stains can be removed by wiping the monitor lightly with a soft cloth
or chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury from broken
glass. Be careful that liquid crystal from the monitor does not touch the skin or enter the eyes or
mouth.
Should you experience any of the following symptoms while framing shots in the viewfinder,
discontinue use until your condition improves:
nausea, eye pain, eye fatigue,
dizziness, headache, stiffness in your neck or shoulders,
queasiness or loss of hand-eye coordination, or
motion sickness.
The display may rapidly flicker on and off during burst photography. Watching the flickering
display could cause you to feel unwell. Discontinue use until your condition improves.
834 Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
-
-
-
-
Bright Lights and Back-Lit Subjects
Noise in the form of lines may in rare cases appear in pictures that include bright lights or back-lit
subjects.
Camera Shooting and Playback Displays
When [HLG] is selected for tone mode, the shooting and playback displays in the camera monitor
and viewfinder may include “noise” in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines or
may fail to accurately reproduce highlights and highly-saturated colors. In addition, abrupt tone
discontinuities may be visible in the camera monitor or viewfinder when photos are displayed
full-frame, although the photos themselves are unaffected. For accurate tone reproduction, use
monitors, computers, operating systems, applications, and other equipment compatible with HLG.
835 Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
Cautions: Using Batteries
Precautions for Use
If improperly handled, batteries may rupture or leak, causing the product to corrode. Observe the
following precautions when handling batteries:
Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
Batteries may be hot after extended use.
Keep the battery terminals clean.
Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
Do not short or disassemble batteries or expose them to flame or excessive heat.
Replace the terminal cover when the battery is not inserted in the camera or charger.
If the battery is hot, for example immediately after use, wait for it to cool before charging.
Attempting to charge the battery while its internal temperature is elevated will impair battery
performance, and the battery may not charge or charge only partially.
If the battery will not be used for some time, remove it from the camera and store it in a cool, dry
location with an ambient temperature of 15°C to 25°C (59°F to 77°F). Avoid hot or extremely
cold locations.
Batteries in long-term storage should be charged to about 50% at least once a year. Do not
charge the battery to 100% before returning it to storage. A fully-exhausted battery will charge
to around 50% in about half the time needed to charge it to 100%.
Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use. The camera and charger draw
minute amounts of charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point that it
will no longer function.
Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or above 40°C (104°F).
Failure to observe this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance. Charge
the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5°C–35°C (41°F–95°F). The battery will not
charge if its temperature is below 0°C (32°F) or above 60°C (140°F).
Capacity may be reduced and charging times increase at battery temperatures from 0°C (32°F)
to 15°C (59°F) and from 45°C (113°F) to 60°C (140°F).
Batteries in general exhibit a drop in capacity at low ambient temperatures. Even fresh batteries
charged at temperatures under about 5°C (41°F) may show a temporary increase from “0” to
“1” in the setup menu [Battery info] age display, but the display will return to normal once the
battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20°C (68°F) or higher.
Battery capacity drops at low temperatures. The change in capacity with temperature is reflected
in the camera battery-level display. As a result, the battery display may show a drop in capacity as
the temperature drops, even if the battery is fully charged.
Batteries may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing batteries from the camera.
836 Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
-
-
-
-
-
-
Charge Batteries Before Use
Charge the battery before use. The supplied battery is not fully charged at shipment.
Ready Spare Batteries
Before taking photographs, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on your
location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice.
Have Fully-Charged Spare Batteries Ready on Cold Days
Partially-charged batteries may not function on cold days. In cold weather, charge one battery
before use and keep another in a warm place, ready to be exchanged as necessary. Once warmed,
cold batteries may recover some of their charge.
Battery Level
Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully discharged will shorten battery
life. Batteries that have been fully discharged must be charged before use.
A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room
temperature indicates that it requires replacement. Purchase a new rechargeable battery.
Do Not Attempt to Charge Fully-Charged Batteries
Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance.
Recycling Used Batteries
Recycle rechargeable batteries in accord with local regulations, being sure to first insulate the
terminals with tape.
837 Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
Specifications
Nikon Z f Digital Camera
Type
Type Digital camera with support for interchangeable lenses
Lens mount Nikon Z mount
Lens
Compatible lenses
Z mount NIKKOR lenses
F mount NIKKOR lenses (mount adapter required; restrictions
may apply)
Effective pixels
Effective pixels 24.5 million
Image sensor
Type 35.9× 23.9mm CMOS sensor (full-frame/FX-format)
Total pixels 25.28 million
Dust-reduction system Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data (requires NX
Studio)
838 Specifications
Storage
Image size (pixels)
[FX (36× 24)] selected for image area:
6048× 4032 (Large: 24.4M)
4528× 3024 (Medium: 13.7M)
3024× 2016 (Small: 6.1M)
[DX (24× 16)] selected for image area:
3984× 2656 (Large: 10.6M)
2976× 1992 (Medium: 5.9M)
1984× 1328 (Small: 2.6M)
[1:1 (24× 24)] selected for image area:
4032× 4032 (Large: 16.3M)
3024× 3024 (Medium: 9.1M)
2016× 2016 (Small: 4.1M)
[16:9 (36× 20)] selected for image area:
6048× 3400 (Large: 20.6M)
4528× 2544 (Medium: 11.5M)
3024× 1696 (Small: 5.1M)
File format (image quality)
NEF (RAW): 14 bit; choose from lossless compression, high
efficiencym, and high efficiency options
JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4), normal
(approx. 1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16) compression; size-priority
and optimal-quality compression available
HEIF: Supports fine (approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic
(approx. 1 : 16) compression; size-priority and optimal-quality
compression available
NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF
(RAW) and JPEG formats
NEF (RAW)+HEIF: Single photograph recorded in both NEF
(RAW) and HEIF formats
839 Specifications
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Storage
Picture Control System
Auto, Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Flat Monochrome,
Deep Tone Monochrome, Portrait, Rich Tone Portrait, Landscape,
Flat, Creative Picture Controls (Dream, Morning, Pop, Sunday,
Somber, Dramatic, Silence, Bleached, Melancholic, Pure, Denim,
Toy, Sepia, Blue, Red, Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary, Carbon);
selected Picture Control can be modified; storage for custom
Picture Controls
Note: Choice of Picture Controls is restricted to Standard,
Monochrome, and Flat when HLG is selected for tone mode during
still photography.
Media
SD (Secure Digital), SDHC, and SDXC memory cards (SDHC
and SDXC memory cards are UHS‑II compliant), and microSD,
microSDHC, and microSDXC memory cards (microSDHC and
microSDXC memory cards are UHS‑I compliant)
Dual card slots
Either card can be used for overflow or backup storage, for
separate storage of NEF (RAW) and JPEG or HEIF pictures, or for
storage of duplicate JPEG or HEIF pictures at different sizes and
image qualities; pictures can be copied between cards.
File system DCF 2.0, Exif 2.32, MPEG‑A MIAF
840 Specifications
Viewfinder
Viewfinder
1.27-cm/0.5-in. approx. 3690k-dot (Quad VGA) OLED electronic
viewfinder with color balance and auto and 13-level manual
brightness controls
Frame coverage Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical
Magnification Approx. 0.8× (50mm lens at infinity, −1.0m−1)
Eyepoint 21mm (−1.0m−1; from rearmost surface of viewfinder eyepiece
lens)
Diopter adjustment −4 – +2m−1
Eye sensor Automatically switches between monitor and viewfinder displays
Monitor
Monitor
8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 2100k-dot vari-angle TFT touch-sensitive LCD
with 170° viewing angle, approximately 100% frame coverage, and
color balance and 15-level manual brightness controls
841 Specifications
Shutter
Type Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane mechanical
shutter; electronic front-curtain shutter; electronic shutter
Speed
Accessible via shutter speed dial: ¹⁄₈₀₀₀ – 4s in steps of 1EV,
Bulb, Time, X (flash sync)
Accessible via main command dial: ¹⁄₈₀₀₀ – 30s in steps of ¹⁄₃EV
(extendable to 900s in mode M), Bulb, Time, X (flash sync)
Flash sync speed
X=¹⁄₂₀₀ s; flash synchronizes with shutter at speeds of ¹⁄₂₀₀ s or
slower; faster sync speeds are supported with auto FP high-speed
sync
Release
Release mode
Single frame, continuous low-speed, continuous high-speed,
continuous high-speed (extended), high-speed frame capture with
Pre-Release Capture, self-timer
Approximate frame advance
rate*
Continuous low-speed: Approx. 1 – 7fps
Continuous high-speed: Approx. 7.8 fps
Continuous high-speed (extended): Approx. 14 fps
High-speed frame capture (C30): Approx. 30fps
Maximum frame advance rate as measured by in-house tests.
Self-timer 2s, 5s, 10s, 20s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of 0.5, 1, 2, or 3s
842 Specifications
*
Exposure
Metering system TTL metering using camera image sensor
Metering mode
Matrix metering
Center-weighted metering: Weight of 75% given to 12 or
8mm circle in center of frame or weighting can be based on
average of entire frame
Spot metering: Meters circle with a diameter of approximately
4mm centered on selected focus point
Highlight-weighted metering
Range*−4 – +17EV
Figures are for ISO 100 and f/2.0 lens at 20°C/68°F
Mode b: auto, P: programmed auto with flexible program, S: shutter-
priority auto, A: aperture-priority auto, M: manual
Exposure compensation −3 – +3EV (−5 – +5EV when exposure compensation dial is rotated
to C) in steps of ¹⁄₃EV
Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended Exposure
Index)
ISO 100–64000 (choose from step sizes of ¹⁄₃ and 1EV); can also be
set to approx. 0.3, 0.7, or 1EV (ISO 50 equivalent) below ISO 100 or
to approx. 0.3, 0.7, 1, or 1.7EV (ISO 204800 equivalent) above ISO
64000; auto ISO sensitivity control available
Note: ISO sensitivity is limited to 400–64000 when HLG is selected
for tone mode.
Active D‑Lighting Auto, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, and Off
Multiple exposure Add, average, lighten, darken
Other options HDR overlay, photo mode flicker reduction
843 Specifications
*
Autofocus
Type Hybrid phase-detection/contrast AF with AF assist
Detection range*
−10 – +19EV
Measured in photo mode at ISO 100 and a temperature of
20°C/68°F using single-servo AF (AF‑S) and a lens with a
maximum aperture of f/1.2
Lens servo
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF‑S); continuous-servo AF
(AF‑C); full-time AF (AF‑F; available only in video mode);
predictive focus tracking
Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be used
Focus points*
273 focus points
Number of focus points available in photo mode with single-
point AF selected for AF-area mode and FX selected for image
area
AF-area mode
Pinpoint (available in photo mode only), single-point, dynamic-area
(S, M, and L; available in photo mode only), wide-area (S, L, C1, and
C2), and auto-area AF; 3D-tracking (available in photo mode only);
subject-tracking AF (available in video mode only)
Focus lock Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway
(single-servo AF/AF‑S) or by pressing the A (g) button
Vibration reduction (VR)
Camera on-board VR 5-axis image sensor shift
Lens on-board VR Lens shift (available with VR lenses)
844 Specifications
*
*
Flash
Flash control
TTL: i‑TTL flash control; i‑TTL balanced fill-flash is used with matrix,
center-weighted, and highlight-weighted metering, standard i‑TTL
fill-flash with spot metering
Flash mode Front-curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-eye reduction,
red-eye reduction with slow sync, off
Flash compensation −3 – +1EV in steps of ¹⁄₃EV
Flash-ready indicator Lights when optional flash unit is fully charged; flashes as
underexposure warning after flash is fired at full output
Accessory shoe ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock
Nikon Creative Lighting
System (CLS)
i-TTL flash control, optical Advanced Wireless Lighting, modeling
illumination, FV lock, Color Information Communication, auto FP
high-speed sync
White balance
White balance
Auto (3 types), natural light auto, direct sunlight, cloudy, shade,
incandescent, fluorescent (3 types), flash, choose color temperature
(2500–10,000K), preset manual (up to 6 values can be stored), all
with fine-tuning
Bracketing
Bracketing Exposure and/or flash, white balance, and ADL
Other options for still photography
Other options for still
photography
Vignette control, diffraction compensation, auto distortion control,
skin softening, portrait impression balance, and interval-timer,
focus-shift, and pixel-shift photography
845 Specifications
Video
Metering system TTL metering using camera image sensor
Metering mode Matrix, center-weighted, or highlight-weighted
Frame size (pixels) and
frame rate
3840× 2160 (4K UHD): 60p/50p/30p/25p/24p
1920× 1080: 120p/100p/60p/50p/30p/25p/24p
Note: Actual frame rates for 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
and 24p are 119.88, 100, 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps
respectively.
File format MOV, MP4
Video compression H.265/HEVC (8 bit/10 bit), H.264/AVC (8 bit)
Audio recording format Linear PCM (48 KHz, 24 bit, for videos recorded in MOV format) or
AAC (48 KHz, 16 bit, for videos recorded in MP4 format)
Audio recording device Built-in stereo or external microphone with attenuator option;
sensitivity adjustable
Exposure compensation −3 – +3EV in steps of ¹⁄₃EV
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended Exposure
Index)
Mode M: Manual selection (ISO 100–51200; choose from step
sizes of ⅙, ¹⁄₃, and 1EV); with additional options available
equivalent to approximately 0.3, 0.7, 1, or 2EV (ISO 204800
equivalent) above ISO 51200; auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO
100–Hi 2.0) available with selectable upper limit
Modes P, S, A: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100–Hi2.0) with
selectable upper limit
b mode: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100–51200)
Note: ISO sensitivity is limited to 400–51200 when HLG is selected
for tone mode.
846 Specifications
Video
Active D‑Lighting Extra high, High, Normal, Low, and Off
Other options
Time-lapse video recording, electronic vibration reduction, time
codes, N-Log and HDR (HLG) video, wave-form display, red REC
frame indicator, video recording display zoom (50%, 100%, and
200%), and extended shutter speeds (modes S and M); option to
view video recording info available via i menu
Playback
Playback
Full-frame and thumbnail (up to 4, 9, or 72 pictures) playback
with playback zoom, playback zoom cropping, video playback, slide
shows, histogram display, highlights, photo information, location
data display, auto picture rotation, picture rating, voice memo
recording and playback, IPTC information embedding and display,
filtered playback, skip to first shot in series, series playback, save
consecutive frames, and motion blend
Interface
USB Type C SuperSpeed USB connector; connection to built-in USB
ports is recommended
HDMI output Type D HDMI connector
Audio input Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter; plug-in power supported)
Audio output Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter)
847 Specifications
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
Standards:
IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Africa, Asia, and Oceania)
IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a/ac (Europe, Americas)
Operating frequency:
2412–2462 MHz (channel 11; Africa, Asia, and Oceania)
2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5825 MHz (5180–
5580 MHz, 5660–5700 MHz, and 5745–5825 MHz) (U.S.A.,
Canada, Mexico)
2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5805 MHz (5180–
5320 MHz and 5745–5805 MHz) (other countries in the
Americas)
2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5745–5805 MHz (Georgia)
2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5320 MHz (other
European countries)
Maximum output power (EIRP):
2.4 GHz band: 6.1 dBm
5 GHz band: 9.4dBm
Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK, WPA3-SAE
Bluetooth
Communication protocols: Bluetooth Specification version 5.0
Operating frequency:
Bluetooth: 2402–2480MHz
Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480MHz
Maximum output power (EIRP):
Bluetooth: 0.6dBm
Bluetooth Low Energy: −0.9dBm
848 Specifications
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Power source
Battery
One EN‑EL15c rechargeable Li-ion battery*
EN‑EL15b and EN‑EL15a batteries can be used in place of the
EN‑EL15c. Note, however, that fewer pictures can be taken on a
single charge than with the EN‑EL15c. EH-8P AC adapters can be
used to charge EN‑EL15c and EN‑EL15b batteries only.
AC adapter
EH‑7P charging AC adapters (available separately)
EH-8P AC adapters (available separately); supplied UC‑E25 USB
cable required
Tripod socket
Tripod socket 0.635cm (¹⁄₄in., ISO 1222)
849 Specifications
*
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W×H×D) Approx. 144 × 103 × 49 mm/5.7 × 4.1 × 2in.
Weight
Approx. 710 g (1 lb. 9.1 oz.) with battery and memory card but
without body cap and accessory shoe cover; approx. 630 g / 1 lb.
6.3 oz. (camera body only)
Operating environment
Temperature 0°C– 40°C (+32°F – 104°F)
Humidity 85% or less (no condensation)
Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity with Camera and Imaging
Products Association (CIPA) standards or guidelines.
All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.
Throughout this document, “FX format” and “FX” are used in reference to an angle of view
equivalent to that of a 35 mm format (“full frame”) camera and “DX format” and “DX” to an angle of
view equivalent to that of an APS-C camera.
The sample images displayed on the camera and the images and illustrations in this document are
for expository purposes only.
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance, specifications, and performance of the product
described in this document at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for
damages that may result from any mistakes that this document may contain.
850 Specifications
EN‑EL15c Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
Type Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity 7.0V, 2280mAh
Operating temperature 0°C–40°C (+32°F–104 °F) with Z f
Dimensions (W×H×D) Approx. 40× 56× 20.5 mm/1.6 × 2.3 × 0.9 in.
Weight Approx. 80g (2.9oz), excluding terminal cover
DCautions: Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting pictures or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not
completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded
storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of
personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all data
using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it with pictures
containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Care should be taken to avoid
injury when physically destroying data storage devices.
Before discarding the camera or transferring ownership to another person, you should also use the
[Reset all settings] item in the camera setup menu to delete network settings and other personal
information.
851 Specifications
Approved Memory Cards
The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, SDXC, microSD, microSDHC, and microSDXC memory cards.
UHS‑I and UHS‑II SD memory cards are supported.
microSDHC and microSDXC memory cards are UHS‑I compliant.
UHS Speed Class3 or better SD memory cards are recommended for video recording and playback.
UHS Speed Class3 or better SD memory cards with a maximum data transfer rate of at least
250MB/s are recommended for recording and playback of videos with a high frame size or rate.
Slower speeds may result in recording or playback being interrupted.
When choosing cards for use in card readers, be sure they are compatible with the device.
Contact the manufacturer for information on features, operation, and limitations on use.
852 Approved Memory Cards
Portable Chargers (Power Banks)
Portable chargers can be used to power the camera or charge the camera battery. The following table
lists the portable chargers that have been tested and approved for use, together with the approximate
number of shots that can be taken with, and the approximate number of times the camera battery can
be charged using, each device.
Manufacturer Model number Number of shots Number of
charges*
Anker PowerCore III Elite
25600 87W
Approx. 5 times that of an
EN‑EL15c battery alone Approx. 4
The number of times the camera battery (EN‑EL15c) can be fully charged using a portable charger
at full charge.
The only batteries that can be charged from portable chargers are the EN‑EL15c and EN‑EL15b.
See the documentation provided with the portable charger for information on use.
Use a USB cable with two Type C connectors supplied with the portable charger when employing
the device to power the camera or charge the camera battery.
Up-to-date information on portable chargers is available on the website of the manufacturers.
Availability may vary with country or region.
853 Portable Chargers (Power Banks)
*
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows buffer capacity and the approximate number of pictures that can be
stored on a 32GB1 card at different image qualities(0 110), and sizes (0 112) with [FX (36×
24)] selected for [Choose image area]and [SDR] selected for [Tone mode]. Actual capacity varies
with shooting conditions and the type of card.
Image quality Image size File size
Number of
exposures
remaining2
Buffer capacity2, 3
NEF (RAW), lossless
compression Approx.
25.9MB 654 frames 186 frames
NEF (RAW), high
efficiencymApprox.
16.5MB 1400 frames Over 200 frames
NEF (RAW), high
efficiency Approx.
11.0MB 2000 frames Over 200 frames
JPEG/HEIF fine4
Large Approx.
11.0MB 1800 frames
Over 200 framesMedium Approx.
7.4MB 3000 frames
Small Approx.
3.9MB 5700 frames
JPEG/HEIF normal4
Large Approx.
6.4MB 3600 frames
Over 200 framesMedium Approx.
3.8MB 5900 frames
Small Approx.
2.1MB 11,000 frames
854 Memory Card Capacity
Image quality Image size File size
Number of
exposures
remaining2
Buffer capacity2, 3
JPEG/HEIF basic4
Large Approx.
2.8MB 7000 frames
Over 200 framesMedium Approx.
2.0MB 11,300 frames
Small Approx.
1.1MB 19,900 frames
Figures are for a SanDisk SD memory card (SDSDXPK-032G-JNJIP, measured in June 2023) with a
NIKKOR Z 50mm f/1.8 S lens mounted on the camera.
The number of pictures that can be saved to the memory card or stored in the memory buffer
varies with the scene recorded.
Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in the memory buffer at ISO 100. May drop in
some situations, including when:
an optimal-compression ([m]) option is selected for [Image quality] for pictures shot in JPEG
format or
[ON] is selected for [Auto distortion control].
Figures assume a size-priority option (an option not marked with [m]) is selected for [Image
quality]. Selecting an optimal-compression ([m]) option increases file size; the number of images
and buffer capacity drop accordingly.
855 Memory Card Capacity
1
2
3
4
Memory Card Capacity (Videos)
The following table shows the approximate length of footage that can be stored on a 256 GB* card
with different options selected for [Frame size/frame rate] (0 189) in the video recording menu
when [H.265 8-bit (MOV)] is selected for [Video file type].
Each shot can be up to 125 minutes in length. Actual capacity varies with shooting conditions and
the type of card.
The maximum capacity for each option is the maximum combined length of files that can be shot at
that frame size and rate.
Even when space remains on the memory card, recording may end before the maximum length is
reached if the battery runs low or camera temperature rises.
Frame size/frame rate Maximum capacity
[3840×2160; 60p]
Approx. 93 minutes
[3840×2160; 50p]
[3840×2160; 30p]
Approx. 186 minutes[3840×2160; 25p]
[3840×2160; 24p]
[1920×1080; 120p]
Approx. 186 minutes
[1920×1080; 100p]
[1920×1080; 60p]
Approx. 368 minutes
[1920×1080; 50p]
[1920×1080; 30p]
Approx. 719 minutes[1920×1080; 25p]
[1920×1080; 24p]
Figures are for a SanDisk SD memory card (SDSDXEP-256G-JNJIP, measured in June 2023).
856 Memory Card Capacity (Videos)
*
Battery Endurance
The video footage or number of shots that can be recorded with a fully-charged EN‑EL15c
rechargeable Li-ion battery1 is given below.2 Actual endurance varies with such factors as the
condition of the battery, the interval between shots, and the options selected in the camera menus.
Photo Mode (Single Frame): Number of Shots3
[Viewfinder only] selected for monitor mode with:
[ON] selected for [Energy saving (photo mode)] in the setup menu: Approx. 410 shots
[OFF] selected for [Energy saving (photo mode)] in the setup menu: Approx. 360 shots
[Monitor only] selected for monitor mode with:
[ON] selected for [Energy saving (photo mode)] in the setup menu: Approx. 430 shots
[OFF] selected for [Energy saving (photo mode)] in the setup menu: Approx. 380 shots
Video Mode: Length of Footage4
[Viewfinder only] selected for monitor mode: Approx. 90 minutes
[Monitor only] selected for monitor mode: Approx. 90 minutes
Actions such as the following can reduce battery endurance:
keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway,
repeated autofocus operations,
taking NEF (RAW) photographs,
slow shutter speeds,
using camera Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) and Bluetooth features,
using the camera with optional accessories connected,
repeatedly zooming in and out, and
taking pictures at low ambient temperatures.
857 Battery Endurance
-
-
-
-
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN‑EL15c batteries:
Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.
Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left unused.
EN‑EL15b and EN‑EL15a batteries can be used in place of the EN‑EL15c. Note, however, that fewer
pictures can be taken on a single charge than with the EN‑EL15c.
Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with a SanDisk SDSDXPK-032G-JNJIP memory card.
Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standard. One photograph taken at default
settings once every 30s. Measured with a NIKKOR Z 40mm f/2 lens.
Actual battery endurance as measured under conditions specified by CIPA. Measured with a
NIKKOR Z 40mm f/2 lens. Measurement performed at default settings.
Each shot can be up to 125 minutes in length.
If camera temperature rises, recording may end before maximum length or size is reached.
858 Battery Endurance
1
2
3
4
Trademarks and Licenses
The SD, SDHC, SDXC, microSD, microSDHC, and microSDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Apple®, App Store®, the Apple logos, iPhone®, iPad®, Mac, and macOS are trademarks of Apple
Inc. registered in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Android, Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks of Google LLC. The Android robot
is reproduced or modified from work created and shared by Google and used according to terms
described in the Creative Commons 3.0 Attribution License.
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the United States and/or other
countries and is used under license.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logo are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and
any use of such marks by Nikon is under license.
Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Powered by intoPIX technology.
All other trade names mentioned in this document or the other documentation provided with your
Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to connect
specifically to the Apple products identified in the badge, and has been certified by the developer
to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or
its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with
an Apple product may affect wireless performance.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
859 Trademarks and Licenses
DFreeType License (FreeType2)
Portions of this software are copyright ©2012 The FreeType Project (https://www.freetype.org). All
rights reserved.
DMIT License (HarfBuzz)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2018 The HarfBuzz Project (https://www.freedesktop.org/
wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights reserved.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN “AS IS”
BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT,
UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.
860 Trademarks and Licenses
DUnicode® Character Database License (Unicode® Character Database)
The software for this product uses the Unicode® Character Database License open-source software.
The terms of the software license are as follows:
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright © 1991–2023 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved.
Distributed under the Terms of Use in
https://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data
files and any associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated
documentation (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the
Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do
so, provided that either
this copyright and permission notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or Software, or
this copyright and permission notice appear in associated Documentation.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE
OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior
written authorization of the copyright holder.
861 Trademarks and Licenses
(i)
(ii)
DAVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO
ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR
DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
https://www.mpegla.com
DBSD License (NVM Express Driver)
The license for the open-source software included in the camera’s NVM Express driver is as follows:
https://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/LicenseNVMe.pdf
DOther Open-Source Software
Additional open-source licenses can be found at the URL below:
https://imaging.nikon.com/oss/en/index.htm
862 Trademarks and Licenses
(i)
(ii)
Notices
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
Z f
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.
CAUTIONS
Modifications
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device
that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the users authority to operate the
equipment.
Interface Cables
Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment. Using other interface cables
may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
863 Notices
This symbol indicates that electrical and electronic equipment is to be
collected separately.
The following apply only to users in European countries:
This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate
collection point. Do not dispose of as household waste.
Separate collection and recycling helps conserve natural resources and
prevent negative consequences for human health and the environment
that might result from incorrect disposal.
For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
This symbol on the battery indicates that the battery is to be collected
separately.
The following apply only to users in European countries:
All batteries, whether marked with this symbol or not, are designated
for separate collection at an appropriate collection point. Do not
dispose of as household waste.
For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
Notice for Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-003(B) / NMB-003(B)
Notices for Customers in Europe
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF
USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
864 Notices
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
This product is controlled by the United States Export Administration Regulations (EAR). The
permission of the United States government is not required for export to countries other than the
following, which as of this writing are subject to embargo or special controls: Cuba, Iran, North Korea,
Sudan, and Syria (list subject to change).
The use of wireless devices may be prohibited in some countries or regions. Familiarize yourself with
and obey all applicable local regulations.
The Bluetooth transmitter in this device operates in the 2.4 GHz band.
Notice for Customers in the U.S.A. and Canada
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device
that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the users authority to operate the
equipment.
Compliance with FCC requirement 15.407(c)
Data transmission is always initiated by software, which is the passed down through the MAC,
through the digital and analog baseband, and finally to the RF chip. Several special packets are
initiated by the MAC. These are the only ways the digital baseband portion will turn on the RF
transmitter, which it then turns off at the end of the packet. Therefore, the transmitter will be on
only while one of the aforementioned packets is being transmitted. In other words, this device
automatically discontinue transmission in case of either absence of information to transmit or
operational failure.
Frequency Tolerance: ±20 ppm
865 Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates,
uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Co-location
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
FCC/ISED RF Exposure Statement
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using
low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices
are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF)
in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects
(by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no
known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological
effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings
have not been confirmed by additional research. This product has been tested and found to comply
with FCC/ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets
the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the ISED radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. Please refer to the SAR test report that was uploaded to FCC website.
866 Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Compliance with RSS-247 Issue 2 §6.4
Data transmission is always initiated by software, which is the passed down through the MAC,
through the digital and analog baseband, and finally to the RF chip. Several special packets are
initiated by the MAC. These are the only ways the digital baseband portion will turn on the RF
transmitter, which it then turns off at the end of the packet. Therefore, the transmitter will be on
only while one of the aforementioned packets is being transmitted. In other words, this device
automatically discontinue transmission in case of either absence of information to transmit or
operational failure.
Notice for Customers in Canada
For indoor use only (5150–5350 MHz).
867 Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Hereby, Nikon Corporation declares that the radio equipment type Z f is in
compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
Notice for Customers in Europe and in Countries Complying with the Radio Equipment
Directive
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://imaging.nikon.com/imaging/support/pdf/DoC_N2137.pdf
For this radio equipment, 5150–5350 MHz band is restricted to indoor operations only. This
restriction on putting into service or of the requirement for authorization of use applies in AT,
BE, BG, CY, CZ, DK, EE, FI, FR, DE, EL, MK, IE, IT, LV, LT, LU, MT, NL, PL, PT, RO, SK, LI, HU, SI, ES, SE, UK
(NI), IS, ME, NO, CH, TR, HR and RS.
Wi-Fi
Operating frequency:
2412–2462 MHz (channel 11; Africa, Asia, and Oceania)
2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5825 MHz (5180–5580 MHz, 5660–5700 MHz, and
5745–5825 MHz) (U.S.A., Canada, Mexico)
2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5805 MHz (5180–5320 MHz and 5745–5805 MHz)
(other countries in the Americas)
2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5745–5805 MHz (Georgia)
2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5320 MHz (other European countries)
Maximum output power (EIRP):
2.4 GHz band: 6.1dBm
5 GHz band: 9.4 dBm
Bluetooth
Operating frequency:
Bluetooth: 2402–2480 MHz
Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480 MHz
Maximum output power (EIRP):
Bluetooth: 0.6 dBm
Bluetooth Low Energy: −0.9 dBm
868 Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Hereby, Nikon Corporation declares that the radio equipment type Z f is in
compliance with Radio Equipment Regulations 2017.
Wi-Fi
Operating frequency:
2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–
5320 MHz
Maximum output power (EIRP):
2.4 GHz band: 6.1 dBm
5 GHz band: 9.4 dBm
-
-
-
Bluetooth
Operating frequency:
Bluetooth: 2402–2480 MHz
Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480 MHz
Maximum output power (EIRP):
Bluetooth: 0.6 dBm
Bluetooth Low Energy: −0.9 dBm
-
-
-
-
Notice for Customers in Europe
Standby Power Consumption
Mode Power consumption
Off mode Less than 0.5 W
Networked standby mode (Bluetooth connections) Less than 2 W
Notice for Customers in the UK
The full text of the UKCA declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://imaging.nikon.com/imaging/support/pdf/UKCA_DoC_N2137.pdf
For this radio equipment, 5150–5350 MHz band is restricted to indoor operations only.
869 Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Notice for Customers in Singapore
Trade Name:
Model: Z f
This device complies with radio-frequency regulations. The content of certification labels not affixed
to the device is given below.
Complies with
IMDA Standards
DA103423
Notice for Customers in Nigeria
Connection and use of this communications
equipment is permitted by the Nigerian
Communications Commission
Notice for Customers in Thailand
   
Notice for Customers in Oman
870 Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Security
Although one of the benefits of this product is that it allows others to freely connect for the wireless
exchange of data anywhere within its range, the following may occur if security is not enabled:
Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless transmissions to steal user IDs,
passwords, and other personal information.
Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the network and alter data or
perform other malicious actions. Note that due to the design of wireless networks, specialized
attacks may allow unauthorized access even when security is enabled.
Unsecured networks: Connecting to open networks may result in unauthorized access. Use secure
networks only.
Tip: Conformity Marking
The standards with which the camera complies can be viewed using the [Conformity marking] option
in the setup menu.
Z f Model Name: N2137
871 Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Index
Index
Symbols, Numerics
b(Auto) (0 95, 0 100)
P (Programmed auto) (0 132)
S (Shutter-priority auto) (0 132)
A (Aperture-priority auto) (0 134)
M (Manual) (0 135)
U (Single frame) (0 145)
V (Continuous L) (0 145)
W (Continuous H) (0 145)
X (Continuous H (extended)) (0 145)
A (C30) (0 145)
E (Self-timer) (0 145, 0 151)
3 (Pinpoint AF) (0 116)
d (Single-point AF) (0 116)
d (Dynamic-area AF (S)) (0 117)
e (Dynamic-area AF (M)) (0 117)
f (Dynamic-area AF (L)) (0 117)
f (Wide-area AF (S)) (0 117)
g (Wide-area AF (L)) (0 117)
8 (Wide-area AF (C1)) (0 118)
9 (Wide-area AF (C2)) (0 118)
u (3D-tracking) (0 118)
n (Subject-tracking AF) (0 118)
h (Auto-area AF) (0 118)
i button (0 75, 0 215)
i menu (0 75, 0 215)
A (g) button (0 223)
O button (0 107)
d (Help) icon (0 73)
1:1 (24×24) (Image area) (0 109)
16:9 (36×20) (Image area) (0 109)
3D-tracking (0 118)
A
AC adapter (0 86)
Access-point mode (0 303, 0 317)
Active D-Lighting (0 399, 0 498)
ADL bracketing (Auto bracketing set) (0 432)
Advanced Wireless Lighting (0 364)
AE bracketing (Auto bracketing set) (0 424)
AF activation (0 536)
AF fine-tuning options (0 681)
AF speed (0 634)
AF tracking sensitivity (0 635)
AF/MF subject detection options (0 120,
0 509)
AF-area mode (0 116)
AF-C (0 114)
AF-C priority selection (0 530)
AF-F (0 114)
AF-S (0 114)
AF-S priority selection (0 531)
After burst, show (0 661)
After delete (0 660)
Airplane mode (0 724)
All pictures (0 237)
Aperture (0 134, 0 135)
Aperture-priority auto (0 134)
ATOMOS AirGlu BT Options (0 746)
Attaching a lens (0 90)
Attenuator (0 514)
Auto (Set Picture Control) (0 176)
Auto c ISO sensitivity control (0 582)
Auto bracketing (0 423)
Auto bracketing (mode M) (0 584)
Auto distortion control (0 405, 0 502)
872 Index
Auto ISO sensitivity control (0 155)
Auto rotate info display (0 680)
Auto temperature cutout (0 688)
Auto-area AF (0 118)
Autoexposure lock (0 141)
Auto-rotate pictures (0 662)
B
Basic information (0 203)
Battery (0 82)
Battery info (0 710)
Bluetooth (0 290)
Bracketing order (0 585)
Brightness information display (0 644)
Built-in AF-assist illuminator (0 542)
Built-in microphone (0 101)
Bulb (Long time-exposures) (0 138)
Burst photography (0 145)
C
C30 (0 145, 0 149)
Camera setup (0 93)
Camera sounds (0 703)
Camera-mounted flash units (0 354)
Candidates for deletion (0 236)
Center-weighted area (0 549)
Choose color temperature (White balance)
(0 159)
Choose image area (0 109)
CL mode shooting speed (0 554)
Clean image sensor (0 689)
Cloudy (White balance) (0 158)
Color space (0 398)
Color temperature (0 161, 0 166)
Conformity marking (0 709)
Connect to computer (0 731)
Connect to FTP server (0 736)
Connect to other cameras (0 743)
Connect to smart device (0 725)
Continuous AF (0 114)
Continuous H (0 145)
Continuous H (extended) (0 145)
Continuous L (0 145)
Control ring response (0 618)
Copy image(s) (0 663)
Copyright information (0 694)
Creative Picture Control (0 177)
Custom controls (0 626)
Custom controls (playback) (0 605)
Custom controls (shooting) (0 591)
Custom monitor shooting display (0 575,
0 645)
Custom Settings (0 522)
Custom viewfinder shooting display (0 647)
Customize i menu (0 587, 0 623)
D
Darken (0 264)
Deep Tone Monochrome (Set Picture Control)
(0 177)
Delete (0 107, 0 233, 0 651)
Delete pictures from both slots (0 655)
Deleting selected pictures (0 235)
Destination (0 489)
Detaching lenses (0 91)
Diffraction compensation (0 404, 0 501)
Diopter adjustment control (0 59)
Direct sunlight (White balance) (0 158)
DISPbutton (0 44, 0 53, 0 202)
Distortion control (0 259)
D-Lighting (0 257)
Dual-format recording PB slot (0 656)
DX (24×16) (Image area) (0 109)
DX format (0 109)
Dynamic-area AF (L) (0 117)
873 Index
Dynamic-area AF (M) (0 117)
Dynamic-area AF (S) (0 117)
E
Easy exposure compens (0 547)
Editing videos (0 269)
Electronic VR (0 512)
Energy saving (photo mode) (0 713)
Exposure comp. for flash (0 581)
Exposure compensation (0 143)
Exposure compensation dial (0 143)
Exposure indicators (0 136)
Exposure data (0 204)
Extended shutter speeds (M) (0 560)
Extended shutter speeds (S/M) (0 638)
External recorder (0 282)
F
File info (0 214)
File naming (0 377, 0 488)
File number sequence (0 562)
Filtered playback (0 229)
Filtered playback criteria (0 229)
Finder display size (photo Lv) (0 678)
Fine ISO control (mode M) (0 637)
Fine-tune optimal exposure (0 550)
Firmware version (0 721)
Flange-back distance (0 130)
Flash (White balance) (0 159)
Flash bracketing (0 424)
Flash burst priority (0 586)
Flash compensation (0 3610 415)
Flash control (0 412)
Flash mode (0 359)
Flash photography (0 354)
Flash shutter speed (0 580)
Flash sync speed (0 578)
Flat (Set Picture Control) (0 177)
Flat Monochrome (Set Picture Control) (0 177)
Flexible program (0 132)
Fluorescent (White balance) (0 159)
Fn button (0 67, 0 158)
Focal plane mark (0 130)
Focus indicator (0 129)
Focus lock (0 126)
Focus mode (0 114, 0 128)
Focus peaking (0 130, 0 543)
Focus point (0 123)
Focus point display (0 540)
Focus point persistence (0 537)
Focus point selection speed (0 544)
Focus point wrap-around (0 539)
Focus points used (0 533)
Focus ring (0 128)
Focus ring rotation range (0 617)
Focus shift shooting (0 469)
Focus tracking with lock-on (0 532)
Focus-point lock (0 612, 0 632)
Format memory card (0 671)
Frame rate (0 189)
Frame size/frame rate (0 189)
Frequency response (0 515)
Full-frame playback (0 199)
Full-frame playback flicks (0 621)
Full-time AF (0 114)
FV lock (0 362)
FX (36×24) (Image area) (0 109)
FX format (0 109)
G
Grid type (0 571, 0 643)
874 Index
H
HDMI (0 280)
HDR overlay (0 444)
Headphone volume (0 518)
Hi (ISO sensitivity) (0 154)
High ISO NR (0 402, 0 499)
High sensitivity (Hi) (0 154)
Highlight display (0 204)
High-speed frame capture (0 149)
High-speed frame capture mode (0 556)
HLG (0 195)
HLG quality (0 497)
HLG video (0 195)
I
Image area (0 108, 0 192)
Image comment (0 693)
Image Dust Off ref photo (0 690)
Image frame (0 570)
Image quality (0 110)
Image size (0 112)
Incandescent (White balance) (0 158)
Infrastructure mode (0 308, 0 322)
Interval timer shooting (0 448)
IPTC (0 696)
ISO sensitivity (0 152)
ISO sensitivity dial (0 152)
ISO sensitivity settings (0 390, 0 493)
ISO sensitivity step value (0 546)
L
Landscape (Set Picture Control) (0 176)
Language (0 672)
Lighten (0 264)
Limit AF-area mode selection (0 538, 0 633)
Limit monitor mode selection (0 679)
Limit selectable image area (0 561)
Limit zebra pattern tone range (0 642)
Link VR to focus point (0 422)
Lo (ISO) (0 154)
Log recording (0 197)
Long exposure NR (0 401)
Long time-exposures (0 138)
Low sensitivity (Lo) (0 154)
M
MAC address (0 750)
Manage Picture Controls (0 183)
Manual (Shooting mode) (0 135)
Manual focus (0 114, 0 128)
Manual focus ring in AF mode (0 545)
Matrix metering face detection (0 548)
Maximum shots per burst (0 555)
Memory card (0 82, 0 852)
G button (0 68)
Metering (0 411)
MF (Manual focus) (0 114, 0 128)
Mic jack plug-in power (0 517)
Microphone sensitivity (0 513)
Mired (0 165)
Modeling flash (0 583)
Monitor (0 92)
Monitor brightness (0 674)
Monitor color balance (0 675)
Monochrome (0 261)
Monochrome (Set Picture Control) (0 176)
Motion blend (0 267)
Multiple exposure (0 436)
My Menu (0 751)
875 Index
N
Natural light auto (White balance) (0 158)
Network menu (0 722)
Neutral (Set Picture Control) (0 176)
N‑Log (0 197)
Non-CPU lens data (0 685)
NX Studio (0 298)
O
Overlay (add) (0 262)
Overview (0 212)
P
Perspective control (0 260)
Photo flicker reduction (0 409)
Photo shooting menu (0 369)
Photo/video selector (0 95, 0 100)
Picture review (0 659)
Pictures shot on selected dates (0 236)
Pinpoint AF (0 116)
Pixel mapping (0 692)
Pixel shift shooting (0 478)
Playback display options (0 653)
Playback folder (0 652)
Playback menu (0 649)
Playback zoom (0 221)
Portrait (Set Picture Control) (0 177)
Portrait impression balance (0 407, 0 504)
Power off delay (0 553)
Power zoom (PZ) button options (0 620,
0 636)
Pre-Release Capture options (0 556)
Preset manual (White balance) (0 159, 0 170)
Press the shutter-release button all the way down
(0 97)
Press the shutter-release button halfway (0 97)
Primary slot selection (0 378)
Programmed auto (0 132)
Protect (0 223)
Q
Quick crop (0 215)
R
Rating (0 225)
RAW processing (0 241)
RAW recording (0 389)
Recent settings (0 757)
Rechargeable Li-ion battery (0 86)
Red REC frame indicator (0 648)
Release button to use dial (0 614)
Release mode (0 145)
Release timing indicator (0 569)
Remote flash photography (0 364)
Reset all settings (0 720)
Reset custom settings (0 529)
Reset photo shooting menu (0 372)
Reset video recording menu (0 486)
Resize (0 254)
Retouch (0 238)
Reverse dial rotation (0 613)
Reverse indicators (0 615)
Reverse ring for focus (0 616)
RGB histogram (0 205)
Rich Tone Portrait (Set Picture Control) (0 177)
Router frequency band (0 749)
876 Index
S
Save focus position (0 686)
Save zoom position (PZ lenses) (0 687)
Save/load menu settings (0 715)
Secondary slot function (0 379)
Select for upload (0 227)
Self-portrait mode (0 49, 0 706)
Self-timer (0 145, 0 151, 0 552)
Series playback (0 658)
Set Picture Control (HLG) (0 394)
Setup menu (0 668)
Shade (White balance) (0 158)
Shooting data (0 207)
Shooting mode (0 131)
Shutter speed (0 132, 0 135)
Shutter type (0 559)
Shutter-priority auto (0 132)
Shutter-release button AE-L (0 551)
Shutter-speed dial (0 132, 0 135)
Shutter-speed dial lock release (0 133, 0 135)
Silent mode (0 704)
Single AF (0 114)
Single frame (0 145)
Single-point AF (0 116)
Skin softening (0 406)
Slide show (0 231)
Slot empty release lock (0 714)
SnapBridge (0 288)
Standard (Set Picture Control) (0 176)
Standby timer (0 84)
Starlight view (photo Lv) (0 566)
Storage folder (0 373)
Store points by orientation (0 534)
Straighten (0 258)
Subject-tracking AF (0 118)
Switch focus/control ring roles (0 619)
Sync. release mode options (0 558)
Synchronized release (0 343)
Synchronizing camera clocks (0 353)
T
Thumbnail playback (0 200)
Time (Long time-exposures) (0 138)
Time zone and date (0 93, 0 673)
Timecode (0 519)
Time-lapse video (0 459)
Tone mode (0 384)
Touch controls (0 60, 0 705)
Touch Fn (0 610)
Touch shutter (0 124)
Trim (0 253)
U
USB (0 748)
USB cable (0 86)
USB connection priority (0 708)
USB power delivery (0 711)
V
Vibration reduction (0 421)
Video flicker reduction (0 505)
Video recording menu (0 484)
Video-record button (0 101)
View all in continuous mode (0 568)
View assist (0 639)
View mode (photo Lv) (0 564)
Viewfinder brightness (0 676)
Viewfinder color balance (0 677)
Vignette control (0 403, 0 500)
Virtual horizon type (0 572)
Vivid (Set Picture Control) (0 176)
Voice memo (0 276)
Voice memo options (0 701)
877 Index
W
Warm display colors (0 567)
WB bracketing (0 429)
White balance (0 157)
Wide-area AF (C1) (0 118)
Wide-area AF (C2) (0 118)
Wide-area AF (L) (0 117)
Wide-area AF (S) (0 117)
Wi-Fi mode (0 294)
Wind noise reduction (0 516)
Wireless LAN (0 302)
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options (0 729)
Wireless Transmitter Utility (0 302)
Z
Zebra pattern (0 640)
878 Index
En_01
No reproduction in any form of this document, in whole or in part (except for brief quotation in critical
articles or reviews), may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
SB3H01(11)
6MO09711-01
872


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Nikon Z f at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Nikon Z f in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 28.31 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Nikon Z f

Nikon Z f User Manual - English - 74 pages

Nikon Z f User Manual - German - 903 pages

Nikon Z f User Manual - German - 70 pages

Nikon Z f User Manual - Dutch - 70 pages

Nikon Z f User Manual - Dutch - 70 pages

Nikon Z f User Manual - French - 903 pages

Nikon Z f User Manual - French - 74 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info